Contents

Seat Ateca Edition 06.22 2022 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 371
1 of 371

Summary of Content for Seat Ateca Edition 06.22 2022 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual PDF

Ateca Owners manual

57 50

12 72

0C K

In gl

s 5

75 01

27 20

C K

(0 6.

22 )

SE A

T A

te ca

I ng

l s

(0 6.

22 )

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook. All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print. Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form. SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the Copyright Act. All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.06.22

Vehicle identification data

Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification number:

Date of vehicle registration or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered with the vehicle: YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was checked

Location: Date:

Signature of owner:

Thank you for your con- fidence With your new SEAT, you will be able to enjoy a vehicle with state-of-the-art technology and top quality features. We recommend reading this Instruction Manual carefully to learn more about your vehicle so you can enjoy all its benefits in your daily driv- ing. Information about handling is complemented with instructions regarding the operation and maintenance of the vehicle in order to ensure its safety and maintain its value. Moreover, we want to give you valuable advice and tips to drive your vehicle efficiently and respecting the environment. We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring.   SEAT, S.A.  

WARNING Read and always observe safety informa- tion concerning the passenger's front airbag  page 54, Fitting and using child seats.

2

Table of Contents

Table of Contents About this instruction manual . . . . . . . 4

General views of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . 6 Front exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Rear exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Overview (right hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Driver information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Instrument cluster operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Infotainment system operation and displays . 30

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Correct sitting position of vehicle occupants . 37 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 PreCrash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 In case of emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Keyless Access system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Seats and head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Vehicle lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper sys- tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Heating, ventilation and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Auxiliary heating and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Driving indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 DSG automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Driving on slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 SEAT Drive Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Brake assist systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Assistant systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Drive assist sensors and cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Predictive speed adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 emergency brake assistance system (Front Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Lane Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Driving Assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Lane departure warning (Side Assist) . . . . . . . . . 178

Parking and manoeuvring . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Park the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 General information on parking systems . . . . . 185 Parking aid Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Parking aid system (Park Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Reverse Assist (Rear View Camera) . . . . . . . . . . 198 Peripheral view system (Top View Camera) . . 200 Trailer Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Practical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Data transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 SEAT CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Privacy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 WLAN access point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Wired and wireless connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 First steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Overview and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 General instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Table of Contents

3

Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Positioning the luggage and cargo . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Luggage compartment equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Fuel and exhaust gas cleaning . . . . . . 276 Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Fuel types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 AdBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Engine management and emissions control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Miscellaneous situations . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . 284 Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . 297 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Fluids and consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 12-volt battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Important information about wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Additional service offers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Vehicle upkeep and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Accessories, spare parts and repair work . . . . . 339

Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Information stored by the control units . . . . . . . 342 Vehicle antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Materials and recycling information . . . . . . . . . . 343 Radioelectrical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Indications about the technical data . . . . . . . . . 349

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

4

About this instruction manual

About this instruction manual This instruction manual is valid for all variants and versions of your SEAT model. It describes all equipment and models without specifying whether they are optional equipment or model variants. As a result, equipment not fitted to your vehicle or only available in certain coun- tries may be described. Find out about your vehicle's equipment in the documentation sup- plied with it and please contact your SEAT Of- ficial SEAT Service if you require more detailed information. All information provided in instruction manual corresponds to the information available at the time of going to press. As the vehicle is under continuous development, it may have differen- ces to the data included in this manual. For this reason, no claims can be made in the event of mismatching data, illustrations and descrip- tions. Ensure that the on-board documentation is kept in the vehicle at all times if you sell it or lend it to third parties. In addition, SEAT recommends re- setting the infotainment system to factory set- tings to delete all personal data. Some details on the drawings may be different to your vehicle and they should be interpreted as a standard representation.

The direction indicators (left, right, forwards, backwards) in this manual refer to the direction of travel of the vehicle unless otherwise stated. This instruction manual has been written for left-hand drive vehicles. In right-hand drive vehicles, the arrangement of the controls dif- fers partly from that shown in the illustrations or described in the texts. Technical modifications to the vehicle or safety-critical issues that have arisen since the time of going to press will be included in a sup- plement to the on-board documentation.

Trademarks are marked with . The ab- sence of this symbol does not guarantee that the term is not a trademark.

You can access the information in this manual using: Thematic table of contents that follows the manuals general chapter structure. Visual table of contents that uses graphics to indicate the pages containing essential infor- mation, which is detailed in the corresponding chapters. Alphabetical index with many terms and syn- onyms to help you find information.

WARNING Texts after this symbol contain information about safety and warn you about possible accident or injury risks.

NOTICE Texts after this symbol indicate possible damage to the vehicle.

For the sake of the environment Texts after this symbol contain information on environmental protection.

Note Texts after this symbol contain additional in- formation.

About this instruction manual

5

Digital instruction manual

The digital version of the manual can be found on SEAT's official website:

Fig. 1  SEAT website

scan the QR code. OR enter the following address in the naviga- tor website: https://www.seat.com/owners/about-my-car/ manuals.html and select your vehicle.

Related videos

The operation of some of the vehicle's features can be shown as an instruction video:

Fig. 2  SEAT website

scan the QR code. OR enter the following address in the naviga- tor website: https://www.seat.com/owners/about-my-car/ manuals.html choose your vehicle and then the Multimedia section.

Note Video instructions are only available in cer- tain languages.

6

General views of the vehicle

General views of the vehicle Front exterior view

Driving assistance sensors  page 154 1 Front multifunction camera 2 Top View Camera mirror cameras 3 Top View Camera front camera 4 Front radar 5 Park distance control sensors 6 Park assist sensor

A Levels control Oil  page 305 Brake fluid  page 303 Battery  page 308

B Bonnet Unlocking lever  page 299 Open/close  page 299

C Towing the vehicle Tow start  page 289 Towline anchorage  page 291

General views of the vehicle

7

Rear xterior view

Rear exterior view

Driving assistance sensors  page 154 1 Rear view camera 2 Park distance control sensors 3 Rear radars 4 Park assist sensor

  A Rear lid

Opening from outside  page 80 Emergency opening  page 83

B Towing the vehicle Tow-start  page 289 Towline anchorage  page 291

C Opening and closing Doors  page 77 Central locking  page 72 Emergency lock  page 78

D Fuel tank Fuel capacity  page 349 Open/Close cap  page 277

E Action in the event of a puncture Anti-puncture kit  page 327 Wheel change  page 320

8

General views of the vehicle

Interior view

1 Armrest  page 262 2 Isofix anchors  page 56 3 Headrest adjustment  page 94 4 Seat belts  page 40 5 Sunroof  page 86 6 Interior mirror  page 109 7 Seat adjustment  page 92

8 Auto Hold  page 184 / Electronic park- ing brake  page 183

9 Rotary Driving Experience Button  page 148

10 DSG automatic transmission  page 139 Manual gearbox  page 138

11 Emergency start  page 134 12 Glove compartment  page 208

13 Front passenger airbag  page 49 14 Disconnecting the front passenger front

airbag  page 50

General views of the vehicle

9

Ov view (left hand drive)

Overview (left hand drive)

1 Electric windows  page 84 2 Central locking  page 72 3 Exterior mirror adjustment  page 110 4 Lighting control  page 99 5 Turn signal and main beam lever

 page 101 6 Multifunction steering wheel control panels

 page 90 7 SEAT Digital Cockpit  page 16

Control lamps  page 11

8 Wipers and rear window wiper  page 106

9 Infotainment system  page 30,  page 225

10 Open bonnet lever  page 299 11 Fuses  page 292 12 Steering wheel adjustment  page 91 13 Steering wheel with drivers airbag

 page 49 / Gear shift paddles for the Tiptronic  page 140:

14 Connectivity Box / Wireless Charger  page 255

15 Start button  page 131 16 Air conditioning  page 114 17 Hazard warning lights  page 63

10

General views of the vehicle

Overview (right hand drive)

1 Infotainment system  page 30,  page 225

2 Turn signal and main beam lever  page 101

3 Multifunction steering wheel control panels  page 90

4 SEAT Digital Cockpit  page 16 Control lamps  page 11

5 Wipers and rear window wiper  page 106

6 Lighting control  page 99

7 Central locking  page 72 8 Exterior mirror adjustment  page 110 9 Electric windows  page 84

10 Open bonnet lever  page 299 11 Fuses  page 292 12 Hazard warning lights  page 63 13 Air conditioning  page 114 14 Start button  page 131 15 Connectivity Box / Wireless Charger

 page 255

16 Steering wheel adjustment  page 91 17 Steering wheel with drivers airbag

 page 49 / Gear shift paddles for the Tiptronic  page 140

Driver information

11

Control lamps

Driver information Control lamps

Control and warning lamps The warning and control lights can be lit indi- vidually or in combination and serve as a warn- ing, to indicate the presence of an anomaly or to warn of the activation of certain functions. Some turn on when the ignition is switched on and have to be switched off after a certain pe- riod of time. Depending on the model, additional text mes- sages may be viewed on the instrument panel display. These may be purely informative or they may be advising of the need for action. Depending upon the equipment fitted in the vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, sometimes a symbol may be displayed on the instrument panel.

WARNING If the warning lamps and messages are ig- nored, faults may occur in the vehicle, it may stall in traffic, or accidents and serious inju- ries may occur. Never ignore warning lamps or text mes- sages. Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.

Symbol Meaning

Stop driving! Central warning lamp  page 22

Fasten your seat belt  page 40

Electronic parking brake on  page 183

Stop driving! Fault in the brake system  page 150

Stop driving Brake fluid level low  page 303

Take control of the vehicle and be ready to brake!  page 161

Stop driving! Fault in the motor coolant system  page 19

Engine oil pressure  page 308

Stop driving! Steering anomaly  page 147

Stop driving! Alternator fault  page 311

Collision warning  page 169

Symbol Meaning

Take control of the steering immediately  page 176

AdBlue level too low, OR fault in the SCR system  page 281,  page 281

Central warning lamp  page 22

Fault in the airbag system or the seat belt tensioners  page 48

Front passenger front airbag off  page 48

Front passenger airbag on  page 48

Please check brake pad  page 150

Lights up: fault in the electronic stability control (ESC)  page 153

Flashing: Electronic stability control (ESC) or Traction Control regulating  page 153

TCS manually deactivated, ESC in Sport mode or ECS manually deacti- vated  page 152

ABS fault  page 153

Travel assist unavailable  page 176

12

Driver information

Symbol Meaning

Fault in the vehicle's lighting  page 99

Fault in the emissions control system  page 282

Particulate filter clogged  page 283

Diesel engine preheating; OR diesel engine management fault  page 283

Petrol engine management fault  page 283

Rear fog light on  page 99

Fuel tank almost empty  page 18

Engine oil level  page 308

Presence of water in diesel.  page 18

Steering anomaly  page 147

Fault in the tyre pressure loss indicator  page 327

Stop driving! Low tyre pressure  page 327

Collision warning deactivated  page 171

Symbol Meaning

Cruise control fault (GRA)  page 159

Speed limiter not available  page 161

Gearbox fault  page 144,  page 144

Adaptive cruise control (ACC) not avail- able  page 166

Emergency Assist unavailable  page 178

Lane Assist not available  page 173

Emergency Assist regulating  page 177

Lane Assist (lane keeping system) regu- lating  page 173

AdBlue level low, OR fault in the SCR system  page 281,  page 281

Auto Hold activated  page 184

Turn signals  page 99

Trailer turn signals  page 99

Cruise control (GRA)  page 158

Speed limiter active  page 160

Symbol Meaning

Lane Assist (lane keeping system) ac- tive.  page 173

Press the brake pedal  page 144

Travel Assist active  page 174

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) reg- ulating, no vehicle detected ahead  page 163

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) reg- ulating, vehicle detected ahead  page 163

Main beam on or flasher on  page 99

The speed limiter is not active  page 160

Start-Stop system activated  page 135

Start-Stop system unavailable  page 135

Hill descent control (HDC)  page 146

Exterior temperature below +4 C (+39 F)  page 20

Main beam assist active  page 102

Take control of the steering  page 176

Driver information

13

Instrument p nel

Symbol Meaning

Distance warning  page 169

Reference to information in the on- board documentation  page 23

Remove foot from accelerator  page 27

Service intervals display  page 28

Instrument panel Introduction

After switching the engine on with a 12-volt battery that is heavily discharged or newly changed some system settings (such as the time, the date, the personalised comfort set- tings and the programming) might be altered or deleted. Check and correct these settings once the battery is sufficiently charged.

WARNING Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury. Do not operate the instrument panel con- trols when driving. To reduce the risk of accident and injury, only make adjustments to the instructions on the instrument panel display and to the instructions on the Infotainment system dis- play when the vehicle is stationary.

14

Driver information

Basic version digital instrument cluster

Fig. 3  Basic version digital instrument cluster: Main view.

Upper zone: Time, selected driving profile, rev counter, outside temperature. Lower zone: total km (miles) or speed set with the cruise control or ACC, range. A Main display: speed in digital format and

road signs. B Secondary indications: driving data

(average speed and fuel consumption, dis- tance travelled, etc.)

C Secondary indications: radio, media, phone, navigation indications.

1 Engine coolant temperature indicator  page 18.

2 Gear engaged and gear or selector lever position recommendation.

3 Selected driving assistant.

4 Fuel gauge  page 17.   The Basic version digital instrument cluster is a digital instrument cluster with a high resolution colour TFT display. Other content can be displayed by selecting different views, e.g. Rev counter, and different displays in the main display area and in the secondary display areas.

Instrument cluster operation

The digital instrument cluster can only be con- trolled from the buttons on the multi-function steering wheel. The functions of the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel depend on the equipment.

As long as a priority 1 warning is active, it will not be possible to access any menu  page 22. Some warnings can be confirmed and hidden with the button  of the multifunction steering wheel.

Instrument cluster views

To switch between the different views press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

The following views can be displayed: Main: Digital speedometer with secondary indications. Speed: Classic representation of the speed- ometer as a circular instrument with secondary indications in the centre of the dial.

Driver information

15

Instrument p nel

Rev counter: Classic representation of the rev counter as a circular instrument with secondary indications in the centre of the dial. The amount and content of the information dis- played may vary depending on the equipment.

Note After switching off the ignition, a display appears showing vehicle status information, such as distance travelled.

Select secondary indications in the Main view The secondary indications B or C can be in- dividually configured or hidden. Proceed as fol- lows to select the secondary indications: 1. Use the keys and to select the right

B or left C secondary indications area. 2. Use the thumbwheel on the multifunction

steering wheel to select the desired secon- dary indication.

3. Confirm your selection by pressing the button.

Selecting secondary indications in the Speed or Rev counter views 1. Use the thumbwheel on the multifunction

steering wheel to select the desired secon- dary indication.

2. Confirm the selection by pressing .

Note If when switching on the ignition warnings are shown about existing faults, it might not be possible to change the settings or show the information as described. If the fault continues, visit a duly qualified specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership.

16

Driver information

1) Pre-set information depending on the selected Driving mode.

SEAT Digital Cockpit

Fig. 4  SEAT Digital Cockpit on the instrument panel (classic view).

1 Engine coolant temperature display  page 18

2 Revolution counter. Revolutions per mi- nute the engine is running page 17.

3 Gear engaged or position of the selec- tor lever.

4 Screen display  page 19. 5 Speedometer 6 Digital speed display 7 Fuel gauge  page 17. 8 Information Profile  page 16.

The SEAT Digital Cockpit is a digital instrument cluster with a high resolution colour TFT dis- play. It has a 3 views accessible using the but- ton of the multifunction steering wheel. By

selecting different information profiles, indica- tions other than the classic circular instruments can be displayed, such as navigation data, multimedia information or travel data. The 3 views are: Classic Dynamic Navigation All views will display information on the screen about audio, phone, travel data, vehicle status, navigation and driving aids. In all views the information displayed in Infor- mation profiles can be customised  Fig. 4 8 .

Information profiles

Use the infotainment system menu > Se- lection > Digital Cockpit to choose be- tween the different options for viewing informa- tion to be displayed in the SEAT Digital Cockpit.

Classic View

The revolutions per minute and speedome- ter needles appear along the entire length  Fig. 4.

View 1, 2, 3 or AUTOMATIC1)

Personalisation of the information that appears in the SEAT Digital Cockpit. Only 2 of these items of information can be displayed at the

Driver information

17

Instrument p nel

same time, but the user chooses which to dis- play, and in what order, by moving the finger vertically over the dials. Depending on the version, the Views can be memorised by exiting the menu or keeping the View button pressed. Consumption. Graphic representation of the current consumption and digital display of the average consumption. Audio. Digital display of the current audio playback. Altitude. Digital display of the current altitude above sea level. Compass. Digital display of the compass. Destination arrival information. Digital dis- play of the remaining travelling time, distance to the destination and the estimated time of arrival. Range. Digital display of the remaining range. Travelling time. Route guidance. Journey. Digital display of the distance trav- elled. Assist systems. Graphic representation of different assistance systems. Road signs. Display of traffic signs detected. Navigation. Graphical representation of the navigation with arrows. It may vary based on the features, the number and the contents of the selectable information profiles.

Revolution counter The rev counter indicates the number of engine revolutions per minute. Together with the gear-change indicator, the rev counter offers you the possibility of using the engine of your vehicle at a suitable speed. The beginning of the red zone of the rev counter indicates the maximum speed in any gear after running-in and with the engine hot. However, it is advisable to move the selector lever to D or lift your foot off the accelerator before the needle reaches the red zone   . We recommend that you avoid high revs and that you follow the recommendations on the gear-change indicator. See the additional infor- mation in  page 126, Selecting the optimal gear.

NOTICE To prevent damage to the engine, the rev counter needle should only remain in the red zone for a short period of time. When the engine is cold, avoid high revs and heavy acceleration and do not make the engine work hard.

For the sake of the environment Changing up a gear early will help you to save fuel and minimise emissions and engine noise.

Fuel gauge

Fig. 5  Basic instrument cluster: fuel gauge.

Fig. 6  SEAT Digital Cockpit instrument cluster: fuel gauge.

18

Driver information

A

B

C

Control lamps

Its lights up yellow. Fuel tank almost empty. The fuel reserve level has been reached   . Refuel as soon as you

have the opportunity. When the fuel level is very low, the lower diode also flashes red.

Its lights up yellow. Presence of water in diesel. Turn off the engine and seek professional assistance.

The display only works when the ignition is switched on. The fuel range is displayed on the instrument panel. You can consult the tank capacity of your vehi- cle in  page 349.

WARNING When driving with low fuel, the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause accidents and se- vere injuries. If the fuel tank level is too low, fuel could reach the engine irregularly, particularly when driving up or down slopes. The steering system and the assistant sys- tems and brakes do not work when the en- gine is running irregularly or switches off due to lack of fuel or an irregular supply thereof.

SEAT recommends always refuelling when the tank is approximately one quarter full, to prevent the vehicle from stopping due to a lack of fuel.

NOTICE Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An irregular fuel supply can cause misfiring and unburnt fuel could enter the exhaust system. The catalytic converter or the particulate fil- ter may get damaged!

Note The small arrow on the fuel gauge next to the fuel pump symbol points out towards the side of the vehicle with the fuel tank flap.

Coolant temperature indicator.

Fig. 7  Basic digital instrument cluster: engine coolant temperature display.

Fig. 8  SEAT Digital Cockpit digital instrument cluster: engine coolant temperature indicator.

Cold zone. The engine has not reached operating temperature yet. Avoid high en- gine speeds and stressing the engine if it has not reached operating temperature. Normal zone. At high outside temperatures and when making the engine work hard, the diodes may continue lighting up and reach the upper zone. This is no cause for concern, provided the control lamp does not light up . Warning area. When the engine is working hard, especially at high outside tempera- tures, the diodes may light up in the warn- ing area.

The coolant temperature gauge only works when the ignition is switched on.

Driver information

19

Instrument p nel

1) Valid for the basic digital instrument cluster.

Control and warning lamps

Fault in the engine coolant system The LED flashes red. Engine coolant The lamp lights up red. The motor coolant temperature is too high or the motor coolant level is too low.

Stop driving! Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity and in a safe place. Switch off the engine and let it cool down. Check the coolant level in the coolant expan- sion tank  page 301. If the warning lamp does not go out even though the motor coolant level is correct, do not continue to drive or leave the motor running. Seek specialist assistance.

NOTICE To ensure a long useful life for the engine, avoid high revs, driving at high speed and making the engine work hard for approxi- mately the first 15 minutes when the engine is cold. The phase until the engine is warm also depends on the outside temperature. If necessary, use the engine oil temperature as a guide  page 21.

Additional lights and other accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect of the coolant. At high outside temperatures and high engine loads, there is a risk of the engine overheating. The front spoiler also ensures proper distri- bution of the cooling air when the vehicle is moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can reduce the cooling effect, which could cause the engine to overheat. Seek specialist assis- tance.

Status display

Possible indications on the instrument panel display

The instrument cluster can display a variety of information, superimposed according to the ve- hicle's equipment: Doors, bonnet and rear lid open Warning and information messages Odometer Time  page 27 Indications of the radio and navigation sys- tem Indications of the phone Outside temperature Compass indication Selector lever positions

Gear-change recommendation Display of travel data (multifunction display) and menus for different settings  page 21 Service interval display  page 28 Speed warning Speed warning for winter tyres Start-Stop system status display  page 135 Signs detected by the traffic signal detection system  page 24 Indication of active cylinder management status (ACT)  page 126 Low consumption driving  Assistant systems display Personalization: greeting  page 213 Engine oil temperature Indication of radiator fan operation with en- gine stopped1)

Doors, bonnet and rear lid open

When the vehicle is unlocked and while driving, the instrument panel display shows if any of the doors, the bonnet or rear lid are opened and, in some cases, it is also indicated by an audible warning.

20

Driver information

1) Valid for the basic digital instrument cluster.

Selector lever positions

The current position of the selector lever is shown on the side of the lever and on the in- strument panel display. When the lever is in the D/S position or in the Tiptronic position, in some cases, the gear engaged in each case is shown on the instrument panel display .

Outside temperature indicator

If the outside temperature is lower than approxi- mately +4 C (+39 F), the ice crystal symbol also lights up . This symbol remains lit until the outside temperature exceeds +6 C (+43 F)   . In the following situations, the displayed exte- rior temperature may be higher than the actual temperature due to the heat emitted by the motor: When the vehicle is stationary. When driving very slowly.

Gear-change recommendation

While driving, the instrument panel of certain vehicles may indicate a gear recommendation for saving fuel  page 126.

Odometer

The odometer records the total distance travel- led by the vehicle.

The partial odometer (trip) shows the dis- tance travelled since the last time it was reset to zero. Set the odometer to zero via the Infotainment system or the multifunction steering wheel  page 21.

Speed warning for winter tyres

If the maximum set speed is exceeded, this is displayed on the instrument cluster display. The speed warning can be set in the infotain- ment system ( > Settings > Tyres; OR > Exterior settings > Tyres)  page 34.

Compass indication

Depending on the equipment, when the ignition is on, the instrument panel display indicates the direction in which you are driving with a symbol, e.g. NW for Northwest. When the Infotainment system is on and there is no route guidance active, the graphic represen- tation of a compass is also shown.

Low consumption driving 

Depending on the equipment, when driving, the display appears on the instrument panel

when the vehicle is in low consumption status due to active cylinder management (ACT)  page 126.

Radiator fan operation indication1)

This indication is displayed after switching off the ignition when the radiator fan is still running. The operating time of the radiator fan can de- pend on: Exhaust gas treatment, e.g. during regenera- tion of the particulate filter. Active brake cooling after descending a slope. Dissipation of heat from the engine after high stress, e.g. after a very long drive.

Destination information1)

If route guidance is enabled, the expected travel time and the distance to the destination are displayed.

Navigation indications1)

If route guidance is activated, the direction of travel is shown by arrows.

Driver information

21

Instrument p nel

1) This will show all data on the display at the same time: distance travelled, average consumption, average speed and autonomy.

WARNING Even when the outside temperature is higher than freezing temperature, some roads and bridges could be frozen. The ice crystal symbol indicates that there may be a risk of freezing. At outside temperatures above +4 C (+39 F), there may be ice even when the ice crystal symbol is not on. The outside temperature sensor takes a guideline measurement.

Note There are different instrument panels and therefore the versions and instructions on the display may vary. In the case of dis- plays without warning or information texts, faults are indicated exclusively by the con- trol warning lamps. Some settings can be saved in the user ac- counts of the personalization function and can therefore be changed automatically when switching user accounts  page 213. Some indications on the instrument panel screen may be concealed by a sudden event, e.g. an incoming call. Depending on the equipment, some set- tings and instructions can be carried out or displayed on the infotainment system as well.

If there are several warnings at the same time, the symbols will be displayed one after the other for a few seconds. The symbols will stay on until you remove the cause. If when switching on the ignition warnings are shown about existing faults, it might not be possible to change the settings or show the information as described. In this case, go to a specialised workshop and request a re- pair.

Driving data indicator The driving data display shows a range of driv- ing data and consumption values.

Change from one display to another Turn the right thumbwheel of the multifunc- tion steering wheel  page 29.

Changing memory While in Driving data > General in- formation press on the multi-function steering wheel to switch between the 3 memo- ries1):

Since start: The memory is deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than 2 hours.

Since refuel: Display and storage of the journey data and the consumption val- ues collected. When refuelling, the memory is deleted. Long-term: This memory contains travel data up to a maximum of 19 hours and 59 minutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes, or up to a maximum of 1999.9 km or 9999.9 km. When one of these values is exceeded (varies depending on the version of the in- strument panel), the memory is deleted.

Delete journey data presets Select the memory that you wish to erase. Keep the button on the multi-function steering wheel pressed for approximately 2 seconds.

Select the instructions

In the Infotainment system, in the menu Vehicle settings, you can display different travel data  page 35.

Current consumption: The current fuel consumption display operates throughout the journey, in litres/100 km; and with the engine running and the vehicle stopped, in litres/hour. Average consumption: The average fuel consumption is displayed after driving for approximately 300 metres.

22

Driver information

1) Valid for the SEAT Digital Cockpit. 2) Not available in all countries.

Travelling time: This indicates the hours (h) and minutes (min) since the igni- tion was switched on.

Range:1) Approximate distance in km that can still be travelled if the same driving style is maintained. AdBlue range or : Approximate dis- tance in km that can still be travelled with the current level of the AdBlue tank with the same driving style. The indication ap- pears from a range of less than 2400 km and cannot be deactivated.2)

Distance travelled: Distance covered in km (m) after switching on the ignition. Average speed: The average speed will be shown after driving for approximately 100 metres. Digital speed: Current speed dis- played in digital format. Eco tips: Recommendations messages are shown to reduce consumption through good driving practices, e.g. Air condi- tioning on: close the window.

Setting a speed warning Select the display Warning at --- km/h or Warning at --- mph. Press the button on the multi-function steering wheel to memorise the current speed and activate the warning. Activate: set the desired speed within 5 sec- onds by rotating the wheel on the multi-func- tion steering wheel. Next, press the button again or wait for a few seconds. The speed is stored and the warning activated. Deactivate: press the button. The stored speed is deleted. The warning can be set for speeds of between 30 and 250 km/h (18 and 155 mph).

Oil temperature display

The engine reaches its operating temperature when, under normal driving conditions, the oil temperature is between 80C (176F) and 120C (248F). If a great effort is required from the engine and the outside temperature is high, the engine oil temperature may increase. This does not present any problem as long as the warning lamps  or  page 308 do not appear on the display.

Warning and information messages The system runs a check on certain com- ponents and functions when the ignition is switched on and while the vehicle is moving. Faults are displayed on the instrument cluster display as red and yellow warning symbols  page 11 accompanied by messages and, depending on the case, even an audible warn- ing. The representation of the messages and symbols may vary depending on the version of the instrument panel. Existing faults can also be checked man- ually. To do this, open the Vehicle status  page 29 menu.

Priority 1 warning (in red)

The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac- companied by audible warnings). Stop driv- ing! Danger! Check the fault and eliminate the cause. If necessary, seek professional assis- tance.

Priority 2 warning (in yellow)

The symbol lights up or flashes (in part accom- panied by audible warnings). Operating faults or the lack of operating fluids can cause dam- age to the vehicle or a fault. Check the faulty function as soon as possible. If necessary, seek professional assistance.

Driver information

23

Instrument p nel

Reference to information in the owner's manual

Further information on any warnings can be found in the owner's manual.

Information message

It provides information about processes in the vehicle.

Driver alert system (break recom- mendation)

Fig. 9  On the screen of the instrument panel: fatigue detection.

The driver alert system informs the driver when it deduces tiredness due to his/her behaviour at the wheel.

Function and operation

Fatigue detection determines the driving be- haviour of the driver when starting a journey, making a calculation of tiredness. This is con- stantly compared with the current driving be- haviour. If the system detects that the driver is tired, an audible warning is given with a sound and an optical warning is shown with a sym- bol and supplementary message on the instru- ment cluster screen  Fig. 9. The message on the instrument panel display is shown for approximately 5 seconds, and depending on the case, is repeated. The system stores the last message displayed. The warning on the instrument cluster display can be hidden as follows: Press the button on the multifunction steer- ing wheel. The message can be recovered on the instru- ment cluster display using the multifunction dis- play  page 21.

Conditions of operation

Driving behaviour is only calculated on speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to around 200 km/h (125 mph).

Activating and deactivating

Fatigue detection can be activated or deacti- vated in the infotainment system using the func- tion button Driver assistance > Fatigue de- tector.

The driver alert system is always switched on when the ignition is switched on  page 35.

System limitations

The Fatigue detection has certain limitations in- herent to the system. The following conditions can limit the Fatigue detection or prevent it from functioning. At speeds below 60 km/h (40 mph). At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph) When cornering In sections with roadworks. On roads in poor condition In unfavourable weather conditions When a sporty driving style is employed In the event of a serious distraction to the driver Fatigue detection will be restored when the ve- hicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes, when the ignition is switched off or when the driver has unbuckled their seat belt and opened the door. In the event of slow driving during a long period of time (below 60 km/h, 40 mph) the system automatically re-establishes the tiredness cal- culation. When driving at a faster speed the driving behaviour will be recalculated.

24

Driver information

WARNING The smart technology of the driver alert sys- tem cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics and only works within the limits of the system. Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fatigue detection system tempt you into taking any risks when driving. Take regular breaks, sufficient in length when making long journeys. The driver always assumes the responsibil- ity of driving to their full capacity. Never drive if you are tired. The system does not detect the tiredness of the driver in all circumstances. Consult the information in the section  page 23, Con- ditions of operation. In some situations, the system may incor- rectly interpret an intended driving manoeu- vre as driver tiredness. No warning is given in the event of the ef- fect called microsleep! Please observe the indications on the in- strument panel and act as is necessary.

Note Fatigue detection has been developed for driving on motorways and well paved roads only. If there is a fault in the system, have it checked by a specialised workshop.

Road signs detection system

Fig. 10  On the instrument panel display: examples of speed limits or overtaking prohibitions with their respective additional signs.

The dynamic road signs display records stand- ard road signs using a camera fitted to the base of the interior mirror, and provides information about speed limits, overtaking prohibitions and warning signs that it recognises.

Within its limitations, the system also displays a additional sign to indicate aspects such as temporary prohibitions. Even on routes without signs, the system can, if necessary, display the applicable speed limits. The dynamic road sign display system is acti- vated whenever the ignition is switched on. The traffic sign detection system does not work in all countries. Keep this in mind when travel- ling abroad.

Shown on the display

In Germany, on motorways and vehicle roads, besides speed limits and overtaking provisions the system also displays the end of prohibition signs. The valid speed limit at the time in other countries is always shown. The road signs detected by the system are displayed on the instrument cluster display  Fig. 10 and, depending on the navigation system fitted in the vehicle, in the infotainment system as well .

Road sign detection system messages: There are no road signs available

The system is in its start-up phase. OR: the camera has not recognized any man- datory or prohibitive signs. Error: Dynamic road sign display

There is a fault in the system. Have the system checked by a specialised workshop.

Driver information

25

Instrument p nel

Speed warning is currently unavail- able

The speed warning function of the road sign detection system is faulty. Have the system checked by a specialised workshop. Dynamic road sign display: Clean the windscreen!

The windscreen is dirty in the camera area or the cameras visibility is impaired by weather conditions. Clean the windscreen. Dynamic road sign display: Cur- rently restricted

The navigation system is not transmitting data. Check if the navigation system has upda- ted maps. OR: the vehicle is in a region not included on the navigation system's map. No data available

The traffic sign detection system does not work in the current country.

Activate and deactivate the road sign dis- play on the instrument panel

The permanent traffic sign view on the instru- ment cluster can be switched on or off in the infotainment system using the function button

Driver assistance > Road sign detection.

Display of traffic signs

After checking and evaluating the information from the camera, the navigation system and the current vehicle data, the system displays up to three current road signs  Fig. 10 with their additional signs. First: The sign that is currently valid for the driver is shown in the left side of the screen For example, a maximum speed limit of 130 km/h (100 mph)  Fig. 10 . Second: A sign valid only in certain circum- stances, e.g. 100 km/h (60 mph) is shown sec- ond, together with the additional rain sign. Additional sign: Displays the circumstances (rain, times of day, fog, etc.) under which the displayed speed limit is in force. Third: Thirdly, a sign prohibiting overtaking is partially displayed. If there is no conditional speed limit and overtaking is prohibited, the latter sign will be displayed in second place  Fig. 10 . The warning sign display is not available in all countries and the system may not be able to detect all existing warning signs.

Speed warning

If the system detects that the permitted speed is exceeded, it may warn the driver with a gong and visually with a message on the dash panel display.

The speed warning can be set or deacti- vated completely in the menu Driver assistance > Road sign detection  page 35. The speed warning can be set to a value of 0, 5 or 10 km/h (0, 3 or 5 mph) above the permitted speed.

Trailer mode

In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket de- vice from the factory and a trailer that is electri- cally connected to the vehicle, it is possible to activate or deactivate the display of specific traffic signs for vehicles with trailer, such as speed limits or overtaking prohibitions. It can be activated or deactivated in the info- tainment system using the function button Driver assistance > Trailer assist  page 35. For trailer mode, the display of speed limits ap- plicable to the type of trailer or to the legal pro- visions can be adjusted. The speed is adjusted in steps of 10 km/h (5 mph) within the range between 60 and 130 km/h (40 and 80 mph). If it is adjusted to a speed greater than that which is permitted in the country in question for driving with a trailer, the system automatically displays the usual speed limits, e.g. in Germany 80 km/h (50 mph). If the speed warning for the trailer is deactiva- ted, the system displays the speed limits as if there were no trailer hitched.

26

Driver information

Limited operation

The traffic sign detection system has certain limitations. The following cases may lead the system to operate with limitations or not at all: In the case of poor visibility, e.g. in snow, rain, fog or intense mist. In cases of dazzling, e.g. caused by head-on traffic or by the sun. When driving at high speeds. If the camera is covered or dirty. If the traffic signs are partially or totally ob- structed, e.g. by trees, snow, dirt or other vehi- cles. In the case of traffic signs that do not fulfil the regulations. In the case of damaged or bent traffic signs. In the case of variable messages on over- head or gantry signs (LED-based variable traf- fic signs or other lighting units). If the maps on the navigation system are not up-to-date. In the case of adhesives affixed to vehicles that depict traffic signs, e.g. speed limits on lor- ries.

WARNING The technology in the traffic sign detection system cannot change the limits imposed by the laws of physics and only works within the system's limits. Do not let the extra conven- ience afforded by the traffic sign detection system tempt you into taking any risks when driving. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. Adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- tions. Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain and fog may lead to the system failing to display traffic signs or not displaying them correctly. If the camera's field of vision is dirty, cov- ered or damaged, system operation may be impaired.

WARNING The driving recommendations and traffic in- dications shown on the traffic sign detection system may differ from the actual current traffic situation. The system may not detect or correctly show all the traffic signs. Traffic signs and traffic regulations have priority over the recommendations and dis- plays provided by the system.

Note To avoid affecting the correct operation of the system, take the following points into consideration: Regularly clean the area of vision of the camera and keep it in a clean state, without snow or ice. Do not cover the field of vision of the cam- era. Always replace damaged or worn blades when required to avoid lines on the camera's field of vision. Check that the windscreen is not damaged in the area of the camera's field of vision. The use of outdated maps on the naviga- tion system may cause the system to show traffic signs incorrectly. In the waypoints mode of the navigation system, the traffic sign detection system is only partly available.

Driver information

27

Instrument p nel

Eco-efficient driving assistance

Fig. 11  Eco-efficient driving assistance indication (schematic representation).

Eco-efficient driving assistance helps you drive with care and with low energy consumption by following instructions superimposed in the digi- tal cockpit, depending on the situation. When you approach places such as a junction, a roundabout or a section of road with a speed limit, the symbol is displayed along with an event in the digital cockpit  Fig. 11. As soon as you follow the indication and take your foot off the accelerator, the vehicle adapts, based on the selected driving profile and distance to the incident, brake energy re- cuperation and speed. Eco-efficient driving assistance uses the trip data from the infotainment system and the sen- sors of some assist systems. If no destination guidance is active, the most likely route is used.

Pressing the accelerator can cancel the inter- vention of the assistance at any time. Eco-efficient driving assistance can be switched on and off in the infotainment system, in the assistance system settings  page 35. Eco-efficient driving assistance is temporarily switched off if: The gear selector is in the S position. The Sport driving program is used. Driving with adaptive cruise control (ACC) or cruise control (GRA). When these conditions no longer exist, the as- sistance is reactivated if it is switched on in the assist system settings. Eco-efficient driving assistance is available de- pending on the equipment, although not in all countries.

WARNING The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Traffic signs on the road and traffic regula- tions have priority over eco-driving notes.

Note The appearance of the symbols may vary slightly depending on the equipment and model. System updates may modify or ex- pand the symbols. When the system is switched on, eco-ef- ficient driving assistance can also increase recuperation without any indication being displayed. This can occur in situations such as when the accelerator pedal is released when a vehicle is driving in front. In this case, energy recuperation is adapted match the speed of the vehicle in front without any indi- cation being displayed.

Time and date

Setting the time on the infotainment system

Press > Settings  page 30. Select the menu option Date and time.

Service Menu In the Service menu various settings can be ad- justed depending on the features.

Open the Service menu

Select the Range information profile while in the Driving data menu, and keep the key pressed on the multifunction steering wheel for approximately 4 seconds. When it is released, the Service menu will be displayed.

28

Driver information

Now you can browse through the menu using the keys on the multifunction steering wheel as usual.

Restart the service interval display

Select the Service menu and follow the in- structions on the screen of the instrument panel.

Restart the oil service

Select the Reset Oil service menu and follow the instructions on the instrument panel display.

Identifying letters on engine (LDM)

Select the menu Engine code. The identifying letters of the engine will be shown on the instru- ment cluster display at the bottom left.

Service intervals The service interval display appears on the in- strument cluster screen and in the infotainment system.

There are different versions of instrument pan- els and infotainment systems, so the versions and instructions on the screens may vary. SEAT distinguishes between services with en- gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and services without engine oil change (e.g. Inspec- tion).

In vehicles with Services established by time or mileage, the service intervals are already pre-defined. In vehicles with LongLife Service, the intervals are determined individually. Thanks to techno- logical progress, maintenance work has been greatly reduced. The oil only needs to be changed when the vehicle requires it. To calcu- late this variation (max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of use and individual driving styles are considered. The advance warning first ap- pears 20 days before the date established for the corresponding service. The kilometres (miles) remaining until the next service are al- ways rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) and the time is given in complete days. The current service message cannot be viewed until 500 km after the last service. Prior to this, only lines are visible on the display.

Inspection reminder

If a service or an inspection has to be carried out soon, a service reminder will be displayed when the ignition is switched on. The figure displayed are the kilometres that can still be travelled or the time until the next service.

Service due

When it is time for a service or an inspection, an audio warning will sound when the ignition is switched on, and a spanner symbol may ap-

pear for a few seconds on the instrument clus- ter display , along with one of the following messages. Service now!

Please have your vehicle inspected

Oil change service due!

Oil change service and inspection due!

Consult a service notification

With the ignition switched on, the engine off and the vehicle at a standstill, the current serv- ice notification can be read: Check the date of the current service on the infotainment system Press the function button Data > Set- tings > Service; OR > Vehicle sta- tus. Checking the date on the digital instrument panel: The date of the service can only be read through the Service  page 27 menu.

Resetting service interval display

If the service was not carried out by a SEAT dealership, the display can be reset as follows: The service interval display can only be reset through the Service  page 27 menu.

Driver information

29

Instrument cluster operation

Do not restart the indicator between the service intervals, otherwise the information dis- played will be incorrect. If the oil change service is reset manually, the service interval display changes to a fixed serv- ice interval, also in vehicles with Flexible oil change service.

Note The service message disappears after a few seconds, when the engine is started or when the button is pressed on the multi- function steering wheel. In vehicles with the LongLife system in which the battery has been disconnected for a long period of time, it is not possible to cal- culate the date of the next service. Therefore the service interval display may not be cor- rect. In this case, bear in mind the maximum service intervals permitted  page 331. If you reset the display manually, the next service interval will be indicated as in vehi- cles with fixed service intervals. For this rea- son we recommend that the service interval display be reset by an authorised dealer.

Instrument cluster opera- tion

Introduction With the ignition switched on, it is possible to read the different functions of the display by scrolling through the menus. In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel, the multifunction display can only be operated with the steering wheel buttons. Some menu options can only be read when the vehicle is at a standstill.

Instrument panel menus

The number of menus and information items available will depend on the vehicles electron- ics and features. Vehicle status  page 22. Driving data  page 21. Assist systems. Front Assist On/Off  page 168 ACC (only display)  page 161 Lane Assist On/Off  page 172 Side Assist On/Off  page 178

Navigation. Audio. Telephone.

WARNING Distracting the driver in any way can lead to an accident and cause injuries. Never use the menus on the instrument panel display while the vehicle is in motion.

NOTICE After charging or changing the 12-volt bat- tery, check the system settings. If the power supply is interrupted, the system settings might be incorrect or deleted.

Operation using the multifunction steering wheel

Fig. 12  Right side of multifunction steering wheel: buttons to the menus and informative indications on the instrument panel (depending on the version).

30

Driver information

As long as a priority 1  page 22 warning is ac- tive, it will not be possible to access any menu. Some warnings can be confirmed and hidden with the button  of the multifunction steering wheel  Fig. 12.

Select a menu or an informative display Switch the ignition on. If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed, press the button   Fig. 12; several times if necessary. To change menus, use buttons  or  . To open the menu or the information dis- played, press the button  or wait a few sec- onds until the menu or the informative display opens automatically.

Changing menu settings In the menu displayed, turn the right thumb- wheel of the multifunction steering wheel until the desired option of the menu is highlighted. The option appears framed. Press the button  to make the required mod- ifications. A mark indicates that the system or function is activated.

Back to menu selection Press the button or .

Infotainment system opera- tion and displays

Introduction The infotainment system brings together impor- tant vehicle functions and systems into a single central control unit, e.g. air conditioning, menu settings, radio equipment and the navigation system. The actual number of menus available and the name of the various options will depend on the vehicles electronics and equipment.

General operating information

General information on the operation of the in- fotainment system, as well as on the warning and safety instructions that must be taken into account, is found in  page 225.

How to move through the different menus and select them Switch the ignition on. If the infotainment system is off, switch it on. The different menus are selected directly on the touch screen using texts, icons or buttons. If the box is checked , the function is activa- ted. Pressing the menu button will always take you to the last menu used.

Any changes made using the settings menus are automatically saved on closing those me- nus Scroll bar: Some menus and functions show more content above or below those displayed on the screen at that time, for example, long lists of settings. Press on the scroll bar and pull up or down.

Tutorial

The first time you connect the Infotainment sys- tem, a system tutorial will open with a brief de- scription of the main functions and how to use it.

Help

In the Help menu can be found more informa- tion and tips for using the infotainment system.

WARNING Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury. Operating the Infotainment system while driving could distract you from traffic.

Note After starting the engine with a 12-volt bat- tery that is heavily discharged or recently replaced, some system settings such as time, date, personalised comfort settings, programming and user accounts might be al-

Driver information

31

Infotainment syst m oper ti and displays

tered or deleted. Check and correct these settings when the battery is sufficiently charged.

32

Driver information

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

Explanation of the function buttons

Fig. 13  Schematic diagram: Overview of the possible function buttons on the screen.

Top part of the screen

Current time. Driving profile and navigation informa- tion. If the user has an active route, both the time and the distance to the destination are displayed. If there is no active route, the driving profile is displayed. On vehicles with no available driving profile, the current address is displayed whenever there is no active route. Air conditioning information. In vehicles with heated steering wheels or windscreen heating, the corresponding icon is dis- played when these functions are enabled. If not, the current outside temperature is displayed.

Telephone information. Information re- garding your mobile device is displayed: available network signal strength, estab- lished Bluetooth connection, unanswered calls, new messages, battery status, etc. System customisation based on user and notifications. Some settings can be saved in the user accounts of the per- sonalization function and can therefore be changed automatically when switching user accounts.

Bottom part of the screen

Valid for the infotainment system: Connect Sys- tem.

Main menu display mode:

: main menu with the 6 main functions divided into 2 screens (3 + 3, customisable by the user by pressing on the function).

: main menu in tile mode (all functions of the Infotainment system). Direct accesses to the functions of the In- fotainment system (up to 10 functions, 5 + 5, customisable by the user). By pressing on the icon, you can select/deselect the functions in question.

Driver information

33

Infotainment syst m oper ti and displays

A

B

C

D

E

Don't show again

Start

End

Initial configuration wizard

Fig. 14  Schematic diagram: Initial configuration wizard

The initial configuration wizard will help you to set up your Infotainment system the first time you switch it on. Whenever you switch on the infotainment sys- tem, the initial setup screen will be displayed  Fig. 14 if any parameters have not been set (marked with ) or if the Don't show again function button has not been pressed. Function buttons:

Press to set day and time. Press to search and store to memory the radio stations that have the best reception at that moment. Press to go to the Online Media settings. Press to link your mobile phone to the Info- tainment system.

Press to select your home address using your current position or by manually enter- ing an address.

Disables the possibility of changing the settings of the Infotainment system. If you wish to perform the initial configuration, you must access through Help.

Starts up the Configuration Wizard. Once one or more settings have been ap-

plied, press to finalise the setup in the main menu of the wizard. Closes the Configuration Wizard.

34

Driver information

Vehicle information

Fig. 15  Schematic diagram: Vehicle information and status

Pressing Vehicle > Selection in the main menu opens the vehicle info menu with the following submenus: Digital Cockpit: The different options for displaying the information that will appear in the Digital Cockpit are shown  page 16. Driving data: The average consumption, average speed, distance travelled, trip dura- tion and autonomy are shown. It has 3 memo- ries: Since start, Long-term and Since refu- elling. Vehicle status: The warnings regarding faults, incidents, memorisation of the tyre pres- sure or information of the next inspection serv- ice are displayed.

Driver information

35

Infotainment syst m oper ti and displays

Assist systems and vehicle settings

Fig. 16  Schematic diagram: Assist systems and vehicle settings

Clicking on Driver assistance from the main menu opens the menu of vehicle assis- tants and settings. The number of assist systems and settings de- pend on the version and the country in ques- tion. Automatic parking brake activation  page 183. Parking assistants  page 185 Trailer Assist  page 203 Activate / deactivate ESC, stabilisation sys- tems and brake assist  page 150. Switch the Start-Stop system on / off  page 135 Adaptive cruise control (ACC)  page 161.

Lane Assist (lane departure warning system)  page 172. Emergency brake assistance system (Front Assist)  page 168. Fatigue detection  page 23 Detection of road signs  page 24 Side assist  page 178

36

Safety

1) Depending on the version/market.

Safety Safe driving

Safety first!

WARNING This manual contains important informa- tion about the operation of the vehicle, both for the driver and the passengers. The other sections of the on-board documentation also contain further information that you should be aware of for your own safety and for the safety of your passengers. Ensure that the on-board documentation is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is espe- cially important when lending or selling the vehicle to another person.

Before driving For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note the following points before every trip: Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn signals are working properly. Check tyre pressure. Ensure that all windows provide a clear and good view of the surroundings.

Make sure all luggage is secured  page 257. Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals. Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors properly according to your size. Ensure that the passengers in the rear seats always have the head restraints in the in-use position  page 94. Instruct passengers to adjust the head re- straints according to their height. Protect children with appropriate child seats and properly applied seat belts  page 53. Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct your passengers also to assume a proper sit- ting position  page 37. Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your passengers also to fasten their seat belts prop- erly  page 39.

Factors influencing safety As a driver, you are responsible for yourself and your passengers. Always pay attention to traffic and do not get distracted by passengers or telephone calls. Never drive when your driving ability is im- paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs). Observe traffic laws and speed limits.

Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and weather conditions. When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly - at least every two hours. If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or stressed.

WARNING Driving under the influence of alcohol, drugs, medication or narcotics may result in severe accidents and even loss of life. Alcohol, drugs, medication and narcotics may significantly alter perception, affect re- action times and safety while driving, which could result in the loss of control of the vehi- cle.

Safety equipment Never put your safety or the safety of your pas- sengers in danger. In the event of an accident, the safety equipment may reduce the risk of injury. The following points cover part of the safety equipment in your SEAT1): Optimised seat belts for all seats. Seat belt tensioners on the driver, front pas- senger and rear side seats. Seat belt force limiters on the driver, front passenger and rear side seats.

Safety

37

Correct sitting position of vehicle occupants

Red warning lamp and, if applicable, seat belt status indication. Front airbags for driver and passenger. Side airbags for driver and passenger. Head airbags on both sides of the vehicle. Knee airbag. Yellow airbag control lamp . Yellow warning lamp on the centre console. Yellow warning lamp on the centre console. Control units and sensors. Optimised and height-adjustable headrests. Adjustable steering column. ISOFIX/i-Size anchor points for child seats. Child seat top tether attachment points. The safety equipment mentioned above works together to provide you and your passengers with the best possible protection in the event of an accident. However, these safety systems can only be effective if you and your passen- gers are sitting in a correct position and use this equipment properly.

Safety is everybody's business.

Correct sitting position of vehicle occupants

Correct position on the seat

Fig. 17  The correct distance between the driver and the steering wheel must be at least 25 cm (10 inches).

Fig. 18  Correct belt web and headrest positions

The correct sitting positions for the driver and passengers are shown below. If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the correct sitting position, contact a specialised workshop for help with any spe- cial devices. The seat belt and airbag can only provide optimum protection if a correct sitting position is adopted. SEAT recommends taking your car in for technical service. For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident or sudden braking or manoeuvre, SEAT recommend the following positions:

Valid for all vehicle occupants: Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same level as the top of

38

Safety

your head and under no circumstances below eye level. Keep the back of your neck as close as possible to the headrest  Fig. 18. Short people must fully lower the headrest completely, even if your head is below its upper edge. Tall people must fully raise the headrest. Always keep your feet in the footwell while the vehicle is in motion. Adjust and fasten your seat belt correctly  page 39.

The following also applies to the driver: Move the seat backrest to an almost upright position so that your back rests completely against it. Adjust the steering wheel so that it is at a distance of at least 25 cm (10 inches) from the sternum  Fig. 17 and can hold it with both hands on the sides, on the outside, with the arms slightly flexed. The steering wheel must always point to- wards the chest and never towards the face. Adjust the seat lengthwise so that you can fully step on the pedals with your knees slightly bent and there is a distance between the knee area and the instrument panel of at least 10 cm (4 inches)  Fig. 18.

Adjust the height of the seat so that you can reach the top of the steering wheel. Always keep both feet in the footwell so that you have the vehicle under control at all times.

For the passenger, the following applies: Move the seat backrest to an almost upright position so that your back rests completely against it. Move the seat as far back as possible (mini- mum 25 cm between the chest and the instru- ment panel check translation). If you are sitting closer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.

Number of seats The vehicle has 5 seats, 2 in the front and 3 in the rear. All seats are equipped with a safety belt.

In some versions, your vehicle is approved only for 4 seats. 2 front seats and 2 rear seats.

WARNING Sitting in an incorrect position may increase the risk of severe or lethal injuries in the event of sudden braking or manoeuvring, in case of collision or accident and if the air- bags deploy. Before starting the car, all passengers must be sitting in a correct position and stay like that for the entire journey. This also ap- plies to a correct use of the seat belt. The maximum amount of people in the ve- hicle is the same as the amount of seats with seat belts. For children, always use a protection sys- tem that is approved and suited for their weight and height  page 53. While driving, always keep your feet in the footwell. Never place them over the seat or the dash panel, for example, or outside the window. Otherwise the airbag and seat belt may offer insufficient protection and also in- crease the risk of injury in the event of an accident.

Risks of sitting in an incorrect posi- tion

If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe or lethal injuries increases. Seat belts can provide optimal protection only if the belt web is properly worn. Incorrect sitting positions substantially reduce the protective function of seat belts and, therefore, increase

Safety

39

Seat belts

the risk of severe or even lethal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially height- ened when a deploying airbag strikes a vehicle occupant who has assumed an incorrect sitting position. The driver is responsible for all people, particularly children, inside the vehicle. The following list contains examples of incor- rect sitting positions that could be dangerous for all vehicle occupants.

When the vehicle is in motion: Never stand in the vehicle. Never stand on the seats. Never kneel on the seats. Never tilt your seat backrest too far to the rear. Never lean against the instrument panel. Never lie on the rear seats. Never sit on the front edge of a seat. Never sit sideways. Never lean out of a window. Never put your feet out of a window. Never put your feet on the instrument panel. Never place your feet on the bench or on the backrest of the seat. Never travel in a footwell. Never sit on the armrests. Never travel without wearing the seat belt. Never travel in the luggage compartment.

WARNING Sitting in an incorrect position increases the risk of severe or fatal injuries in the event of accidents and sudden braking or manoeu- vres. All occupants must sit correctly during the journey and wear the seat belt correctly. Occupants of the vehicle that are not sit- ting correctly, not wearing the seat belt or are not at a proper distance of the airbag risk suffering very serious or lethal injuries, espe- cially if the airbags deploy and strike them.

Seat belts Introduction

Fig. 19  Drivers with properly worn seat belts will not be thrown forward in the event of sudden braking.

Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants in the proper position. They also help prevent uncontrolled movements that may result in seri- ous injury and reduce the risk of being thrown out of the vehicle in case of an accident. Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts cor- rectly benefit greatly from the ability of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition, the front part of your vehicle and other passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are designed to absorb the kinetic energy released in a collision. Taken together, all these features reduce the releasing kinetic energy and conse- quently, the risk of injury. This is why it is so important to fasten seat belts before every trip, even when "just driving around the corner". Ensure that your passengers wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics have shown that wearing seat belts is an effective means of substantially reducing the risk of injury and im- proving the chances of survival when involved in a serious accident. Furthermore, properly worn seat belts improve the protection provi- ded by airbags in the event of an accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt is required by law in most countries. Although your vehicle is equipped with airbags, the seat belts must be fastened and worn. The front airbags, for example, are only triggered in some cases of head-on collision. The front air- bags will not be triggered during minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end collisions, overturns or accidents in which the airbag trigger thresh- old value in the control unit is not exceeded.

40

Safety

Important safety instructions for the use of seat belts Always wear the seat belt as described in this section. Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened at all times and are not damaged.

WARNING If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The optimal protection from seat belts can be achieved only if you use them properly. Never allow two passengers (even chil- dren) to share the same seat belt. Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehi- cle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury. The seat belt should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries. Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges. Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect position. Bulky and unfastened clothing (such as an overcoat over a sweater) impairs the proper fit and function of the seat belts, reducing their capacity to protect. The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging securely.

Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings or similar items to alter the position of the belt webbing. Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retractors or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an accident. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at regu- lar intervals. Seat belts which have been worn in an ac- cident and have been stretched must be re- placed by a specialised workshop. Renewal may be necessary even if there is no ap- parent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked. Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re- moved or modified in any way. The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the retractors may not work properly.

Seat belt buckled indication It lights up red The driver or passenger has not fastened the seat belt.

The control lamp lights up to remind the driver to fasten their seat belt. Before starting the vehicle:

Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your passengers to fasten their seat belts properly before driving off. Protect children by using a child seat ac- cording to the child's height and weight  page 53. When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speed exceeds approx. 25 km/h (15 mph) and the seat belts are not fastened or are unfastened while driving, a warning sound will be heard for a few seconds. In addition, the warning lamp on the instrument cluster display flashes.

The lamp goes out when the driver and pas- senger seat belts are fastened with the ignition switched on.

Rear seat belts fastened display

Fig. 20  Instrument cluster: indication of the status of the rear seat seat belts.

Safety

41

Seat belts

Depending on the version of the model, when the ignition is switched on, the status display of the belts  Fig. 20 informs the driver on the in- strument panel display whether the occupants of the rear seats have their seat belts fastened.

It indicates that the corresponding seat is empty.

Indicates that the seat is occupied and the occupant is wearing the seat belt.

If a rear seat occupant unfastens his/her seat belt while driving, the symbol lights up for a maximum of 60 seconds. If you drive faster than approx. 25 km/h (15 mph), an audio signal sounds for a few seconds.

If a seat belt is fastened or unfastened while driving in some of the rear seats, the seat belt status is displayed for approximately 30 sec- onds.

Head-on collisions and the laws of physics

Fig. 21  A driver not wearing a seat belt may be thrown forward violently.

Fig. 22  Any rear seat occupants not wearing a seat belt may be thrown forward violently, hitting the driver who is wearing the seat belt.

The effects of the laws of physics in the case of a head-on collision are easy to explain: the mo- ment a vehicle starts moving, a type of energy called kinetic energy starts acting on both the vehicle and its passengers. The amount of kinetic energy depends on the speed of the vehicle and on the weight of the vehicle and of its passengers. The higher they are, the more energy there is to be absorbed in the event of an accident. The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), for example, the corresponding kinetic energy is multiplied by four. Given that the passengers of the vehicle in our example do not have their seat belts fastened, in the event of a collision the entire amount of the passengers' kinetic energy will be only ab- sorbed by the mentioned impact. Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bodies in a colli- sion can easily exceed one tonne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are even higher. Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are not attached to the vehicle. In a head-on col- lision, they will move forward at the same speed their vehicle was travelling just before the im- pact. This example applies not only to head-on collisions, but to all accidents and collisions. Even at low speeds the forces acting on the body in a collision are so great that it is not pos- sible to brace oneself with one's hands. In the

42

Safety

event of a head-on collision, vehicle occupants not wearing a seat belt will be thrown uncon- trollably forward and will collide, for example, against the steering wheel, instrument panel or windscreen  Fig. 21. It is also important for rear passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they could otherwise be thrown forward violently through the vehicle in- terior in an accident. If a rear seat occupant is not wearing a seat belt, they are not only en- dangering themselves but also the occupants of the front seats  Fig. 22.

Fastening and unfastening the seat belt

Fig. 23  Insert the latch plate of the seat belt into the buckle.

Fig. 24  Release the seat belt's latch plate.

Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occu- pants in the position that most protects them in the event of an accident or sudden braking   .

Fastening the seat belt

Fasten your seat belt before each trip. Adjust the front seat and head restraint cor- rectly  page 37. Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat in an upright position   . Pull the latch plate and place the belt web- bing evenly across your chest and lap. Do not twist the seat belt when doing so   . Insert the buckle plate in the buckle of the correct seat  Fig. 23. Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in the buckle.

Releasing the seat belt

Only unfasten the seat belt when the vehicle has come to a standstill   . Press the red button on the buckle  Fig. 24. The latch plate is released from the buckle. Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim will not be damaged.

WARNING The seat belt cannot offer its full protec- tion unless the seat backrest is in an upright position and the seat belt is worn correctly, according to your size. Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion can cause severe or fatal injuries in the event of an accident or sudden brak- ing. The seat belt itself, or a loose seat belt, can cause severe injuries if the belt moves from hard areas of the body to soft areas (e.g. the stomach).

Safety

43

Seat belts

Correct position of the seat belt

Fig. 25  Correct seat belt and headrest positions, viewed from front and the side.

Fig. 26  Position of seat belt during pregnancy.

Seat belts offer their maximum protection in the event of an accident and reduce the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries only when they are properly positioned. Furthermore, if the webbing is correctly positioned, the seat belt

will hold the vehicle occupants in the optimum position to ensure the airbag provides the max- imum protection. The seat belt must therefore always be worn and the webbing correctly positioned. Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe or even fatal injuries  page 37, Correct sitting position of vehicle occupants. The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm, under the arm or behind the shoulder. The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack. In the case of pregnant women, the seat belt should pass uniformly over the chest and as low as possible through the pelvic area with the strap flat so it does not press down on the ab- domen; in addition, it must be used throughout the entire pregnancy  Fig. 26.

Adapting the position of the belt webbing to your size

The position of the seat belt can be adapted by adjusting the height of the front seats.

WARNING An incorrectly worn seat belt web can cause severe or fatal injuries in the event of an acci- dent. The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm. The seat belt must lie flat and fit comforta- bly on the torso The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfortably on the pelvis Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack. In the case of pregnant women, the ab- dominal strap of the seat belt should pass as low as possible across the pelvic area, resting flat and surrounding the abdomen  Fig. 26. Do not twist the seat belt while it is fas- tened. Once the seat belt is positioned correctly, don't pull it away from your body with your hand. Do not lie the seat belt across rigid or frag- ile objects, e.g. glasses, pens or keys. Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or similar instruments to alter the position of the belt webbing.

44

Safety

1) Only if fitted with the PreCrash System.

Note If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the correct position of the belt webbing, contact a specialised work- shop for help with any special devices to en- sure the optimum protection of the seat belt and airbag. SEAT recommends taking your car in for technical service.

Automatic retractor, tensioner and belt force limiter

Vehicle seat belts are part of the vehicles safety system  page 37. This system has the following important functions:

Automatic belt retractor

The seat belt shoulder straps on the driver's and front passenger seats, as well as those on the rear side seats (and, depending on equip- ment, also the seat belt of the central rear seat) are fitted with automatic retractors. This device ensures complete freedom of movement when the shoulder strap is pulled gently or during normal driving. However, during sudden braking, when driving in the mountains, around bends and when accelerating, the retractor locks the seat belt if it extends rapidly. In critical driving situations, e.g. in the event of emergency braking or in the case of over- steer and understeer, the proactive occupant

protection can tension the front seat belts auto- matically if they are worn1). The two belts are loosened again if an accident does not happen or when the critical situation passes. Proactive occupant protection is ready to operate again  page 45.

Seat belt tensioner

The seat belts on the front seats and, depend- ing on the equipment, side rear seats are fitted with tensioners. The tensioners are activated by sensors in the event of severe head-on, side and rear colli- sions, and tension the seat belts in a direction opposite their extension. If the seat belt is slack, the tensioner tightens it. This cushions the movement of occupants forwards towards the impact. The belt pre-tensioners work in combination with the airbag system. In case of overturn, the pre-tensioners do not activate unless the head airbags are deployed. When activated, a fine powder may be re- leased. This is completely normal and it is not an indication of fire in the vehicle.

Reversible belt tensioning (proactive occu- pant protection)

A reversible tensioning of the seat belts may occur in certain driving situations  page 45. For example: in the event of sudden brakes in the event of oversteering or understeering in the event of minor collisions

Belt force limiter

Depending on the equipment and the country in question, in the event of an accident, the seat belt force limiter reduces the force the seat belt exerts on the body.

Note After certain driving situations, the reversi- ble belt tensioners may be left permanently tensioned1). In this case, to loosen the belt, it must be removed manually while the vehicle is stationary and then replaced correctly. The relevant safety requirements must be observed if the vehicle or any components of the system are to be scrapped. Specialised workshops are aware of these requirements.

Safety

45

PreCrash s stem

Maintenance and disposal of seat belt tensioners

The belt tensioners are components of the seat belts that are installed in the seats of your vehicle. If you work on the belt tensioners or remove and install parts of the system when performing other repair work, the seat belt may be damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an accident, the belt tensioners function incorrectly or may not function at all. So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten- sioner is not reduced and that removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pol- lution, regulations, which are known to the spe- cialised workshops, must be observed.

WARNING Improper handling and home repairs to seat belts, automatic retractors and belt tension- ers may increase the risk of serious or fa- tal injuries. The tensioners may not activate, even though they should, or they may acti- vate unexpectedly. Never repair, adjust, or disassemble and reassemble seat belt components or ten- sioners. Always have this work carried out by a specialist workshop. Seat belts, tensioners and their automatic retractors cannot be repaired and have to be replaced.

For the sake of the environment Airbag modules and belt tensioners may contain perchlorate. Observe the legal requirements for their dis- posal.

PreCrash system How it works

The PreCrash system is an assistance system that actives a series of measures to protect the occupants of the vehicles in potentially risky situations, but which cannot prevent a collision. It only works completely if no special driving profile is selected and if there are no operating anomalies.

Basic features

Depending on the legal provisions of the coun- try and the features of the vehicle, in critical situations (e.g. in certain cases of emergency braking or loss of control of the vehicle by the driver) the following functions can be activated separately or at the same time when the vehi- cle is travelling faster than approximately 30 km/h (20 mph). Reversible tensioning of front seat belts that are fastened. Operation of the hazard warning lights.

Automatic closing of the windows until they are just cracked open and, depending on the equipment, of the sunroof. Depending on how critical the driving situation is, the belts are either tightened individually, or both belts at the same time.

In addition to Front Assist

In vehicles with Front Assist  page 168, within the limits of the system, information is assessed on the risk of collision with the vehicle in front. The functions of the PreCrash system may also be activated if there is a high likelihood of a rear-end collision, or during the activation of Front Assist.

In addition to Side Assist

In vehicles with lane assist  page 178, within the limitations of each system, information is assessed on the risk of collision with traffic to the rear of the vehicle. If a rear-end collision is highly likely, the functions of the PreCrash system may also be activated. In this situation, the hazard warning lights are turned on with a higher frequency of flashes.

In addition to the Emergency Assist system

In vehicles with emergency assist, driver status information is assessed within the limitations of this system. The following PreCrash systems may be activated if a lack of activity is detec- ted:

46

Safety

Reversible seat belt tensioning of the driver's seat belt. Automatic closing of the windows until they are just cracked open and, depending on the equipment, of the sunroof.

Activation of the PreCrash system

The PreCrash system can be partially deac- tivated by deactivating the traction and/or stability control, depending on the equip- ment. When these vehicle safety controls are switched on (by default, every time the ignition is turned on), the system is fully activated.

Driving profile selection settings

In vehicles with driving profile selection, Pre- Crash adapts to suit the special vehicle configuration of the corresponding profile  page 147.

Limited operation

The PreCrash system is not available or only has limited availability in the following situa- tions: When the TCS and/or ESC is off. When driving in reverse. When the airbag control unit is not operating properly. When there is a fault in the system itself, in the ESC or in the Front Assist.

Troubleshooting

If the PreCrash is not working correctly, the message System unavailable or System with limited functions is shown perma- nently on the instrument cluster screen. Get the system checked by a SEAT Official Service.

WARNING The PreCrash system cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only works within the limits of the system. Risks that compromise safety are never justified by the use of this system. The system is not a re- placement for driver awareness and cannot prevent a collision. Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit the visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- tions. The system is not always able to recognise objects. The system may not react to people or animals or objects that cross length-wise or that are hard to detect. Metallic objects (e.g. fences) or other ele- ments of the public road or adverse weather conditions can hinder its operation and thus its ability to detect collision risk. Never ignore the warning lamps that light up or the messages shown on the dashboard.

WARNING Distracting the driver in any way can lead to an accident and cause injuries. Never change settings on the Infotainment System while driving.

Airbag system Why is it so important to wear a seat belt and to sit correctly?

For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sitting position must be assumed. The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the airbag system can only work ef- fectively when the vehicle occupants are wear- ing their seat belts correctly and have adjus- ted the head restraints properly. Therefore, it is most important to properly wear the seat belts at all times, not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your safety  page 39, Seat belts. The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so if you are not properly seated when the airbag is triggered, you may sustain fatal injuries. There- fore, it is essential that all vehicle occupants as- sume a correct sitting position while travelling.

Safety

47

Airbag system

Sharp braking before an accident may cause a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag may inflict criti- cal or fatal injuries on the occupant. This also applies to children. Always maintain the greatest possible distance between yourself and the front airbag. This way, the front airbags can completely deploy when triggered, providing their maximum pro- tection. The most important factors for triggering the airbag are the type of accident, the angle of impact and the vehicle speed. Whether or not the airbags are activated de- pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration rate resulting from the collision and detected by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration occurring during the collision and measured by the control unit remains below the specified reference values, the front, side and/or curtain airbags will not be triggered. Take into account that the visible damage in a vehicle involved in an accident, no matter how serious, is not a determining factor for the airbags to have been activated.

WARNING Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assum- ing an incorrect sitting position can lead to critical or fatal injuries All vehicle occupants, including children, who are not properly belted can sustain criti- cal or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered. Children up to 12 years old should always travel on the rear seat. Never transport chil- dren in the vehicle if they are not restrained or the restraint system is not appropriate for their age, size or weight. To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating airbag, always wear the seat belt properly  page 39.

Description of the airbag system The airbag system offers additional protection for the occupants in combination with the seat belts.

The airbag system comprises the following modules (as per vehicle equipment): Electronic control unit Front airbags for driver and passenger Knee airbag for the driver Side airbags Head airbag Airbag control lamp on the instrument panel  page 48

Key-operated switch for front passenger air- bag Control lamp for disabled/enabled status of the front passenger airbag. The airbag system operation is monitored elec- tronically. The airbag control lamp will illumi- nate for a few seconds every time the ignition is switched on (self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system if the control lamp : does not light up when the ignition is switched on  page 48, turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on, turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on, illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is mov- ing.

The airbag system is not triggered if: the ignition is switched off there is a minor frontal collision there is a minor side collision there is a rear-end collision in the event of the vehicle overturning if the dynamic characteristics measured by the con- trol unit are too low, the impact speed is lower than the reference value programmed in the control unit.

48

Safety

WARNING The seat belts and airbags can only pro- vide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly  page 37. If a fault has occurred in the airbag sys- tem, have the system checked immediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.

Airbag activation The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within thousands of a second, to provide additional protection in the event of an accident. A fine dust may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indication of fire in the vehicle. The airbag system is only ready to function when the ignition is on. In special accidents instances, several airbags may activate at the same time. In the event of minor head-on and side colli- sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or rollover of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.

Activation factors

The conditions that lead to the airbag system activating in each situation cannot be general- ised. Some factors play an important role, such as the properties of the object the vehicle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle speed, etc.

Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag activa- tion. The control unit analyses the collision trajec- tory and activates the respective restraint sys- tem. If the deceleration rate is below the predefined reference value in the control unit the airbags will not be triggered, even though the accident may cause extensive damage to the car.

The following airbags are triggered in seri- ous head-on collisions: Driver airbag. Front passenger front airbag Knee airbag for the driver.

The following airbags are triggered in seri- ous side-on collisions: Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the acci- dent. Front side airbag on the side of the accident.

In an accident with airbag activation: the interior lights switch on (if the interior light switch is in the courtesy light position); the hazard warning lights switch on; all doors are unlocked; the fuel supply to the engine is cut; an emergency call is started.

Airbag system control lamps Lights up on the instrument cluster Fault in the airbag system and seat belt tensioners. Have the system checked im-

mediately by a specialised workshop.

It lights up on the dash panel Front passenger front airbag deactivated. Check if the airbag should be kept deacti- vated. OR: Fault in the airbag system. Have the system checked immediately by a special- ised workshop.

It lights up on the dash panel Front passenger front airbag activated. The control lamp turns off automatically 60 seconds after the ignition is switched on.

Several warning and control lamps light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, signalling that the function is being verified. They will switch off after a few seconds. If the airbag and seat belt tensioner system control lamp remains on or flashes, it indi- cates a malfunction in the airbag and seat belt tensioner system   . Have the system checked immediately by a specialised work- shop. If the front passenger airbag has been deacti- vated, the warning lamp remains lit on the roof console to remind you that the airbag is deactivated. If, with the front passenger airbag

Safety

49

Airbag system

deactivated, this lamp does not remain lit or if it is lit along with the control lamp on the instrument panel, there is a fault in the airbag system   . If the control lamp is flashing, there is a fault in the disabling of the airbag system   . Have the system checked imme- diately by a specialised workshop.

WARNING In the event of a fault in the airbag and seat belt tensioner system, the airbags and seat belts may not trigger correctly, may fail to trigger or may even trigger unexpectedly. The vehicle occupants run the risk of sus- taining severe or fatal injuries. Have the sys- tem checked immediately by a specialised workshop. Do not mount a child seat in the front pas- senger seat or remove the mounted child seat! The front passenger front airbag may deploy during an accident in spite of the fault.

NOTICE Always pay attention to any lit control lamps and to the corresponding descriptions and instructions to avoid damage to the vehicle or harm to the occupants.

Front airbags

Fig. 27  Drivers airbag in the steering wheel.

Fig. 28  Front passenger airbag located in dash panel.

The driver's front airbag is housed in the steer- ing wheel and that of the front passenger, on the dash panel. Airbags are identified by the word AIRBAG.

The airbag covers open and remain attached to the steering wheel and instrument panel when the driver and front passenger air- bags are triggered, respectively  Fig. 27 ,  Fig. 28. In conjunction with the seat belts, the front airbag system gives the front occupants addi- tional protection for the head and chest in the event of a severe frontal collision   . In addition, in certain head-on collisions, the head airbag is triggered on both sides of the vehicle. Their special design allows the controlled es- cape of the propellant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and chest are protected by the airbag. After the collision, the airbag deflates sufficiently to al- low visibility.

WARNING The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags must not in any case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects. The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have de- ployed. It is also important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the air- bag units.

50

Safety

Activate and deactivate front pas- senger front airbag

Fig. 29  Switch for activating and deactivating the front passenger airbag.

Fig. 30  Dashboard: control lamp for deactivated front passenger airbag in centre console.

Deactivate the front passenger front airbag only if you have to use a rear-facing child seat in the front passenger seat.

SEAT recommends fitting the child seat in the rear seat to avoid having to deactivate the front passenger airbag. When the front passenger airbag is deactiva- ted, this means that only the front passenger front airbag is deactivated. All the other airbags in the vehicle remain activated.

Deactivate and activate the front passenger front airbag Switch the ignition off. Open the passenger side door. Remove the key shaft from the vehicle key. Insert the key blade into the slot provided in the front passenger airbag disconnection switch  Fig. 29. About 3/4 of the key should enter; this is as far as it will go. Turn the key gently to change its position to

(deactivate) or to (activate). If you have difficulty, ensure that you have inserted the key as far as it will go. Close the front passenger door. When deactivating the airbag, switch the ig- nition on and check that the control lamp remains lit  Fig. 30. When reactivating the airbag, check that when the ignition is switched on, the con- trol lamp does not light up and the   lamp lights up for 60 seconds and then turns off.

WARNING The driver of the vehicle is responsible for disabling or switching on the airbag. Always switch off the ignition before disa- bling the front passenger airbag! Failure to do so could result in a fault in the airbag de- activation system. Never leave the key in the airbag disabling switch as it could get damaged or enable or disable the airbag during driving. If for any reason an airbag is deactivated, reactivate it as soon as possible so that it can fulfil its protective function.

Side airbags

Fig. 31  Side airbag in driver's seat.

Safety

51

Airbag system

Fig. 32  Illustration of completely inflated side airbag on left side of vehicle.

The side airbags are located in the front seat backrests  Fig. 31 ,  Fig. 32.

Its location is marked with the word AIRBAG on the upper part of the back of the seats or on the lower coverings with the word AIRBAG in relief. In conjunction with the seat belts, the side air- bag system provides additional protection for the upper body in the event of a severe side collision   . In a side collision, the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers to the areas of the body facing the impact. In addition to their nor- mal protection, the seat belts also hold the passengers in the event of a side collision; this is how these airbags provide maximum protec- tion.

WARNING If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk of injury if the side airbag system is triggered in an accident. In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sit- ting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling. In a side-on collision the side airbags will not work if the sensors do not correctly measure the pressure increase on the inte- rior of the doors, due to air escaping through the areas with holes or openings in the door panel. Never drive if the interior door panels have been removed or if the panels have not been correctly fitted. Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the airbags, or al- low children or other passengers to travel in this position. It is also important not to at- tach any accessories (such as cup holders) to the doors. This would impair the protection offered by the side airbags. The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pock- ets.

Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon the backrest bol- ster because the system may be damaged. In this case, the side airbags would not be triggered. Under no circumstances should protective covers be fitted over seats with side airbags unless the covers have been approved for use in your vehicle. Because the airbag de- ploys from the side of the backrest, the use of conventional seat covers would obstruct the side airbag, seriously reducing the air- bag's effectiveness. Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of the side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a special- ised workshop. The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have de- ployed. Any work on the side airbag system or re- moval and installation of the airbag compo- nents for other repairs (such as removal of the front seat) should only be performed by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may occur during the airbag system operation.

52

Safety

Head-protection airbags

Fig. 33  Location and deployment area of the head-protection airbag.

Head-protection airbags are on both sides of the passenger compartment, above the doors  Fig. 33 and their location is indicated with the word AIRBAG.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the head- protection airbag system gives the vehicle oc- cupants additional protection for the head and upper body in the event of a severe side colli- sion   .

The framed area is covered by the head-pro- tection airbag when it is deployed (deployment area)  Fig. 33. Therefore, objects should never be placed or mounted in this area   . In the event of a side collision the curtain airbag is triggered on the impact side of the vehicle.

The head-protection airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers in the front and rear side seats facing the impact.

WARNING In order for the head-protection airbags to provide their maximum protection, the pre- scribed sitting position must always be main- tained with seat belts fastened while travel- ling. For safety reasons, the curtain airbag must be disabled in those vehicles fitted with a screen dividing the interior of the vehicle. See your technical service to make this ad- justment. There must be no other persons, animals or objects between the occupants of the outer seats and the deployment space of the head-protection airbags so that the head- protection airbag can deploy completely without restriction and provide the greatest possible protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have not been expressly approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached to the side windows. The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pock- ets. Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hangers. The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have de- ployed.

Any work on the head-protection airbag system or removal and installation of the air- bag components for other repairs (such as removal of the roof lining) should only be performed by a specialised workshop. Oth- erwise, faults may occur during the airbag system operation. The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct operation of the side and curtain airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modi- fied in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag system may not work correctly. All work carried out on the front door must be done in a special- ised workshop.

Knee airbag

Fig. 34  On the driver side: location of airbag for knees.

Safety

53

Transporting children safely

Fig. 35  On the driver side: action radius of airbag for knees.

The knee airbag is located on the driver side below the dash panel  Fig. 34. Airbags are identified by the word AIRBAG. The framed area (deployment area)  Fig. 35 is covered by the knee airbag when it is de- ployed. Objects should never be placed or mounted in this area.

WARNING The knee airbag is deployed in front of the driver's knees. Always keep the deployment areas of the knee airbags free. Never not fix objects to the cover or in the deployment area of the knee airbag. Adjust the driver's seat so that there is a distance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) between your knees and the location of the this air-

bag. If your physical constitution prevents you from meeting these requirements, make sure you contact a specialised workshop.

Transporting children safely

Introduction For safety reasons, as we have learned from accident statistics, we recommend that chil- dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear seats. Depending on their age, height and weight, children travelling in rear seats must use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety reasons, the child seat should be installed in the rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or in the centre back seat. The laws of physics involved and the forces acting in a collision apply also to children  page 41. But unlike adults, children do not have fully developed muscle and bone struc- tures. This means that children are subject to a greater risk of injury. To reduce the risk of injuries, children must al- ways use special child restraint systems when travelling in the vehicle. We recommend the use of child safety products from the Original Accessories Pro- gramme, which includes systems for all ages made by Peke (not for all countries) (see www.seat.com).

These systems have been especially designed and approved, complying with the ECE-R44. regulation. SEAT recommends securing the child seats shown on the website as described below:

Child seats in the opposite direction of travel (group 0+): ISOFIX and support peg (ROMER BABY SAFE PLUS SHR II + ISOFIX BASE / PEKE G0 I-SIZE + I-SIZE BASE). Child seats in the direction of travel (group 1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (ROMER DUO PLUS + TOP TETHER / PEKE G1 TRIFIX I-SIZE). Forward facing child seats (group 2): safety belt and ISOFIX (ROMER BRITAX KIDFIX2 S). Child seats directed towards the front of the vehicle (group 3): safety belt (TAKATA MAXI).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and ob- serve any statutory requirements when instal- ling and using child seats. Always read and note  page 54. We recommend you always carry the man- ufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to- gether with the on-board documentation.

54

Safety

Child seats group classification

Fig. 36  Examples of child seats.

Use only child seats that are officially approved and suitable for the child. These seats are subject to the ECE-R44 or ECE-R129 standards. ECE-R stands for: Eco- nomic Commission for Europe Regulation.

Child seats by weight group

The child seats are grouped into 5 categories:

Age group Weight of the child

Group 0 Up to 10 kg

Group 0+ Up to 13 kg

Group 1 From 9 to 18 kg

Group 2 From 15 to 25 kg

Group 3 From 22 to 36 kg

Child seats that have been tested and ap- proved under the ECE R44 or ECE-R129 stand- ards bear the ECE-R44 or ECE-R129 test marks on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test number below it). Follow the manufacturer's instructions and ob- serve any statutory requirements when instal- ling and using child seats. We recommend you to always include the manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual together with the on-board documentation. SEAT recommends you use child seats from the Original Accessories Catalogue. These child seats have been designed and tested for use in our vehicles. You can find the right child seat for your model and age group at our dealers.

Child seats by approval category

Child seats may have the approval category of universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific (all according to the ECE-R44 standard) or i-Size (according to the ECE-R129 standard). Universal: child seats with universal approval can be installed in all vehicles. There is no need to consult any list of models. In the case of universal approval for ISOFIX, the child seat is additionally provided with a Top Tether belt. Semi-universal: semi-universal approval, in addition to the standard requirements of univer- sal approval, requires safety devices to lock the child seat, which require additional test-

ing. Child seats with semi-universal approval include a list of vehicle models for which they can be installed. Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approval requires a dynamic test of the child seat for each vehicle model separately. Child seats with vehicle-specific approval also include a list of vehicle models for which they can be instal- led. i-Size: child seats with i-Size approval must meet the requirements prescribed in the ECE- R 129 standard in relation to installation and safety. Child seat manufacturers can tell you which seats have i-Size approval for this vehi- cle.

Fitting and using child seats

Fig. 37  Airbag sticker: on the passenger side sunshade blind.

Safety

55

Transporting children safely

1) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats.

Fig. 38  Airbag sticker: on the rear frame of the passenger side door.

Warnings about fitting a child seat

Take the following general warnings into ac- count if you are going to fit a child seat. They are valid for all child seats regardless of their attachment system. Please read and follow the child seat manu- facturer's operating instructions. The child seat should preferably be fitted to the rear seat behind the front passenger seat so that the child can exit the vehicle on the pavement side. Set the height of the seat belt such that it adapts to the child seat naturally, without twist- ing. The lowest position of the seat belt height regulator must be used with rear-facing child seats.

To correctly use a child seat in the back, the front backrest must be adjusted so that there is no contact with the child seat in the back in the case that it goes opposite to the direction of the car. In the case of front facing restraint systems, the front backrest must be adjusted so that there is no contact with the child's feet. For a correct assembly of the child's seat on the rear seats, adjust or dismount the headrest, in order to prevent contact with the seat. If a semi-universal type chair is to be installed, in which the method of attachment to the car is through the seat belt and support bracket, it should never be installed in the central rear seat as the ground clearance is lower than in other places and the support bracket will not allow the seat to remain sufficiently stable. When fitting a child seat on the front passen- ger seat, the seat must be moved backwards as far as possible and placed in the highest position. The backrest must also be put in a vertical position1).

Important information about the front pas- senger front airbag

A sticker with important information about the passenger airbag is located on the passenger's sunshade blind and/or on the passenger side door frame  Fig. 37. Read and always observe the safety informa- tion included in the following chapters:

Safety distance with respect to the passen- ger airbag  page 46. Objects between the passenger and the pas- senger side airbag   in Front airbags on page 49. The passenger side front airbag, when enabled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing back- ward since the airbag can strike the seat with such force that it can cause serious or fatal inju- ries. Children up to 12 years old should always travel on the rear seat. Therefore we strongly recommend you to trans- port children on the rear seats. This is the safest location in the vehicle. Alternatively, the front passenger airbag can be disabled with a key- operated switch  page 50. When transport- ing children, use a child seat suitable for the age and size of each child  page 54.

WARNING If a child seat is secured to the front pas- senger seat, the risk to the child of sustaining critical or fatal injuries in the event of an ac- cident increases. An inflating front passenger airbag can strike the rear-facing child seat and project it with great force against the door, the roof or the backrest. Never install a child seat facing back- wards on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger front airbag has been

56

Safety

disabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! However, if necessary, the front passenger front airbag must be deactivated  page 50 . If the passenger seat has a height adjustment option, move it to the highest, most upright position. If you have a fixed seat, do not install any child restraint system in this location. For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to deactivate the airbag, the ve- hicle must be taken to a technical service. Do not forget to reconnect the airbag when an adult wants to sit in the front passenger seat. Never allow a child to be transported in a vehicle without being properly secured, or to stand up or kneel on a seat while travel- ling. In an accident, the child could be flung through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal injuries to themselves and to the other vehi- cle occupants. Never leave a child alone in the child seat or in the vehicle. Children who are less than 1.50 m tall must not wear a normal seat belt without a child seat, as this could cause injuries to the ab- dominal and neck areas during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident. When a child seat is mounted in the rear seats, the door child-proof lock should be activated  page 79.

Attachment systems Depending on the country, different attach- ment systems are used for safely installing child seats.

Attachment systems overview ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attachment system allowing quick and safe attachment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX attachment es- tablishes a rigid connection between the child seat and the car body. The child seat has two rigid attachment clips, called connectors. These connectors are fit- ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings found be- tween the seat cushion and the backrest of the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISOFIX attachment systems are used mainly in Europe  page 57. If necessary, ISOFIX attachment may have to be supplemented with a Top Tether belt or a support bracket. Automatic three-point seat belt. Whenever possible, it is preferable to attach the child seats with the ISOFIX system rather than at- taching them with an automatic three-point seat belt  page 61. Additional attachment: Top Tether: the Top Tether belt is guided over the back of the rear seat and attached to an anchor point with a hook. Anchor points are lo- cated at the back of the rear seat backrest on

the luggage compartment side  page 60. The rings for retaining the Top Tether belt are marked with an anchor symbol. Support bracket: some child seats rest on the floor of the vehicle with a support bracket. The support bracket prevents the child seat from tipping forward in the event of impact. Child seats fitted with a support bracket should only be used in the passenger seat and side rear seats   . For the assembly of this type of seat you should also consult the list of ap- proved vehicles for this assembly, available in the instructions for child restraint systems.

Recommended systems for attaching child seats

SEAT recommends attaching child seats as fol- lows: Baby carriers or child seats in the opposite direction of travel: ISOFIX and support bracket or i-Size. Child seats in the direction of travel: ISOFIX and Top Tether.

WARNING Incorrect use of the support bracket can cause serious or fatal injury. Make sure the support bracket is correctly and safely installed. When the base of the child seat is sup- porting the childs weight, the support foot should not hang in the air or be supplemen-

Safety

57

Transporting children safely

ted with objects. In addition, make sure that the base of the child seat is always suppor- ted by the surface of the vehicle's seat. The support leg of the child seat should not raise the base of the child seat off the surface of the vehicle's seat.

Securing the child seat with the ISO- FIX or i-Size system

The marking of ISOFIX or i-Size anchor points depends on the equipment and the country in question. See the following tables to understand the compatibility of the ISOFIX/i-Size systems in the vehicle:

58

Safety

Vehicle ISOFIX positions

Weight group Size classa) Electrical equip- ment

Front passenger seat Rear side seat Rear central seat

airbag enabled airbag disabled

Baby carrier F ISO/L1 X X X X

G ISO/L2 X X X X

Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X X IL X

Group 0+ to 13 kg

E ISO/R1 X X IL X

D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C SO/R3 X X IL X

Group I 9 to 18 kg

D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

B ISO/F2 X X IL, IUF X

B1 ISO/F2X X X IL, IUF X

A ISO/F3 X X IL, IUF X

Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- X X IL X

Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- X X IL X

IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this weight group. IL: It is suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. Take the child seat manufacturer's vehicle list into account. X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class.

a) The indication of class according to size corresponds to the authorised bodyweight for the child seat. In child seats with universal or semi-universal approval, the class according to size is indicated on the ECE approval label. The indication of class according to size is stated on the corresponding child seat.

Safety

59

Transporting children safely

Vehicle i-Size positions

Front passenger seat Rear side seat Rear central seat

airbag enabled airbag disabled

X X i-U X

i-U: Position suitable for forward- or rear-facing i-Size child restraint systems with universal certification. X: Position not suitable for i-Size child restraint systems.

Securing the child seat with the ISOFIX or i-Size system

Fig. 39  Rear seat: location of the ISOFIX or i-Size securing rings.

Fig. 40  Rear seats: fitting a child seat with the ISOFIX system.

You must follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions. The location of the ISOFIX or i-Size anchor points is indicated by a symbol  Fig. 39. In some vehicles, the rings are secured to the seat frame and, in others, they are secured to the rear floor. Press the child seat onto the ISOFIX or iSize retaining rings until it is heard to engage se- curely  Fig. 40. If the child seat is equipped

with Top Tether anchor points, secure it to the correspondent ring  page 60. Follow the child seat manufacturers instructions. Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure that it is properly anchored. Child seats with the ISOFIX or i-Size and Top Tether attachment system can be purchased from technical services.

WARNING The securing rings are designed only for use with ISOFIX or i-Size and Top Tether system child seats. Never secure other child seats that do not have ISOFIX, i-Size or Top Tether systems, or safety belts or any other objects to the se- curing rings as this can result in potentially fatal injuries to the child. Ensure that the child seat is correctly se- cured to the ISOFIX or i-Size rings and the Top Tether.

60

Safety

Top Tether securing belts

Fig. 41  Rear seats: adjustment and assembly according to the Top Tether belt.

Fig. 42  Rear part of the rear seats: securing rings for the Top Tether strap.

Child seats with a Top Tether system are fitted with an additional strap for fastening to an an- chor point in the vehicle. This anchor point is

located on the rear of the rear seat backrest (identified with the symbol ) and provides better retention. The objective of this system is to reduce for- ward movements of the child seat in a head-on collision, to reduce the risk of injuries that may be caused to the childs head by impacting against any element of the inside of the vehicle.

Using the Top Tether in rear-facing mounted seats

Currently, there are very few rear-facing child safety seats that have Top Tether. Please care- fully read and follow the seat manufacturer in- structions to learn the proper way to install the Top Tether strap.

Securing the retainer strap Follow the manufacturer's instructions to de- ploy the child seat Top Tether retaining strap. Position the belt under the headrest (accord- ing to the instructions of the seat itself, lift or remove the headrest if necessary)  Fig. 41. Slide the strap and secure it properly with the anchor on the rear seat backrest  Fig. 42. Firmly tighten the strap following the manu- facturer's instructions.

Releasing the retaining strap Loosen the strap following the manufacturer's instructions. Push the lock and release it from the anchor- ing support.

WARNING An undue installation of the safety seat will increase the risk of injury in the event of a crash. Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in the luggage compartment. Never secure or tie luggage or other items to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or the up- per ones (Top Tether).

WARNING Child restraint anchors are designed to sup- port the loads of properly adjusted child restraint systems. Under no circumstances should they be used to attach adult seat belts, harnesses or other items or equipment to the vehicle.

Safety

61

Transporting children safely

Fitting a child seat using the seat belt

Fig. 43  On rear seats: installing a child seat.

If you want to fit a universal approval category (U) child seat in your vehicle, you must check that the seat is approved for your vehicle. You will find any necessary information on the child seats orange ECE approval label. The following table shows the different fitting options.

62

Safety

Weight group Front passenger seata)

Rear side seat Rear central seatb) Airbag enabled Airbag deactivatedc)

Group 0 to 10 kg X U U U

Group 0+ to 13 kg X U U U

Group I 9 to 18 kg X U U U

Group II 15 to 25 kg X UF UF UF

Group III 22 to 36 kg X UF UF UF

X: Not compatible for the installation of seats install chairs in this configuration. U: Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this weight group. UF: Acceptable for front-facing universal-category child restraint systems approved for this mass group.

a) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats. b) For semi-universal chairs where the securing system is the car safety belt and the support bracket, do not use them in the centre rear seat. c) Seats without height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost position. Seats with height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost and highest position.

Fitting a child seat using the seat belt Set the height of the seat belt such that it adapts to the child seat naturally, without twist- ing. The lowest position of the seat belt height regulator must be used with rear-facing child seats. Put the seat belt in place and pass it through the child seat according to the instructions of the child seat manufacturer. Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted. Insert the latch plate into the seat's buckle until you hear the engagement click.

WARNING When travelling, children must be secured in the vehicle with a restraint system suitable for age, weight and size. Always read and observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats  page 54.

Safety

63

In case of emergency

In case of emergency Hazard warning lights

Fig. 44  Dashboard: switch for hazard warning lights.

The hazard warning lights are used to draw the attention of other road users to your vehicle in emergencies. If your vehicle is stationary: 1. Park the vehicle at a safe distance from

road traffic. 2. Press the button to switch on the hazard

warning lights   . 3. Apply the electronic parking brake. 4. Stop the engine. 5. Engage 1st gear in vehicles with a manual

gearbox, or set the gear selector to the P position in vehicles with automatic trans- mission.

6. Follow the legal provisions of each country (reflective vest, warning triangles, light bea- con, etc.).

7. Always carry the key with you when leaving the vehicle.

All turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are switched on. The two turn signal turn signal lamps and the turn signal lamp in the switch will flash at the same time. The simultaneous hazard warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off. While the hazard warning lights are on, you can signal a direction or lane change, e.g. during towing, by operating the turn signal lever. The hazard warning lights remain switched off dur- ing this time.

Emergency braking warning

If the vehicle brakes suddenly and continuously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50 mph), the brake light flashes several times per second to warn the vehicles driving behind. If you continue braking, the hazard warning lights will come on automatically when the vehicle comes to a standstill. They switch off automatically when the vehicle starts to move again.

WARNING The risk of an accident increases if your vehicle breaks down. Always use the hazard warning lights and a warning triangle (or light beacon, depending on the country) to draw the attention of other road users to your stationary vehicle. Never leave anybody inside the vehicle, particularly children or anybody who may need help. This is especially important when the doors are locked. Individuals locked in the vehicle can be exposed to very high or very low temperatures. Due to the high temperatures that the cat- alytic converter can reach, never park in an area where the catalytic converter could come into contact with highly inflammable materials, for example dry grass or spilt pet- rol. This could start a fire.

Note The 12-volt vehicle battery will run down if the hazard warning lights are left on for a long time (even if the ignition is switched off). The use of the hazard warning lights de- scribed here is subject to the relevant statu- tory requirements.

64

Safety

1) Only available in certain countries.

Behaviour in the event of an accident or fire

Actions to take in the event of a fire or acci- dent

For your own safety and that of other passen- gers, the following points should be observed in the order given   : Switch off the engine. If possible, switch on the hazard warning lights  page 63. Follow the legal provisions of each country (reflective vest, warning triangles, light beacon, etc.). If necessary, get any people out of the haz- ard area and apply first aid. Notify the emergency services. Wait at a safe distance from the scene of the accident for the emergency services to arrive. In case of fire, do not attempt to extinguish the fire yourself or remain near the vehicle.

WARNING For your own safety, do not ignore this impor- tant check list, otherwise accidents and seri- ous injuries could occur. Always complete the operations on the check list and always bear in mind the gen- eral safety measures.

WARNING In the event of fire, an explosion may occur and substances harmful to health may be re- leased, which can cause serious injury. Never stay near the burning vehicle.

Emergency call service

Fig. 45  On the roof console: controls for voice services

Depending on the equipment, an emergency call system may be located on the roof con- sole. The following voice services can be run by pressing the buttons , and  Fig. 45: information call assistance call emergency call service. A built-in control unit establishes the connec- tion.

When a voice service is activated, a connection is established with a phone line.

Control lamp

There is a control lamp on the control  Fig. 45 (arrow). It shows the following statuses: Off: the eCall service is not available. Flashes in red, approx. 20 seconds after swing on the ignition: the eCall service is de- activated. Lights up red: system failure. The eCall serv- ice is available with certain restrictions. SEAT suggests going to a specialised workshop. Lights up green: the eCall service is availa- ble. The system works correctly. Flashes green: There is an ongoing voice connection.

Emergency call service1)

The automatic emergency call is only activated if the ignition is switched on. If the airbags or, if applicable, the seatbelt ten- sioners are triggered, a connection is automat- ically established with the emergency coordi- nation centre. The automatic emergency call cannot be interrupted by pressing the button

1 .

Safety

65

In case of emergency

If the emergency coordination centre's ques- tions are not answered, the corresponding as- sistance measures are implemented. If the call is public, the person on the other end of the line uses the language of the country in which you are located. If the call is private, the person on the other end of the line will assist you in the language you have configured in the Infotainment system. If the configured language is not available, Eng- lish will be used.

Starting an emergency call manually Press and hold the emergency call button for a few seconds 1 . The emergency call is activated and a voice connection is established with the emergency coordination centre. If you press the emergency call button inadver- tently, hang up the call immediately: Press the emergency call button again until the control light stays green.

Integrated battery

The integrated battery ensures that the emer- gency call system (eCall) remains available for some time even if the 12-volt battery has been disconnected or has failed.

If the integrated battery discharges or is de- fective, a message stating this is displayed on the instrument cluster display. Go to a special- ised workshop and ask for the battery to be replaced.

EDR data transmission  page 342

When an emergency call is made, the legally required data is transmitted to the emergency coordination centre so that the necessary as- sistance measures can be determined. Vehicle location data is continuously overwrit- ten. This means that the vehicle is not subject to permanent monitoring. The data related to the emergency call is only processed to ensure the correct operation of the emergency call system (eCall). The system will automatically delete the data related to the call a few hours after the call is activated. The sent data includes: The vehicle's current position at the time the emergency call is activated. Vehicle identification number (VIN) Type of vehicle and type of drive. Type of activation (automatic or manual). Type of call. Direction in which the vehicle was travelling at the time the emergency call was activated.

Moment of the collision. Estimated number of vehicle occupants.

Diversion to 112 emergency number

In some situations where the emergency call service is limited or cannot be carried out, an emergency call is made to 112. The following conditions may cause the emer- gency call service to function in a limited man- ner or the call to be diverted to the 112 emer- gency number: The emergency call is made from an area with weak or no mobile and GPS signal, as well as e.g. tunnels, between very tall buildings, ga- rages, underground walkways, mountains and valleys. In areas with sufficient mobile telephone and GPS coverage, the mobile telephone network of the telecommunications operator in question may not be available. In some countries, the emergency call serv- ice may not be available due to legal reasons. There is no valid license for the use of the emer- gency call service. The components of the vehicle required for the emergency phone call are damaged or do not get enough power.

66

Safety

1) Only available in certain countries.

In some countries, the emergency call service may not be available and depending on the location of the vehicle, the control lamp LEDs, and even the operation of the different types of calls, could have a specific behaviour.

Assistance call1)

With the breakdown call you can directly re- quest specialised help in the event of a break- down. Parallel to the voice call, some vehicle data is transmitted, e.g. your current location.

Information call1)

With a information call, a call is placed to the customer care service of SEAT. S.A.

Note Breakdown service and information calls can incur an additional cost on your tele- phone bill. The operation of the eCall system, which is required by law, may be limited if an infotain- ment system is retrofitted.

Opening and closing

67

Set of vehicle keys

1

2

3

4

5

Opening and closing Set of vehicle keys

Vehicle key

Fig. 46  Vehicle key

Fig. 47  Vehicle key with alarm button.

Unlock the vehicle Lock the vehicle

Unlock only the rear lid. Press the button until all the turn signals on the vehicle flash briefly. You have 2 minutes to open the rear lid. Once this time has passed, it will lock again. In addition, the lamp on the key flashes. Control lamp Alarm button. Only press in the event of an emergency! When the alarm button is pressed, the vehicle's sounds and the turn signals light up for a short time. Press again to disconnect.

The vehicle can be locked and unlocked from a distance using the vehicle key  page 73. The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat- tery. The receiver is in the interior of the vehicle. The range of the vehicle key with remote con- trol and new battery is several metres around the vehicle. If it is not possible to open or close the vehicle using the remote control key, this should be re-synchronised  page 69 or the battery changed  page 69. Different keys belonging to the vehicle may be used.

Control lamp on the vehicle key

When a button is pressed briefly on the vehicle key, the control lamp 4  Fig. 46 flashes once briefly, but if pressed for a long period of time, it will flash several times, for example, in the convenience opening. If the vehicle key control lamp does not light up when the button is pressed, replace the key's battery  page 69.

Spare key

To obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys, the vehicle chassis number is required. Each new key contains a microchip which must be coded with the data from the vehicle elec- tronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will not work if it does not contain a microchip or the microchip has not been encoded. This is also true for keys which are specially cut for the vehicle. The vehicle keys or new spare keys can be obtained from a SEAT Official Service, a spe- cialised workshop or an approved key service qualified to create this kind of key. New keys or spare keys must be synchronised before use  page 69.

68

Opening and closing

1

2

3

WARNING Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emergency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle or manage on their own. An uncontrolled use of the key by third parties could activate a piece of electrical equipment (e.g. electric windows), with the resulting accident hazard. The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could become an obstacle for assistance in an emergency situation. Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. An unauthorised use of your vehicle could result in injury, damage or theft. Therefore always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle.

NOTICE All of the vehicle keys contain electronic components. Protect them from damage, im- pacts and humidity.

Note Only use the key button when you require the corresponding function. Pushing the but- ton unnecessarily could accidentally unlock the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It is also pos- sible even when you are outside the radius of action.

Key operation can be greatly influenced by overlapping radio signals close to the vehicle working in the same range of frequencies, for example, radio transmitters or mobile tel- ephones. Obstacles between the remote control and the vehicle, bad weather conditions and discharged batteries can considerably re- duce the range of the remote control. If the buttons of the vehicle key are pressed or one of the central locking but- tons  page 74 is pressed repeatedly in short succession, the central locking briefly disconnects as protection against overload- ing. The vehicle is then unlocked. Lock it if necessary. Spare remote control keys are available at your Technical Service, where they must be matched to the locking system.

Pull out the key blade

Fig. 48  Vehicle key: extracting the emergency key.

Inside the vehicle key is an emergency key for manually locking and unlocking the vehicle  Fig. 48.

Slightly move the lock in the direction of the arrow. Remove the emergency key in the direction of the arrow. Unlock or lock the vehicle with the emer- gency key.

Possible functions: Deactivating and activating the front pas- senger airbag  page 50. Manually unlocking and locking the vehicle  page 78. Manual release mechanism for the rear lid  page 83.

Opening and closing

69

Set of vehicle keys

Changing the battery

Fig. 49  Vehicle key: opening the battery compartment.

Fig. 50  Vehicle key: removing the battery.

SEAT recommends you ask a specialised work- shop to replace the battery. The battery is located to the rear of the vehicle key, under a cover.

Changing the battery

Remove the emergency key  page 68. Insert a flat blade screwdriver into the vehicle key, through the outer guide of the emergency key, approx. 1 cm in the direction of the arrow  Fig. 49 1 . Turn the screwdriver clockwise until the cover opens  Fig. 49 2

Open the cover in the direction indicated by the arrow  Fig. 49 3 and remove it   . Lever the battery out of its compartment  Fig. 50. Fit a new button battery into the compart- ment   . Put on the cover and press it into the housing until it clicks into place. Stow the emergency key.

WARNING Swallowing a battery with a 20 mm diameter or any other button battery can cause seri- ous and even fatal injuries within a very short time. Keep the vehicle key and key fobs with bat- teries out of reach of children. If you suspect that someone may have swallowed a battery, seek immediate medi- cal attention.

NOTICE If the battery is not changed correctly, the vehicle key may be damaged. Use of unsuitable batteries may damage the vehicle key. For this reason, always re- place the dead battery with another of the same voltage, size and specifications. When fitting the battery, check that the po- larity is correct.

For the sake of the environment Please dispose of your used batteries cor- rectly and with respect for the environment.

Synchronize the vehicle key If the button is pressed frequently outside of the vehicle range, it is possible that the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked using the key. In this case, the key must be resynchron- ised as described below:

Unfold the vehicle key blade  page 67 . If necessary, remove the cover from the driver door handle  page 78. Press the button on the vehicle key. For this, it must remain with the vehicle. Open the vehicle within one minute using the key blade. The key has been synchronised. If necessary, fit the cap.

70

Opening and closing

A

BKeyless Access system Locking and unlocking with the Key- less Access system

Fig. 51  Keyless Access: proximity zones.

Fig. 52  Driver door lever: sensor surfaces.

 Fig. 52

Unlocking sensor surface on the inside of the door handle.

Locking sensor surface on the outside of the door handle.

Depending on the equipment, the vehicle may have the Keyless Access system. This is a key- less locking and starting system that can un- lock and lock the vehicle without actively using its key. For this, it is only necessary that there is a valid vehicle key in the detection area cor- responding to the attempted access to the ve- hicle.

Configuring the Keyless Access system

The behaviour of the Keyless Access system can be adjusted in the Vehicle settings menu of the Infotainment system  page 35. If the Keyless Access function is disabled, its operation is limited.

Unlock the vehicle Touch the sensor surface on the inside of the handle A . All turn signals flash twice. If selective opening is fitted, touching the sen- sor's surface twice unlocks the entire vehicle. If the vehicle is not unlocked for an extended period, the function is deactivated. The function will reactivate the next time that the vehicle is unlocked with the remote control.

Lock the vehicle Park the vehicle. Touch the sensor surface  Fig. 52 B on the outside of the door handle. All turn signals flash once. To check that the vehicle is properly locked, the unlocking function is deactivated for a few seconds.

Unlocking the rear lid

When the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto- matically unlocks when it is opened if there is a vehicle key in its proximity zone. The rear lid locks again after closing.

Temporarily deactivating the Keyless Ac- cess system

The Keyless Access systems unlocking func- tion can be temporarily deactivated: Move the gear lever to position P since other- wise the vehicle cannot be locked. Lock the vehicle using the button on the vehicle key. Within 5 seconds, touch the sensor on the outside of the door handle  Fig. 52 B once. Do not grip the handle while doing so. This tem- porarily deactivates the Keyless Access system. Check that it is deactivated by pulling the door handle after at least 10 seconds. It should not be possible to open the door.

Opening and closing

71

Keyl ss Access system

The next time, the vehicle can only be unlocked electronically with the vehicle key. After being unlocked the next time, the Keyless Access sys- tem will be activated again   .

Permanently disabling the Keyless Access system

The Keyless Access system can also be perma- nently deactivated in the infotainment system   .

Convenience functions

To close all the electric windows and the sun- roof using the comfort function, keep a finger for a few seconds on the locking sensor surface  Fig. 52 B of the door handle until the win- dows and roof have closed. How the doors open when touching the sensor surface on the door handle will depend on the settings that have been activated in the info- tainment system, using the function button  > Settings > Opening and closing.

NOTICE Deactivating the Keyless Access system also deactivates the sensor controlled opening and closing of the rear lid, although the func- tion is shown as active in the vehicle menu.

Troubleshooting

The Keyless Access system does not work

The operation of the sensor surfaces may be limited if they are very dirty. Clean the sensor surfaces.

All turn signals flash four times

The key that was last used is still inside the vehi- cle. Remove the key and lock the vehicle.

Automatic deactivation of the sensor surfa- ces

The sensor surfaces are deactivated in the fol- lowing cases: If the vehicle is not unlocked or locked for a long period of time. If any of the sensor surfaces are activated unusually often. To reactivate the sensor surfaces: Unlock the vehicle using the button on the vehicle key.

NOTICE The sensor surfaces on the door handles may activate if hit by a jet of water or high pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity area. If at least one of the windows is open and the sensor surfaces on one of the handles permanently activates, all of the windows will close. If the jet of wa- ter or steam is briefly moved away from the sensor surfaces of one of the handles and redirected towards them, all of the windows may open.

Note If the message Keyless system faulty is displayed on the instrument cluster dis- play, abnormalities may occur in the opera- tion of the Keyless Access system. Contact a specialised workshop.

Note If there is no vehicle key inside the vehicle or the system fails to detect one, a warning will display on the instrument cluster screen. This could happen if any other radio frequency signal interferes with the key signal or if the key is covered by another object, e.g. a metal case.

72

Opening and closing

Central locking Introduction

Central locking functions correctly when all the doors and the rear lid are correctly shut. If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannot be locked with the key.

WARNING The incorrect use of the central locking sys- tem may cause serious injuries. The central locking system will lock all doors. A vehicle locked from the inside can prevent any non-authorised individual from opening the doors and accessing the vehicle. Nevertheless, in case of emergency or acci- dent, locked doors will complicate access to the vehicle interior to help the passengers. Never leave children or disabled people alone in the vehicle. The central locking but- ton can be used to lock all the doors from within. Therefore, passengers will be locked inside the vehicle. Individuals locked in the vehicle can be exposed to very high or very low temperatures. Depending on the time of the year, temper- atures inside a locked and closed vehicle can be extremely high or extremely low resulting in serious injuries and illness or even death, particularly for young children.

Never leave individuals locked in a closed and locked vehicle. In case of emergency, they may not be able to exit the vehicle by themselves or get help.

Description Central locking allows all doors, the rear lid and the tank flap to be unlocked centrally:

From outside, using the vehicle key  page 73. From outside with the Keyless Access system  page 70. From inside, by pushing the central locking button  page 74.

Self-locking system to prevent involuntary unlocking

It is an anti-theft system and prevents the unin- tentional unlocking of the vehicle. If the vehicle is unlocked and none of the doors (including the boot) are opened within 45 seconds, it re- locks automatically.

Automatic locking (Auto Lock)

The vehicle locks automatically at over a speed of approx. 15 km/h (9 mph). The fuel tank flap is unlocked so that you can refuel without getting out of the vehicle. When the vehicle is locked, the control lamp of the central locking button lights up yellow.

Automatic unlocking (Auto Unlock)

If one of the following conditions is met, all doors and the rear lid are unlocked automati- cally: The electronic parking brake is engaged and the ignition is switched off. EITHER: the inside door handle is pulled. This applies when driving at under 15 km/h (9 mph). OR: in the event of an accident and an airbag has been triggered  page 75. Automatic unlocking allows third parties to ac- cess the interior of the vehicle to provide assis- tance if necessary.

Turn signals

The turn signals will flash twice when the vehi- cle is unlocked and once when the vehicle is locked. If it does not flash, this indicates that one of the doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is not closed correctly.

Accidental lock-out

The central locking system prevents you from being locked out of the vehicle in the following situations: If the driver door is open, the vehicle can- not be locked with the central locking switch  page 74.

Opening and closing

73

Central locking

Lock the vehicle with the remote control key, when all the doors and the rear lid have been closed. This prevents the accidental locking of the vehicle.

Central locking settings

Central locking settings can be changed in the Infotainment system. Selective unlocking of the doors Press the function button > Settings > Opening and closing > Central lock- ing > Door unlocking. You can choose to unlock all the doors or only the driver door when you unlock the vehicle. In all the options, the fuel tank flap is also un- locked. With the Driver setting, when you press the button on the remote control key once, only the driver door is unlocked. If that button is pressed twice, the rest of the doors and the rear lid will be unlocked. If the button is pressed, all the vehicle doors are locked. At the same time, a confirmation signal is heard.

Note Never leave any valuable items in the vehi- cle unattended. Even a locked vehicle is not a safe. If the LED on the driver door sill lights up for about 30 seconds when the vehi- cle is locked, the central locking system or anti-theft alarm is not working properly. You should have the fault repaired at a SEAT Offi- cial Service or specialised workshop. Vehicle interior monitoring by the anti-theft alarm system will only function as intended if the windows and sunroof are closed.

Unlock and lock with the key

Fig. 53  Remote control key: keys.

Lock: press the  Fig. 53 button. Locking the vehicle without the Safe secur- ity system: push the button again and hold for 2 seconds.

Unlock: press the button. Unlocking the rear lid: hold down the but- ton for at least 1 second. The vehicle will be locked again automatically if you do not open one of the doors or the rear lid within 45 seconds after unlocking the car. This function prevents the vehicle from remain- ing unlocked if the unlocking button is pressed by mistake. This does not apply if you press the

button for at least one second.

Selective unlocking system

The selective unlocking system allows you to only unlock the driver door and the fuel tank flap. All other doors and the rear lid remain locked. Unlocking the driver's door and tank flap: Press (once) the button on the remote con- trol key or turn the key once in the opening direction. Unlocking all the doors, the rear lid and the tank flap simultaneously: Within 5 seconds, press (twice) the button on the remote control key, or turn the key twice within 5 seconds in the opening direction. The Safe security system and the anti-theft alarm deactivate immediately when only the driver door is opened. In vehicles with Infotainment system, you can programme the security central locking system directly  page 72.

74

Opening and closing

WARNING Observe the safety warnings  page 74, Safe security system.

Note Do not use the remote control key until the vehicle is visible. Other functions of the remote control key  page 84, Opening and closing the win- dows.

Unlocking and locking from the in- side

Fig. 54  On the driver's door: central locking button.

Lock: press the  Fig. 54 button. Unlock: press the  Fig. 54 button.

Please note the following when using the cen- tral locking switch to lock your vehicle: It is not possible to open the doors or the rear lid from the outside (for safety reasons, e.g. when stopped at traffic lights). The LED in the central locking switch lights up when all the doors are closed and locked. You can open the doors individually from the inside by pulling the inside door handle. The fuel tank flap remains unlocked. In the event of an accident in which the air- bags inflate, doors locked from the inside will be automatically unlocked to facilitate access and assistance.

WARNING The central locking switch also works with the ignition switched off, except when the Safe security system is activated. The central locking switch does not oper- ate if the vehicle is locked from the outside and the security system is switched on. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency. Do not leave anyone, especially children, in the vehicle.

Note Your vehicle will lock automatically when it reaches a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph) (Auto Lock)  page 72. You can unlock the vehicle again using the button on the cen- tral locking switch.

Safe security system Depending on its equipment, the vehicle may be fitted with the Safe security system. When the vehicle is locked, the Safe security system puts the door handles out of operation and hinders possible attempts by people to ac- cess the vehicle. The doors cannot be opened from inside   .

Disabling the Safe security system

The Safe security system may be disabled in any of the following ways: Press the vehicle key button again within 2 seconds. Touch the sensor surface on the outside of the door handle again within 2 seconds  page 70. Switch the ignition on. OR: deactivate interior monitoring and the anti-tow system  page 76.

Opening and closing

75

Central locking

Depending on the equipment, before locking the vehicle temporarily deactivate interior mon- itoring and the anti-tow system in the Vehicle settings menu of the infotainment system  page 76. The instrument cluster may display an indica- tion that the Safe security system is switched on. When the Safe security system is deactivated, the following needs to be taken into account: The vehicle can be opened and unlocked from the inside using an inside door handle. The anti-theft alarm is active  page 76. The interior monitoring system and the anti- tow system are disabled  page 76.

Safe status

The flashing frequency of the diode in the door sill immediately confirms the process. Initially, the diode flashes in a fast sequence for a brief period, then it stops for approximately 30 sec- onds and, lastly continues flashing slowly.

WARNING Using the Safe security system negligently or without paying due attention can cause serious injuries. Never leave anyone inside the vehicle when you lock it with the key. When the Safe security system is active the doors cannot be opened from the inside!

Troubleshooting

The control lamp remains on

The red LED on the drivers door flashes at short intervals and then stays on. There is a fault in the locking system. Contact a specialised workshop. SEAT rec- ommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

The turn signals do not flash

If the turn signals do not flash as a confirmation when the vehicle is locked: At least one door or the rear lid are not closed or The engine bonnet is not closed.

The vehicle locks automatically

If one of the following conditions is met, the vehicle re-locks automatically after approx. 45 seconds. The vehicle has been unlocked, but has not been opened. The ignition has not been switched on. The rear lid has not been opened. The vehicle has been unlocked with the lock- ing cylinder. The vehicle has been locked with the button located in the vehicle interior.

What happens when locking the vehicle with a second key

They key inside the vehicle is blocked and can- not be used to start the engine as soon as the vehicle is locked from the outside with a second key. To activate the key inside the vehicle to al- low it to switch on the engine, press its button.

Locking the vehicle after an airbag is trig- gered

When an airbag is triggered as a result of an accident, the vehicle is fully unlocked. Depend- ing on the extent of the damage, the vehicle may be relocked after the accident as descri- bed below: Switch the ignition off. Open the driver's door and close it again. Lock the vehicle.

Note If the 12-volt vehicle battery has little or no charge, or the vehicle key battery is almost or entirely out of charge, you will probably not be able to lock or unlock the vehicle with the Keyless Access system. The vehi- cle can be unlocked and locked manually  page 78.

76

Opening and closing

Note If there is no vehicle key in the vehicle or the system does not detect it, a warning will be displayed on the instrument cluster. This could happen if any other radio frequency signal interferes with the key signal or if the key is covered by another object, e.g. a metal case.

Anti-theft alarm Description

Depending on the equipment, the vehicle may be fitted with an anti-theft alarm. The theft alarm monitors the doors, bonnet and rear lid. The anti-theft alarm system activates automat- ically when the vehicle is locked. If the vehicle is not opened electronically with a valid key, the alarm triggers and emits audio and light signals for a maximum of approx. 5 minutes.

When is the anti-theft alarm triggered? If a mechanically unlocked door is opened with the vehicle key, you have 15 seconds to switch on the ignition before the alarm is trig- gered (depending on markets, the 15 seconds waiting time disappears and the alarm is trig- gered immediately when the door is opened).

If the bonnet is opened. If the rear lid is opened. If an invalid vehicle key is used. If there are movements inside the vehicle (in vehicles with interior monitoring  page 76). If the vehicle is lifted or towed (for vehicles with an anti-tow system  page 76. If the vehicle is transported on a ferry or by rail (in vehicles with an anti-tow system or inte- rior monitoring  page 76). If the 12-volt battery is disconnected. If the window is broken. When a trailer connected to the theft alarm system is unhitched.

Switching off the alarm Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key un- locking button . Grip the door handle. Switch the ignition on.

Note After 28 days, the indicator light will be switched off to prevent the battery from ex- hausting if the vehicle has been left parked for a long period of time. The alarm system remains activated.

If, after the audible warning goes off, an- other monitored area is accessed (e.g. the rear lid is opened after a door has been opened), the alarm is triggered again. The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the vehicle is locked from within using the central locking button . If the driver door is unlocked mechanically with the key, only the driver door is unlocked, the rest of the doors remain locked. Only when the ignition has been turned on will the other doors be available - but not unlocked - and the central locking button will be activa- ted. Vehicle monitoring remains active even if the battery is disconnected or not working for any reason.

Interior monitoring and anti-tow sys- tem

If movement is detected in the vehicle interior while the vehicle is locked, the interior monitor- ing triggers the alarm. If it detects that the vehicle is being lifted, the anti-tow system triggers the alarm.

Switching on the interior monitoring and the anti-tow systems Lock the vehicle. When the anti-theft alarm is activated, the interior monitoring and the anti- tow system are as well.

Opening and closing

77

Doors

Depending on the equipment, the use of a par- tition net can affect the operation of the interior monitoring system.

Temporarily switching off the interior moni- toring and anti-tow systems Open the vehicle with the key, either me- chanically or by pressing the button on the remote control. The time period from when the door is opened until the ignition is turned on should not exceed 15 seconds, otherwise the alarm will be triggered. Press the button on the remote control twice. The interior monitoring and the anti-tow systems will be deactivated. The alarm system remains activated. Disconnect through the infotainment system Press the function button > Settings > Opening and closing > Central lock- ing > Interior monitoring. The interior monitoring and anti-tow system re- main deactivated until the next time the vehicle is locked.

To avoid false alarms, deactivate interior moni- toring and the anti-tow system in the following situations:

When people or animals remain inside the ve- hicle. When the vehicle is to be loaded onto an- other means of transport, transported or towed. When the vehicle is to be left in a car wash or is to be parked in a double-decker garage.

Risk of false interior monitoring alarms

The interior monitoring system will only operate correctly if the vehicle is completely locked. Please bear in mind all legal provisions. The following situations may cause a false alarm: If one or more windows are partially or com- pletely open. If the sliding/tilting roof is partially or fully open. If light objects are left inside the vehicle, e.g. loose paper or items hanging from the interior mirror. If the vibrate function of a mobile left inside the vehicle is activated.

Note It is not possible to permanently deactivate the interior monitoring and anti-tow systems. If any doors or the rear lid are open when the anti-theft alarm is activated, only the alarm will be activated. The interior monitor- ing and anti-tow systems will only activate once all of the doors and the rear lid are closed.

When the interior monitoring and anti-tow systems are switched off, the Safe security system is also switched off  page 74.

Doors Introduction

The doors and rear lid can be locked manually and partially opened, for example if the key or the central locking is damaged.

WARNING Opening and closing doors carelessly can cause serious injury. If the vehicle is locked from outside, the doors and windows cannot be opened from the inside. Never leave children or disabled people alone in the car. They could be trapped in the car in an emergency and will not be able to get themselves to safety. Depending on the time of the year, temper- atures inside a locked and closed vehicle can be extremely high or extremely low resulting in serious injuries and illness or even death, particularly for young children.

78

Opening and closing

WARNING Getting in the way of the doors and the rear lid is dangerous and can lead to serious in- jury. Open and close the doors and the rear lid only when there is nobody in the way.

NOTICE When opening and closing in an emergency, carefully disassemble components and then reassemble them carefully to avoid damage to the vehicle.

Emergency unlocking or locking of the drivers door

Fig. 55  Driver door lever: hidden lock cylinder.

Fig. 56  Driver's door handle: pry the cover open.

If the central locking system should fail to op- erate, the driver door can still be locked and unlocked by turning the key in the lock. As a general rule, when the driver door is locked manually all other doors are locked. When it is unlocked manually, only the driver door opens. Please observe the instructions relating to the anti-theft alarm system  page 76.

Remove the emergency key from the vehicle key  page 68. Insert the emergency key into the lower open- ing in the cover on the driver door handle then lift the bottom cover upwards  Fig. 56. Insert the emergency key into the lock cylin- der to unlock or lock the vehicle.

Special characteristics The anti-theft alarm will remain active when vehicles are unlocked. However, the alarm will not be triggered  page 76. After the driver door is opened, you have 15 seconds to switch on the ignition. Once this time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered. Switch the ignition on. The electronic immo- bilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and deac- tivates the anti-theft alarm system.

Note The anti-theft alarm is not activated when the vehicle is locked manually using the key shaft  page 72.

Emergency lock of doors without lock cylinders

Fig. 57  Locking the door manually.

Opening and closing

79

Re r lid

If the central locking system should fail to work at any time, doors with no lock cylinder will have to be locked separately. The emergency lock is located on the front of the front passenger's door and the rear doors. It can only be seen if the door is open.

Insert the key in the slot  Fig. 57 (arrow) and turn it to the right as far as it will go (if the door is on the right side) or to the left (if the door is on the left side).

Once the door has been closed it can no longer be opened from the outside. Pull the interior door handle once to unlock and open the door.

Child lock

Fig. 58  Left door child lock.

The childproof lock prevents the rear doors from being opened from the inside. This system prevents minors from opening a door acciden- tally while the vehicle is running. This function is independent of the vehicle elec- tronic opening and locking systems. It only af- fects rear doors. It can only be activated and deactivated manually, as described below.

Activating the childproof lock Unlock the vehicle and open the door in which you wish to activate the childproof lock. With the door open, turn the slot with the vehi- cle key clockwise for the left doors  Fig. 58 and anticlockwise for the right doors. Once the childproof lock is activated, the door can only be opened from the outside.

Deactivating the childproof lock Unlock the vehicle and open the door whose childproof lock you want to deactivate. With the door open, turn the slot with the vehicle key anticlockwise for the left doors  Fig. 58 and clockwise for the right doors.

Rear lid Introduction

The rear lid unlocks and locks together with the doors.

On vehicles with the Keyless Access start/lock- ing system, the rear lid automatically unlocks when it is opened  page 70.

WARNING Careless and unsuitable locking, opening and closing of the rear lid can cause acci- dents and serious injury. Do not close the rear lid by pushing it down with your hand on the rear window. The glass could smash. Risk of injury! Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing it. If not, it may open unexpectedly while driv- ing. Closing the rear lid without observing and ensuring it is clear could cause serious injury to you and to third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of the rear lid. Never drive with the rear lid open or half- closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poison- ing! Never open the rear lid if there is cargo, e.g. bicycles, attached to it. The rear lid may close by itself due to the additional weight. If necessary, remove the cargo first or hold the rear lid. Never leave the vehicle unattended or al- low children to play inside or next to it, espe- cially if the rear lid is open. Children could enter the luggage compartment, close the rear lid and become trapped. A locked vehi- cle can reach extremely high and low tem-

80

Opening and closing

peratures, depending on the time of year, thus causing serious injuries, illness or even death.

NOTICE Before opening or closing the rear lid, make sure that there is enough space to open or close it, e.g. when pulling a trailer or in a ga- rage. Never use the rear wiper or rear spoiler to secure cargo or as a handhold. This could cause damage that could lead to the break- age of the rear wiper or spoiler.

Note Before closing the rear lid, make sure that the key has not been left inside the luggage compartment.

Opening and closing the rear lid

Fig. 59  Rear lid: opening from the outside.

The rear lid opening system operates electri- cally. To lock or unlock the rear lid, press the or buttons of the vehicle key.

Opening and closing Open: place slight pressure on the handle. The rear lid opens automatically.  Fig. 59. Close: grip the rear lid by one of the handles on the interior trim and move it downwards to close. OR: press the button on the rear lid  Fig. 60.

If the doors are locked, the rear lid is also locked. A warning appears on the instrument panel display if the rear lid is open or not properly closed.

The rear lid locks automatically while driving. When the outside temperature is around freez- ing point, the opening mechanism cannot al- ways automatically raise the partially opened rear lid. Lift the rear lid by hand.

Note If the rear lid is not opened within a few mi- nutes of being unlocked, it re-locks automati- cally.

Rear lid with electric opening and closing

Fig. 60  Rear lid: button to close rear lid.

Opening and closing

81

Re r lid

Fig. 61  Centre console: button to open and close rear lid.

Opening the rear lid Unlock the vehicle and briefly press the han- dle of the rear lid. On vehicles with Keyless Ac- cess you can directly press the handle of the rear lid. The rear lid is unlocked if an authorised key is recognised in the proximity of the vehicle. OR: press the button on the centre con- sole  Fig. 61 for at least one second. The button also works when the ignition is switched off. OR: press and hold the button of the ve- hicle key for approx. 1 second. If the vehicle is locked, only the rear lid is unlocked (the doors remain locked). OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access and sen- sor-controlled opening you can open the rear lid by moving one foot in the area of the sensors

located below the rear bumper (Easy Open  page 82). The rear lid will open automati- cally.

Closing the rear lid Briefly press the button on the rear lid  Fig. 60,   in Introduction on page 79. EITHER: press the button located on the centre console until the rear lid is closed  Fig. 61. OR: on vehicles with Keyless Access, press and hold the vehicle key button until the rear lid is closed or move one foot in the area of the sensors located below the rear bumper (Easy Open  page 82). The vehicle key must be in the Keyless Access system detection zone at the rear outside the vehicle. OR: manually move the rear lid in the direc- tion of closing until it closes automatically. The rear lid goes down automatically to the final position and also closes automatically   in Introduction on page 79.

Interrupting opening or closing

After beginning to open or close the rear lid, the action can be halted by pressing one of the buttons . If you press one of the buttons again, the rear lid will move again in the original direction.

If the rear lid meets with resistance or an ob- stacle during the automatic opening or closing, opening or closing will be interrupted immedi- ately. For the closing process, the rear lid opens again slightly. Check why it has not been possible to open or close the rear lid. Try to open or close the rear lid again. If necessary, the rear lid can be opened or closed by hand using reasonable force.

Particular features if towing a trailer

If the factory-fitted towing bracket is electri- cally connected to a trailer  page 265, the electric rear lid can only be opened or closed with the buttons on the rear lid itself or by using the Easy Open function.

Audible warnings

Throughout the process of opening or closing the rear lid, acoustic warnings can be heard. Exception: when the rear lid is opened manually using the handle or the Easy Open function with the movement of the foot or closed using the button on the rear lid itself  Fig. 60.

Modifying and memorising the opening an- gle

If the space behind or above the vehicle is less than the travel area of the rear lid, you can change the opening angle of the rear lid.

82

Opening and closing

To memorise a new opening angle, the rear lid must be open at least halfway. Interrupt the opening process in the desired position. Press the  Fig. 60 button on the rear lid for at least 3 seconds. The opening angle is memorised. Memorisation is indicated by blinking of the hazard warning lights and an audible warning.

Resetting and memorising the opening an- gle

For the rear lid to reopen completely, the open- ing angle must be reset and memorised again. Release the rear lid and open it to the memo- rised height. Lift the rear lid by hand as far as it goes. To do this, some force will have to be used. Press the  Fig. 60 button on the rear lid for at least 3 seconds. This resets and memorises the factory-set opening angle. Memorisation is indicated by blinking of the hazard warning lights and an audible warning.

Automatic protection against overheating

If the system is operated repeatedly in a short space of time, it automatically switches off to prevent overheating.

Once the system is cool again, the function can be reused. Until then, the rear lid can only be opened and closed by hand using reasonable force. If with the rear lid open the vehicle battery is disconnected  page 310 or the correspond- ing fuse burns out  page 294, the system will have to be reset. This requires closing the rear lid completely once.

Emergency unlocking

 page 83.

WARNING If a lot of snow builds up on the rear lid or it is heavily loaded, the rear lid may not open or, after opening, it may lower by itself due to the extra weight and cause serious injury. Do not open the rear lid when there is a lot of snow on it or when carrying a load (e.g. on a rack). Before opening the rear lid, remove the snow or the load.

Rear lid with sensor-controlled opening and closing (Easy Open)

Fig. 62  Rear lid with sensor-controlled opening (Easy Open).

If there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity of the rear lid, it is possible to unlock and open or close it moving one foot in the area of the sensors located under the rear bumper. Switch the ignition off. Stand in front of the rear bumper, in the mid- dle. With a brisk movement, bring your foot and lower leg as close as you can to the bumper. The lower part of the leg needs to be close to the upper sensor area and your foot to the lower sensor area  Fig. 62 1 . Quickly remove your foot and lower leg from the sensor areas  Fig. 62 2 . The rear lid will open automatically.

Opening and closing

83

Re r lid

If the rear lid fails to open, repeat the proce- dure after a few seconds. The detection zone of the lower sensor may not have been reached. The rear lid can be closed with another foot movement similar to the opening one (provided a valid vehicle key is in the proximity of the rear lid). When closed, the rear lid automatically locks if the vehicle has been locked beforehand and there is no valid key inside. While the rear lid is in motion (either opening or closing), it can be stopped with another foot movement similar to the opening one (provided a valid vehicle key is in the proximity of the rear lid). The Easy Open feature is not available or only has limited availability in the following situations (examples): If the rear bumper is very dirty. If the rear bumper is wet with salt water, e.g. after having driven on gritted roads. If the vehicle has been equipped at a later time with a tow bracket. In the event of heavy rain, the Easy Open fea- ture may take a little longer to open the boot or may deactivate automatically, to avoid the boot opening by accident, e.g. because of the running water. The Easy Open function can be connected and disconnected permanently in the infotainment system using the button > Settings > Open- ing and closing.

WARNING If there is a valid key in the proximity of the rear lid, in some cases the Easy Open func- tion may be accidentally activated and the rear lid will open, for example, when sweep- ing under the rear bumper, when directing a water jet or high pressure steam to the area or when carrying out maintenance work or repairs in that area. If accidentally opened, the rear lid could injure somebody situated in its area of operation or cause material dam- age. Therefore, always make sure that there is no unsupervised valid key in the area near the rear lid. Before carrying out any maintenance or re- pair work on the vehicle, always disable the Easy Open feature via the infotainment sys- tem. Before washing the vehicle, always disable the Easy Open function via the infotainment system. Before attaching a bike rack or hitching a trailer  page 265, always disable the Easy Open function via the infotainment system.

Emergency unlocking of the rear lid

Fig. 63  Luggage compartment: access to manual release.

Fig. 64  Luggage compartment: manual release.

The rear lid can be unlocked from inside in the event of an emergency (e.g. if the 12 volt bat- tery is flat).

84

Opening and closing

1

2

3

4

5

There is a groove in the luggage compartment allowing access to the emergency opening mechanism.

Unlocking the rear lid from inside the lug- gage compartment Remove the cover using the key blade as a lever  Fig. 63. Insert the key blade into the slot and move the key in the direction of the arrow until the lock unlocks  Fig. 64.

Window controls Opening and closing the windows

Fig. 65  Detail of the driver door: controls for the windows.

Opening the window: press button Closing the window: pull button Buttons on the driver door

Window on the front left door Window on the front right door Window on the rear left door Window on the rear right door Safety switch for deactivating the electric window buttons in the rear doors.

The front and rear electric windows can be op- erated by using the controls on the driver door. The other doors each have a switch for their own window. Always close the windows fully if you park the vehicle or leave it unattended   . You can use the electric windows for approx. 10 minutes after switching off the ignition if neither the driver door nor the front passenger door have been opened and the ignition key has not been removed (depending on the equipment).

Safety switch

The safety control  Fig. 65 5 on the driver door can be used to disable the electric win- dow buttons on the rear doors. Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear doors are activated. Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors are deactivated.

The safety control symbol lights up in yellow if the buttons on the rear doors are switched off.

Convenience open/close function

The electric windows can be opened or closed from outside using the vehicle key: Convenience opening: Press and hold the button on the remote control key until all the windows and the sun- roof have reached the desired position. OR: First unlock the vehicle using the button on the remote control key and then keep the key in the driver door lock until all the windows and the sunroof have reached the required po- sition. Convenience closing: Press and hold button on the remote con- trol key until all the windows and the sunroof are closed   . OR: Keep the key in the driver door in the "lock" position until all the windows and the sunroof are closed. OR: using the Keyless Access system (only locking): Press and hold the locking sensor sur- face  Fig. 67 (arrow) on the door handle for several seconds to close the windows and the sunroof. If you release the sensor surface, the closing movement stops. During convenience closing, first the windows and then the sliding sunroof will be closed.

Opening and closing

85

Wi dow controls

In the infotainment system different settings can be adjusted using the function button > Settings > Opening and closing > Window operation > Convenience opening.

One-touch opening and closing

The one-touch automatic opening and closing is used to open or close the windows com- pletely. It will not be necessary to hold the but- ton of the corresponding electric window. For the automatic raising function: pull the but- ton for the corresponding window upwards until it reaches the second position. For the automatic lowering function: push the button for the corresponding window down- wards until it reaches the second position. Stop automatic movement: push or pull on the button of the corresponding window.

Resetting one-touch opening and closing

If the 12-volt battery is disconnected or dis- charged when the windows are not completely closed, the electric window automatic raising and lowering function deactivates and has to be reset: Switch the ignition on. Close all windows and doors. Pull the corresponding window button up- wards and hold it in this position for a few sec- onds.

Release the button, pull it up again and hold it in this position. This resets the automatic raising and lowering function. The function can be reset for a single window or for several windows at the same time.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings   in Intro- duction on page 77. Incorrect use of the electric windows can result in injury. Never close the rear lid without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise could cause serious injury to you and third parties. Make sure that no one is in the path of a win- dow. If the ignition is switched on, the electric equipment could be activated with risk of in- jury, for example, in the electric windows. The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could become an obstacle for assistance in an emergency situation. Therefore always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle. The electric windows will work until the ig- nition has been switched off and one of the front doors has been opened. If necessary, use the safety switch to disa- ble the rear electric windows. Make sure that they have been disabled.

For safety reasons, you should only use the remote control open and close functions within about 2 metres of the vehicle. To avoid injuries, always keep an eye on the windows when pressing the button to close them. The windows stop moving as soon as the button is released.

Note If the window is not able to close because it is stiff or because of an obstruction, the window will automatically open again  page 85. If this happens, check why the window could not be closed before attempt- ing to close it again.

Window anti-trap function The roll-back function reduces the risk of injury when the electric windows close. If a window encounters resistance or an obsta- cle when closing, it will reopen immediately   . Check why the window does not close. Try closing the window again. If the closing process is interrupted again, the anti-trap function stops working for a few sec- onds. If the window still cannot be closed, it will stop in the corresponding position. Pulling the button again within a few seconds closes the window without the anti-trap function   .

86

Opening and closing

Closing the windows without the anti-trap function Try to close the window again by pulling the button without releasing it, within a few sec- onds. The anti-trap function will be deacti- vated! If the closing process takes longer than a few seconds, the anti-trap function is activated again. The window will stop again if it encoun- ters resistance or an obstacle, and will reopen automatically. If the window will still not close, visit a special- ised workshop.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings   in Open- ing and closing the windows on page 85. The roll-back function does not prevent fingers or other parts of the body getting pinched against the window frame. Risk of accident.

Note The anti-trap function also works when the windows are closed with the comfort func- tion using the vehicle key.

Sunroof Introduction

The sunroof consists of two glass parts. The rear part is fixed and cannot be opened. It also has a sun blind.

The sunroof only works when the ignition is switched on. Once the ignition has been switched off, you can still open or close the sunroof for a few minutes provided the driver door and the front passenger door are not opened.

WARNING If the sunroof is used negligently or without paying due attention, it can cause serious injury. Open or close the sunroof and the sun blind only when no one is in their path of movement. Never leave any key inside the vehicle when exiting. Never leave a child or any other person who may need help in the vehicle, especially if they have access to the vehicle key. If using they key unattended, they could lock the ve- hicle, start the engine, switch on the ignition and activate the sunroof.

After switching off, it is still possible to open or close the sunroof during a short space of time provided that neither the driver nor passenger door is opened.

NOTICE To prevent damage, during winter tempera- tures remove any ice or snow that might be on the car roof before opening the sunroof or adjusting the tilt position. Before leaving the vehicle or in case of rainfall, always close the sunroof. With the sunroof open or in a tilted position, water can enter the interior and can cause considera- ble damage to the electrical system. As a re- sult, other damage can occur in the vehicle.

Note Leaves and other loose objects that accu- mulate on the sunroof rails should be regu- larly cleaned away either by hand or with a vacuum. If the sunroof does not work correctly, the anti-trap function will not work either. Con- tact a specialised workshop.

Opening and closing

87

Sunroof

Operating the sunroof

Fig. 66  On the interior roof lining: sunroof button.

The sun blind automatically opens along with the sunroof if completely closed or if in front of the sunroof. The sun blind remains in the previ- ous position and does not automatically close with the sunroof. The sun blind can only be closed completely once the sunroof has been closed. The  Fig. 66 button has two levels. The first level switches the sunroof to the tilted posi- tion, opening or closing it fully or partially. On the second level, the sunroof automatically moves to the corresponding final position after briefly pressing the button. Activating the but- ton again stops the automatic function.

Adjusting the tilt position of the sunroof Press the rear part of the button B to the first level. Automatic function: briefly press the rear part of button B to the second level.

Closing the sunroof from a tilted position Press the front part of the button A to the first level. Automatic function: briefly press the front part of the button A to the second level.

Stopping the automatic operation by adjust- ing the tilted position of the sunroof or by closing the sunroof Press button A or B again.

Opening the sunroof Press button C backwards to the first level. Automatic function to the convenience posi- tion: briefly press button C backwards to the second level.

Closing the sunroof Press button D forwards to the first level. Automatic function: briefly press button D forwards to the second level.

Stopping the automatic operation during the opening or closing Press button C or D again.

Convenience function to open or close the sunroof

Fig. 67  Door handle: sensor surface.

The sunroof can be opened and closed with the convenience function, just like the windows.

Using the door lock Hold the key in the door lock of the driver door in either the unlocking or locking position to open or close the roof in the tilted position. Release the key to interrupt this function.

Using the remote control Keep the locking or unlocking button pressed to open or close the roof. If you release the button is the opening or closing will stop.

88

Opening and closing

Using the Keyless Access system (only lock- ing)

Press and hold the locking sensor surface  Fig. 67 (arrow) on the door handle to close the sunroof. If you release the sensor surface, the closing movement stops.

Anti-trap function of the panoramic sunroof

The anti-trap function can reduce the risk of injury when closing the sunroof   . If the sunroof encounters resistance or an obstacle when closing, it reopens immediately. Check why the sunroof did not close. Try to close the sunroof again. If the sunroof cannot be closed due to an obstacle or some resistance, it stops at the corresponding position and then reopens. For automatic closing, a new closing attempt might take place. If the sunroof is still unable to close, close it without the anti-trap function.

Closing the sunroof without the anti-trap function Within approximately 5 seconds of having activated the roll-back function, press the  Fig. 66 button to the second level in the direction of arrow D until the sunroof closes completely.

The sunroof closes without the anti-trap function intervening! If the sunroof will still not close, visit a special- ised workshop.

WARNING Closing the sunroof without the anti-trap function can cause serious injuries. Always be careful when closing the sun- roof. No person should ever remain in the way of the sunroof, especially when closing without the anti-trap function. The anti-trap function does not prevent fin- gers or other parts of the body from becom- ing trapped against the roof frame and inju- ries occurring.

Glass roof sun blind

Fig. 68  On the interior roof lining: function button to operate the sun blind.

The electrical sun blind works when the ignition is switched on. When the sunroof is in its most tilted position, the sun blind automatically goes into a ventila- tion position. The sun blind remains in this posi- tion also with the sunroof closed. Once the ignition has been switched off, you can still open or close the sun blind for a few minutes provided the driver door and the front passenger door are not opened.

Opening and closing the sunshade blind Manual operation: press the button 1 (open) or 2 (close) up to the first level until the curtain reaches the desired position.

Opening and closing

89

Sunroof

Automatic operation: briefly press the button 1 (open) or 2 (close) up to the second level.

Pressing the button again stops the automatic function.

Anti-trap function of the sunshade blind

The anti-trap function can reduce the risk of injury when closing the sunshade blind   . If the blind encounters resistance or an obstacle when closing, it will reopen immediately. Check why the blind did not close. Try to close the blind again. If the blind still cannot be closed due to an obstacle or resistance, it will reopen immedi- ately. Once open, it can be closed for a short space of time without the anti-trap function. If it is still not possible to close the blind, close it without the anti-trap function.

Closing the sunshade blind without the anti- trap function Try to close the blind again. If it still cannot be closed, within 5 seconds press the button  Fig. 68 2 until the blind closes fully. The blind closes without the in- tervention of the anti-trap function! If it is still not possible to close the blind, visit a specialised workshop.

WARNING Closing the sun blind without the anti-trap function can cause serious injury. Always close the blind with care. Do not allow anyone to remain in the blind travel area, particularly when closing with- out the anti-trap function. The anti-trap function does not prevent fin- gers or other parts of the body from becom- ing trapped against the roof frame and inju- ries occurring.

Note When the sunroof is open, the electric sun blind can only be closed to the front edge of the sunroof.

90

Steering wheel

Steering wheel Multifunction steering wheel

Functions

Fig. 69  Controls on the steering wheel.

Fig. 70  Controls on the steering wheel.

The steering wheel includes multifunction mod- ules from where it is possible to control the audio, telephone, navigation, voice control and assist functions without the driver needing to be distracted from the road.

Buttons available depending on the version

1 Turn: Turn volume up/down. Press: Mute volume.

2

Turn: Search in the instrument panel menu. In Navigation mode, turn to zoom in/out of the map in the instrument clus- ter. Press: Select the highlighted option in the instrument cluster

Radio: Search for the previous/next sta- tion. Media: Short press: previous/next track; long press: fast forward/rewind.

Activate phone menu (answer call, end call).

Switch between media and radio sour- ces.

  Change the instrument panel menu (previous/next).

Enable/disable voice control.

Change instrument cluster views  page 16

Activate or deactivate steering wheel heating  page 119

Switching ACC on or off  page 161 / Cruise control  page 158 / Speed limiter  page 160 / Travel Assist  page 174.

Activate ACC / Travel Assist / Speed lim- iter

Reset programmed speed.

   : Increase programmed speed. : Decrease programmed speed.

Select Travel Assist / ACC.

Open the driver assistants menu in the instrument cluster.

Modify the programmed ACC distance.

Steering wheel

91

Multifunction steering wheel

Steering wheel position adjustment

Fig. 71  Lever in the lower left side of the steering column.

Adjust the steering wheel before your trip and only when the vehicle is stationary. Pull lever  Fig. 71 1 down, move the steer- ing wheel to the desired position and lift the lever back up until it locks.

WARNING Incorrect use of the steering wheel adjust- ment function and an incorrect adjustment of the steering wheel can result in severe or fatal injury. After adjusting the steering column, push lever  Fig. 71 1 firmly upwards so that the steering wheel does not accidentally change position while driving.

Never adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion. If you need to adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion, stop safely and make the proper adjustment. The adjusted steering wheel should be fac- ing your chest and not your face so as not to hinder the driver's front airbag protection in the event of an accident. When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions to reduce injuries when the driver's front air- bag deploys. Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if the driver's airbag deploys, you may sustain injuries to your arms, hands and head.

92

Seats and head restraints

1

2

3

4

Seats and head re- straints Front seats

Introduction

WARNING Always read and observe the informa- tion and safety advice given in chapter  page 37, Correct sitting position of vehi- cle occupants.

WARNING Incorrect seat adjustment may lead to acci- dents and severe injuries. Only adjust the seats when the vehicle is stationary, as the seats could move unex- pectedly while the vehicle is in motion and you could lose control of the vehicle. Further- more, an incorrect position is adopted when adjusting the seat. Adjust the height, position and inclination of the front seats only when their movement area is empty. Make sure there are no objects in that area. Make sure that the movement and locking areas of the seats are clean.

WARNING Incorrectly using upholstery and seat cov- ers might cause an accidental activation of the electrical seat adjustment system and make it move unexpectedly while driving. This might cause loss of control of the vehi- cle and thus accidents or injuries. Moreover, the electrical components of the front seats might be damaged. Never attach or place seat upholstery or covers on the electric controls. Never use upholstery or seat covers that have not been explicitly authorised for the seats of the vehicle.

NOTICE Objects with sharp edges can damage the seats. Do not rub the seats with sharp objects. Sharp objects, such as zips and rivets on clothing or belts, can damage surfaces. Open Velcro fasteners can also cause dam- age.

Manual adjustment of the front seats

Fig. 72  Front seats: manual seat adjustment.

Pull the lever to move the seat forwards or backwards. The seat must engage when the lever is released! Move the lever up or down to adjust the seat height; several times if necessary. Without placing force on the seat backrest, turn the wheel to adjust the backrest. To adjust the lumbar support, move the lever until the required position is achieved.

Seats and head restraints

93

Rear seats

1) Valid for vehicles fitted with the Infotainment Connect System.

A

B

C

Electric adjustment of the front seats

Fig. 73  Driver's seat: electric seat adjustment.

Adjust the lumbar support: press the button according to the desired position. Seat forwards/backwards: press the button forwards/backwards. Seat up/down: Press the rear part of the button up/down. To adjust the angle of the seat cushion, press the front of the button up/down. Backrest further upright/further reclined: press the button forwards/backwards.

The position will be saved automatically in the SEAT Connect Active user when the ignition is switched off1).

WARNING If the electric front seats are used negli- gently or without paying due attention, it can cause serious injury. The front seats can also be electrically ad- justed when the ignition is switched off. Never leave a child or any other person who may need help in the vehicle. In the event of an emergency, electrical adjustment can be stopped by pressing any control.

NOTICE To avoid damaging the electrical compo- nents of the seats, please refrain from kneel- ing on the seat or applying sharp pressure at a single point to the seat cushion and back- rest.

Note It may not be possible to electrically adjust the seat if the vehicle battery is very low. If the engine is started while the seats are being electrically adjusted, the adjustment will stop.

Note When changing user a warning will be shown on the infotainment system's screen during the time that the seat is moving to the saved position. This movement can be stopped by pressing the stop button on the screen.

Rear seats Folding down and raising the rear seat backrest

Fig. 74  Rear seat: folding down the backrest.

The rear seat backrest is split and each part be lowered separately to extend the luggage compartment.

94

Seats and head restraints

Folding the backrest forwards

Fully lower the rear headrests  page 95. Press the unlock button  Fig. 74 1 for- wards and at the same time fold the backrest down. The rear seat backrest is not engaged when the red marking of the button 2 is visible.

Converting the table to a seat Raise and lock in the back rest. The red mark- ing on button 2 should no longer be visible when the backrest is properly secured.

WARNING Serious injuries can be caused if the rear seat backrest is lowered or lifted without due care and attention. Never lower or lift the rear seat backrest while driving. Do no trap or damage the seat belt when raising the rear seat backrest. When lowering or lifting the rear seat back- rest, keep your hands, fingers, feet and other body parts out of its path. For the rear seat belts to offer the nec- essary protection all the parts of the rear backrest must be properly engaged. This is particularly important in the case of the centre rear seat. If someone is seated in a seat whose backrest is not properly engaged they will fly forward, along with the backrest, during an accident or a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre.

A red mark on button 2 warns that the rear backrest is not engaged. Always check that the red marking is not visible when the back- rest is in the upright position. When the rear seat backrest is lowered or is not properly engaged nobody else can travel in the corresponding seats (not even a child).

NOTICE Serious damage can be caused to the vehi- cle and other objects if the rear seat back- rest is lowered or lifted without due care and attention. Before lowering the rear seat backrest, al- ways adjust the front seats so that neither the head restraints nor the cushions of the rear backrest can hit them.

Headrest Introduction

The possibilities for the adjustment and disas- sembly of the headrests are described below. Always make sure that the seats are correctly adjusted  page 37. All seats are equipped with a head restraint. The central rear headrest is only intended for the central seat of the rear bench. Therefore, do not install it on any other seat.

Correct adjustment of head restraint

Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head and under no circumstances below eye level. Keep the back of your head always as close to the head restraint as possible.

Adjusting the head restraint for short people

Lower the head restraint completely, even if your head is below its upper edge. In the low- est position, there may be a small distance be- tween the head restraint and the backrest.

Adjusting the head restraint for tall people

Push the head restraint up as far as it will go.

WARNING If travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted, the risk of severe or fatal injuries in the event of accidents and sudden braking or manoeuvres increases. Always travel with the head restraint cor- rectly installed and adjusted. To decrease the risk of cervical injuries in the event of an accident, adjust the head restraint correctly based on your height, al- ways making sure that its upper edge is at the same height as the top of the head, but never below eye level. Keep the back of your head always as close to the head restraint as possible and centred.

Seats and head restraints

95

Headrest

Never adjust the head restraint while the vehicle is in motion. Under no circumstances should the rear passengers travel while the head restraints are in the non-use position.

NOTICE When assembling and disassembling the head restraints, do not let them meet the top lining of the vehicle, the back rest of the front seat or other parts of the vehicles. If not, this could damage the vehicle.

Adjusting the headrests

Fig. 75  Front seat: adjusting the head restraint.

Fig. 76  Rear headrest: adjusting the headrest.

Adjusting the height of the head restraints Grab the sides of the head restraints with both hands and push upwards to the desired position. To lower it, repeat the same action, pressing the button on the side 1  Fig. 75 ,  Fig. 76. The headrest must lock correctly in one posi- tion.

Removing and fitting the headrests

Fig. 77  Front head restraint: removal.

Fig. 78  Rear head restraint: removal.

96

Seats and head restraints

Removing the front head restraints Lower the head restraint if necessary. To unlock it, look for the rabbet on the bottom of the backrest and press in the direction of the arrow  Fig. 77 1 . Remove the head restraint in the direction of the arrow 2 .

Fitting the front head restraints Place the head restraint in the correct posi- tion on the guides of the corresponding back- rest and insert it. Press the head restraint downwards until the bars lock. Adjust the head restraint according to the in- structions on the correct position of the seat.

Removing the rear head restraints

To remove the head restraint, the correspond- ing backrest must be partially folded forward. Unlock the backrest  page 93. Move the head restraint upwards until it ar- rives to the top. Press button  Fig. 78 1 , while simultane- ously pressing on the safety hole 2 with a flat screwdriver a maximum of 5 mm wide, and re- move the headrest. Move the backrest until it engages properly   in Folding down and raising the rear seat backrest on page 94.

Fitting the rear head restraints

To mount the external head restraints, the cor- responding backrest must be partially folded forward. Unlock the backrest  page 93. Insert the head restraint bars into the guides until they perceptibly engage. It should not be possible to remove the head restraint from the backrest. Move the backrest until it engages properly   in Folding down and raising the rear seat backrest on page 94.

WARNING Remove the rear headrests only when it is necessary to fit a child seat. After removing a child seat, refit the headrest immediately.

Seat functions Memory function

Fig. 79  On the outer side of the driver seat: memory buttons.

Memory buttons

The memory buttons can be used to save and turn on settings for the driver seat and the exte- rior mirrors. The settings will also be saved in the key or in the user of the online services, depending on the version.

Save the settings of the driver seat and the exterior mirrors while driving forward Apply the electronic parking brake. Move the gearshift to the neutral position. Switch the ignition on. Adjust the driver seat and the exterior mirrors. Press  for longer than 1 second  Fig. 79.

Seats and head restraints

97

Seat functions

Press the memory button in which to store the settings within approx. 10 seconds. A warning sound will confirm they have been stored.

Storing the passenger rear view mirror set- tings while driving in reverse Apply the electronic parking brake. Move the gearshift to the neutral position. Switch the ignition on. Press the required memory button. Select reverse gear. Adjust the front passenger exterior mirror so that you can see, for example, the kerb edge well. The new position of the mirror will be stored automatically and allocated to the vehicle key that was used to unlock the vehicle.

Activating settings With the vehicle stopped and the ignition switched on, press and hold the correspond- ing memory button until the saved position is reached. OR: With the ignition switched off and the driver's door open, briefly press the corre- sponding button. The front passenger side exterior mirror auto- matically changes from the position stored for reversing as soon as the vehicle moves forward

at a speed of at least 15 km/h (10 mph) or when the gear selection lever is changed to a position other than R  page 110.

Initialising the seat position memory

The position memory system must be restar- ted if, for example, the driver seat has been changed. Restarting deletes all memories and assign- ments for the seat with position memory. The memory keys can then be programmed again. Open the driver door and do not get into the vehicle. Operating the seat settings from outside the vehicle. Tilt the backrest fully forward. Release the control to set the angle and then press again until an audible warning is heard.

WARNING Adjust the memory function only when the vehicle is stationary.

Note If the driver door is opened approx. 10 mi- nutes after the vehicle was unlocked or later, the driver seat and the exterior mirrors do not move automatically.

Front centre armrest

Fig. 80  Front centre armrest

To raise the armrest, pull it fully up in the direc- tion of the arrow  Fig. 80 up or step by step depending on the desired opening. To lower the armrest, first lift it to its highest position. Then lower it down.

To move the armrest horizontally, move it for- ward  Fig. 80 or backward as much as possi- ble in the direction of the corresponding arrow.

WARNING The front centre armrest may obstruct the driver's arm movements, which could cause an accident and severe injuries. Keep the storage compartments of the centre armrest closed at all times while the vehicle is in motion.

98

Seats and head restraints

Never let anyone sit on the centre arm- rest while the vehicle is in motion, not even a child. This position is incorrect and may cause severe injuries.

Unlock the seat backrest with the cord.

Fig. 81  In the luggage compartment: levers to unlock the rear backrest.

Lower the head restraint properly. Open the rear lid. Pull the remote release lever of the left  Fig. 81 1 or right 2 parts of the backrest in the direction of the arrow. The released part of the rear seat backrest is folded automatically down and forwards. If this occurs, close the rear lid.

The rear backrest is not engaged when a red mark can be seen on the button  Fig. 74 2 .

Lights

99

Vehicle lighting

Lights Vehicle lighting

Control lamps Lights up yellow There is a total or partial failure of the exterior lighting.

Lights up yellow Rear fog light on.

Lights up green Left or right turn signal. The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a

turn signal is faulty. Hazard warning lights on  page 63.

Lights up green Trailer turn signals

Lights up blue Main beam on or flasher activated  page 101.

Lights up blue The Light Assist system is on  page 102.

Lights control

Fig. 82  Instrument panel: light panel.

Turning on the lights Turn on the ignition and turn the light switch to the desired position  Fig. 82:

Automatic control of dipped beam head- lights and daytime running lights.

Side lights and daytime running lights on.

Dipped beam switched on.

Daylight running lights switched on.

Turning off the lights Turn off the ignition and turn the light switch to the desired position:

Lights off.

The Coming home, Leaving home and Welcome lights may be switched on.

Side light or parking light on both sides on. Dipped beam headlight off.

The driver is personally responsible for the cor- rect use and adjustment of the lights in all situa- tions.

Side lights

When the side light is switched on, the side lights in both headlights, certain areas of the rear light clusters, the number plate light and the button lights on the instrument cluster turn on. The automatic dipped beam activates as of a speed of approx. 10 km/h (6 mph).

Automatic dipped beam headlight control

When the light control is in position , the vehicle's lighting and the lighting of the instru- ments and controls turn on and off under the following conditions: The light sensor has detected darkness. The wiper has been on for some time.

100

Lights

The automatic dipped beam is only an auxili- ary function and cannot always identify all sit- uations that may arise during driving with suffi- cient precision.

Cornering light function

The cornering light function is an additional function to the dipped beam headlights to im- prove lighting of the side of the road when tak- ing a sharp turn at low speed. When the dipped beam is on, a static cornering light comes on when driving at speeds below about 40 km/h (25 mph) or on very tight bends. If the steering wheel is turned or the turn sig- nal is switched on, the front fog light gradually turns on. After the turn, the cornering light func- tion is gradually switched off. When engaging reverse gear, both front fog lights turn on.

Daytime running lights

Daytime running lights can increase vehicle vis- ibility when driving during the day. The daytime running lights switch on every time the ignition is switched on, if the switch is in positions or , according to the level of exterior lighting.

Motorway light

The function is connected and disconnected via the corresponding Infotainment system menu.

Activation: when going above 110 km/h (68 mph) for more than 10 seconds, the dipped beam raises slightly to increase the driver's visi- bility distance. Deactivation: when reducing the speed of the vehicle below 100 km/h (62 mph), the dip- ped beam immediately returns to its normal po- sition.

Audible warnings to advise the driver that the lights have not been switched off

If the ignition is not connected and the driver door is open, an audible warning signal is heard in the following cases: this will remind you to turn the light off. When the parking light is on  page 101. When the light switch is in position or . If the exit lighting is switched on (Coming Home function), when you leave the vehicle there will be no audio warning to warn you that the lights are still on.

WARNING If the road is not well lit and other road users cannot see the vehicle well enough or at all, accidents may occur. The automatic dipped beam control ( ) only switches on the dipped beam when there are no changes in brightness, and not, for example when it is foggy.

WARNING The side lights or daytime running lights are not bright enough to illuminate the road ahead and to ensure that other road users are able to see you. Always use your dipped beam head lights if it is raining or if visibility is poor. Never drive with daytime lights if the road is not well lit due to weather or lighting con- ditions. On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs, when activating the daytime running light the rear lights are not switched on. A vehicle which does not have the rear lights on may not be visible to other drivers in the darkness, in the case of heavy rain or in conditions of poor visibility.

WARNING If the headlights are set too high and not used correctly, there is a risk of dazzling or distracting other road users. This could result in a serious accident. Always make sure that the headlights are correctly adjusted.

Lights

101

Vehicle lighting

1

2

3

4

Note The legal requirements regarding the use of vehicle lights in each country must be ob- served. The dipped beam headlights will only work with the ignition on. The side lights come on automatically when the ignition is turned off.

Fog lights

Fig. 83  Instrument panel: light panel.

The warning lamps or also show, on the light switch or instrument panel, when the fog lights are on. The fog lights can be switched on with the light control in position , or when the igni- tion is switched on:

Turn on the fog lights : pull the light switch to its first position  Fig. 83 1 . Switching on the rear fog light : pull the light switch fully out 2 . To switch off the fog lights, press the light switch or turn it to position .

Note The rear fog light can dazzle drivers behind you. You should use the rear fog light only when visibility is very poor.

Turn signal and main beam lever

Fig. 84  Turn signal and main beam lever.

More the lever to the required position: Right turn light or right-hand parking light (ignition switched off). Left turn light or left-hand parking light (ig- nition switched off).

Turning on the main beam. The control lamp lights up on the instrument cluster. The headlight flasher turns on when the lever is pulled. The control lamp lights up on the instrument cluster.

Place the lever in rest position to turn off the corresponding function.

Convenience turn signals

When the ignition is switched on, move the lever as far as possible upwards or downwards and release the lever. The turn signal will flash three times. To switch off the convenience turn signal early, immediately move the lever in the opposite di- rection until you feel resistance and release it. The convenience turn signals are switched on and off in the infotainment system using the function button > Settings > Lighting > Lighting assistant > Convenience turn signals.

Parking light

The parking lights will only work with the igni- tion off. If said light is on, an audible warning will sound while the driver door is open. Switch the ignition off. Move the turn signal lever up or down. When the parking light is switched on, the front side light and the tail light on the corresponding side of the vehicle turn on.

102

Lights

Parking light on both sides Switch the ignition off. Place the light switch in position . Lock the vehicle from the outside. In doing so, only the side lights of both head- lights light up, and additionally the tail lights will do so partially.

WARNING Improper or lack of use of the turn signals, or forgetting to deactivate them can confuse other road users. This could result in a seri- ous accident. Always give warning when you are going to change lane, overtake or when turning, acti- vating the turn signal in good time. As soon as you have finished changing lane, overtaking or turning, switch the turn signal off.

WARNING Incorrect use of the headlights may cause accidents and serious injury, as the main beam may distract or dazzle other drivers.

Note When you turn the ignition off without hav- ing turned the turn signals off, an acoustic signal sounds while the driver door is open. This is intended as a reminder to switch off the turn signal, unless you wish to leave the parking light on. If the convenience turn signals are oper- ating (three flashes) and the other conven- ience turn signals are switched on, the active part stops flashing and only flashes once in the new part selected. The turn signal only works when the igni- tion is switched on. The hazard warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off. The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam headlights are already on. If a trailer turn signal malfunctions, the control lamp will stop flashing (trailer turn signals) and the vehicle turn signal will flash at double speed. In cold or damp weather conditions, the headlights, tail lights and turn signals may mist up inside temporarily. This is normal and in no way effects the useful life of the vehicle lighting system. The parking light does not activate auto- matically if the left- or right-hand turn signal is left on and the ignition is disconnected.

Main beam assist (Light Assist) The main beam assist automatically prevents glare from vehicles moving in the opposite di- rection or ahead in the same direction. In addi- tion, the main beam assist detects illuminated areas and disconnects the main beam head- light when passing, e.g. by populated areas. Within its limitations, the assist system automat- ically connects or disconnects the main beam headlight depending on the environmental and traffic conditions, as well as the speed   .

Switching on the main beam assist Turn on the ignition and turn the light switch to position . From the base position, press the turn sig- nal and main beam headlights lever forwards  Fig. 84 3 . When the main beam assist is switched on, the control lamp on the instrument cluster screen turns on. When the main beam is on, the blue main beam control lamp on the instru- ment cluster switches on.

Switching the main beam assist off Turn the headlight switch to a position other than . EITHER: if main beam assist is on, pull the turn signal light and main beam headlights lever back  Fig. 84 4 .

Lights

103

Vehicle lighting

OR: if the main beam assistant is on, but the main beam does not turn on, press the turn signal and main beam lever forwards to turn the main beam on manually. Pull the turn signal and main beam lever back to switch off the main beam manually, if necessary. OR: switch off the ignition.

System limitations

In the following cases, the main beam headlight must be switched off manually because the main beam assist will not disconnect it on time or disconnect it at all: On roads with insufficient lighting with very reflective signs If road users are insufficiently lit up, e.g. pe- destrians or cyclists. On closed curves, when the traffic in the opposite direction is partially hidden, on pro- nounced slopes or inclinations. On roads with traffic in the opposite direction and with a central reservation barrier where the driver can see over it e.g. lorry drivers. In the event of fog, snow or heavy rain In the event of dust or sand storms If the windscreen is damaged in the camera's field of vision. If the camera's field of vision is misted up, dirty or covered by a sticker, snow or ice. If the camera is damaged or if the power sup- ply has been cut off.

WARNING The convenience features of the main beam assist should not encourage the taking of risks. The system is not a replacement for driver concentration. You are always in control of the main beam and adapting it to the light, visibility and traffic conditions. It is possible that the main beam headlight control does not recognise all driving situa- tions and is limited under certain circumstan- ces. When the field of vision of the camera is dirty, covered or damaged, operation of the main beam control may be affected. This also applies when changes are made to the vehicle lighting system, for example, if addi- tional headlights are installed.

NOTICE To avoid affecting the operation of the sys- tem, take the following points into considera- tion: Clean the field of vision of the camera reg- ularly and make sure it is free of snow and ice. Do not cover the field of vision of the cam- era. Check that the windscreen is not damaged in the area of the field of vision of the cam- era.

Note The headlight flasher can be turned on and off manually at any time with the turn signal and main beam lever  page 101. If there are objects that radiate light in the camera's area of influence, e.g. a portable navigation system, this may affect the oper- ation of the main beam assist system.

Coming home and Leaving home function (exterior orientation light- ing)

The Coming home and Leaving home func- tion lights up the vehicles immediate surround- ings when getting into and out of it in the dark. This light is automatically controlled by a light sensor.

Turning on the Coming home light Unlocks the vehicle (if the light switch is in position and the light sensor detects dark- ness).

Turning off the Coming home light It turns off automatically once the lights off delay time has elapsed. OR: lock the vehicle. OR: rotate the light switch to position  . OR: switch on the ignition.

104

Lights

Turning on the Leaving home light Switch the ignition off. The Leaving Home light turns on if the light control is in position and the light sensor detects darkness. The lights-off delay countdown starts when the last door or rear lid of the vehicle is closed.

Turning off the Leaving home light It switches off automatically after the set lights-off delay time has elapsed. EITHER: it is automatically deactivated if, 30 seconds after the function has been activated, any vehicle door or the rear lid is still open. OR: rotate the light switch to position  . OR: switch on the ignition.

Welcome light

The welcome light is a light located on the exte- rior mirrors facing the ground which is switched on or off if the lights control is in the posi- tion and the Coming Home or Leaving Home function is switched on or off.

Coming home and Leaving home set- tings

The duration of the lights-off delay can be set in the vehicle settings menu of the infotainment system, where the function can also be activa- ted and deactivated  page 35.

Dynamic headlight range control The headlight range is automatically adjusted according to the vehicle load status when they are switched on.

WARNING If the dynamic headlight range control fails or does not work properly, the headlights could dazzle and distract other road users. This could cause accidents and lead to seri- ous injuries. Immediately go to a specialist workshop and have the headlight range control system checked.

Driving abroad The light beam of the dipped beam lights is asymmetric: the side of the road on which you are driving is lit more intensely. When a car that is manufactured in a country that drives on the right travels to a country that drives on the left (or vice versa), it is normally necessary to cover part of the headlight bulbs with stickers or to change the adjustment of the headlights to avoid dazzling other drivers. In such cases, the regulations specify certain light values that must be complied with for des- ignated points of the light distribution. This is known as Tourist light.

The light distribution of the headlights allows the specific tourist light values to be met without the need for stickers or changes being made to the settings.

Note Tourist light is only allowed temporarily. If you are planning a long stay in a country that drives on the other side, you should take the vehicle to an Authorised Technical Service to change the headlights.

Interior lights Lighting of the instrument cluster, displays and controls

The brightness of the instrument and control lighting can be adjusted in the infotainment system: Select > Settings > Lighting > Vehicle interior lighting; OR > Interior settings > Lighting > In- strument cluster.

The set intensity automatically adapts to changes in ambient brightness in the vehicle. When the automatic dipped beam light is turned on, a sensor automatically turns the dipped beam light on or off, as well as the in- strument and control lighting, depending on the ambient brightness.

Lights

105

Inter or lights

Central position

In some cases, e.g. when driving through a tun- nel without the automatic dipped beam light

function switched on, the instrument clus- ter lighting may even switch off. The objective of this function is to provide the driver with a visual indication that he or she should activate the dipped beam. If your vehicle is fitted with a digital instrument cluster, the message Turn on the lights will be displayed on the in- strument cluster.

Interior and reading lights

Fig. 85  Detail of headliner: front interior lighting.

Turns off the interior lights.

Turn on the interior lights.

Door contact connection. The interior lights come on automatically when you unlock the vehicle, open a door

or disconnect the ignition. The light goes out a few seconds after closing all the doors, when locking the vehicle or con- necting the ignition.

Turning the reading light on and off

The light controls may vary depending on the vehicle version.

Glove compartment and luggage compart- ment lighting

When opening and closing the glove compart- ment on the front passenger side and the rear lid, the respective light will automatically switch on and off.

Footwell lighting

The lights in the footwell area below the dash (driver and front passenger sides) will switch on when the doors are opened and will decrease in brightness while driving. This brightness can be adjusted through the infotainment system menu using the function button > Set- tings > Lighting > Interior light- ing.

Background lighting

The background lighting lights up the area of the centre console and the footwell area and, depending on the version, the front door panels as well.

The brightness and colour of the background lighting can be adjusted in the infotainment menu using the function button > Set- tings > Background lighting; OR > Background lighting.

Note The reading lights go out when the vehicle is closed and locked or after a few minutes of turning the ignition off. This prevents the battery from discharging.

106

Visibility

Visibility Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper systems

Window washer lever

Fig. 86  Operating the windscreen wiper and rear wiper.

More the lever to the required position: 0 Windscreen wipers off. 1 Intermittent wiping of the windscreen

activates the rain sensor. The intermittent wiping of the windscreen depends on the speed at which you are driving. The faster the speed, the more frequent the wiping. 2 Slow wipe. 3 Continuous wipe. 4 Short wipe. Pressing the lever for longer

accelerates the wiping.

5 Pull the lever to switch on the auto- matic windscreen washer/wiper. The Cli- matronic switches on air recirculation for

approx. 30 seconds to prevent the smell of windscreen washer fluid from entering the vehicle interior.

6 Switches on the intermittent rear win- dow wipe. The wiper operates at intervals of approx. 6 seconds. 7 Pressing and holding the lever turns on

the automatic rear window washer/wiper. A A Control for adjusting the duration of

the wiping intervals (vehicles without rain and light sensors) or the sensitivity of the

rain sensor.

WARNING If insufficient antifreeze is added to the washer fluid, it could freeze on the glass and impair visibility. In cold conditions you should not use the wash/wipe system unless you have warmed the windscreen with the heating and venti- lation system. The windscreen washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the windscreen and obscure your view of the road.

WARNING The use of worn or dirty wiper blades re- duces visibility and increases the risk of seri- ous accidents and injuries. Replace the wiper blades whenever they are in poor condition or worn out and no longer clean the windows sufficiently  page 285.

NOTICE Before driving off and before switching on the ignition, check the following aspects of the wiper blades and the wiper motor to prevent damage to the glass: The wiper lever is in the neutral position. You have removed or cleared any snow and ice from the wiper blades and windows. You have carefully removed any wiper blades that may have frozen from the win- dow. SEAT recommends a de-icer spray for this operation.

NOTICE Do not turn on the wiper until the glass is dry. Using the wipers while dry can damage the glass.

Visibility

107

Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper systems

0

Note When the vehicle stops while the wiper is on, the wiper switches to operating tempora- rily at the next lower wiping level. If the drivers or passenger door is opened when the vehicle is stationary, the wipers re- turn to the starting position and are switched off. If the door is closed or the wiper lever is moved within a few seconds, the wiper turns on again. In winter, the service position of the wipers can be useful to make it easier to lift the wip- ers off the windscreen when the vehicle is going to be left stationary  page 285.

Wiper functions

Automatic rear window wipe

The rear wiper switches on automatically when the wiper is switched on and reverse gear is en- gaged. The automatic rear window wiper acti- vation when engaging reverse gear can be ac- tivated and deactivated in the infotainment sys- tem, in the vehicle settings menu  page 35.

Heated windscreen washer nozzles

The heating defrosts any windscreen washer nozzles that have frozen. The heat output is automatically adjusted according to the ambi- ent temperature when the ignition is switched

on. The heater only defrosts the nozzles, but not the flexible pipes through which the washer fluid passes.

Note The windscreen will be wiped again approx- imately 5 seconds after the windscreen washer has been activated, provided the ve- hicle is moving (drip function). If you acti- vate the wipers less than 3 seconds after the drip function, a new wash sequence will begin without performing the last wipe. For the drip function to work again, you have to turn the ignition off and then on again.

Note The wiper will try to wipe away any obsta- cles that are on the windscreen. The wiper will stop moving if the obstacle is still block- ing its path. Remove the obstacle and switch on the wiper again.

Rain and light sensor

Fig. 87  Windscreen wipers lever: adjust the rain sensor A .

Fig. 88  Rain sensor sensitive surface

The rain sensor controls the frequency of the windscreen wiper intervals, depending on the amount of rain   . Push the lever to the desired position  Fig. 87.

Rain sensor off.

108

Visibility

1

A

Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces- sary. Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor: Set control to the right: high sensitivity. Set control to the left: low sensitivity.

When the ignition is switched off and then back on, the rain sensor stays on and starts operat- ing again when the windscreen wipers are in position  Fig. 87 1 and the vehicle is travel- ling at more than 16 km/h (10 mph).

Abnormal operation of the rain and light sensor

The possible causes of anomalies and errone- ous interpretations in the sensitive surface area  Fig. 88 of the rain sensor are, among others: Damaged wipers: a film of water on the damaged blades may lengthen the activation time, reduce the washing intervals or result in a fast and continuous wipe. Insects: the impact of insects may cause the wiper to activate. Salt on the road: in winter, salt spread on the roads may cause an excessively long wipe when the windscreen is almost dry. Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotus effect) or traces of detergent (car wash) may reduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor or make it react more slowly, later or not at all.

Regularly clean the sensitive surface of the rain sensor  Fig. 88 (arrow) and check for possi- ble damage to the wiper blades. Windscreen crack: the impact of a stone will trigger a single wipe cycle with the rain sensor on. Next the rain sensor detects the reduction in the sensitive surface area and adapts accord- ingly. The behaviour of the sensor will vary with the size of the damage caused by the stone.

WARNING The rain sensor may not detect enough rain to switch on the wipers. If necessary, switch on the wipers man- ually when water on the windscreen ob- structs visibility.

Note To remove wax and coatings, we recom- mend a window cleaner containing alcohol. Do not put stickers on the windscreen in front of the rain sensor. This may cause sen- sor disruption or faults.

Mirrors General safety instructions

The exterior and interior mirrors allow the driver to observe vehicles driving behind and adapt his or her driving behaviour accordingly.

For safe driving, it is important for the driver to adjust the exterior mirrors and interior mirror correctly before setting off. When looking through the exterior mirrors and the interior mirror, it is not possible to see the entire area behind and to the sides of the vehi- cle. These areas outside the field of view are known as the blind spot. Other road users and objects may be in the blind spot.

WARNING Adjusting the exterior mirrors and interior mirror while driving can distract the driver. This could cause accidents and lead to seri- ous injuries Only adjust the exterior mirrors and interior mirror when the vehicle is stationary. When parking, changing lanes, overtaking or turning, always keep a close eye on your surroundings, as other road users or objects may also be in the blind spot. Always make sure that the mirrors are ad- justed correctly and that visibility to the rear is not reduced by ice, snow, fogging or other objects.

Visibility

109

Mirrors

WARNING A failure to accurately estimate the distance to vehicles driving behind can lead to serious accidents and injuries. Curved (convex or aspherical) mirrors in- crease the field of view and objects in them appear smaller and further away. Curved mirrors do not allow you to pre- cisely calculate the distance to vehicles driving behind, so using them when changing lanes could cause serious accidents and in- juries. If possible, use the interior mirror to pre- cisely calculate the distance to vehicles driving behind you, or to other objects. Always make sure you have sufficient visi- bility to the rear.

WARNING The automatic anti-dazzle mirrors contain an electrolyte fluid which could leak if the mirror is broken. If it gets out, the electrolyte fluid can irritate the skin, eyes and respiratory or- gans, particularly in the case of people with asthma or similar diseases. Immediately in- hale enough fresh air and get out of the vehi- cle, or open all windows and doors if this is not possible.

If the electrolytic fluid comes into contact with your eyes or skin, immediately rinse the affected area with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical advice. If the fluid comes into contact with foot- wear or clothing, rinse immediately with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes. Clean thoroughly before using the footwear or clothing in question again. If the electrolytic fluid is swallowed, imme- diately rinse the mouth with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes. Do not induce vomit- ing unless advised by a doctor. Immediately seek medical attention.

NOTICE Electrolyte fluid may leak if the automatic anti-dazzle mirror is broken. This liquid at- tacks plastic surfaces. Therefore, it should be cleaned as fast as possible with a damp sponge or similar.

Interior mirror

Rear view mirror with automatic anti-dazzle function

When the ignition is switched on, the sensors in the mirror measure the light falling on it from behind and in front. The interior mirror automatically darkens based on the measured values.

If the light falling onto the sensors is blocked or interrupted, e.g. by a sunshade blind or hanging objects, the automatic anti-dazzle interior mir- ror does not work or does not work properly. Similarly, the use of portable navigation devi- ces attached to the windscreen or close to the automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror can affect the operation of the sensors   . The automatic anti-dazzle function is deactiva- ted in certain situations, e.g. when reverse gear is engaged.

WARNING Light from screens of portable navigation devices can cause malfunctions of the au- tomatic anti-dazzle interior mirror and may cause serious accidents and injuries. Abnormal operation of the automatic anti- dazzle function may result in it being impos- sible to use the interior mirror to precisely calculate the distance to vehicles driving be- hind, or to other objects.

110

Visibility

1) Regulation in right-hand drive vehicles is symmetrical

/

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Fig. 89  Detail of the driver door: control for the exterior mirror.

Turn the control to the corresponding position. Moving the control to the desired position adjusts the mirrors on the driver's side ( , left) and on the passenger's side ( , right)

in the desired direction. Depending on the equipment fitted on the vehicle, the mirrors may be heated ac- cording to the outside temperature. Folding the mirrors   .

The exterior mirror cannot be adjusted and all functions are deactivated.

Activating exterior mirror functions

The following exterior mirror functions can be activated and deactivated in the vehi- cle settings menu of the infotainment system  page 35.

Synchronized regulation of the exterior mir- rors

The synchronised mirror setting simultaneously adjusts the right hand exterior mirror when the left mirror is adjusted

Turn the control to position 1). Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. The right exterior mirror will be adjusted at the same time (synchronised). If necessary, correct the setting of the right hand mirror: turn the control to position 1).

Fold the rearview mirrors when locking the vehicle

When the vehicle is locked or unlocked from the outside, the exterior mirrors can be folded in or out automatically, depending on the equip- ment. For this purpose, the rotary control has to be in position , , , or . If the rotary control of the electric exterior mir- rors is in the folded position, the exterior mirrors remain folded.

Memory function

The memory buttons  page 96 can be used to save and turn on settings for the exterior mir- rors. The settings will also be saved in the key or in the user of the online services.

Saving the passenger rear view mirror set- tings for reversing Switch the ignition on. In the infotainment system, select > Settings > Mirrors and wipers >

Mirrors > Lower in reverse gear  page 35.

Select the R 1) position on the control. Select reverse gear. Adjust the front passenger exterior mirror so that you can see, for example, the kerb area well. Release the reverse gear. The adjusted position for the rear view mirror is stored.

Activating the passenger side exterior mirror settings for reversing Turn the exterior mirror control knob to posi- tion 1).

Visibility

111

Sun protection

Engage reverse gear with the ignition switched on. The right-hand exterior rear-view mirror will move to the saved position. The passenger side exterior mirror leaves the saved reversing position when the vehicle is travelling faster than approx. 15 km/h (9 mph), or if the control is turned from position to an- other position.

WARNING Fold and unfold the exterior mirror, taking care to avoid injuries. Only fold or unfold the exterior mirror when there is no-one in the way of the mirror. When moving the mirror, take care not to trap fingers between the mirror and the mir- ror bracket.

NOTICE Before washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash, please make sure to fold the ex- terior mirrors in to prevent them from being damaged. The electrically folding exterior mirrors must only be operated electrically, not by hand, and this could damage their electric drive.

For the sake of the environment Do not leave the exterior mirror heating on for longer than necessary. Otherwise it cau- ses unnecessary energy consumption.

Note If the electrical adjustment should fail to op- erate, both of the mirrors can be adjusted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.

Sun protection Sun blind

Fig. 90  Sun visor

Options for adjusting driver and front pas- senger sun visors Lower the sun visor towards the windscreen. The sun visor can be pulled out of its mount- ing and turned towards the door  Fig. 90 1 . Swing the sun visor towards the door, longitu- dinally backwards. There is a vanity mirror on the sun visor, with a cover. When the cover is opened 2 a light comes on. The lamp goes out when the vanity mirror cover is closed or the sun visor is pushed back up.

WARNING Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility. Always store sun blinds and visors in their housing when not in use.

Note The light above the sun visor automatically switches off after a few minutes in certain conditions. This prevents the battery from discharging.

112

Air conditioning

Air conditioning Heating, ventilation and cooling

Introduction Depending on the vehicles equipment, several systems may have been fitted: The manual air conditioning system heats, cools and dehumidifies the air. The Climatronic is an automatic air condi- tioner that heats, cools and dehumidifies the air.

With the Climatronics automatic mode it is possible to automatically regulate the air tem- perature, distribution and flow. The air conditioning system is more effective if the vehicle's interior is kept closed. When a lot of heat builds up inside the vehicle, ventilation can speed up the cooling process. To switch a specific function on, press the ap- propriate button. Press the button again to switch off the function. The illuminated LEDs next to the buttons indi- cate that the function is switched on. In the air conditioning settings in the info- tainment system, the yellow function buttons indicate that the function is switched on  page 117.

Economic use of the air conditioning

When the air conditioning is switched on, the compressor consumes engine power and has influence on fuel consumption. The air conditioning operates most effectively with the windows and the sunroof closed. How- ever, if the passenger compartment has heated up after standing in the sun for some time, the air inside can be cooled more quickly by briefly opening the windows and the sunroof.

Dust and pollen filter

The dust and pollen filter with its activated charcoal cartridge serves as a barrier against impurities in the air taken into the vehicle inte- rior. The dust and pollen filter must be changed reg- ularly so that air conditioner performance is not adversely affected. If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to use in areas with very high levels of air pollu- tion, the filter must be changed more frequently than stated in the Service Schedule.

Air vents

To ensure proper heating, cooling and ventila- tion in the vehicle interior, the air vents must remain open. There are other additional, non-adjustable air vents in the instrument panel, in the footwells and in the rear area of the passenger compart- ment.

WARNING Reduced visibility through the windows in- creases the risk of serious accidents. Always ensure that all windows are free of ice and snow, and that they are not fogged, so as to maintain good visibility of everything outside. Only drive when you have good visibility. Always ensure that you use the air condi- tioner and heated rear window to maintain good visibility. Never leave the air recirculation on for a long period of time. If the cooling system is switched off and air recirculation mode switched on, the windows can mist over very quickly, considerably limiting visibility. Switch air recirculation mode off when it is not required.

NOTICE Food, medicines and other objects sensitive to heat or cold may be damaged or made unsuitable for use by the air coming from the vents. Never place food, medicines or other tem- perature-sensitive objects close to the air vents.

Air conditioning

113

Heating, ventilat on a d cooling

Note When the cooling system is turned off, air coming from the outside will not be dried. To prevent fogging of the windows, SEAT recom- mends leaving the cooling system (compres- sor) turned on. To do this, press the function button . The icon should light up. The maximum heat output required to de- frost windows as quickly as possible is only available when the engine has reached its normal running temperature. Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to ensure heating and cooling are not impaired, and to prevent the windows from misting over. The air from the vents flows through the ve- hicle interior and is extracted by slots in the luggage compartment designed for this pur- pose. Therefore, you should avoid obstruct- ing these slots with any kind of object. It is advisable to turn on the air condition- ing at least once a month, to lubricate the system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a de- crease in the cooling capacity is detected, a Technical Service should be consulted to check the system. When the engine is under extreme strain, switch off the compressor for a moment.

114

Air conditioning

Climatronic controls and functions

Fig. 91  In the centre console: Climatronic control panel.

Temperature 1 / 2

The temperature of the right and left sides can be adjusted separately using the adjusters. The selected temperature is shown on the display of the climate control panel.

Synchronizes the drivers temperature settings to the passenger side. Activates the temperature regulator for the pas-

senger side to set a different temperature. The set air temperature is kept con- stant. Temperature and the amount and distribution of air are controlled auto-

matically. Automatic mode is switched off when the fan power is changed manually.

Switches the cooling system on or off. The cooling mode cools and dehumidi- fies the air.

The recirculation of air and the cooling system turn on automatically and air dis- tribution adjusts automatically to the posi-

tion . Adjust the fan power.

The defrost/demisting function removes ice and fog from the windscreen. The air is dehumidified and the fan is set high.

Open the air conditioning settings in the infotainment system  page 117. The climate control operation and set-

tings menu will be displayed in the infotain- ment system screen. The heated rear window only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 mi-

nutes. It should be switched off as soon as the glass is demisted. By saving electrical power you can also save fuel.

To avoid possible damage to the battery, an automatic temporary disconnection of this function is possible, coming back on when normal operating conditions are re- established.

Switches the air recirculation mode on and off  page 117.

Switches seat heating on and off  page 118. Switches the auxiliary heater on or off  page 121.

Switch off the air conditioning system. If the fan is manually set to , it also switches off.

Air distribution

The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort. It can also be manually distributed to the desired zone by pressing the corresponding button:

Air conditioning

115

Heating, ventilat on a d cooling

The airflow is directed towards the chest

The airflow is directed towards the foot- well. The airflow is directed at the windscreen.

Air Conditioning settings in Infotainment

Open the auxiliary heater menu in the air con- ditioning settings in the infotainment system  page 121.

Allergen filter

The Air Care Climatronic allergen filter can re- duce the amount of harmful substances that get inside, including allergens  page 117.

Windscreen heating

Switches the heated windscreen on and off with the engine running  page 119.

Steering wheel heating

Switches steering wheel heating on and off  page 119.

116

Air conditioning

Manual air conditioning controls

Fig. 92  In the centre console: manual air conditioning control panel.

Cooling mode

Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.

Temperature 1

Turn the control to adjust the temperature.

Fan

Turning the regulator 2 sets the fan power. At level 0 the fan and manual air conditioning are disconnected. Level 6 is the maximum.

Air distribution

Turning regulator 3 distributes the air to the desired zone:

The airflow is directed towards the chest

The airflow is directed towards the chest and the footwell area.

The airflow is directed towards the foot- well. The airflow is directed towards the wind- screen and the footwell area.

Defrost/demist function. The air flow is directed towards the windscreen.Air re- circulation is automatically deactivated

or not activated in the first place. Increase the fan power to clear the windscreen of condensation as soon as possible. To de- humidify the air, the cooling system will au- tomatically switch on.

Maximum cooling power

When the control is in position air recircu- lation and the cooling system are connected automatically and the air flow is automatically adjusted to position .

Rear window heating

This only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes. It should be switched off as soon as the glass is demisted. By saving electrical power you can also save fuel. To avoid possible damage to the battery, an automatic temporary disconnection of this function is possible, coming back on when nor- mal operating conditions are re-established.

Air recirculation

 page 117

Seat heating

 page 118

Air conditioning

117

Heating, ventilat on a d cooling

Switching off

Manually set the fan to .

Setting the temperature on the info- tainment system

The air conditioning settings in the infotainment system are available in the Climatronic. De- pending on the vehicle equipment.

Open the air conditioning menu Press the button on the Climatronic con- trol panel. The current air conditioning settings are dis- played at the top of the screen. The current air conditioning settings are displayed at the top of the screen.

Air conditioning operating modes

The air conditioning operating modes are col- our coded: Blue: Cooling. Red: Heating.

General settings submenu

Sets the following functions: Automatic air recirculation mode  page 117. Automatic front window heating  page 119.

Presets submenu

Sets the automatic or manual mode of the cooling system or switches the air conditioning off.

Air conditioning profile

Adjust the power of the fan in AUTO mode. Valid for the front and rear air conditioning con- trol unit.

Air recirculation Air recirculation mode prevents the ambient air from entering the interior. When the outside temperature is very high, selecting manual air recirculation mode for a short period refreshes the vehicle interior more quickly. For safety reasons, air recirculation is switched off in the following situations: When the button is pressed or the air dis- tributor is turned to . When a sensor detects that the vehicle's win- dows could mist up.

Switching the manual air recirculation mode on and off Press the button to switch manual air re- circulation on or off.

Climatronic automatic air recirculation mode

With the automatic air recirculation mode ac- tivated, the entry of fresh air into the cabin in- terior is enabled. If the system detects a high concentration of hazardous substances in the ambient air, air recirculation mode is switched on automatically. When the level of impurities drops to within a normal range, recirculation mode is switched off. The system is unable to detect unpleasant smells. The air recirculation will not connect automati- cally in versions without humidity sensor and in the following external conditions: The outside temperature is lower than +3C (+38F). The cooling system is switched off and the outside temperature is below +10C (+50F). The cooling system is switched off, the out- side temperature is below +15C (+59F) and the windscreen wipers are switched on.

Air Care Climatronic with allergen filter

The Air Care Climatronic allergen filter can reduce the amount of harmful substances, in- cluding allergens, that get inside. If the Air Care option is switched on, the air con- ditionings air recirculation mode is maximised until there is a risk of the windows misting up due to humidity inside the vehicle and the out- side temperature. The air recirculation mode is

118

Air conditioning

automatically regulated and incorporates an automatic setting to prevent the vehicle occu- pants suffering from fatigue. Open the air conditioning settings in the info- tainment system  page 117. Switch the Air Care function on or off using Air Care active

WARNING Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and reduce driver concentration possibly result- ing in a serious accident. Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or use the air recirculation for long periods of time; the air in the vehicle interior will not be refreshed.

NOTICE In vehicles with an air conditioner, do not smoke when air recirculation is switched on. The smoke may be deposited on the cool- ing evaporator and on the active combina- tion filter and cause permanent unpleasant odours.

Note When the outside temperature is very high, briefly switching on the air recirculation mode helps to cool the vehicle interior more quickly.

Seat heating With the engine running, the front seats and side rear seats can be electrically heated to three power levels.

Control seat heating Press  or  on the control panel to turn on the seat heating at maximum power. Press the or button repeatedly to adjust it to the required level. To turn off seat heating, press  or  several times until no LEDs are lit. If the ignition is switched on again in approx. the next 10 minutes, the driver seat heating is automatically turned on to the level set the last time.

Cases in which the heat seating should not be switched on

Do not switch the seat heating on if any of the following conditions are met: The seat is occupied by a person with limited perception of pain or temperature. The seat is not occupied. The seat has a cover. A child seat has been installed on the seat. The seat cushion is wet or damp. The outdoor or indoor temperature is greater than +25C (77F).

WARNING People who cannot perceive pain or temper- ature because of medications, paralysis or chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes) or have a limited perception of these, may suffer burns to the back, buttocks or legs when using seat heating. People with limited pain and temperature thresholds must never use seat heating. If an abnormality in the device's tempera- ture control is detected, have it checked by a specialist workshop.

WARNING If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can adversely affect the operation of the seat heating, increasing the risk of burns. Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior to using the seat heater. Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is wet or damp. Do not leave clothing that is wet or damp on the seat. Do not spill liquids on the seat.

Air conditioning

119

Heating, ventilat on a d cooling

NOTICE To avoid damaging the heating elements of the seat heaters, please do not kneel on the seat or apply sharp pressure to a single point on the seat cushion or backrest. Liquids, sharps objects and insulating ma- terials (e.g. covers or child seats) can dam- age the seat heating. In the event of smells, switch off the seat heating immediately and have it inspected by a specialised workshop. If the original seat upholstery is replaced by another material, the seat heating may overheat or its operation may be limited.

For the sake of the environment The seat heating should remain on only when needed. Otherwise, it is unnecessary energy consumption.

Steering wheel heating Steering wheel heating works only with the en- gine running. The selected steering wheel heating level will be displayed on the instrument panel display.

Adjust the steering wheel heating by press- ing on the multifunction steering wheel Short press (less than 1 second):

The heating is switched on at its maximum level. Press the steering wheel button repeatedly to set the desired level. To switch off steering wheel heating, press the steering wheel button repeatedly until the heated steering wheel icon is displayed on the instrument cluster. Long press (more than 1 second): The heating is switched off directly from the current operating level. Another long press on the button switches on the heating directly at the last level saved before switching off.

Automatic disconnection

The steering wheel heating will be switched off automatically when any of the following condi- tions are met: Electrical energy consumption is too high. The steering wheel heating system is faulty. If the ignition is switched off.

Windscreen heating

Fig. 93  Windscreen humidity and temperature sensor.

Fig. 94  Areas for placing electronic accessories

The brake servo works only when the engine is running.

120

Air conditioning

The heated windscreen is comprised of a set of heated wires placed between the layers of the windscreen which, when electric current is supplied to them, heat up and cause the tem- perature of the glass to rise. Its function is to assist the air-conditioning sys- tem to prevent the windscreen from misting up or to demist it faster if it does mist up. The system can be switched on manually or automatically.

Manual activation Press the button in the air conditioning settings in the infotainment system. The heated windscreen is switched off based on the outside temperature and, in any case, after approximately 8 minutes.

Automatic activation

The heated windscreen switches on automati- cally when a window is at risk of misting up. Open the air conditioning settings in the info- tainment system  page 117. Switch the automatic heated windscreen on or off. The automatic heated windscreen is switched on, even when the air conditioning is switched off.

Thermal windscreen using the defrost func- tion

If the defrost function is switched on and a sen- sor detects that the windscreen could mist up, the heated windscreen switches on.

When does the heated windscreen switch off?

The heated windscreen switches off when one of the following conditions is met: Power consumption is too high. The air conditioner fuse is faulty. If the preset time has elapsed.

Location of electronic accessories

The windscreen heating has a film that reflects infra-red rays. This film interferes with the op- eration of electronic accessories (e.g. remote tolls or similar devices). To avoid this, there are defined areas next to the interior mirror where these devices can be placed  Fig. 94 (ar- rows). These areas should not be covered and stickers should not be placed on them, as this could cause anomalies in the operation of electronic components placed there.

Troubleshooting

The cooling system cannot be switched on or its operation is limited

If the air conditioning system cannot be switched on, this may be caused by the follow- ing: The engine is not running. The fan is switched off. The air conditioner fuse has blown. The outside temperature is lower than ap- proximately +3C (+38F). The air conditioner compressor has been temporarily switched off because the engine coolant temperature is too high. Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air con- ditioner checked by a specialised workshop.

The heating and fresh air system cannot be switched on or operates in a limited way The heating and fresh air system and the de- frost function operate best when the engine is hot. If the fault continues, consult a specialised workshop.

Air conditioning

121

Auxiliary heati g and ventilation

The windows are misted up

Windows mist up when they are cooler than the ambient temperature and the air is very damp. Cold air can absorb less moisture than hot air, so the windows mist up more often in cold weather. The air vent in front of the windscreen keeps it free of ice, snow and leaves, which improves the performance of the heating and cooling systems. The air grooves located at the rear of the luggage compartment must be kept clear to allow the air to circulate through the vehicle from front to back. Switch on the demist function.

Change the temperature unit (Climatronic)

The temperature display can be changed from Celsius to Fahrenheit on the Infotainment sys- tem screen using the function button > Set- tings > Units.

Water or water vapour under the vehicle

If the humidity and temperature outside the ve- hicle are high, condensation can drip off the evaporator in the cooling system and form a pool underneath the vehicle. This is normal and does not indicate a leak! When the outside humidity is high and the am- bient temperature is low, condensation water may evaporate when the stationary air condi- tioning is operating. In this case, steam may

be released from underneath the vehicle. This does not mean that the vehicle has any dam- age.

Note After starting the engine, any residual humid- ity in the air conditioner could mist over the windscreen. Switch on the defrost function as soon as possible to clear the windscreen of condensation.

Auxiliary heating and venti- lation

Introduction With the auxiliary heating and ventilation, it is possible to heat the vehicle interior in winter and ventilate it in summer. It can also be used to demist the windscreen and remove ice or even a thin layer of snow. The auxiliary heating is powered by fuel from the vehicles tank and can even continue to operate when the ignition is switched off. The auxiliary ventilation is pow- ered by the 12-volt vehicle battery. The auxiliary heating can be controlled by the SEAT CONNECT mobile app or through the My- SEAT website.

The auxiliary heater can be switched on using the fast heating button of the air conditioning controls, with the remote control or by previ- ously programming a departure time in the aux- iliary heater menu of the infotainment system. If the outside temperature is very high, the vehi- cle interior can be ventilated with the engine off using the auxiliary heater.

Auxiliary heating exhaust system

The exhaust gases generated by the auxiliary heater are removed via an exhaust pipe fitted underneath the vehicle. This exhaust pipe must not be blocked by snow, mud or anything else.

WARNING The auxiliary heater exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colour- less toxic gas. Carbon monoxide can cause people to lose consciousness. It can also cause death. Never switch on the auxiliary heater or leave it running in enclosed spaces or areas with no ventilation. Never programme the auxiliary heater so that it switches itself on and is running in an enclosed space or an area with no ventila- tion.

122

Air conditioning

WARNING The components of the auxiliary heater are extremely hot and could cause a fire. Always park your vehicle so that no part of the exhaust system can come in contact with easily flammable materials that might be below the vehicle, such as dried grass.

NOTICE Never place food, medicines or other tem- perature-sensitive objects close to the air vents. Food, medicines and other objects sensitive to heat or cold may be damaged or made unsuitable for use by the air coming from the vents.

Switching the auxiliary heater and ventilation on and off

The auxiliary heating can operate with the igni- tion switched on and off.

Open the Auxiliary heater menu Open the air conditioning settings in the info- tainment system. Press the function button .

Switching on the auxiliary heater

The auxiliary heating can be switched off in the following ways:

Press the immediate heating button on the air conditioning controls. OR: Press the button on the remote control  page 123. OR: Set the departure time  page 124. OR: Using the App or MySEAT website. If the 12-volt vehicle battery is low on charge or the tank is empty, the auxiliary heating cannot be switched on.

Switch off the auxiliary heating manually

The auxiliary heater can be switched off man- ually in the following ways: Press the immediate heating button on the air conditioning controls. OR: Press the button on the remote control. OR: Using the SEAT CONNECT mobile app or the MySEAT website.

The auxiliary heater switches off automati- cally At the scheduled departure time or the end of the set operating period  page 124. If the yellow indicator lamp (fuel gauge) lights up. If the 12-volt battery's charge level drops sharply. The auxiliary heating can be turned off imme- diately with the on/off button.

To burn the remaining fuel in the auxiliary heat- ing, it continues to operate briefly once it has been turned off manually or automatically.

Using the auxiliary heating as a supplemen- tary heater

If the engine has been started, the auxiliary heating can continue to operate as a supple- mentary heating system. The following condi- tion must be met for this to happen: The Automatic supplementary heater function can be switched on in the infotainment system's air conditioning settings. The outside temperature is lower than +5 C (+41 F). The supplementary heating system switches off again automatically after a while.

Note Noises will be heard while the auxiliary heater is running. When the air humidity is high and the in- side temperature low, condensation from the heating and ventilating system may evapo- rate when the auxiliary heater is switched on. In this case, steam may be released from underneath the vehicle. This does not mean that there is a vehicle malfunction. If the vehicle is tilted, e.g. if parked on a slope, the operation of the auxiliary heater may be restricted if the fuel tank level is low (just above the reserve level).

Air conditioning

123

Auxiliary heati g and ventilation

If the auxiliary heater is used a number of times for a long period of time, the 12-volt battery will lose its charge. To recharge the battery, the vehicle must be driven for a number of kilometres from time to time. As a guideline: the journey should last approxi- mately as long as the heater was connected. At temperatures below +5 C (+41 F), the auxiliary heater may switch itself on auto- matically when the engine is switched on. The auxiliary heater is switched off again af- ter a certain time. While the vehicle is stopped, the auxiliary heating can be switched on up to a maximum of three consecutive times in a row with the maximum operating duration.

Remote control

Fig. 95  Independent heating: radiofrequency remote control key

Switch on: Press the button for about one second Switch off: Press the button for about one second

If the buttons of the remote control are pressed unnecessarily, it could switch on the auxiliary heater involuntarily, even when it is out of range or when the control lamp is flashing.

Remote control LED

When the buttons are pressed, the LED of re- mote control  Fig. 95 2 gives the user a range of information:

It lights up for approx. 2 seconds In green: The auxiliary heater has been switched on using the button. In red: The auxiliary heater has been switched off using the button.

Flashes slowly for approx. 2 seconds In green: No on signal has been received. The remote control is out of range. Move closer to the vehicle. In red: No off signal has been received. The remote control is out of range. Move closer to the vehicle.

It flashes irregularly In green: The independent heating is blocked. Possible causes: the fuel tank is almost empty, the 12-volt battery charge is very low or there is a fault.

It lights up or flashes steadily In orange (then in green or in red): The remote control battery is almost flat. However, the on or off signal has been received. In orange (then flashes green or red): The re- mote control battery is almost flat. No on or off signal has been received.

Flashes for around 5 seconds In orange: The remote control battery is flat. No on or off signal has been received.

Range

The range of the remote control is a few hun- dred meters when the battery is fully charged and under optimal conditions. A distance of at least 2 m must be left be- tween the remote control and the vehicle. There should be no obstacle between the re- mote control and the vehicle. Secure the remote control with the chrome pin  Fig. 95 1 vertically facing upwards. Do not cover the antenna.

124

Air conditioning

The range of the control is considerably less in poor weather conditions, if there are buildings in the vicinity or if the battery is low.

Changing the remote control battery

If the indicator lamp does not come on, the re- mote control's battery must be replaced. Insert a suitable tool, e.g. a screwdriver, into the indentation in the remote control housing, in the direction of the arrow  Fig. 95. With the help of the same tool, lift the lid until the housing locking element is released. Slightly move the cover in the direction of the arrow. Remove the cover. To remove the battery, carefully insert a tool like a screwdriver into the indentation next to the battery. Use the screwdriver to lift up the battery until it releases from its housing. Remove the old battery. Insert a new battery of the same type and make sure it clicks into place. When inserting the battery, make sure that the polarity is cor- rect. Fit the cover onto the remote control housing. Slide the cover in the direction opposite to the arrow until it clicks into place  Fig. 95.

WARNING Swallowing a battery with a 20 mm diameter or any other button battery can cause seri- ous and even fatal injuries within a very short time. Always keep the remote control, keyrings with batteries, the spare batteries, button batteries and all other batteries over 20 mm out of reach of children. If you suspect that someone may have swallowed a battery, seek immediate medi- cal attention.

NOTICE The radio frequency remote control con- tains electronic components. Therefore, avoid getting it wet and exposing it to knocks or direct sunlight. The use of inappropriate batteries may damage the radio frequency remote control. For this reason, always replace the used bat- tery with another of the same voltage, size and specifications.

For the sake of the environment Please dispose of your used batteries cor- rectly and with respect for the environment. The remote control battery may contain perchlorate. Observe the legal provisions re- garding disposal. Care should be taken so as not to operate the remote control unintentionally so as to prevent the auxiliary heater being switched on accidentally.

Programming the auxiliary heater Before programming it, check that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly   . The auxiliary heater is programmed in the Aux- iliary heater menu of the infotainment sys- tem.

Set the operating duration of the auxiliary heating Open the Auxiliary heater menu. Press the Set function button. To set the operating time, press the Operat- ing duration button. The set operating duration is taken into account when the auxiliary heating is switched on using the immediate heat button or the remote control. The maximum duration of the auxiliary heating is 60 minutes.

Air conditioning

125

Auxiliary heati g and ventilation

Set the departure time

Activating this function only affects the heating or ventilation. The departure time must be reac- tivated whenever the vehicle is started. Open the Auxiliary heater menu. Press the Set function button. Select one of the memory spaces for a De- parture time. Press the Activate function button. Manual air conditioning: The scheduled depar- ture time determines when the auxiliary heating or ventilation will be switched off. The start of the heating or ventilation process depends on the programmed duration of operation. Climatronic: The vehicle uses the programmed departure time to automatically calculate the time at which the heating or ventilation process should begin to attain the set temperature. A departure time can be scheduled in the App or on the MySEAT website.

Checking the programming

If a departure time is activated, the yellow LED on the immediate heat button lights up on the Climatronic control panel, approximately ten seconds after the ignition is switched off.

WARNING Never programme the auxiliary heater so that it switches itself on and is running in an enclosed space or an area with no ven- tilation. The auxiliary heater exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and colourless toxic gas. Carbon monoxide can cause people to lose consciousness. It can also cause death.

126

Driving

Driving Driving indications

Pedals Ensure that you can always press the accel- erator, brake and clutch pedals unimpaired to the floor. Ensure that the pedals can return unimpaired to their initial positions. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas- tened during the trip and do not obstruct the pedals   . Only use floor mats which leave the pedals clear and which are secured to prevent them from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor mats from a specialised dealership. Fasteners for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.

Wear suitable footwear

Always wear shoes which support your feet properly and give you a good feeling for the pedals.

WARNING Restricting pedal operation can lead to critical situations while driving. Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could ob- struct the pedals. Risk of accident. Never place objects in the driver footwell. An object could move into the pedal area and impair pedal operation.

Selecting the optimal gear Depending on the equipment on the instrument panel screen, a recommendation is shown with the gear that should be engaged to optimise consumption. On vehicles with automatic transmission, it is only displayed when driving in Tiptronic mode  page 140. No recommendation will appear if the optimal gear is engaged. The current gear will be dis- played.

Display Meaning

3 Optimum gear.

4 5 Changing to a higher gear is rec- ommended.

2 1 Changing to a lower gear is rec- ommended.

Information regarding the cleanliness of the particulate filter

When the exhaust system detects that the par- ticulate filter is close to saturation, this systems self-cleaning function recommends the optimal gear for that function  page 281.

WARNING The gear change recommendation is an aux- iliary function and in no case should be a substitute for careful driving. Responsibility for selecting the correct gear, depending on the circumstances, rests solely with the driver.

For the sake of the environment Selecting the correct gear can help to save fuel.

Note The recommended gear display turns off when you are no longer in tiptronic mode.

Economical and environmentally friendly driving

Fuel consumption, environmental pollution and wear to the engine, brakes and tyres all depend largely on driving style. Consumption can be reduced between 10-15% with an efficient driv- ing type. The following section gives you some

Driving

127

Driving indications

tips on lessening the impact on the environment and reducing your operating costs at the same time.

Active cylinder management (ACT)

Depending on vehicle equipment, the active cylinder management (ACT) may deactivate some of the engine cylinders if the driving sit- uation does not require too much power. The number of active cylinders can be seen on the instrument panel display  page 16.

Foresight when driving

If you think ahead when driving, you will need to brake less and thus accelerate less. Take ad- vantage of the inertia of the vehicle whenever possible, with a gear engaged. This takes ad- vantage of the engine braking effect, reducing wear on the brakes and tyres. Emissions and fuel consumption will drop to zero.

Changing gear to save energy

An effective way of saving is to change in ad- vance to a higher gear. Manual gearbox: change from first to second gear as soon as possible. Choosing the cor- rect gear saves fuel. Select the highest possi- ble gear suitable for the driving situation (the engine should continue to run with cyclical reg- ularity). Automatic transmission: accelerate gradually and without reaching the kick-down position.

Avoid driving at high speed

Avoid travelling at your vehicles top speed, whenever possible. Fuel consumption, emission of harmful gases and noise pollution multiply as speed is increased. Driving at moderate speeds will help to save fuel.

Reduce idling time

In vehicles with the Start-Stop system idling is automatically reduced. In vehicles without the Start-Stop system it is worth switching off the engine, for example, at level crossings and at traffic lights that remain red for long periods of time. When an engine has reached operating temperature, and depending on the cylinder capacity, keeping it switched off for a minimum of about 5 seconds already saves more than the amount of fuel necessary for restarting. The engine takes a long time to warm up when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollutant emis- sions are also especially high during this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best to drive off immediately after starting the engine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.

Regular maintenance

Regular servicing helps in saving fuel even be- fore the engine is started. A well-serviced en- gine gives you the benefit of improved fuel efficiency as well as maximum reliability and an enhanced resale value. A badly serviced en- gine can consume up to 10% more fuel than necessary.

Avoid short journeys

The engine and catalytic converter need to reach their optimal operating temperature in order to minimise fuel consumption and emis- sions. A cold engine consumes a disproportionate amount of fuel. The engine reaches its work- ing temperature after about four kilometres (2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will return to a normal level.

Check tyre pressure

Always make sure the tyres are inflated to the correct pressures  page 316 to save fuel. If the pressure is below half bar, fuel consumption may increase by 5%. Due to the greater rolling resistance, under-inflation also increases tyre wear and impairs handling. Do not use winter tyres all year round as they increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.

Avoid carrying unnecessary loads

Given that every kilo of extra weight will in- crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable make sure that no unnecessary loads are being transported. Since the luggage rack increases the aerody- namic drag of the vehicle, you should remove it when not needed. At speeds of 100-120 km/h (62-75 mph), this will save 12% of fuel.

128

Driving

Save electrical energy

The engine drives the alternator, thereby gen- erating electricity. This implies that any in- crease in power consumption also increases fuel consumption! For this reason, switch off any unneeded electrical devices. Devices that use a lot of electricity include the blower at a high setting, the rear window heating or the seat heating.

Note If you have the Start-Stop system, it is rec- ommended that it should not be disconnec- ted. It is recommended that you close the win- dows when driving at more than 60 km/h (37 mph). Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, as the pressure can make the plate slip. This causes wear and can damage the clutch plate. Do not ride the clutch on a hill, use the brake. The fuel consumption will be lower and you will prevent the clutch plate from being damaged. Use the engine brake on downhills by changing to the gear that is best suited for the gradient. Fuel consumption will be zero and the brakes will not suffer.

Driving with a loaded vehicle In order to achieve appropriate driving charac- teristics when the vehicle is loaded, please note the following: Place all luggage securely  page 257. Accelerate with particular care and precau- tion. Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. Brake earlier than usual. If applicable, please note the information about the roof rack  page 263.

WARNING Loads that move around could seriously threaten the vehicle's stability and safety, extend the braking distance during hard or emergency braking and lead to serious acci- dents and injuries. Secure the load correctly to prevent it from moving around. Secure heavy objects with suitable lashing straps or tie-down belts. Ensure that the rear seat backrests are se- curely engaged.

Driving with the rear lid open Driving with the rear lid open is particularly dangerous. Secure all objects and the open rear lid correctly and take any necessary measures. Driving with the rear lid open increases the aer- odynamic drag of the vehicle, along with fuel consumption. It is therefore recommended that you do not drive with the rear lid open.

WARNING Driving with the rear lid unlocked or open can cause serious injury. Always drive with the rear lid closed. Place all objects securely inside the lug- gage compartment. Otherwise, loose ob- jects could fall out of the luggage compart- ment and injure road users driving behind. Always drive carefully and with special care and anticipation. Avoid braking and sudden manoeuvres, as the open rear lid could move uncontrollably. When transporting objects that protrude from the luggage compartment, mark them accordingly to warn other road users. Please bear in mind all legal provisions. Never use the rear lid to support or secure objects protruding from the luggage com- partment.

Driving

129

Driving indications

If a luggage rack is fitted on the rear lid, re- move it and the load when you have to drive with the rear lid open.

NOTICE An open rear lid changes the height and, in some cases, the length of the vehicle.

Note Depending on the country, it may be forbid- den to drive with the rear lid open. Please observe the legal regulations of the country in question.

Driving on flooded roads To prevent damage to the vehicle driving on flooded roads, take the following into account: Water should never come above the lower edge of the bodywork. Drive at pedestrian speed. Never stop the vehicle in the water, drive in reverse or stop the engine. Vehicles driving in the opposite direction form waves that can raise the water level so high that your vehicle will not be able to cross the water safely.

WARNING After driving through flooded zones, braking effectiveness can decrease if the brake discs or pads are damp  page 149.

Note Driving through flooded areas may se- verely damage vehicle components such as the engine, drive train or electrical system. Avoid driving through salt water (corrosion)  page 334. Whenever driving through water, the Start-Stop system must be switched off  page 135.

Running in Please observe the instructions for running-in new components.

Running-in the engine

A new engine must be driven through a run-in period during its first 1500 kilometres (1000 miles). During its first few hours of run- ning, the internal friction in the engine is greater than later on when all the moving parts have bedded down. How the vehicle is driven for the first 1500 km (1000 miles) influences the future engine per- formance. Throughout the life of the vehicle, it should be driven at a moderate speed (es-

pecially when the engine is cold) this will re- duce engine wear and increase its useful life. Never drive at extremely low engine speeds. Always engage a lower gear when the engine works irregularly. For the first 1000 km or 600 miles, please note: Do not use full throttle. Do not force the engine above two thirds of its maximum speed. Do not tow a trailer. Between 1000 and 1500 kilometres (600 to 1000 miles), gradually increase power until reaching the maximum speed and high engine speeds.

Running in new tyres and brake pads Replacement of wheel rims and new tyres  page 315. Information about brakes  page 149.

For the sake of the environment If the engine is run in gently, the life of the engine will be increased and the engine oil consumption reduced.

Four-wheel drive (4Drive) On four-wheel drive models, the engine power is distributed to all four wheels

130

Driving

General notes

On four-wheel drive vehicles, the engine power is distributed to all four wheels. The distribution of power is controlled automatically according to your driving style and the road conditions. See also  page 150. The four-wheel drive is specially designed to complement the superior engine power. This combination gives the vehicle exceptional han- dling and performance capabilities, both on normal roads and in more difficult conditions, such as snow and ice. Even so (or perhaps es- pecially for this reason), it is important to ob- serve certain safety points   .

Winter tyres

Thanks to four-wheel drive, your vehicle will have plenty of traction in winter conditions, even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless, we still recommend that winter tyres or all-season tyres be fitted on all four wheels to give even better braking response.

Snow chains

On roads where snow chains are mandatory, this also applies to cars with four-wheel drive  page 319.

Changing tyres

On vehicles with four-wheel drive, all four tyres must have the same rolling circumference. Also avoid using tyres with varying tread depths  page 315.

Off-roader?

Your SEAT vehicle is not an off-roader: in fact, the ground clearance is not enough to be used as such. Avoid consequently rough tracks and uneven terrain.

WARNING Even with four-wheel drive, you should al- ways adjust your speed to suit the condi- tions. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving. Accident hazard! The braking capability of your vehicle is limited by the tyres' grip. It is therefore no dif- ferent from a car without four-wheel drive. So do not be tempted to drive too fast on firm or slippery roads just because the vehicle still has good acceleration in these conditions. Accident hazard! On wet roads bear in mind that the front wheels may start to aquaplane and lose contact with the road if the car is driven too fast. If this should happen, there will be no sudden increase in engine speed to warn the driver, as occurs with a front-wheel drive car.

For this reason you should always choose a driving speed suitable for the road condi- tions. Accident hazard!

Trips abroad The vehicle has been manufactured for a spe- cific country and meets the approval regula- tions in force in that country at the time it was manufactured. If you are going to use the vehicle abroad tem- porarily or for a short period of time, please observe the relevant instructions. Some countries have special safety regulations and provisions that the vehicle may not com- ply with. Before travelling abroad, SEAT recom- mends that you seek information from one of your dealers about the legal provisions in force in your destination country. If you are going to sell the vehicle in another country or use it there for a longer period of time, please observe the legal regulations in force in the country in question. In some cases it may be necessary to install or remove certain equipment at a later date, and to deactivate certain functions. Sets and types of services may also be affected. In particular, this can occur if the vehicle is to be used in an- other climatic region for a long period of time. Due to the different frequency bands around the world, the factory-fitted infotainment sys- tem may not work in another country.

Driving

131

Starting and stopping the engine

With petrol vehicles, it should be ensured that lead-free petrol is available throughout the journey. Seek information about service station networks selling unleaded fuel.

SEAT importers and distributors will provide in- formation about the technical preparation that your vehicle requires and also about necessary maintenance and repair possibilities.

NOTICE SEAT does not accept liability for any dam- age to the vehicle due to the use of a lower quality fuel, an inadequate service or the non-availability of genuine spare parts.

Starting and stopping the engine

Switching the ignition on/off

Fig. 96  In the lower part of the centre console: start button.

The engine can be started with a start button (Press & Drive). To do so, there must be a valid key inside the vehicle in the area of the front or rear seats, or on the centre console. In vehicles with the Keyless Access system, the engine can also be started with the key in the luggage compartment. Opening the driver's door when exiting the ve- hicle activates the electronic lock on the steer- ing column if the ignition is disabled.

Switching the ignition on/off

If you only want to switch on the ignition (with- out starting the engine), briefly press the start button once without pressing the brake pedal or the clutch pedal  page 132. The starter button text flashes like a heartbeat when the system is preset for switching the ignition on and off.

Automatic ignition disconnection

If the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the key with them but leaving the ignition on, the igni- tion does not switch off automatically. The igni- tion is switched off by pressing the lock button on the remote control or by pressing the sen- sor surface on the door lever.  page 70

Automatic deactivation of the ignition on ve- hicles with the Start-Stop system

The ignition is switched off automatically when the vehicle is stopped and the automatic en- gine shutdown is active, if: The driver's seat belt is not fastened, the driver does not step on any pedal, the driver door is opened. After automatically turning off the ignition, if the dipped beam  is on, the side light remains on for approx. 30 minutes (if the battery has enough charge). If the driver locks the vehicle or manually turns off the light, the side light goes out.

132

Driving

Engine restart feature

If no key is detected inside the vehicle after the engine stops, you will only have 5 seconds to restart it. A warning will display on the dash panel screen. After this interval, it will not be possible to start the engine without a valid key inside the vehicle.

Function My Beat

For vehicles with a convenience key there is the My Beat function. This feature provides an ad- ditional indication of the vehicle ignition system. When entering the vehicle, the start button  Fig. 96 flashes to draw attention to it. When the ignition is on/off, the engine start but- ton flashes. With the ignition is switched off, the start button goes off after a few seconds. With the engine running, the start button light stays on, indicating that the engine is running. The time elapsed between the moment the user starts the engine with the start button and the lighting changes from flashing to fixed will depend on specific engine size characteristics. When the start button is used to stop the en- gine, the button starts flashing again. In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the My Beat function also offers additional infor- mation:

When the engine stops during the Stop phase, the light of the start button stays on, as the Start-Stop system remains active even though the engine is off. When the engine cannot be started again with the Start-Stop system  page 135 and needs to be started manually, the start button flashes to indicate this situation.

WARNING When switching on the ignition, do not press the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise the en- gine could start immediately.

WARNING If vehicle keys are used negligently or with- out due care, this may cause accidents and serious injury. Never leave any key inside the vehicle when you leave it. Otherwise, a child or un- authorised person could lock the vehicle, start the engine or connect the ignition and operate any of the electrical equipment.

Note Before leaving the vehicle, always discon- nect the ignition and, if appropriate, take into account the instructions on the screen of the dash panel. If the vehicle is stationary for a long time with the engine off and the ignition on, the vehicle battery might be discharged and it might not be possible to start the engine. In vehicles with diesel engines, wait until the warning light goes off before starting the engine. If during the STOP phase you press the

button, the ignition is switched off and the push-button flashes. If the following indication appears on the instrument cluster display: Start-Stop system deactivated: Start the en- gine manually; the button will flash.

Starting the engine Vehicles with manual transmission: put the gear lever in neutral, press the clutch pedal and keep it pressed in this position until the engine starts. Vehicles with automatic transmission: put the selector lever in P or N, press the brake pedal and keep it pressed in this position until the en- gine starts.

Driving

133

Starting and stopping the engine

Press the start button without pressing the accelerator. There must be a valid key in the vehicle for the engine to start. After starting the engine, the lighting of the button remains fixed indicating that the engine is run- ning. Once the engine starts, release the start but- ton. If the engine does not start, stop and wait for around 1 minute to try again. If necessary, perform an emergency start  page 134.

Diesel engines can take a few seconds longer than usual to start on cold days. During pre- heating, the warning lamp remains lit. To avoid unnecessary discharging of the battery, do not use any other major electrical equip- ment while the glow plugs are pre-heating. The preheating time depends on the coolant and exterior temperatures. With the engine at operating temperature, or at outside tempera- tures above +8C, the warning lamp  will light up for about one second. This means that you can start the engine almost immediately.

Starting a diesel engine after having run out of fuel

If the fuel tank of a diesel vehicle was run until completely empty, after refuelling it can last longer than normal to start the engine, even up to a minute. This is because the fuel system must eliminate air first.

WARNING Do not keep the engine running in confined spaces, as there is a risk of poisoning. The exhaust gases contain carbon monox- ide, an odourless and colourless poisonous gas that can cause loss of consciousness and death.

WARNING Do not get out of the vehicle with the en- gine running, especially if a gear is engaged. The vehicle could then suddenly move or something strange could happen that would cause damage, fire or serious injury.

WARNING Never use cold start sprays, they could ex- plode or cause the engine to run at high revs. Doing this risks injury.

NOTICE The starter motor or the engine may be damaged if you try to restart the engine im- mediately after switching it off. When the engine is cold, you should avoid high engine speeds, driving at full throttle and over-loading the engine, as this could cause engine damage.

For the sake of the environment Do not warm-up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle stationary. Start off immediately, driving gently. This helps the engine reach operating temperature faster and reduces emissions.

Note Electrical components with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily when the engine starts. When starting with a cold engine, noise levels may briefly increase. This is quite nor- mal, and no cause for concern. When the outside temperature is below +5 C (+41 F), if the engine is diesel, some smoke may appear under the vehicle when the fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on.

Turning off the engine

Bring the vehicle to a full stop   . Vehicles with manual transmission: fully de- press the clutch. Vehicles with automatic transmission: Move the selector lever to the P position. Apply the electronic parking brake. Briefly press the start button.

134

Driving

Emergency disconnection

If the engine does not switch off after briefly pressing the starter button, an emergency dis- connect will be required: Press the start button twice within 3 seconds or press it once for more than 1 second .

WARNING Never switch off the engine while the vehicle is moving. This could cause loss of control of the vehicle, accidents and serious injury. The airbags and belt tensioners do not work when the ignition is switched off. The brake servo does not work with the engine off. Therefore, you need to press the break pedal harder to brake the vehicle. Power steering does not work when the en- gine is not running. You need more strength to steer when the engine is switched off. If the ignition is switched off, the steering column could be locked, making it impossi- ble to control the vehicle.

WARNING Always take the key with you when you leave the vehicle. This is particularly important if there are children in the vehicle, as they might otherwise be able to start the engine or use power-operated equipment (e.g. the electric windows), which could cause inju- ries.

NOTICE If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stop system switches off the engine, the ignition remains switched on. Make sure that the ig- nition is switched off before leaving the vehi- cle, otherwise the battery could discharge. If the engine has been driven at high speed for a prolonged period of time, it may over- heat when switched off. To avoid damage, allow the engine to run for approximately two minutes in neutral before switching it off.

Note After the engine is switched off the radiator fan may run on for up to 10 minutes, even if the ignition is switched off. It is also pos- sible that the fan turns itself on once more if the coolant temperature increases due to the heat accumulated in the engine com- partment or due to its prolonged exposure to solar radiation.

Electronic immobilizer The electronic immobiliser helps to prevent the engine from being started with an unauthorised key and, consequently, the vehicle being put in motion. The vehicle key has an integrated chip which automatically deactivates the electronic immo- biliser if there is a valid key inside the passenger compartment.

The electronic immobiliser is automatically ac- tivated when there is no longer a valid key in- side the vehicle. For this reason, the engine can only be started with a properly coded Original SEAT key. This type of keys can be purchased from a SEAT dealer.

NOTICE A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensured if genuine SEAT keys are used.

Emergency starting function

Fig. 97  On the right of the steering column: emergency start.

If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle, an emergency start-up will be required. The rel- evant message will appear in the dash panel display. This may happen when, for example, the vehicle key battery is very low.

Driving

135

Start-Stop system

1) Only in vehicles with Keyless Access.

Immediately after pushing the starter button, keep the key next to the right trim of the steer- ing column  Fig. 97, as close as possible to the Kessy logo. The ignition connects and the engine starts automatically.

Indications for the driver on the in- strument cluster screen Depress the clutch

This indication is displayed on vehicles with a manual gearbox when the driver does not depress the clutch pedal when starting the en- gine. The engine can only be started if the clutch pedal is depressed. Press the brake

This message appears on vehicles with an automatic gearbox if the driver tries to start the engine without having the brake pedal pressed. Select N or P

This message appears if you try to start or stop the engine when the selector lever of the automatic gearbox is not in position P or N. The engine can only be started and stopped in those positions.

Engage position P; the vehicle can move; doors can only be locked in position P.

For safety reasons, this driver message ap- pears and an audible warning sounds if the se- lector lever of the automatic gearbox is not in position P after you switch off the ignition. Move the selector lever to the P position, otherwise the vehicle could move. Gear change: Selector lever in the drive position!

This driver message is displayed when the selector lever is not in the position P when the driver door is opened. Additionally, a buzzing sound is emitted. Put the selector lever in posi- tion P, otherwise the vehicle could roll away. Ignition is switched on

This driver message is displayed and a buz- zer is sounded when the driver door is opened with the ignition switched on.

Start-Stop system Description and operation

The Start-Stop system helps you to save fuel and reduce CO2 emissions.

In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automati- cally switch off when the vehicle stops or is stopping. The ignition remains switched on. The engine automatically switches back on when required. In this scenario, the light of the button remains lit.1)

When the ignition is switched on, the Start-Stop function is automatically activated.

Control lamps

The Start-Stop system is available, the automatic engine shutdown is active. The Start-Stop system is not available or has been disconnected.

Stopping and starting the engine

Vehicles with a manual gearbox: When the vehicle is stopped, put it into neu- tral and release the clutch pedal. The engine will stop. The warning lamp will light up on the display. The engine may be stopped before the vehicle comes to a standstill (approximately 7 km/h). When you depress the clutch pedal, the en- gine will start again. The indicator lamp goes out.

136

Driving

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox: Brake until the vehicle has come to a stand- still, and keep your foot on the brake pedal or activate the Auto Hold system so that the vehicle remains braked. The engine will stop. The warning lamp will appear on the dis- play. The engine can be stopped before stop- ping completely (approximately 7 or 2 km/h de- pending on the vehicle's gearbox). When you take your foot off the brake pedal the engine will start up again. The indicator lamp goes out. With the Auto Hold system, the engine will not start if you remove your foot from the brake pedal. The car starts when you press the accelerator pedal.

Basic requirements for the start/stop mode The driver door must be closed. The driver's seat belt must be fastened. The bonnet must be closed. The engine has reached operating tempera- ture. The reverse gear must not be engaged. The vehicle must not be on a very steep slope.

The engine does not turn off for various rea- sons

Before stopping the vehicle, the system verifies whether certain conditions are met. The engine does not switch off, in the following situations for example: The engine has not yet reached the required temperature for the Start-Stop mode. The temperature selected on the climate control has not been reached. The interior temperature is very high/low. De-icing function button activated. Park assist is switched on. The battery is very low. The steering wheel is overly turned or is being turned. If there is a danger of misting. After engaging reverse gear. In case of a very steep gradient.

is displayed on the instrument cluster screen; it is also displayed in the driver informa- tion system, .

The engine starts by itself

When stopped, the normal system mode may be interrupted in the following situations. The engine restarts without the driver's intervention. The interior temperature differs from the tem- perature selected on the climate control. Defrost function button activated .

The brake is pressed several times in a row. The battery is not charged enough. High electricity consumption.

Additional information related to the auto- matic gearbox

The engine stops when the selector lever is in D, N and S, as well as in Tiptronic mode. With the selector lever in P, the engine will also remain switched off when you take your foot off the brake pedal. In order to start the engine up again the ac- celerator must be pressed, or another gear en- gaged or the brake released. If the selector lever is placed in R while stopped, the engine will start up again. Change from D to P to prevent the engine from accidentally starting when passing through R.

Additional information about vehicles with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

In vehicles with ACC function, the engine will start up again in certain operating conditions if the radar sensor detects that the vehicle ahead drives off again.

Driving

137

Start-Stop system

WARNING Never switch the engine off until the vehi- cle is stationary. The operation of the brake and steering will not be fully guaranteed. More force will be needed to turn the steer- ing wheel or to brake. You could suffer an accident and even serious injuries. To avoid injury, make sure that the Start- Stop system is switched off when working in the engine compartment  page 137.

NOTICE The Start-Stop system must always be switched off when driving through flooded areas  page 129.

Note In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, you can control whether the engine should switch off or not by reducing or increasing the brake force applied. While the vehicle re- mains stopped, the engine will not stop if the brake pedal is slightly pressed, in traffic jams with frequent stopping and starting for exam- ple. As soon as strong pressure is applied to the brake pedal, the engine will stop. When stopped, the brake pedal must be kept pressed to ensure that the vehicle does not move. If the engine stalls with a manual gear- box, it can be directly started up again by immediately pressing the clutch pedal.

If the lever is placed in position D, N or S after engaging reverse gear, 10 km/h (6 mph) in a forwards direction must be reached for the system to be in a condition to stop the engine.

Manually connecting and discon- necting the Start-Stop system

Fig. 98  Centre console: Start-Stop system button.

If you do not wish to use the system, you can switch it off manually: To manually switch on/off the Start-Stop sys- tem, press the button  Fig. 98 The button symbol remains lit up in yellow when the system is switched off.

Note The system switches on every time the en- gine is turned off voluntarily.

Troubleshooting

Indications for the driver on the instrument cluster screen Start-Stop system deactivated. Start the engine manually

This indication shows that the Start-Stop sys- tem cannot restart the engine. This happens for 2 reasons: if the driver's door has been opened or if the driver has unbuckled the seat belt. Start-Stop system: Fault! Function not available

There is a fault in the Start-Stop system. Take the vehicle to a workshop to have the fault re- paired.

138

Driving

Manual gearbox Changing gears

Fig. 99  Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speed manual gearbox.

Gear positions are indicated on the gear lever  Fig. 99. Depress the clutch and keep your foot as far as it will go. Move the gear lever to the desired position. Release the clutch.

Engaging reverse gear

Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stopped.

Depress the clutch and keep your foot as far as it will go. With the gear lever in neutral, push it down, move it all the way to the left and then forwards to select reverse gear  Fig. 99 R . Release the clutch.

Changing to lower gears

When driving, you should always change down through the gears progressively, i.e. to the gear immediately below when engine RPM is not tool high   . Skipping one or several gears when changing down through the gears at high speed or high RPM can cause damage to the clutch and gearbox, even if the clutch is de- pressed   .

WARNING If the engine is running, the vehicle starts moving as soon as a gear is engaged and the clutch pedal is released. This also happens if the electronic parking brake is switched on. Never engage reverse gear while the vehi- cle is in motion.

WARNING Changing down through the gears incor- rectly by selecting a gear that is too low can lead to loss of control of the vehicle and cause accidents and serious injuries.

NOTICE Engaging a gear that is too low when driving at high speed or at high engine RPM can cause considerable damage to the clutch and gearbox. This can happen even if the clutch pedal is kept depressed and the gear is not engaged.

NOTICE Consider the following to avoid damage and premature wear: Do not rest your hand on the gear lever while driving. The pressure exerted by the hand is transmitted to the gearbox forks. Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal; even if the pressure seems insignificant, it can cause premature wear of the clutch disc. Use the footrest when not changing gears. Make sure the vehicle is completely stop- ped before engaging reverse gear. When changing gears, always fully de- press the clutch. Do not ride the clutch with the engine running when the vehicle is stopped on an uphill slope.

Driving

139

DSG automatic transmission

DSG automatic transmis- sion

Introduction Your vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled manual gearbox. Torque between the engine and the gearbox is transmitted via two independent clutches. They replace the torque converter found on conventional auto- matic gearboxes and allow for smooth, uninter- rupted acceleration of the vehicle. The Tiptronic system allows the driver to change gears manually  page 140, Chang- ing gear in Tiptronic mode.

Gear selector positions

Fig. 100  Selector lever lock.

The selector lever position is shown when the corresponding sign lights up. With the selector lever in the manual gearbox positions M, D and S, the engaged gear is also shown on the dis- play.

- Parking lock

When the lever is put in this position, the drive wheels are locked. The lever should only be put in P when the vehicle is stationary   . To put the lever in P or take it out of P , the locking button must be pressed and held and the brake pedal pressed simultaneously.

Reverse gear

Reverse gear must be engaged only when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is idling   . To move the lever to position R, the lock button must be pressed and held while pressing the brake pedal at the same time. The reverse lights come on when the lever is in the R position with the ignition on.

Neutral

In this position, the gear is in neutral. Press the brake pedal to move the lever from N to D/S when the vehicle is stationary or at speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph)   .

Permanent forward drive position

The lever in the D/S position enables the gears to be operated in normal mode (D) or sport mode (S). To select Sport mode S, move the lever backwards. Pushing the lever again will select normal mode D. The selected driving mode is shown on the instrument panel display. In normal mode (D), the gearbox selects the best gear ratio. This depends on the engine load, the road speed and the dynamic gear control programme (DCP). Sport mode (S) should be selected for a sporty driving style. This setting makes use of the en- gine's maximum power output. When acceler- ating the gear shifts will be noticeable. Under certain circumstances (e.g. on mountain roads) it can be advantageous to switch tip- tronic mode  page 140, to adapt the gears to suit the road conditions.

Selector lever lock

In P or N, the lever lock prevents a gear range from being engaged, and prevents the vehicle from moving off accidentally. To release the gear lever lock, press and hold the brake pedal with the ignition on. At the same time, press the lever lock in the direction of the arrow  Fig. 100. As a reminder to the driver, when the lever is in positions P or N the following indication will be shown on the screen:

140

Driving

When stationary, apply foot brake while selecting a gear.

The lever is not locked if it is moved quickly through position N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). This makes it possible, for instance, to rock the vehicle backwards and forwards if it is stuck in snow or mud. The lever lock engages automatically if the brake pedal is not pressed and the lever is in position N for more than about one second at a speed of less than 5 km/h (3 mph).

WARNING Take care not to press the accelerator pedal when the vehicle is stopped. The vehi- cle could start moving immediately (in some cases even if the parking brake is engaged) resulting in the risk of an accident. Never move the lever to R or P when driving. Failure to follow this instruction could result in an accident or failure. With the lever in any position (except P), the foot brake must be pushed down when- ever the engine is running. This is because an automatic gearbox still transmits power even at idling speed. While you are selecting a gear and the ve- hicle is stopped with the engine running, do not accelerate. Failure to follow this instruc- tion could result in an accident.

As a driver you should never leave your ve- hicle if the engine is running and a gear is engaged. Switch on the electronic parking brake and select the parking lock (P).

Note If the lever is moved accidentally to N when driving, release the accelerator and let the engine speed drop to idling before selecting gear range D or S again. Should the power supply to the lever be in- terrupted in position P, it will not be possible to move the lever. If this should happen the manual release can be used  page 144.

Note If the lever lock does not engage, there is a fault. The transmission is interrupted to pre- vent the vehicle from accidentally moving. Follow the procedure below in order for the lever lock to engage again: With a 6-speed gearbox: press the brake pedal and release it again. With a 7-speed gearbox: press the brake pedal. Move the lever to position P or N and subsequently engage a gear.

If a gear has been selected, the vehicle does not move forwards or back. Proceed to the next mode:

When the vehicle does not move in the required direction, the system may not have the gear range correctly engaged. Press the brake pedal and engage the gear range again. If the vehicle still does not move in the re- quired direction, there is a system malfunc- tion. Seek specialist assistance and have the system checked.

Changing gear in Tiptronic mode

Fig. 101  Lever in the Tiptronic position

Driving

141

DSG automatic transmission

Fig. 102  Steering wheel: automatic gearbox levers

Tiptronic gives the driver the option to change gears manually. When you change to the Tiptronic programme, the vehicle remains in the currently selected gear. This is possible as long as the system is not changing gear automatically due to a traf- fic situation.

Using Tiptronic with the selector lever

It is possible to change to Tiptronic mode, both when the vehicle is stopped and while driving. Starting from the D/S position, move the lever to the right. The instrument panel will show whether the lever is in manual or Tiptronic mode (e.g. M4). Move the lever forwards + or backwards to change up or down a gear  Fig. 101. To exit Tiptronic mode, move the lever to the left.

Using Tiptronic with the steering wheel pad- dles

The gearshift paddles can be used when the selector lever is in the D/S or M (Tiptronic) posi- tions. Press the + gear shift paddle to change up a gear  Fig. 102. Press the gear shift paddle to change down a gear. To exit the Tiptronic mode, pull the right-hand lever towards the steering wheel for approxi- mately 1 second or move the lever to the left. If the paddles are not operated for some time and the lever is not in the Tiptronic selection position, it will automatically exit from Tiptronic mode.

NOTICE When accelerating, if a higher gear is not selected, it will automatically change shortly before reaching the maximum per- mitted RPM. Also, if a lower gear is selected, the system will not change until it detects that the en- gine will not reach its maximum RPM.

Driving with an automatic gearbox The gearbox changes gear ratios automati- cally as the vehicle moves.

The engine can only start with the selector lever in position P or N. At low temperatures (below -10 C), the engine can only start with the selector lever in position P.

Driving down hills

Under certain circumstances it may be advan- tageous to use the Tiptronic mode to select the gear manually according to driving conditions   .

Stop/Park

On level ground, just use the lever to engage position P. On slopes you should first apply the parking brake and then set the lever to P. This makes it easier to remove the lever from posi- tion P when starting. If the driver door is opened and the lever is not in position P, the vehicle could move. The fol- lowing warning is displayed on the instrument panel: Gear change: selector lever in the drive position!. Additionally, a buzzer will sound.

Stopping on a downhill

Always apply the brake pedal firmly to prevent the vehicle from moving; if necessary, apply the electronic parking brake   . Do not accelerate while a range of gears is en- gaged to prevent the car from rolling downhill   .

142

Driving

1) Vehicles without a driver information system: the warning lamp flashes slowly. Vehicles with a driver information system: the warning lamp remains on.

Starting off uphill with the Auto Hold function Once you have engaged a gear, take your foot off the brake pedal and gently press the accelerator.

Starting off uphill without the Auto Hold function Pull on the electronic parking brake button. Once you have engaged a gear, gently press the accelerator and pull on the electronic park- ing brake button.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings   in Gear selector positions on page 140. Never allow the brake to rub and do not use the brake pedal too often or for long periods, as the brakes can overheat. This reduces the braking power, increases the braking dis- tance or even causes a brake system fault. If you have to stop on a hill, keep the vehi- cles brakes applied with the brake pedal or parking brake.

NOTICE If you stop the vehicle on a gradient, do not attempt to stop it from rolling by depressing the accelerator when a gear has been selec- ted. This could cause overheating and dam- age the automatic gearbox. If you allow the vehicle to roll with the lever in position N and the engine off, the auto- matic gearbox will be damaged by lack of lubrication. In certain driving situations or traffic condi- tions, the gears could overheat and be dam- aged! If the warning lamp lights up, stop the vehicle as soon as you can and wait for the gearbox to cool  page 144. If the gearbox operates with the backup programme, take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have the fault repaired with- out delay.

Kick-down

The kick-down device provides maximum ac- celeration when the gear selector lever is in the positions D, S or in Tiptronic mode. When the accelerator pedal is pressed right down, the automatic gearbox will shift down to a lower gear, depending on road speed and engine speed. This takes advantage of the maximum acceleration of the vehicle   . The upshift to the next higher gear is delayed until the engine reaches maximum rpm.

WARNING Please note that if the road surface is slip- pery or wet, the kickdown feature could cause the driving wheels to spin, which could result in skidding.

Launch-control program The Launch-control programme enables maxi- mum acceleration from a standstill. Condition: the engine must have reached oper- ating temperature and the steering wheel must not be turned. The engine speed for Launch-control is differ- ent for petrol and diesel engines. To use the Launch-control it is necessary to disconnect the traction control (TCS) using the infotainment system menu  page 35. The warning lamp will stay switched on or will flash slowly depending on whether or not the vehicle has a driver information system. On vehicles with the driver information system, the ESC lamp lights up permanently and the corresponding text message Stability con- trol deactivated (temporary) appears on the instrument panel to indicate the deactiva- tion status. With the engine running, switch off traction control (TCS)  page 1521).

Driving

143

DSG automatic transmission

Press the brake pedal with your left foot and hold it down for at least one second. Turn the selector lever to the S or Tiptronic position, or else select the sport driving mode from the Drive Profile. With your right foot, press the accelerator down to the full throttle or kick-down posi- tion. The engine speed will stabilise at about 3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about 2,000 rpm (diesel engine). Take your left foot off the brake pedal. The vehicle starts with maximum acceleration.

WARNING Always adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Only use the Launch control programme when road and traffic conditions permit, and make sure your manner of driving and accel- erating the vehicle does not inconvenience or endanger other road users. Make sure that the ESC remains switched on. Please note that when the TCS and ESC are deactivated, the wheels may start to spin, causing the vehicle to lose grip. Acci- dent hazard! After moving off, the ESC sport mode should be deactivated by briefly pressing the

button.

Note After using the Launch control programme, the temperature in the gearbox may have in- creased considerably. In this case, the pro- gram may be out of service for a few minutes. The program may be used again once the cooling phase is complete. Accelerating with the Launch control pro- gramme places a heavy load on all parts of the vehicle. This can result in increased wear and tear.

Inertia mode The inertia mode allows you to travel certain distances without using the accelerator, which saves fuel. Plan ahead and use the inertia mode to let the vehicle roll.

Activation of the inertia mode

Condition: lever in position D, slopes of less than 12% and speeds between 20 and 130 km/h (12 and 80 mph). Gently take your foot off the accelerator. The indication will be shown on the instrument panel , the engaged gear and current con- sumption will disappear and the word Inertia will appear. The gears will automatically disengage and the vehicle will roll freely, without the effect of the engine brake. While the vehicle rolls, the engine runs at idling speed.

Stopping inertia mode Press the brake or the accelerator pedal. To take advantage of the engine's inertia mode, simply remove your foot from the accelerator. Applying both the inertia mode (= prolonged section with less energy) and inertia discon- nection (= shorter section without the need for fuel) facilitates improved fuel consumption and emission balance. If the vehicle has SEAT Drive Profile  page 147, the inertia mode can be acti- vated in Normal, Eco and Individual modes. In Eco mode, it is activated whenever the op- erating conditions are met, regardless of the smoothness with which the foot is removed from the accelerator.

WARNING If the inertia mode has been switched on, take into account, when approaching an ob- stacle, that the vehicle will not decelerate in the usual manner: risk of accident! When using inertia mode while travelling down hills, the vehicle can increase speed: risk of accident! If other users drive your vehicle, warn them about inertia mode.

144

Driving

NOTICE The driver message Inertia is only displayed with the current consumption. In inertia mode the gear will no longer be displayed (for ex- ample D or E will appear instead of D7 or E7).

NOTICE The inertia mode will be automatically dis- connected on gradients steeper than 15%.

Note In the case of the TDI and 2.0l TSI engines, the inertia mode will only work in the Eco driving mode.

Troubleshooting

The engine does not start

The indicator lamp lights up green. The brake is not depressed, e.g. when trying to change the gear selector lever. To select a gear range, press the brake pedal.

Selector lever lock

The control lamp flashes green. The selector lever locking button is not en- gaged. The vehicle is prevented from moving forwards. Engage the selector lever lock.

Indications on the instrument cluster display:

Clutch

Clutch overheated! Please stop!

The clutch has overheated and could be damaged. Stop and wait for the gearbox to cool with the engine at idling speed and the selector lever in position P. When the warning lamp and the driver message switch off, have the fault corrected by a specialised workshop without delay. If they do not turn off, do not continue driving. Seek specialist assistance.

Faults in the gearbox

Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehi- cle and place the lever in the P

There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi- cle in a safe place and do not continue driving. Seek specialist assistance.

Gearbox: System fault! You may continue driving

Have the fault corrected by a specialised workshop without delay.

Gearbox: System fault! You can continue driving with restrictions. Reverse gear disabled

Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have the fault repaired.

Gearbox: System fault! You can continue driving in D until switch- ing off the engine

Park the vehicle in a safe place. Seek special- ist assistance.

Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your driving accordingly

Continue driving at moderate speeds. When the warning lamp switches off, you can con- tinue driving in a normal manner.

Gearbox: press the brake and engage a gear again

If the warning was caused by the temperature of the gearbox, this driver message will be dis- played when the gearbox has cooled again.

Back-up programme

If all the gear positions are shown over a light background on the instrument cluster, there is a system fault and the automatic gearbox will operate with the backup programme. It is still possible to drive the vehicle, however, at low speeds and within a selected range of gears. Driving in reverse gear may not be possible.

Driving

145

Driving on slopes

Manual release of the selector lever

Fig. 103  Selector lever: manual release from position P.

In the event of a power failure when starting (e.g. discharged battery), the lever will remain locked in position P. To move it to position N to move the vehicle, there is an emergency re- lease device under the centre console, on the right side. Releasing the selector lever requires a certain degree of practical skill. Removing the cover from the selector lever: Connect the electronic parking brake   . Carefully pull the corners of the selector lever boot and twist it upwards over the lever handle. Releasing the selector lever: Using the flat part of a screwdriver, press the yellow tab sideways and keep it pressed down  Fig. 103.

Press the lock button on the selector lever and move it to position N. After completing the emergency release, re- attach the selector lever boot to the gearbox console.

WARNING Do not move the lever from position P if the parking brake is not firmly engaged. If you still think the car could move, press the brake pedal. Danger! The vehicle could move in an unforeseen way and cause an accident or serious injury.

Driving on slopes Hill Hold Control (HHC)

When driving up a slope or driving in Offroad with the lever in position D/S, stopping the vehi- cle switches on the hill hold control. When the brake pedal is released, the assistant keeps the vehicles brakes applied for a few seconds to give the driver time to press the ac- celerator pedal and continue driving.

downhill assistant Downhill speed control is activated when the gear lever is in the D/S position and the brake is applied. An appropriate lower gear is engaged.

The assistant attempts to maintain the speed at which the vehicle was travelling when the brake was applied, within logical limits. It may be necessary to correct the speed by pressing the brake. The assistant can only change down as far as 3rd gear. It is possible that on very steep slopes you may have to switch to tiptronic mode and thus manually change down to 2nd or 1st gear to take advantage of engine braking and take the load off the brake system. Downhill speed control is deactivated as soon as the road levels out again or you press the accelerator pedal. On vehicles with a cruise control system  page 158, downhill speed control is activa- ted when you set a cruising speed.

WARNING The downhill speed control cannot defy the laws of physics. Therefore, speed cannot be maintained constant in all situations. Always be prepared to use the brakes!

Hill Descent Control (HDC) Valid for vehicles: 4Drive all-wheel drive

Hill Descent Control limits the speed on steep descents by automatically braking all four wheels, both when moving forward and in re- verse. As the anti-lock brake system remains active, it prevents the wheels from locking.

146

Driving

In vehicles with manual transmission, the Hill Descent Control adapts the theoretical speed without slowing the engine below its idling speed.

Control lamps

It lights up white. Hill Descent Control is active. It lights up grey. Hill Descent Control is not active. The system is switched on, but is not adjust-

ing.

After starting the descent of a slope below 30 km/h (18 mph), speed is limited to a min- imum of 2 km/h (1 mph) and a maximum of 30 km/h (18 mph). When appropriate, the driver may increase or decrease the speed within the limit by pressing the accelerator or the brake. At this point the function is interrupted and, if necessary, it is then reactivated. Even so, it is imperative that the surface guaran- tees sufficient adhesion. For this reason, the Hill Descent Control will not fulfil its function when, for example, descending a slope with a frozen or slippery surface. Hill Descent Control is available when the dash panel display shows the message  . Hill Descent Control automatically intervenes if the following conditions are met:

The vehicle engine is running. The Offroad driving profile has been selec- ted  page 148. Driving at a speed below 30 km/h (18 mph) (the message is shown on the dash panel display). The slope of the descent is at least 10% when driving forward and 9% when driving in reverse. The brake and the accelerator are not pressed. Hill Descent Control is deactivated on pressing the brake and the accelerator or if the slope is below 5%. The function can be switched off manually in the infotainment system using the > HDC function button.

WARNING Always be ready to brake. Otherwise, an ac- cident could occur and cause injury. Hill Descent Control is only an auxiliary system that in some situations may not suffi- ciently brake the vehicle when going down a slope. The speed of the vehicle may increase de- spite the intervention of Hill Descent Control.

Steering Information relating to different vehi- cle processes.

To make the vehicle more difficult to steal, al- ways lock the steering before leaving the it.

Steering

On vehicles with electromechanical steering, the power steering automatically adjusts ac- cording to the driving speed, the steering wheel torque and the orientation of the wheels. The power steering only works when the engine is running. If the power steering does not work properly or does not work at all, you will have to use much more strength than usual to turn the steering wheel.

Progressive steering

Depending on the vehicles features, it may or may not incorporate a progressive steering sys- tem. In city traffic you do not need to turn so much on parking, manoeuvring or in very tight turns. On roads or motorway, progressive steering transmits, for example, in bends, a sportier, more direct and noticeably more dynamic driv- ing sensation.

Steering assist

This help assists the driver in critical situations. It recommends turning the steering wheel to per- form a corrective manoeuvre (counter-steer- ing), turning slightly to avoid skidding   .

Driving

147

SEAT ri e Profiles

WARNING Steering assist helps the driver in critical sit- uations. The driver is the person who has to control the vehicle's steering at all times.

Troubleshooting

Steering fault

The warning lamp lights up red. There is a fault in the power steering. Stop driving! Seek specialist assistance. Do not allow the vehicle to be towed on its own wheels.

Steering fault

The control lamp lights up or flashes yellow. The steering is stiffer or reacts more sensitively than usual. The control lamp lights up and remains lit: Restart the engine and drive slowly for a short distance. Contact a specialist workshop if the control lamp remains on. OR: the 12-volt battery was disconnected and reconnected. Drive slowly for a short dis- tance. The control lamp flashes: Turn the steering wheel slightly from one side to the other. Turn off the ignition and turn it on again.

Consider the warnings shown on the instru- ment cluster display. If the control lamp continues flashing after the ignition has been switched on, do not con- tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.

SEAT Drive Profiles Introduction

The driver can use the drive profiles to adapt various features of the vehicle's systems to the current driving situation, the desired driving comfort and an economical driving style. Some of the systems that can be adapted are the suspension, steering, engine and air condition- ing. Depending on the vehicles equipment, various drive profiles can be selected. The degree of in- fluence of the vehicle's systems on the different drive profiles depends on the vehicles equip- ment.

Engine

Depending on the profile selected, the engine responds more quickly or smoothly to the ac- celerator being pressed. When the Eco profile is selected, the Start-stop function is activated. In vehicles with automatic transmission, the gear change timing is changed to put the changes at higher or lower revolutions. The Eco profile activates the Inertia function, thereby re-

ducing consumption. The rest of the driving pro- files will activate the inertia use function when the gear selector lever is not in the S position, depending on how the accelerator pedal is re- leased  page 143. When the vehicle is turned on again, the function is activated by default to reduce consumption. With manual transmission, the ECO profile changes the gear change recommendations to facilitate more efficient driving.

Adaptive chassis control (DCC)

The DCC continuously adapts the damping of the suspension system to the characteristics of the road surface and the driving situation (speed, acceleration and steering wheel angle) according to the selected driving profile. In the event of a fault in the DCC, the following mes- sage is displayed on the instrument cluster dis- play> Fault: damping adjustment.

Steering

The operation of the power steering is modified and adapted to the selected profile to offer the best behaviour for each situation.

Air conditioning

Climatronic can operate in Eco mode, espe- cially restricting fuel consumption.

148

Driving

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Depending on the driving profile, the perform- ance of the ACC to allow adaptation to a speed that is more sporty or fuel consumption- friendly.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

In the Offroad and Snow driving profiles, the ESC adjusts to adapt to the characteristics of the terrain.

PreCrash system

The PreCrash system adapts according to the selected configuration  page 45.

Hill descent control assistant

This assistant can be activated or deactivated in the Offroad profile. Hill Descent Control lim- its the speed on steep descents by automati- cally braking all four wheels, both when moving forward and in reverse.

Hill Start Assist

It is possible to activate or deactivate this assis- tant in the Offroad profile.

Selecting a driving profile

Fig. 104  Centre console: Driving Experience button.

The drive profile can be selected when the igni- tion is switched on and the vehicle is stationary or moving   .

Selecting a driving profile Turn the Driving Experience Button to select the desired driving profile  Fig. 104.

Displaying the drive profile information To display more information on the selected drive profile, press Information in the info- tainment system.

WARNING Adjusting the driving profile while driving can distract attention from traffic and cause ac- cidents. Always drive as carefully and responsibly as possible.

Characteristics of driving profiles The icon of the selected profile is displayed on the Infotainment System screen. The selector indicates the selected profile using a LED light.

Driving pro- file

Characteristics

Places the vehicle in a low state of consumption, facilitating a fuel-saving driving style that is re- spectful to the environment.

Normal

Offers a balanced driving experi- ence, suitable for everyday use.

Sport

Provides a complete dynamic performance in the vehicle, ena- bling the user a more sporty driv- ing style.

Individual

It allows you to personalise the configuration. The functions that can be adjusted depend on the equipment fitted in the vehicle.

Driving

149

Braking system

Driving pro- file

Characteristics

Offroada)

Maintains optimal off-road driv- ing by allowing the personalisa- tion of the vehicles configuration parameters.

Snowa)

It adjusts the vehicle's behaviour for driving on slippery road surfa- ces, optimising grip and manoeu- vrability.

a) Only for 4Drive models.

WARNING Your speed and driving style must always be adjusted to visibility, weather, and traffic conditions.

Note Regardless of the driving profile selected when the ignition is switched off, all systems will start up Normal mode. To select another driving profile use the rotary (Driving Experi- ence button). Use of the Eco profile is not recommended when driving with a trailer.

Braking system Information about the brakes

During the first 200 to 300 km, new brake pads do not provide maximum braking power and still have to settle   . When running in the brake pads, the emergency braking distance is longer than after they have been run in. During the run-in, avoid sharp braking and situations that place a lot of demand on the brakes, e.g. driving too close to another ve- hicle. Brake pad wear depends to a large extent on the conditions in which the vehicle is used, and driving style. If the vehicle is frequently used in city traffic and for short distances, or for sporty driving, brake pad thickness should be checked regularly at a specialist workshop. Driving with wet brakes, e.g. after driving through water, in heavy rain or after washing the vehicle, braking performance may be af- fected by wet brake discs, or even frozen discs in winter. The driver should be ready to brake harder. If the brake discs and pads have a layer of salt on them, the braking performance is reduced and the braking distance increases. When driving on salted roads without braking for some time, the layer of salt should be re- moved by carefully applying the brakes a few times   .

Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the brake pads increase if the vehicle is left unused for a long time, if it is not driven for many kilo- metres. If corrosion is present, it is recommen- ded to clean the discs and pads by braking hard several times while driving at high speed. Make sure that you do not endanger any other vehicles or road users   .

WARNING Driving with worn brake pads or a defective brake system can lead to accidents and seri- ous injuries. If you suspect that the brake pads are worn or that the brake system is faulty, have the brake pads checked immediately by a spe- cialist workshop and replaced if they are worn.

WARNING The braking performance of new brake pads is not optimal. During the first 300 km, new brake pads do not provide maximum braking power and still have to settle. This can be counteracted by applying more pressure to the brake pedal. When brake pads are new, drive with extra care to reduce the risk of accidents, serious injury or loss of control of the vehicle. Only perform hard braking to clean the brake system when permitted by the traffic situation. Do not endanger the occupants of other vehicles. Accident hazard!

150

Driving

When running in new brake pads, do not drive too close to other vehicles or cause sit- uations that would require the brakes to be applied heavily.

WARNING When the brakes overheat, their braking per- formance drops and the braking distance in- creases. When driving downhill, particular demand is placed on the brakes and they heat up very quickly. Before a long steep slope, reduce speed and change down into a lower gear or range. Therefore, using the engine brake relieves the brakes. If you wish to retrofit a front spoiler, inte- gral trim or other accessories, ensure that the air inlet around the brakes is not reduced, as otherwise the brake system could over- heat. Please also note the information on brake fluid  page 303.

WARNING Wet, frozen or salt-covered brakes take lon- ger to brake and increases the braking dis- tance. Test the brakes carefully. Always dry the brakes and free them from ice and salt by braking repeatedly, if permit- ted by visibility, weather, road surface and traffic conditions.

WARNING When braking manoeuvres are started auto- matically, the brake pedal may move auto- matically in the application direction. Do not put your foot under the brake pedal. Risk of injury!

Note Never let the brakes drag by leaving your foot on the pedal when it is not necessary to brake. This can cause the brakes to over- heat, resulting in increased brake travel and wear. Please consider the important notes on brake fluid  page 303.

Note Regularly check the thickness of the brake pads visually through the holes in the rims or from the underside of the vehicle. If nec- essary, the wheels should be removed for a more thorough inspection. SEAT recom- mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

Troubleshooting

Defect in the brake system

The warning lamp lights up red. A message may also be displayed.

 Stop driving!

Inform a specialist workshop and request a brake system inspection.

Brake pad wear indicator

The control lamp switches on yellow. The front brake pads are worn. Contact a specialised workshop immediately. Get all the brake pads inspected and replace if necessary.

Brake assist systems Information relating to brake assist systems

Brake assist systems can help the driver in crit- ical driving or braking situations. The driver is responsible for driving safely   . When the brake assist systems are regulating the brakes, the brake pedal may move or make noises. Even so, continue to brake with the nec- essary force and control the trajectory of the vehicle if necessary. Depending on the equipment, the ESC and TCS settings may be changed in the vehicle. The ESC, ABS and TCS can only operate cor- rectly if the four wheels are fitted with the stipu- lated tyres   . If a fault occurs in the ABS, the ESC, TCS and EDS also cease to function.

Driving

151

Brake assist systems

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

The ESC helps to reduce the risk of skidding and to improve stability in certain driving situa- tions   .

Traction control (TCS)

The TCS reduces the driving force on skidding wheels and adapts this force to suit the road surface conditions. The TCS facilitates starting, acceleration and hill climbing   .

Electronic brake pressure distribution (EBV)

Electronic brake force distribution (EBV) regu- lates the braking force between the front and rear axles. Excessive braking of the rear axle is avoided and the vehicle remains stable during the braking operation.

Anti-lock braking system (ABS),

The ABS can prevent the wheels from locking up under braking until shortly before the vehicle comes to a stop, and helps the driver maintain control of the steering and the vehicle   .

Brake assist (BAS)

Brake assist (BAS) can help to reduce the brak- ing distance. Brake Assist increases the pressure exerted by the driver when the brake pedal is depressed quickly in an emergency.

Electronic differential lock (EDS and XDS)

The EDS automatically brakes skidding wheels and transmits the driving force to the other driv- ing wheels. The XDS improves traction by applying the brakes to keep the vehicle in its lane.

Multi-collision brake

The multi-collision brake automatically triggers braking if the airbag control unit detects a colli- sion in the event of an accident. Automatic braking requirements: The driver is not pressing the accelerator pedal.

Tractor-trailer sway mitigation

If the vehicle is pulling a trailer, it will control the following: tractor-trailers tend to sway. When the swaying of the trailer is felt by the vehicle and detected by the ESC, it will automatically brake the towing vehicle within the limits of the system and mitigate the sway. Tractor-trailer sway mitigation is not available in all countries  page 271.

WARNING Smart brake assist technology cannot over- come the limits imposed by the laws of phys- ics and only works within the limits of the sys- tems. Driving at high speed on icy, slippery or wed road surfaces can cause a loss of control of the vehicle and serious injury to the driver and passengers. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Never take any risk that compromises safety. Brake assist systems cannot prevent an ac- cident if you are driving too close to other vehicles. Always use suitable tyres. Driving stability depends on tyre grip.

WARNING The efficiency of the ESC can be significantly reduced if components or systems that af- fect the driving dynamics are not properly maintained or are not working properly. This can particularly occur if changes are made to the suspension or unauthorised rim/tyre combinations are used. Ensure that vehicle conversions and modi- fications are only made by specialised work- shops. Always use suitable tyres. Driving stability depends on tyre grip.

152

Driving

1) Only for 4Drive models.

WARNING When driving without a brake servo or with restricted brake servo functions, the braking distance can increase considerably and can cause accidents and serious injuries. If the brake servo is not working, the brake pedal has to be pressed harder, as the brak- ing distance increases due to the lack of as- sistance from the servo brake.

Connecting and disconnecting the ESC and TCS

The ESC is switched on automatically when the engine is started, and only works when the en- gine is running and includes the ABS, EDS and TCS systems. The TCS function should only be switched off in situations in which traction is insufficient. Depending on the finishes and versions, there is the possibility of disconnecting only the TCS or activating the ESC in Sport mode.

Disconnecting and connecting the TCS The TCS can be activated or deactivated in the infotainment system using the function button > Driver assistance > ESC Menu  page 35. When the TC is switched off, the control lamp lights up on the instrument cluster.

Disconnecting and connecting the ESC in Sport mode The ECS in Sport mode can be activated or deactivated in the infotainment system using the function button > Driver assistance > ESC Menu  page 35. When Sport mode is connected, the interven- tions of the ESC to stabilise the vehicle, and the traction control (TCS) interventions are limited. In vehicles with 4-wheel drive, the TCS is dis- connected completely . In addition, the control lamp lights up on the instrument cluster.

ESC in Offroad mode1)

Turn the (Driving Experience button) to se- lect the Offroad profile to be switched on  page 148. The interventions of the TCS, as well as of the EDS and the ABS system adapt to irregular terrain. In the following exceptional situations it may make sense to activate the Offroad mode to allow the wheels to spin: When swinging the vehicle to get it unstuck. Driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces. When driving on rough terrain with much of the car's weight is lifted off the wheels (axle articulation). Steep descents with braking on unpaved ter- rain.

For your safety we recommend that you turn off the Offroad mode when it is not absolutely necessary. To disconnect the Offroad mode, select a dif- ferent driving mode.

ESC in Snow mode1)

Use the rotary (Driving Experience button) to select the Snow profile to be switched on  page 148. Traction control system (TCS) interventions adjust to the adhesion of snowy roads. To disconnect the Snow mode, select a differ- ent driving mode.

WARNING The ESC Sport mode should be activated only when traffic conditions and the ability of the driver allow it. Danger of skidding! With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising function will be limited to allow for a sportier drive. The vehicle may skid.

Driving

153

Brake assist systems

WARNING You should only activate the Offroad Mode or disable the TCS if the experience of the driver and traffic conditions allow it. Danger of skidding! With the Offroad mode activated, the sta- bilisation function is limited. In particular, if the road is too smooth and slippery, the driv- ing wheels could spin and the vehicle could skid.

Note If the TCS is disconnected or Sport mode is selected, the cruise control system will be switched off.

Troubleshooting

The ABS does not work properly or does not work at all

The control lamp switches on yellow. Contact a specialised workshop. The vehi- cles brakes still work without the ABS.

The ESC or TCS is regulating

The control lamp flashes yellow.

ESC fault

The control lamp switches on yellow. The ESC has been switched off. There is a fault or defect. Turn off the ignition and turn it on again. If possible, drive for a short distance at 15-20 km/h (9-12 mph). If the control lamp is still on, go to a speci- alised workshop.

The brake assist systems make noises

When the described brake assist systems inter- vene, you may hear noises.

WARNING When the ignition is switched on, the sta- tus of the brake system and the brake assist functions are automatically checked. The control lamps on the instrument cluster light up briefly and then go out. Any indicator lamp that remains on indicates a fault. Seek qualified technical assistance immediately. If the brake system warning light comes on together with the control lamp, the ABS regulation function may not work and the rear wheels may lock relatively quickly when braking. This can lead to loss of control of the vehicle! If possible, slow down and drive slowly and carefully to the nearest specialist workshop to have the brake system inspec- ted. During this journey, avoid heavy braking and any sudden manoeuvres.

If the control lamp does not go out, or comes on while driving, it means that the ABS is not working properly. The vehicle can only be stopped using normal braking (without ABS). In this case the protective ABS func- tion will not be available. Go to a specialised workshop as soon as possible.

154

Assistant systems

Assistant systems General notes

Safety advice

WARNING Responsibility for driving rests with the driver at all times. The drive assist systems are not a replacement for driver attention. Focus all your attention on driving and be prepared to intervene at all times. Use the drive assist systems only when conditions allow. The driving style must al- ways be suitable for the weather, visibility, road and traffic conditions. In order for drive assist systems to react correctly, sensors and cameras must oper- ate without limitations. Please read the notes on sensors and cameras in this chapter.

Note Keep in mind the specific rules of each country, especially when it comes to driving, formation of an emergency corridor, braking distance, speed, parking position, wheel po- sition, etc. The driver is solely responsible for always complying with the specific regula- tions of each country. The area in front of and around the radar sensor should not be covered with adhesives, additional headlights or similar items, as this

could have a negative impact on the oper- ation of the assistants. If the vehicle is not properly repaired or structural modifications are made to it, the operation of the assistants may be affected. The repair and adjustment of sensors and cameras requires special knowledge and tools. It is recommended to visit a SEAT deal- ership for this purpose.

System limits

WARNING Drive assist systems can not overcome the laws of physics. Depending on the circum- stances, a collision may not be avoidable. Warnings, notices and indicator lamps may not be displayed on time, or may be displayed incorrectly, e.g. if a vehicle ap- proaches too quickly. Corrective interventions by drive assist systems (e.g. interventions in the steering or brakes) may be insufficient or may never oc- cur, depending on the circumstances. As a driver, you must be prepared to act at all times.

Note Due to the system's detection limits in the surroundings, the systems may not give warnings or intervene on time, or they might do so even if it is not desired. In addition, the auxiliary systems may incorrectly interpret a manoeuvre and, as a result, warn the driver in an unexpected manner. When the towing mode is selected, some assist systems may react with limitations, in an unusual way or may not be available. Keep in mind the instructions relating to the towing mode.

Button for the assistant systems

Fig. 105  On the turn light and main beam lever: key for driver assistance systems (depending on the version).

Assistant systems

155

Drive assist ensors and cameras

Fig. 106  Left side of the multifunction steering wheel: button for driver assistance systems (depending on the version).

Depending on the equipment, the button for the driver assistance systems is located on the turn signal and main beam lever or on the multifunc- tion steering wheel. This button can be used to switch the driver assistance systems in the Assistants menu on and off.

Press the button to open the Assis- tants menu. Select the assistance system in question and turn it off or on. A mark indicates that assistant system is switched on. Next, confirm the selection by pressing the  button on the multifunction steering wheel. The assistant systems can also be switched on and off in the infotainment system, in the vehi- cle settings menu  page 35.

Drive assist sensors and cameras

Front radar

Fig. 107  On the front bumper: radar sensor.

Fig. 108  Detection area.

A radar sensor may be fitted to the front bumper of the vehicle  Fig. 107. The front radar detects any objects in its detection zone  Fig. 108 and provides support for the follow- ing functions: Front Assist  page 168. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)  page 161.

The radar can have a range of up to 120m (400ft) depending on road and weather condi- tions.

WARNING The visibility of the radar sensor can be impaired by dirt or environmental influences such as rain, fog, snow, mud, dust, insects etc. In this case the Front Assist and ACC functions may stop working. The instrument panel displays the following message: No sensor vision! And the Front Assist un- available or ACC unavailable warning lights come on. Clean the sensor area on the bumper as indicated in  page 335, Cleaning the ex- terior. When the radar sensor starts correctly detecting again, the message disappears from the screen and the functions become available again.

156

Assistant systems

NOTICE If the radar sensor is dirty or poorly adjus- ted, the Front Assist system may give unnec- essary warnings and apply the brakes inap- propriately. The operation of the radar can be affected by strong reflections of the emitted signal. This may occur, for example, in an enclosed car park or due to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. guard rails or sheets used in road works). The sensor may not be adjusted correctly if it receives an impact. This may compro- mise the system's efficacy or disconnect it. If you have the feeling that the radar sensor is damaged or adjusted incorrectly, switch off the Front Assist and ACC functions to avoid any damage. If this occurs have it adjusted.

Front camera

Fig. 109  On the windscreen: field of vision of the Lane Assist system camera.

Depending on the equipment, the vehicle may be fitted with a front camera on the front wind- screen. This camera detects lane boundaries (lines) to provide support for the following func- tions: Lane Assist  page 172. Travel Assist  page 174. Emergency assist  page 176.

NOTICE To avoid affecting the operation of the sys- tems, take the following points into consider- ation: Clean the field of vision of the camera reg- ularly and make sure it is free of snow and ice. Do not cover the field of vision of the cam- era. Check that the windscreen is not damaged in the area of the camera's field of vision.

Rear radar

Fig. 110  Rear view of the vehicle: radar sensor areas.

Assistant systems

157

Drive assist ensors and cameras

Fig. 111  Sensor detection zones.

The radar sensors are located on the left and right of the bumper and are not visible from the outside  Fig. 110. The sensors monitor both the blind spot and traffic behind the vehicle  Fig. 111. They support the following functions: Lane departure warning (Side Assist)  page 178. Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA)  page 206.

Automatic deactivation of supported func- tions

The rear radar sensors deactivate automati- cally when, among other reasons, one of the sensors is detected to be permanently covered. This may be the case if, for example, there is a layer of snow or ice over one of the sensors. The relevant text message will appear in the instrument panel display.

NOTICE The radar sensors on the rear bumper may be damaged or shifted in the event of a colli- sion, for example, when entering or exiting a parking space. This may result in the system disconnecting itself, or at least possibly hav- ing its functionality diminished. In order to ensure that the radar sensors work properly, keep the rear bumper free of snow and ice and do not cover it. The rear bumper should only be painted with paint authorised by SEAT. The lane de- parture warning's functions may be limited or work incorrectly if other paints are used. The visibility of radar sensors may be af- fected due to leaves, snow, strong haze or dirt, among others. Clean the area in front of the sensors. Never use auto lane changing or the rear cross traffic alert if the radar sensors are dirty. Radar operation may also be affected if objects such as bicycle racks or luggage racks interfere with the visibility of the ra- dars.

Ultrasound sensors The bumpers are fitted with ultrasound sensors to perform the following functions:

Park Assist  page 192. Park assist plus  page 186. Rear park assist  page 190.

NOTICE Damage to the radiator grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle underbody can mod- ify the orientation of the sensors. This can af- fect the parking aid function. Have the func- tion checked by a specialised workshop. A number plate or number plate holder with dimensions that exceed the space for the number plate, or a cured or deformed number plate can cause false detections or a loss of visibility for the sensors.

Note In order to guarantee good operation, keep the sensors clean, free of snow and ice, and do not cover them with stickers or other ob- jects. If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly, unless you do so very briefly, and always keep a distance of more than 10 cm away. Fitting certain accessories to the front of the vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad- vertising, may interfere with the operation of the Park Assist.

158

Assistant systems

Area View system

Fig. 112  On the rear lid handle: top view system.

Depending on your vehicles equipment, it can be fitted with 1 or 4 cameras that provide sup- port to the following functions: Top View Camera  page 200. Rear View Camera  page 198.

WARNING Fitting a number plate frame may interfere with the view shown on the screen, as it may reduce the cameras field of vision.

NOTICE In order to guarantee good system opera- tion, keep the cameras clean, free of snow or ice, and do not cover them with stickers or other objects. The camera can be cleaned by operating the wiper. Never use abrasive cleaning products to clean the camera lens. Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice or snow from the camera lens. Doing so could damage the camera.

Cruise control system Introduction

The cruise control system (GRA) helps maintain a constant speed set by you.

Speed range

The cruise control system is available when driving in forward gear at a speed of over ap- prox. 20 km/h (15 mph).

Temporarily switching off the cruise control

The saved speed can be exceeded at any time, e.g. for overtaking. The cruise control is suspen- ded during acceleration and is then resumed with the saved speed.

Status display

When the cruise control system is switched on, the instrument cluster display shows the saved speed and the system status:

It lights up grey. The cruise control system is switched on, but regulation is not active.

It lights up green. The cruise control system is switched on and regulation is active.

If there is no speed saved, the instrument clus- ter display shows instead of speed.

Changing gears

As soon as the clutch pedal is depressed, regu- lation is suspended and resumes once the gear change has been made.

WARNING If it is impossible to drive with sufficient brak- ing distance and at a constant speed, using the cruise control system may cause acci- dents and serious injuries may occur. Do not use Travel Assist when visibility is bad, on steep roads, on windy roads or in slippery circumstances (such as snow, ice, rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads. Only use the cruise control system on paved roads with a firm surface.

Assistant systems

159

Crui e control system

Adapt your speed and safety distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit the visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- tions. After use, always switch off the speed lim- iter to prevent the speed being regulated against your wishes. It is dangerous to use a set speed which is too high for the prevailing road, traffic or weather conditions.

Operating the cruise control

Fig. 113  On the multifunction steering wheel: cruise control operation buttons.

Connecting Press the button. There is no speed saved and regulation is not yet operating.

Start regulation While driving, press the button . The cruise control system saves and regulates the current speed.

Adjusting the speed

While the GRA is set, the stored speed can be adjusted:

+ 1 km/h (1 mph) - 1 km/h (1 mph) + 10 km/h (5 mph) - 10 km/h (5 mph)

The cruise control system only operates the ac- celeration, it does not brake the vehicle.

Interrupting the adjustment Briefly press the button or press the brake pedal. The speed is stored.

Reinstating the cruise control Press the button. The cruise control system resumes the saved speed and regulates it.

Switching off Press and hold the button .

The cruise control system switches off and the saved speed is deleted.

Switching off the speed limiter Press the button. Select the speed limiter on the instrument cluster display. The cruise control system is switched off.

Troubleshooting

Cruise control fault

The control lamp switches on yellow. Abnormal operation. Switch off the cruise con- trol system and take the vehicle to a specialist workshop.

The adjustment is interrupted unexpectedly If the clutch pedal is pressed for a long time. The vehicle has exceeded the saved speed for a long time. No forward gear has been selected. A brake assistance system has intervened, e.g. TCS or ESC. Front Assist has braked the vehicle. If the fault continues, disconnect the Emer- gency Assist and consult a specialised work- shop.

160

Assistant systems

Speed limiter Introduction

The speed limited helps the driver not to ex- ceed a set speed.

Speed range

The speed limiter helps avoid exceeding a pro- grammed speed, from 30 km/h (20 mph) ap- prox. and faster.

By selecting the speed limiter

The speed limitation can be interrupted at any time by depressing the accelerator pedal fully, beyond the point of resistance. As soon as the saved speed is exceeded, the green indicator light flashes and an audible warning signal may sound. The speed is stored. The limiter is reactivated automatically after re- turning to less than the set speed.

Status display

When the speed limiter is switched on, the instrument cluster display shows the saved speed and the system status:

It lights up grey The speed limiter is switched on but reg- ulation is not active.

Lights up green The speed limiter is switched on and ac- tive.

WARNING After use, always switch off the speed limiter to prevent the speed being regulated against your wishes. The speed limiter does not relieve the driver of their responsibility to drive at the appropriate speed. Do not drive at high speed if not necessary. Using the speed limiter under adverse weather conditions is dangerous and can cause serious accidents, e.g. aquaplaning, snow, ice, leaves, etc. Only use the speed limiter when the status of the road and the weather conditions allow it.

Operating the speed limiter

Fig. 114  On the multifunction steering wheel: buttons to control the speed limiter.

Connecting Press the button. It does not take effect yet.

Start regulation While driving, press the button . The current speed is saved as a limit speed.

Adjusting the speed

The programmed speed can be set:

+ 1 km/h (1 mph) - 1 km/h (1 mph) + 10 km/h (5 mph) - 10 km/h (5 mph)

Assistant systems

161

ACC - daptive Cruise Control

Interrupting the adjustment Press the button. The speed is stored.

Reinstating the cruise control Press the button . The limiter will re-activate as soon as the vehi- cle is moving at a speed lower than the saved one.

Switching off Press and hold the button . The speed limiter switches off and the speed is deleted.

Switch to another driver assistance system Press the button. Observe the corresponding message on the instrument cluster display. The speed limiter is switched off.

Troubleshooting The speed limiter is not available

The control lamp switches on yellow. Malfunctions Switch off the speed limiter and go to a specialist workshop.

The adjustment is interrupted unexpectedly You have switched off the Electronic Stabiliza- tion Control (ESC). The brakes have overheated. Wait for the brakes to cool down and check the operation again. If the fault continues, consult a specialised workshop. For safety reasons, the speed limiter only switches off fully whenever the driver stops pressing the accelerator pedal or switches the system off manually.

ACC - Adaptive Cruise Con- trol

Introduction Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) maintains a constant speed set by the driver. When ap- proaching another vehicle in front, the ACC de- tects it and adapts the speed automatically, maintaining a distance set by the driver.

Does my vehicle have ACC?

Your vehicle has ACC if it has the ACC func- tion buttons on the multifunction steering wheel  page 90, or if it has the configuration menu in the infotainment system.

Speed range

ACC regulates at speeds between 30 and 210 km/h (20 and 130 mph). If the vehicle is fitted with an automatic gear- box, the ACC can bring the vehicle to a stand- still if a vehicle in front of it stops. If your vehicle is fitted with a manual gearbox, you must pay attention to speed and gear changes. The ACC is deactivated if the speed is too low (less than 30 km/h) of the engine RPM is too low or high.

Driving with ACC

You can override the ACC at any time. Braking interrupts the ACC. If you accelerate, regulation is interrupted during acceleration and then re- sumed.

Driver intervention prompt

ACC is subject to certain limitations inher- ent to the system. This means that the driver will have to control the speed and

distance from other vehicles in certain sit- uations. In this case, the instrument cluster display will tell you to intervene by ap- plying the brake, and an audio warning will be played.

Radar sensors

The ACC uses the front radar technology. Read its maintenance instructions and information about its limitations  page 154.

162

Assistant systems

1

2

WARNING The ACCs technology cannot overcome the system's inherent limitations or change the laws of physics. If used negligently or invol- untarily, it may cause serious accidents and injuries. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. Always be prepared to brake or accelerate. If you press the accelerator pedal the ACC will stop working. Therefore, it will not brake or request any braking intervention. Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi- bility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Do not use the ACC in poor visibility, or on roads that are steep, with lots of curves or slippery. Never use ACC when driving off-road or on unpaved roads. The system does not react in time to sta- tionary obstacles (such as a traffic jam queue). React soon enough to avoid a haz- ardous situation. The system does not react to people, an- imals or vehicles that are crossing or ap- proaching in the opposite direction. If you are driving with a spare wheel fitted, the ACC system could automatically switch off. Switch off the system when starting off. Brake immediately if the ACC does not slow down enough.

Brake immediately when a driver interven- tion instruction is displayed on the instru- ment cluster screen. If the vehicle continues to move involuntar- ily after a driver intervention prompt, brake the vehicle.

Note If the ACC does not work as described in this chapter, do not use it until it has been checked by a specialised workshop. Visiting a SEAT dealership is recommended.

ACC operation

Fig. 115  On the instrument panel display: ACC active.

Fig. 116  On the multifunction steering wheel: buttons for operating the ACC.

 Fig. 115

Vehicle ahead detected. It will light up if the distance to the vehicle is adjusted. Selected distance level 2.

This information can be displayed on the cen- tral panel of the Assistants view, or in the left hand information profile  page 16. If these views are not selected, it will be automatically displayed in the lower central part of the instru- ment cluster in a simplified manner. The set speed will be displayed next to the function status indicator.

Connecting Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel  Fig. 116. The ACC does not regulate anything yet (standby).

Assistant systems

163

ACC - daptive Cruise Control

Start regulation

Activating the ACC system also automatically activates the ESC and traction control (TCS). To start regulation, press the button  Fig. 116. The ACC sets the current speed, or the closest speed within the valid range (30-210 km/h), as the cruise speed. Vehicles with automatic transmission: the gear lever must be in the D, S or M. With manual transmission: the gear lever must be in any gear except first and reverse, and the speed must be higher than approximately 30 km/h (18 mph). Depending on the driving situation, the follow- ing indicator lamps come on:

Lights up green ACC connected, no vehicle detected in front.

Lights up green ACC connected, vehicle detected in front.

When the ACC is in standby, the indicator lamps light up grey.

Setting speed

To program the speed, press the or  Fig. 116 buttons to the desired speed. The speed is adjusted at intervals of 10 km/h (5 mph).

While the ACC is active, you can press the button to increase the desired speed by 1 km/h (1 mph). You can then press to decrease it by 1 km/h (1 mph).

Setting your distance level

The distance can be set to one of five levels, from very short to very long: Press the button and then the button or  Fig. 116. Alternatively, press the button as many times as necessary to set the desired distance. Keep in mind each countrys regulations on minimum braking distances.

Suspend regulation (standby)

Briefly press the button  Fig. 116 or press the brake pedal. The ACC indicator lamp is grey; the speed and distance are saved. If the ESC or TCS is switched off, the ACC is automatically interrupted.

Reinstating the cruise control Press the button. The ACC regulates to the last speed and distance setting. OR: Press the button to regulate to the current speed.

Switching off Press and hold the button . The set speed is cleared.

Exceeding the speed regulated by the ACC

While driving with the ACC switched on, the driver can increase speed by pressing the ac- celerator pedal. ACC regulation is suspended until you release the accelerator pedal   .

Set the default distance setting

In the Infotainment system, you can pre-select the distance level when connecting the ACC from: Very short, Short, Medium, Long and Very long using the Infotainment system: Driver assis- tance > ACC  page 35.

Changing the driving profile

In vehicles with the SEAT Drive Profile, the se- lected driving profile can have an influence on the ACCs acceleration and braking behaviour  page 147. In vehicles without SEAT Drive Profile, the be- haviour of the ACC can also be affected if any of the following drive profiles are selected in the infotainment system in Drive assist. ACC settings will be the same as those in the SEAT Drive Profile.

164

Assistant systems

1) Or on the left, in countries that drive on the left hand side of the road.

WARNING Before driving off, check that the road is clear. The radar sensor may not detect ob- stacles on the road. This could cause an ac- cident and serious injuries. If necessary, ap- ply the brake.

NOTICE If you increase speed using the accelerator pedal, the ACC may not be able to safely adjust the speed of the distance due to the limitations of the system. Be prepared to react if required by the sit- uation.

Special driving situations

Fig. 117  On the instrument panel display: ACC active, vehicle detected on the left.

Be aware of the limitations and warnings described at the beginning of this chapter  page 161, Introduction.

Avoid undertaking on the right1)

If a vehicle is detected in the left lane that is travelling at a speed slower than that set by the driver, it will brake the vehicle within the comfort limits of the system to avoid passing it on the right  Fig. 117. You can cancel this regulation by changing the set speed or by pressing the accelerator pedal. The function works at speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph). It may not be available in certain countries.

Overtaking

When the turn signal is switched on for over- taking, the ACC reduces the distance from the vehicle in front to help with the overtaking ma- noeuvre. The set cruising speed will not be ex- ceeded. The function works at speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph). It may not be available in certain countries.

Stop&Go function

Valid for vehicles with an automatic gearbox The ACC can bring the vehicle to a standstill if the vehicle in front stops.

The ACC remains active and the message ACC ready to start is displayed on the instru- ment cluster for a few seconds. You can extend or reactivate this warning by pressing the but- ton or by grabbing the wheel if your vehicle is fitted with Travel Assist. During this time, the vehicle will move off again if the vehicle in front moves forwards. To move off when the message ACC ready to start is not longer displayed, once the vehicle in front has moved off: Press the accelerator pedal. OR: press the button on the multifunction steering wheel. The ACC is deactivated in the following cases: The stopping phase lasts for several minutes. When a vehicle door is opened.

WARNING If the message ACC ready to start is displayed on the instrument cluster display and the vehicle in front moves off, your vehi- cle will move off automatically. In this case, any obstacles in the road may not be detec- ted. This may cause serious accidents and injuries. Always check the road before moving off, and apply the vehicle brakes yourself if nec- essary.

Assistant systems

165

ACC - daptive Cruise Control

ACC system limitations

Fig. 118  Vehicle on a bend. Motorcyclist ahead, out of range of the radar sensor.

Fig. 119  Vehicle changing lanes. One vehicle turning and another stationary.

The limits of the ACC system mean that it is not appropriate in all situations. SEAT does not recommend using the function in the following cases   : Heavy rain, snow or fog. When going through tunnels. In sections with roadworks. On routes with curves, e.g. on mountain roads. On off-road routes. In covered car parks. On roads with embedded metal objects such as train or tram tracks. On roads with loose gravel.

Pay special attention when using ACC in the following situations:

On curves

The ACC may not detect the vehicle in front on a curve, or may regulate the distance from vehicles in other lanes  Fig. 118 .

Vehicles outside the sensor zone

In the following situations the ACC may not re- act, or may react slowly or inappropriately: Vehicles that are not aligned while driving or that are outside the sensor's detection area, such as motorcycles  Fig. 118 . Vehicles that move into your lane, a short dis- tance from your vehicle  Fig. 119 . Vehicles with loads or accessories that pro- trude from the sides, rear or roof.

Objects that are not detected

The ACC function only detects and reacts to vehicles moving in the same direction. There- fore it does not detect: People Animals Vehicles travelling in the opposite direction or crossing the road. Other stationary obstacles

166

Assistant systems

The ACC does not react to stationary vehicles. If, for example, a vehicle detected by the ACC turns or moves over and there is a stationary vehicle in front of it, the ACC will not react to the second vehicle  Fig. 119 .

WARNING Using the ACC in the above situations can cause serious accidents and injuries, and you could break the law.

Troubleshooting ACC not available

The indicator lamp lights up yellow: The radar sensor is dirty or adjusted in- correctly. Take into account the warnings described at the beginning of this chapter  page 155 There is a fault or a defect. Turn off the vehi- cle's ignition and turn it on again after a few minutes. If the problem persists, consult a specialised workshop.

The ACC does not work as expected Make sure that the conditions are met for the radar sensor to operate properly  page 155. If the brakes overheat, regulation stops au- tomatically. Wait for them to cool down and check the operation again. Unusual noises during automatic ACC brak- ing are normal and do not indicate any anoma- lies.

The following conditions may lead the ACC not to react: The accelerator or brake is depressed. No gear is engaged or the vehicle is in gear R. The vehicle is reversing. ESC is operating. The driver is not wearing his/her seat belt. The RPM is too high or too low. A vehicle brake light is faulty. A trailer brake light is faulty. The parking brake is applied. Driving on an excessive slope.

Predictive speed adjust- ment

Introduction The predictive speed adjustment adapts the speed to the speed limitations detected and to the road layout (curves, crossings, round- abouts, etc.). Predictive speed adjustment is an additional function of the ACC  page 161 and uses the traffic signal detection system  page 24 and the navigation data of the infotainment system. Predictive speed adjustment is available de- pending on the equipment, although not in all countries.

WARNING The predictive speed adjustment smart tech- nology cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics and it only works within the limits of the system. Never allow the enhanced convenience of this function induce you to take any risk that compromises safety. If used negligently or involuntarily, it may cause serious accidents and injuries. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. Always adapt your speed to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Always pay attention to traffic and always keep the vehicle environment in mind.

Assistant systems

167

Predictive speed adjustment

Always be prepared to adjust the speed yourself. If the traffic sign recognition sys- tem is not working properly or the navigation data is not updated, the speed may change unexpectedly and suddenly or may not be suitable for the current traffic situation. In addition, the speed adjusted by the system may not suit your driving style. Always be prepared to adjust the speed yourself. If you drive without any active gui- ded route, if you leave the route calculated by the navigation system or if the position of the vehicle cannot be determined correctly because the GPS does not provide accurate data, the speed may change unexpectedly and suddenly or may not adapt to the cur- rent traffic situation. Always use up to date navigation data. Always take into account the maximum permitted speed. In the case of speed limita- tions that are not included in the navigation data, the maximum permitted speed may be exceeded.

Note Also note the information related to the ACC relevant to safety  page 161.

Limitations of the predictive speed adjustment

In addition to the limitations of the road sign de- tection system  page 24 and the limitations of the ACC, predictive speed adjustment has the following limitations inherent to the system: Predictive speed adjustment only recognises traffic signals that show a speed limitation. The predictive speed adjustment does not take into account, above all, the rules on priority of pas- sage or traffic lights. Traffic signs that indirectly show a speed re- striction, e.g. signs at the entrance to towns, are only recognised on the basis of navigation data. On roads that are not included in the naviga- tion data, or that are included with little accu- racy, predictive speed adjustment is not availa- ble. If a speed limitation is notified based on the navigation data without it being detected by the traffic signal detection system, the indica- ted speed will be adjusted to the speed that was saved the last time. Predictive speed adjustment is not available for speed limitations below approx. 20 km/h (approx. 15 mph). In this case, a relevant mes- sage is displayed on the instrument panel screen.

Activating the predictive speed ad- justment

In the infotainment system, in the assist services menu, you can individually adjust the type of incident the vehicle should react to  page 35: Response to road layout. Response at permitted speeds.

Driving with the predictive speed ad- justment

Connect the ACC  page 162. Set the distance and speed. Activate the predictive speed adjustment. As soon as the system recognises a speed limi- tation or a relevant road layout during the route, a warning will appear on the instrument panel display. This warning will indicate the reason and the speed to which the vehicle will adjust due to said limitation.

Adjustment due to a speed limitation.

Adjustment due to a road layout.

In the event of adjustment due to a speed lim- itation, the detected speed will be saved as the new desired speed. In the event of adjust- ment due to the road layout, the vehicle will

168

Assistant systems

accelerate again after leaving the reason for the adjustment behind and the speed will be adjustment to that which has been saved. The speeds indicated for curves depend on the driving profile page 147.

Interrupting speed adjustment During the warning, press the button . During the regulation, press the button .

Adjust the announced speed

The announced speed can only be adjusted in the event of adjustment due to a speed limita- tion.

Multifunction steering wheel:

+ 1 km/h (1 mph), only while the ACC is adjusting - 1 km/h (1 mph), only while the ACC is ad- justing + 10 km/h (5 mph)

- 10 km/h (5 mph)

If you adjust the indicated speed excessively, the predictive speed adjustment is interrupted.

Note When a speed limitation is recognised, the predictive speed adjustment also adapts the saved speed even if the ACC is switched off. However, it will not adjust. If the speed of travel considerably exceeds the speed limit detected by the traffic signal detection system, a relevant warning is dis- played in the instrument panel display. In the event of joining a highway without speed limitation, the recommended speed is automatically saved as the desired speed. If a higher speed has previously been saved for a motorway without a speed limit, this is used instead of the recommended speed.

Troubleshooting

A message is displayed indicating that pre- dictive speed adjustment is not currently available or not in your country. If this message is displayed for a long time and predictive speed adjustment is available in your country, contact a specialised workshop.

Note Depending on the anomaly in question, ad- ditional information may be displayed in Ve- hicle status  page 34.

emergency brake assis- tance system (Front Assist)

Introduction The objective of the system is to prevent head- on collisions against objects that may be in the vehicles path or minimise the consequences of such impacts. The function is designed to avoid collisions against: Parked vehicles. Vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists that are travelling in the same lane and direction. Pedestrians and cyclists who transversely cross the vehicle path. Front Assist detects the aforementioned objects using a radar sensor at the front of the vehicle  page 155. Depending on several factors and how critical the situation is, the system operates in a stag- gered manner. First informing the driver, and if there is no or insufficient reaction, then activating an autono- mous emergency braking as indicated by the conditions that will be discussed in the follow- ing points. The system operation can be cancelled if the clutch pedal is pressed or the steering wheel is turned firmly.

Assistant systems

169

emergency brake assistance system (Front Assist)

WARNING Front Assist is a driving assistance function that can never replace the drivers attention. Front Assist cannot change the laws of physics or replace the driver in terms of keeping control of the vehicle and reacting to a possible emergency situation. Following a Front Assist emergency warn- ing, pay immediate attention to the situation and try to avoid the collision where appropri- ate. Always adapt your speed and distance away from the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci- dents and serious injuries. The Front Assist does not react to animals or vehicles crossing your path or approach- ing head-on down the same lane. The Front Assist does not react to pedes- trians walking head-on in the same lane. If the Front Assist does not work as descri- bed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedly inter- venes unnecessarily), switch it off. Have the system checked by a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealer- ship.

Note When Front Assist is connected, the indica- tions of other functions on the screen may be hidden.

Warning levels and brake assist

Fig. 120  On the instrument panel display: advance warning indications.

Front Assist is active from 5 km/h (3 mph). De- pending on different conditions (vehicle speed, speed and type of object recognised, etc.), some of the stages described below are omit- ted to optimise the performance of the system.

Safety distance warning

If the system detects that you are driving too close to the vehicle in front, it will warn the driver with this indication on the instrument panel display .

The timing of the warning varies depending on driver behaviour, vehicle speed and relative speed between both.

Advance warning

If the system detects a possible collision with the vehicle in front, it alerts the driver by means of an audible warning and an indication on the instrument panel display  Fig. 120. The warning moment varies depending on the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a possi- ble emergency braking  page 170. When Front Assist is connected, the indications of other functions on the screen may be hidden.

Critical warning

If the driver fails to react to the advance warn- ing, the system may actively intervene in the brakes and generate a brief jolt to warn the driver of the imminent danger of a collision.

Automatic braking

If the driver also fails to react to the critical warning, the system may initiate independent emergency braking by progressively increasing the braking in accordance with the criticality of the situation.

170

Assistant systems

Driver emergency braking assistance sys- tem

If the driver, after the critical warning, starts braking but the system detects that the brake is not being applied with sufficient force, the braking intensity will be increased.

WARNING The system cannot prevent a collision, al- though it can significantly minimise the con- sequences by reducing the speed and the force of the impact. When the Front Assist causes a braking, the brake pedal is harder. Automatic interventions by the Front Assist on the brakes may be interrupted by pressing the clutch, accelerator or moving the wheel. The Front Assist may brake the vehicle until it stops completely. However, the brake sys- tem does not halt the vehicle permanently. Use the foot brake!

System limitations

Fig. 121  On the instrument cluster screen: indication of the systems initial self-calibration.

Front Assist has certain limitations inherent to the system. Thus, in certain circumstances, some of the reactions may be inappropriate from the driver's standpoint. So pay attention in order to intervene if necessary.

The following conditions may cause the Front Assist not to react or to do so too late: In the first few instants of driving after switch- ing on the ignition, due to the systems initial auto-calibration. During this period, a status icon  Fig. 121 is displayed.

Unrecognised objects Loads and accessories of other vehicles that protrude over the sides, backwards or over the top. If there are metal objects, e.g. guard rails or sheets used in road works. Other vehicles crossing the vehicles path. Misaligned vehicles. Narrow vehicles such as motorcycles. Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc- tion.

Operating limitations If the radar sensor is disabled or faulty. If the radar sensor is dirty or covered. On taking tight bends or complex paths. When pressing the accelerator firmly or at full throttle. If the TCS has been disconnected or the ESC is activated in Sport mode  page 152. If the ESC is adjusting or is broken. If several brake lights of the vehicle or electri- cally connected trailer are damaged. If the vehicle is reversing. In case of snow or heavy rain. In complex driving situations (such as traffic islands, cut-through roundabouts, etc), Front Assist may issue warnings and intervene in braking in an unnecessary manner.

Assistant systems

171

emergency brake assistance system (Front Assist)

For more details, see section  page 154.

Manual activation and deactivation of the function

Fig. 122  On the screen of the instrument panel Front Assist switched off message.

The Front Assist is active whenever the ignition is switched on. When the Front Assist is disabled, so too are the advance warning and the distance warning functions. SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist activated except in the situations presen- ted in  page 171.

Switching the Front Assist on and off

With the ignition switched on, the Front Assist can be deactivated or activated as follows:

In the infotainment system: press the function button Driver assistance > Front Assist  page 35. OR: Select the corresponding menu option using the button for the assistants systems  page 154. When Front Assist is deactivated, the indication

will be displayed on the instrument cluster. Each time the ignition is switched on, the Front Assist will reappear as active.

Activating or deactivating the pre-warning (advance warning)

The advance warning can be activated or de- activated in the infotainment system using the function button Driver assistance > Front Assist  page 35. The system will store the setting for the next time the ignition is switched on. SEAT recommends keeping advance warning active. Depending on the vehicles infotainment system the advance warning function may be adap- ted in the following modes: Advance Medium Delayed Deactivated SEAT recommends driving with the function in Medium mode.

Switching distance warning on and off

The distance warning can be activated or de- activated in the infotainment system using the function button Driver assistance > Front Assist  page 35. The system will store the setting for the next time the ignition is switched on. SEAT recommends keeping the distance warn- ing active.

Deactivating Front Assist temporarily in the following situations

In the following situations the Front Assist should be deactivated due to the system's limitations: When the vehicle is to be towed. If the vehicle is on a test bed. When the radar sensor is damaged. If the radar sensor receives a violent impact. If it intervenes several times unnecessarily. If the radar sensor is temporarily covered by an accessory. When the vehicle is going to be loaded onto transportation.

172

Assistant systems

Lane Assist system Introduction

The Lane Assist System helps the driver stay in his/her lane within the physical limits of the system. This function is not suitable and is not designed to keep the vehicle automatically in the lane. Using the camera located in the windscreen, the Lane Assist system detects the lane boun- daries dividing the lanes in which the vehicle is travelling. If the vehicle gets too close to the detected lane limits, the system alerts the driver through a corrective motion of the steer- ing wheel. The driver can cancel the steering corrective action at any time. No warning is produced with the turn signals activated, given that the Lane Assist system un- derstands that a lane change is required.

System limits

Use the Lane Assist system only on large, well- maintained motorways and highways. The system is not available under the following conditions: The driving speed allowed is below approx. 55 km/h (30 mph). The system has not detected any lane lines. On tight bends. Temporarily in very sporty driving situations.

If the turn signal is switched on before a man- ual lane change. If the driver firmly rectifies a system interven- tion. If a lane marking is crossed despite system intervention. If the driver does not react to a request to intervene.

WARNING The intelligent technology in the Lane Assist system cannot change the limits imposed by the laws of physics and by the very nature of the system. Careless or uncontrolled use of the Lane Assist system may cause accidents and injury. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness or manoeuvres when driving. Always adapt your speed and the distance to the vehicles ahead in line with visibility, weather conditions, the condition of the road and the traffic situation. Always keep your hands on the steering wheel so it can be turned at any time. The responsibility of staying in the lane is always the driver's. The Lane Assist system does not detect all road markings. The road surfaces, road structures or objects in poor condition can be incorrectly detected as road markings un- der certain circumstances by the Lane Assist system. Immediately counter any unwanted intervention of the system.

Please observe the indications on the in- strument panel and act as is necessary if the traffic situation permits. In the following situations there may be undesired interventions of the system or it may be that the system does not intervene at all. In these situations, special attention is required from the driver and, where appropri- ate, the temporary deactivation of the lane assist warning system: In very sporty driving situations. In adverse weather conditions and roads in poor condition. When passing through areas undergoing works. Before gradient changes of grade and river beds.

Always observe the vehicle surroundings carefully and drive proactively. When the area of vision of the camera becomes dirty, covered or is damaged, the Lane Assist system function can be affected.

Assistant systems

173

Lane Assist system

1

2

Driving with the Lane Assist System

Fig. 123  On the instrument cluster screen: indications of the lane assist system.

Yellow line: The system intervenes assisting on the represented side. White line: Lane line detected. The system does not intervene.

Control lamps

Lights up green Lane Assist system active and availa- ble.

Lights up yellow The Lane Assist system intervening with a rectification of the steering.

Switching the lane assist system on or off

In some countries, the Lane Assist System is al- ways activated when the ignition is switched on. The connection status is shown in the Driver

assistance menu of the Infotainment system or the driver assistance systems menu after press- ing the corresponding button. These menus can be used to activate and deactivate the system. The Lane Assist system is designed to actively intervene as of approximately 60 km/h (35 mph) and if it has detected the lane boundaries (system status: active). If the control lamp of the instrument cluster dis- play is off, it means that the system is connec- ted but not ready to intervene or it is disconnec- ted. When you activate a turn signal, the system temporarily goes into a passive state in order to allow manual lane change. An energetic rotation or rectification of the steering wheel by the driver causes the system to temporarily switch to a passive state.

Driver intervention prompt

If the steering is not corrected manually, the system prompts the driver through an indication on the instrument panel display and acoustic warnings. If no reaction is obtained from the driver, the system switches to a passive state. Regardless of the steering manoeuvres, through an indication on the instrument panel display and acoustic warnings, the driver is also prompted to drive through the centre of the lane if the steering correction lasts more than reasonable.

Steering wheel vibration

The following situations may result in a steering wheel vibration: The lane ceases to be recognised during a sudden intervention in the direction of the sys- tem. It is also possible to select steering wheel vibra- tion in the Assistants menu of the infotainment system. In this case, when a vehicle with Lane Assist switched on crosses over a detected lane marking, the steering wheel will vibrate.

Note If the lane departure warning assistant is faulty, it may switch off automatically.

Troubleshooting

Lane Assist is not available

The control lamp switches on yellow. A relevant warning is also displayed on the instrument panel screen. The field of vision of the camera is dirty. Clean the windscreen  page 334. The visibility of the camera is diminished due to accessories or adhesives. There is a fault or a defect. Switch the engine off and on again.

174

Assistant systems

The system behaves differently than expec- ted The camera has been altered or damaged, e.g. because of damage caused to the wind- screen. Check for visible damage. Do not mount objects on the steering wheel. If the problem persists, consult a specialised workshop.

Note After switching on the ignition, it may take a few seconds before a fault is detected in the system.

Note If Lane Assist is unavailable, Emergency As- sist and Travel Assist will be unavailable as well.

Driving Assist (Travel As- sist)

Introduction Travel Assist combines adaptive cruise control (ACC) and the adaptive lane guidance func- tion. Within the limitations of the system, the ve- hicle can maintain a distance from the vehicle in front that is preselected by the driver and remain in the preferred position within the lane.

Travel Assist uses the same sensors as Adap- tive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane Assist. Therefore, carefully read the information about the ACC  page 161 and the Lane Assist  page 172 and take into account the limita- tions of the systems and the indications given in the information.

How to know if the vehicle is fitted with Travel Assist

The vehicle is fitted with Travel Assist if the mul- tifunction steering wheel has the button.

Speed range

Depending on the type of gear, Travel Assist regulates from 0 km/h (0 mph). The speed can be set from 30 km/h (20 mph).

Driving with Travel Assist

Travel Assist automatically controls the accel- erator pedal, the brakes and the steering. In addition, Travel Assist may, within its limitations, decelerate the vehicle until it stops behind an- other that stops and automatically starts again. You can override assisted adjustment at all times.

Status display

Fig. 124  On the instrument cluster display: display of active regulation (schematic representation).

1 The colour of the lane markings indicates the status of the adaptive lane guidance function. Yellow: adaptive lane guidance function active. White: adaptive guidance function avail- able. Grey: passive adaptive lane guidance function.

2 Distance set. Depending on the equipment, additional de- tails, e. g. dashed road markings and vehicles in front, can also be shown on the instrument cluster display.

Assistant systems

175

Driving A sist (Trav l Assist)

Control lamps indicate the status of the system on the instrument panel display:

Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con- trol and adaptive lane guidance function are active. Travel Assist active, adaptive cruise con- trol active and adaptive lane guidance function passive. Travel Assist deactivated, not regulating.

Driver intervention prompt

If you remove your hands from the steering wheel, after a few seconds the system asks you to take over the steering with an indication on the instrument panel display and acoustic warnings. If you do not react, Travel Assist is deactivated. Depending on the equipment, Emergency As- sist activates if it is activated in the infotainment system.

WARNING The Travel Assist smart technology cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics and it only works within the limits of the system. If Travel assist is used negli- gently or involuntarily, it may cause serious accidents and injuries. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness.

Bear in mind the system limitations and the indications regarding the control of the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane As- sist. Adapt your speed and safety distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- tions. Do not use Travel Assist when visibility is bad, on steep roads, on windy roads or in slippery circumstances (e. g., snow, ice, rain or loose gravel), or on flooded roads. Do not use Travel Assist offroad or on roads where the surface is not firm. Travel Assist has been designed for use on paved roads only. Travel Assist does not react to people or animal or vehicles crossing your path or which approach you head-on in the same lane. Brake immediately if Travel Assist does not slow down enough. Brake immediately when instructed to do so on the instrument cluster display, or if Travel Assist does not reduce speed suffi- ciently. Brake when the vehicle continues to move forward without it being desired after an indi- cation to brake. If possible, do not wear gloves while driv- ing. The system could interpret this as no driving activity.

If driver intervention is requested on the in- strument panel display, immediately resume control of the vehicle. Keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times, to ensure you have control over the steering at all times. The driver is always re- sponsible for keeping the vehicle in its own lane. Always be prepared to adjust the speed yourself.

Operating Travel Assist

Fig. 125  Left side of the multifunction steering wheel

Switch on and start regulation

1. While driving with ACC activated, press on the multifunction steering wheel. The vehicle switches from ACC to Travel As- sist.

176

Assistant systems

Depending on the driving situation, the vehicle switches to the following system statuses in Travel Assist: When ACC is regulating, Travel Assist main- tains the current speed and the preset distance to the vehicle in front. When lane markings are detected, the vehicle is also kept in the lane by steering movements. If ACC is not regulating, Travel Assist remains selected but in a passive (unregulated) status. 1. Press the button.

Travel Assist switches to the active system status, depending on the driving situation.

The indicator lamp for the driving situation lights up on the instrument cluster display. A message is also displayed.

Interrupting the adjustment

1. Briefly press the button  . OR: press the brake pedal. The set distance remains saved.

Switch to ACC

1. Press the button on the multi-function steering wheel. The vehicle switches from Travel Assist to the ACC system status corresponding to the driving situation.

Making other adjustments

All other aspects of Travel Assist are controlled like the ACC.

Troubleshooting

Travel Assist is not available or does not work as expected

The control lamp switches on yellow. A relevant warning is also displayed on the instrument panel screen. There is a fault in the sensors. Check the cau- ses and solutions described in the information about the ACC  page 166 or Lane Assist  page 173. There is a fault or a defect. Switch the engine off and on again. The system limits are exceeded. If the problem persists, consult a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership.

Grip the steering wheel

The warning lamp lights up white, and a mes- sage is shown on the instrument cluster display. You released the steering wheel for a few sec- onds. Take hold of the steering wheel and take control of the vehicle.

Grip the steering wheel

The warning lamp lights up red and a mes- sage is shown on the instrument cluster display. Depending on the situation, an audio warning sounds or the steering wheel vibrates. You have let go of the steering wheel for a long time, or the system limits have been reached. Immediately take hold of the steering wheel and take control of the vehicle.

Travel Assist disconnects automatically Vehicles without Emergency Assist: You have released the steering wheel for a long period. There is a fault or a defect. Switch the engine off and on again. If the problem persists, consult a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership.

The adjustment is interrupted unexpectedly You have turned on the turn signal.

Emergency Assist How it works

Emergency Assist can detect whether there is inactivity by the driver and can automatically keep the car in its lane and stop it altogether

Assistant systems

177

Emergency Assist

if necessary. This way the system can actively help avoid an accident or reduce its conse- quences. Emergency Assist uses the same sensors as Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Lane As- sist. Therefore, carefully read the information about the ACC  page 161 and Lane Assist  page 172 and take into account the limita- tions of the systems and the indications given in the information.

Driver intervention prompt

If the emergency assist detects that the driver is not actively doing anything, he or she is promp- ted to take control of the vehicle by audio warnings and a brief application of the brake. In addition, a warning is shown on the instrument cluster display and the volume of the infotain- ment system is lowered. Depending on the equipment, the drivers seat belt is tightened at the same time.

System intervention

If the driver does not react, the system can brake the vehicle and keep it in its lane. The fol- lowing control lamp lights up on the instrument cluster display:

The system is regulating.

You can cancel the adjustment at any time by moving the steering wheel, over-accelerating or braking.

While the emergency assistant is in operation, other road users are warned as follows: The hazard warning lights are switched on soon after. The horn sounds (depending on the speed). The following happens as soon as the vehicle stops: The electronic parking brake is activated. All doors are unlocked. The interior lighting comes on. Depending on the features, an emergency call (eCall) is made.

Connecting and disconnecting

Emergency Assist can be switched on and off in the assistants menu of the infotainment system. When connected, the Emergency Assist is only activated if the following requirements are met: The Travel Assist or the Lane Assist are switched on. The system has detected a road lane mark- ing on both sides of the vehicle.

Note If the emergency assist is faulty, it may switch off automatically.

Note If Lane Assist is unavailable, Emergency As- sist will be unavailable as well.

WARNING The smart technology fitted into the Emer- gency Assist cannot overcome the limits im- posed by the laws of physics; it only works within the limits of the system. The driver is responsible for driving the vehicle. Adapt your speed and safety distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit the visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- tions. The Emergency Assist cannot always avoid accidents or serious injuries by itself. If the radar sensor or the camera are cov- ered or have been altered or damaged, the system may intervene on the brakes or on the direction in an inappropriate manner. The Emergency Assist does not react to people or animal or vehicles crossing your path or which approach you head-on in the same lane.

WARNING If the Emergency Assist Intervenes inoppor- tunely, serious accidents and injuries may occur. If the vehicle behaves differently than expected, interrupt the intervention of the Emergency Assist by over-accelerating, braking or moving the steering wheel. Do not use Travel Assist or Lane Assist. Have the system checked by a specialised workshop.

178

Assistant systems

Troubleshooting Emergency Assist not available

The control lamp switches on yellow. A relevant warning is also displayed on the instrument panel screen. The field of vision of the camera is dirty. Clean the windscreen. The visibility of the camera is diminished due to weather factors, e.g. snow, or detergent resi- due or some coating. Clean the windscreen. The visibility of the camera is diminished due to accessories or adhesives. Leave the area around the cameras field of vision free. The camera has been altered or damaged, e.g. because of damage caused to the wind- screen. Check for visible damage. There is a fault or a defect. Switch the engine off and on again. If the fault continues, disconnect the Emer- gency Assist and consult a specialised work- shop.

Lane departure warning (Side Assist)

Introduction The lane departure warning uses radar sen- sors to monitor the areas behind the vehicle  page 6. The system does this by measuring the vehicle's distance from other vehicles and its speed differential. The lane departure warn- ing will not work at speeds of less than approx. 15 km/h (9 mph). The lane width is not detected individually, but is rather pre-configured in the system. Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in between two lanes, the indications may be incorrect. Further- more, the system can detect vehicles driving in the lane next to you (if there are any), and can also detect stationary objects such as dividers, and thus give an incorrect indication.

Trailer mode

Side assist is automatically deactivated and cannot be switched on if the factory-fitted tow- bar is electrically connected to a trailer or simi- lar device. As soon as the driver starts to drive with a trailer connected electrically to the vehicle, a mes- sage is displayed on the instrument panel dis- play indicating that side assist is switched off. Once the vehicle trailer has been disengaged,

side assist will return to the initial state prior to the moment the trailer was electrically connec- ted. If the tow-bar is not factory fitted, side assist should be switched off manually when driving with a trailer.

Physical limitations inherent to the system

In some situations the lane departure warning may not interpret the traffic situation correctly. I.e. in the following situations: on tight bends; in the case of lanes with different widths; in areas with significant gradient changes; in adverse weather conditions; in the case of special constructions to the side of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular divid- ers.

WARNING The smart technology incorporated into Side Assist cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only works within the limits of the system. Accidents and se- vere injury may occur if Side Assist is used negligently or involuntarily. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit visi- bility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

Assistant systems

179

Lane departure warning (Side Assist)

Keep your hands on the wheel at all times to be ready to intervene in the steering at any time. Pay attention to the indicator lamps that may come on in the external rear view mir- rors and on the instrument cluster, and follow any instructions they may give. The lane departure warning could react to any special constructions that might be present to the sides of the vehicle, e.g. high or irregular dividers. This may cause errone- ous warnings. Never use the lane departure warning on unpaved roads. The lane departure warning has been designed for use on paved roads. Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur- roundings. The control lamps of the lane departure warning may have limited functionality due to solar radiation.

Note If Side Assist does not work as described in this chapter, stop using it and contact a spe- cialised workshop.

Driving with Side Assist

Fig. 126  Control lamp of the lane departure warning.

Fig. 127  Control lamp of the lane departure warning.

Connecting and disconnecting

Side Assist can be switched on and off by accessing the Assistants menu of the infotain- ment system or through the instrument clus- ter display using the controls on the steering

wheel. If the vehicle is equipped with a multi- function camera, it can also be accessed by means of the assistants systems key located on the main beam headlight lever. When the lane departure warning is ready to operate, the indications in the control lamps will turn on briefly as confirmation. When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust- ment in the system will remain active.

Indication on the exterior mirror

The control lamp provides an indication on the corresponding side regarding the traffic situa- tion behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to be critical. The control lamp on the left-hand side indicates the traffic situation to the rear left of the vehicle, and the control lamp on the right- hand side indicates the traffic situation to the rear right of the vehicle . In the case of retrofitted tinted windows or win- dows with tinted film, the indications of the ex- ternal mirrors may not be seen clearly. Keep the external mirrors clean and free of snow and ice, and do not cover them with ad- hesives or other similar materials.

It lights up

It turns on once briefly: the lane departure warning is activated and ready to operate, i.e. when acti- vating the system.

180

Assistant systems

It lights up

It lights up continuously: the lane departure warn- ing has detected a vehicle in the blind spot.

Flashes

A vehicle has been detected in the adjacent lane and the turn signal has been engaged in the direc- tion of the detected vehicle.

For vehicles that are also equipped with Lane As- sist  page 172, a warning to switch lanes will also appear even though the turn signal has not been engaged (Lane Assist Plus).

The control lamps light up when the ignition is switched on and should turn off after approxi- mately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for the function check. If there are no indications from the control lamp of the lane departure warning, this means that the lane departure warning has not detected any other vehicles at the rear area. When the exterior lighting is low, the intensity with which the control lamps come on is dim- med. The user can modify the intensity of the control lamps with up to 5 levels in the infotain- ment system menu.

Lane assist Plus.

The Lane Assist Plus function can be used by activating the Lane Assist  page 172 and Side Assist functions. In this case its functions are expanded as described below. If the driver initiates a lane change manoeuvre in a potential critical situation: The lamp flashes in the corresponding rear- view mirror even though the turn signal has not been activated. The steering wheel vibrates to warn the driver of the risk of collision. torque is applied to correct the steering and return the vehicle to its lane.

Driving situations

Fig. 128  Schematic diagram: Overtaking with traffic behind the vehicle. Side Assist indication on the left hand side.

Assistant systems

181

Lane departure warning (Side Assist)

Fig. 129  Schematic diagram: Overtaking in the central lane and then joining the right lane.

Side Assist indication on the right hand side.

In the following situations, an indication will be displayed in the control lamp  Fig. 128 (arrow) or  Fig. 129 (arrow): When being overtaken by another vehicle  Fig. 128 . When passing another vehicle  Fig. 129 with a speed differential of approx. 10 km/h (6 mph). If the vehicle is passing at a considerably higher speed, no indication will be displayed.

The faster the vehicle approaches, the sooner an indication will be displayed in the control lamp, because the lane departure warning takes into account the speed differential with other vehicles. Thus even though the distance from the other vehicle is identical, the indication will appear sooner in some cases and later in others.

182

Parking and manoeuvring

Parking and manoeu- vring Park the vehicle

Parking When parking your vehicle, all legal require- ments should be observed.

1. Connect the electronic parking brake  page 183.

2. Automatic transmission: move the selector lever to position P.

3. Stop the engine and turn off the ignition. Turn the steering wheel slightly to engage the steering lock.

4. Manual gearbox: engage first gear on flat ground and slopes, or even reverse gear on hills, and release the clutch pedal.

5. On slopes, turn the steering wheel so that if the parked vehicle were to start moving, it would steer toward the kerb.

6. Exit the vehicle   . Watch out for other road users!

7. Take all vehicle keys with you and lock it.

To avoid damage or hazardous situations, al- ways park the vehicle on a suitable parking sur- face   .

WARNING If the vehicle is parked incorrectly, it could roll away, even on gentle slopes. This can cause accidents and serious injuries. When parking, always carry out the opera- tions in the stipulated order. Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the electronic parking brake is engaged.

WARNING If children, people who may need assistance or animals are left unattended in the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries can occur. Never leave children, people who may need assistance or animals unattended in the vehicle. They could operate the gear selector and release the electronic parking brake. The vehicle could be set in motion. Never leave children, people who may need assistance, or animals in the vehicle. Depending on the season, very high or low temperatures can be reached inside a closed vehicle. Always take all vehicle keys with you when leaving the vehicle.

NOTICE The presence of irregularities on the ground, sand or mud can cause damage to the vehi- cle and mean that it cannot be parked prop- erly. Always park the vehicle on firm and flat ground.

NOTICE Components on the underside of the vehicle, such as bumpers, spoilers and running gear components, can be damaged when running over objects protruding from the ground. Drive carefully when entering buildings, on ramps, driving over kerbs or fixed markings, and on descents.

NOTICE Avoid parking the vehicle where the hot ex- haust system could ignite inflammable mate- rials, such as dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel or flammable materials.

Parking and manoeuvring

183

Electronic parking brake

Electronic parking brake Using the electronic parking brake

Fig. 130  Centre console, lower part: electronic parking brake button.

Connecting

The electronic parking brake can be activated whenever the vehicle is at a standstill, even when the ignition is switched off. Activate it whenever you leave or park the vehicle. Pull and hold the  Fig. 130 button. The parking brake is on when the red indicator lamp turns on on the instrument cluster and the button indicator lamp turns on. Release the button.

Switching off Switch the ignition on. Press the button  Fig. 130. At the same time step hard on the brake pedal or, if the engine is running, press the accelerator pedal slightly. The indicator lamp on button and the red indicator lamp on the instrument cluster turn off.

Automatic disconnection when moving off

The electronic parking brake automatically dis- connects when moving off in any of the follow- ing situations, if the driver's door is closed and the driver's seatbelt is buckled: Vehicles with automatic gearboxes: a gear is engaged or changed to another and the accel- erator is pressed gently. Vehicles with manual gearboxes: the clutch pedal is pressed fully before starting off and the accelerator is pressed gently. To facilitate certain manoeuvres, there are ex- ceptions that allow the parking brake to discon- nect automatically without the driver's seatbelt being buckled. The parking brake can be prevented from being automatically released by continuously pulling up the switch when moving off.

The electronic parking brake is not disconnec- ted until the button is released. This can fa- cilitate starting off when a heavy load is towed  page 265.

Automatic application when leaving the ve- hicle improperly

In vehicles with automatic transmission, the electronic parking brake is activated automat- ically when exiting the vehicle incorrectly if: The gear selector is in the D/S or R or is in tiptronic mode. AND: the vehicle is stationary. AND: the driver door is open.

Emergency brake function

Only use the emergency brake function in an emergency, if the vehicle cannot be stopped by pressing the brake pedal   ! Pull and hold the button. The vehicle will brake sharply. At the same time, an acoustic warning can be heard. To stop the braking process, release the but- ton or press the accelerator.

184

Parking and manoeuvring

1) Not valid for the 1.4L 110 kW engine with 8-speed automatic transmission.

WARNING If the vehicle is left improperly, it could roll away. This could lead to accidents, serious injury and property damage. When parking the vehicle, always perform the appropriate operations in the indicated order  page 182, Parking. Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the electronic parking brake is applied and that the control lamp next to the gear se- lector is red on the instrument cluster.

WARNING The improper use of the electronic parking brake can cause accidents and serious in- jury. Never use the electronic parking brake to stop the vehicle, unless it is an emergency. The braking distance is considerably longer. Always use the brake pedal. Never accelerate from the engine when a gear range or a gear is engaged and the en- gine is running. The vehicle could move, even if the electronic parking brake is activated.

NOTICE To prevent the vehicle from unintentionally moving when parking it, first apply the elec- tronic parking brake and then remove your foot from the brake pedal.

Troubleshooting

The electronic parking brake does not re- lease.

The 12-volt battery is discharged. Use the jump start  page 286.

The electronic parking brake makes noises When the electronic parking brake is applied and released, noises may be heard. The system performs automatic and audible checks sporadically in the parked vehicle if some time elapses without the electronic park- ing brake being used.

Auto-Hold function1)

Fig. 131  In the lower part of the centre console: Auto Hold function button.

The Auto-Hold function holds the vehicle at a standstill and prevents it from moving without it being necessary to depress the brake pedal.

When the Auto-Hold function is active, the control lamp on the instrument cluster lights up green. The control light of the 

 Fig. 131 button remains on when the Auto Hold function is connected.

Requirements The driver's door is closed. The drivers seatbelt is buckled. The engine is running.

Connecting and disconnecting

Press the Auto Hold button   . The control lamp on the button goes out when the Auto Hold function is switched off.

Switching on and off automatically

If the Auto Hold function was switched on via the Auto Hold button before switching the igni- tion off, the function will remain on the following time the ignition is switched on. If the Auto Hold function was not switched on, it will automatically remain off next time the ignition is engaged. The Auto Hold function connects automatically if the following conditions are met (all points must be met at the same time):

Parking and manoeuvring

185

General inform tion on parking systems

1. The vehicle is kept stationary with the brake pedal on a flat surface or on a slope.

2. The engine rotates correctly. The Auto Hold function disconnects automati- cally if the following conditions are met: 1. If any of the requirements of the function

are no longer met. 2. If the engine runs erratically or has any

anomaly. 3. If the engine stalls. 4. Manual gearbox: If the clutch and the ac-

celerator are pressed at the same time. Automatic gearbox: If the accelerator is pressed.

5. Automatic gearbox: If any of the tyres have only minimal contact with the ground, e.g. For example, if the axles are crossed.

WARNING The smart technology of the Auto-Hold can- not overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics and it only operates within the lim- its of the system. Never allow the enhanced convenience of the Auto-Hold function to in- duce you to take any risk that compromises safety.

Never leave the vehicle running with the Auto Hold function switched on. The Auto-Hold cannot always keep the ve- hicle stopped on an uphill, or brake it suffi- ciently on a downhill, e.g. on slippery or icy surfaces.

NOTICE Always deactivate the Auto-Hold function before entering an automatic car wash fa- cility. Failure to do so could cause damage due to the automatic application of the park- ing brake.

General information on parking systems

Automatic brake operation The automatic braking feature of a parking sys- tem is used to reduce the danger of collision when an obstacle is detected during a parking manoeuvre.

Braking functions

Depending on the equipment, the following systems are available: Park assist plus manoeuvre braking function  page 186. Rear cross traffic alert emergency brake function  page 206.

Assisted parking assistant emergency brake function  page 192. Trailer Assist manoeuvre braking function  page 204

Requirements The vehicle is moving between approx. 3 km/h and 8 km/h when manoeuvring A parking system is switched on. The brakes are not automatically operated when park assist is switched on automatically while moving forward.

What happens in the event of automatic braking?

If there is an obstacle, the system brakes the vehicle to a standstill and keeps it stationary for approx. 2 seconds. Press the brake!

Activate Automatic braking is activated when the driver switches a parking system on.

Deactivating The automatic brake operation function de- activates when a park assist system is switched off. OR: to temporarily deactivate the manoeuvre braking function, press the function button on the park assist screen and change the set- ting.

186

Parking and manoeuvring

WARNING Never allow the automatic braking opera- tions of park assist systems to lead you to take any risk that compromises safety. In certain situations, the automatic braking in- tervention may only work in a limited way or not work at all. Collisions with obstacles can injure people and damage the vehicle. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. Pay attention and do not rely solely on park assist systems. Always be prepared to brake and control the steering yourself. Do not take any risks that compromise safety. Act in accordance with the warnings and driving recommendations of the parking sys- tems.

Note Switch off the parking system if the auto- matic brakes operate excessively, e.g. when driving off-road. After the park assists manoeuvre braking function has braked the vehicle, driving in the same direction for 5 metres is deactivated, and becomes active again after changing gear or changing the position of the gear se- lector.

Troubleshooting

The parking system behaves differently than expected

There can be several causes: The system requirements are not met. The sensors or the camera are dirty or have ice on them  page 335. The camera lens is not clean and the camera image is not clear  page 335. Some noise sources, such as a jackhammer or a cobblestone surface can interfere with the ultrasound signal. The vehicle has some type of damage in the sensor or camera area, e.g. due to a parking impact. The sensor detection zone or field of view of the camera are blocked by an accessory, e.g. a bike rack. Changes have been made to the paintwork or structural modifications in the sensor or camera area, e.g. at the front of the vehicle or to the running gear. Also take into account the messages displayed on the infotainment system screen.

Sensor or camera without visibility, or the parking system has been switched off

If a sensor fails, that sensor zone is permanently switched off. The affected sensor zone may be displayed on the infotainment system with a

symbol and a greyed-out graphic segment. If necessary, the parking system switches off the affected zone. If the park assist is not working properly, a con- tinuous audio signal sounds for a few seconds when it is switched on. If applicable, a message to this effect is displayed on the instrument cluster screen Check if one of the causes indicated above has occurred. Once the source of the problem has been eliminated, the system may be reconnected. If the problem persists, consult a specialised workshop.

Parking aid Plus Description

Fig. 132  Parking aid view on the Infotainment system display.

Parking and manoeuvring

187

Parking aid Plus

A

B

C

Parking aid plus assists the driver by giving visual and audio warnings about obstacles de- tected in front of and behind the vehicle. The bumpers are fitted with sensors. When an obstacle is detected, it is indicated by au- dible signals and in the Infotainment system  Fig. 132. When moving close to an obstacle, it is possible to know if the obstacle is in front of the vehicle or behind it according to the sound frequency.

The approximate measurement range of the sensors is:

1.20 m 1.60 m 0.90 m

As you approach the obstacle, the frequency of the audible signals will increase. The signal will sound continuously at around 0.30 m: Stop the vehicle! If the separation is maintained, the warning vol- ume is reduced after about 4 seconds.

In order to view the entire periphery of the vehi- cle, the vehicle must be moved a few metres forwards or backwards. Therefore, the missing areas are screened and obstacles at the sides of the vehicle are displayed  Fig. 132 C .

Special features of ParkPilot with Area View

In the following situations the screened area on the side of the vehicle is automatically hidden: When a vehicle door is opened. When the TCS is switched off. When there is TCS or ESC regulation. If the vehicle remains stationary for more than approximately 3 minutes.

Error messages

If a an error or fault message is displayed on the instrument cluster in Park Assist, there is a fault. If the fault doesn't disappear before discon- necting the ignition, it will not be indicated next time the parking aid is connected. If a rear sensor is faulty, only the obstacles in the front area are detected. If a front sensor is faulty, only the obstacles in the rear area are displayed. The symbol is displayed. We recommend taking the vehicle to a special- ised workshop to have the fault repaired.

Trailer mode

Fig. 133  Parking assist display on the screen with trailer attached.

On vehicles with a factory-fitted trailer hitch, when the trailer is connected, the rear sensors will not activate when reverse gear is engaged or button is pressed. Therefore, any objects behind or to the side of the vehicle will not be indicated on the screen and no audio signals will sound. The screen will only display objects detected at the front, and the vehicle's trajectory will be hidden.

Parking assist settings

The audio indications and signals are set in the infotainment system  page 35: Automatic activation: On/off Front volume: Volume in the front and rear area. Rear volume: Volume in the rear area.

188

Parking and manoeuvring

Reduce volume: When the parking aid is switched on, the volume of the audio source will be reduced, depending on the selected option. Front sound settings/treble: Sound tone in the front area. Rear sound settings/treble: Sound tone in the rear area.

WARNING Always pay attention, by looking directly, to traffic and the area around the vehicle. As- sistance systems are not a replacement for driver awareness. Responsibility always lies with the driver. The sensors have blind spots in which ob- stacles and people are not detected. Pay special attention to children and animals. Always keep visual control of the surround- ings: use the mirrors for additional help.

NOTICE Park assist plus functions can be affected by various factors which may cause damage: Under certain circumstances, the system does not detect or display certain objects: Chains, trailer draw bars, bars, fences, posts and thin trees. Objects that are located above the sen- sors, such as protrusions in a wall. Objects with certain surfaces or struc- tures, such as wire mesh fences or powder snow.

Certain surfaces of objects and garments do not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig- nals. The system cannot detect these ob- jects or people wearing such clothes cor- rectly. Sensor signals may be affected by exter- nal sound sources. This may prevent them from detecting people or objects. If the system warns you of the proximity of a low obstacle, please note that after be- ing detected by the system, the obstacle in question may disappear from the measure- ment sensors as the vehicle moves closer, and the system will no longer warn of its presence. In certain circumstances, objects such as high kerbs that could damage the underside of the vehicle are not detected. If the parking distance warning system is ignored, the vehicle could suffer considera- ble damage.

Damage to the radiator grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle underbody can mod- ify the orientation of the sensors. This can affect the parking aid function. Have the function checked by a specialised workshop. A number plate or number plate holder with dimensions that exceed the space for the number plate, or a cured or deformed number plate can cause false detections or a loss of visibility for the sensors.

Note The display on the Infotainment system screen shows a slight time delay. In certain situations, the system can give a warning even though there is no obstacle in the detected area: Rough or cobbled surfaces or surfaces with long grass. External ultrasound sources, such as other vehicles equipped with ultrasound systems. Heavy rain or snow, hail or dense exhaust gases. If the number plate is not properly se- cured to the surface of the bumper. Gradient changes.

In order to guarantee good operation, keep the sensors clean, free of snow and ice, and do not cover them with stickers or other ob- jects.

Parking and manoeuvring

189

Parking aid Plus

1) The RVC button will only be displayed when reverse gear is engaged.

If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly, unless you do so very briefly, and always keep a distance of more than 10 cm away. Fitting certain accessories to the front of the vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad- vertising, may interfere with the operation of the Park Assist. We recommend that you practice parking in an area without traffic. The volume and tone of the signals and indications can be changed. Please observe information on towing a trailer.

Operating Park Assist Plus

Fig. 134  Centre console: parking aid button (depending on the version).

Switching on and off manually Press the button once.

Automatic activation Select reverse gear. EITHER: if you drive forward at a speed of less than 15 km/h (9 mph) and an obstacle is en- countered, it is detected when it is approx. less than 95 cm. away. If the automatic connection is activated, a reduced view is shown. OR: if the vehicle moves backwards.

When the Plus Parking Aid connects automat- ically, a diagram of the vehicle and the seg- ments will appear on screen. It only operates every time the speed drops be- low 15 km/h (9 mph) for the first time. Automatic activation of park assist can be switched on and off in the infotainment system: Switch the ignition on. In the infotainment system, select > Set- tings > Parking and manoeuvring. Check the Automatic activation box. OR, in the parking assistance function, select Settings > Automatic activation. If activated automatically, an audible sound warning will only be given when obstacles in front are at a distance of less than 50 cm. ap- prox. If it is switched off using the  button, one of the following actions must be taken for it to re- activate automatically:

Switch off the ignition and switch it on again. EITHER:drive forward at over approx. 15 km/h (9 mph). OR: move the lever into position P and back again. OR: switch the automatic activation on and off in the Infotainment system.

Automatic disconnection Drive forward at 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster. OR: move the selector lever to position P.

Temporary sound suppression Press the function button on the infotain- ment screen.

Change from reduced view to full view Select reverse gear. Press the car icon on the reduced view

Switch to the reverse assist image (Rear View Camera RVC) Select reverse gear.

OR press the RVC function button 1). A short confirmation signal will be heard and the button symbol will light up when the system is switched on.

190

Parking and manoeuvring

NOTICE Park assist plus only connects automatically when driving very slowly. If driving style is not adapted to the circumstances, an acci- dent and serious injury or damage may be caused.

Visual indication segments

Fig. 135  Parking aid view on the Infotainment system display.

The optical indication of the segments works as follows: White segments: the obstacle is more than approx. 30 cm away from the path or in the direction opposite to travel. They are also dis- played when the electronic parking brake is ac- tivated.

Yellow segments: the obstacles lie on the vehicles path and are at a distance of less than approx. 30 cm away. Red segments: obstacles are less than ap- prox. 30 cm away. A guiding track will indicate the anticipated for- ward or backward trajectory, depending on the gear that is engaged. If an obstacle is located in the vehicles way, the corresponding audible warning will sound. When the penultimate segment is displayed, the vehicle has reached the collision zone. In the collision zone, the obstacles are represen- ted in red (including those out of the path). Stop the vehicle!   in Description on page 188

In the event the car is equipped with the Top View Camera system, Park Assist visual guid- ance will appear in accordance with the view selected in the Top View Camera system.

Rear parking aid Description

The rear park assist is an optical and audible assistant that warns of obstacles located be- hind the vehicle.

There are sensors integrated in the rear bumper. When they detect an obstacle, you are alerted by audible and visible warnings on the Infotainment system.

If the Top View Camera system is installed, the rear parking aid will issue an audible warning about objects near the rear of the vehicle, and the Top View Camera image will be available on the infotainment screen, giving a real image of the objects around the car. Make particularly sure that the sensors are not covered by adhesives, residues, dirt and the like, as this could affect the system's operation. Cleaning instructions  page 335. The approximate measurement range of the rear sensors is: Side area: 0.60 m Central area: 1.60 m As you approach the obstacle, the frequency of the audible signals will increase. The signal will sound continuously at around 0.30 m: Stop the vehicle!   on page 188. If the separation is maintained, the warning vol- ume is reduced after about 4 seconds.

Parking Aid connection Select reverse gear.

Parking Aid disconnection Drive forward at 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster. OR: place the selector level in position P, N or D (for automatic gearboxes) or disengage reverse (for manual gearboxes).

Parking and manoeuvring

191

Rear parking aid

Set the lever to the N or D position to maintain the system active for approximately 8 seconds before switching off. During this time, the Park- ing aid will be deactivated if the selector lever is set to P. If the Top View Camera system is installed, rear parking aid will be automatically deactivated when disengaging reverse gear.

Temporary sound suppression Press the function button on the infotain- ment screen. If you have the Top View Camera system instal- led, you cannot use the temporary Parking Aid sound suppression.

Change from reduced view to full view Select reverse gear. OR: on vehicles fitted with reverse assist (Rear View Camera RVC) press on the car icon of the reduced display.

Switch to the reverse assist image (Rear View Camera RVC) Select reverse gear. OR: press the RVC function button.

Parking assist settings

The audio indications and signals are set in the infotainment system  page 35:

Rear volume: Volume in the rear area. Reduce volume: When the parking aid is switched on, the volume of the audio source will be reduced, depending on the selected option. Rear sound settings/treble: Sound tone in the rear area.

Error messages

If a an error or fault message appears on the in- strument panel in Parking assist, there is a fault. If the fault doesn't disappear before discon- necting the ignition, it will not be indicated next time the parking aid is connected. If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol is displayed on the infotainment system display. We recommend taking the vehicle to a special- ised workshop to have the fault repaired.

Towing device

In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket de- vice from the factory, when the trailer is con- nected, the parking aid will not be activated when reverse gear is engaged.

WARNING Observe the safety warnings   in De- scription on page 188.

Visual indication segments

Fig. 136  Parking aid view on the Infotainment system display.

The distance to the obstacles can be estimated with the help of the segments at the rear of the vehicle. The optical indication of the segments works as follows: White segments: the obstacle is more than approx. 30 cm away from the path or in the direction opposite to travel. They are also dis- played when the electronic parking brake is ac- tivated. Yellow segments: the obstacles lie on the vehicles path and are at a distance of less than approx. 30 cm away. Red segments: obstacles are less than ap- prox. 30 cm away.

192

Parking and manoeuvring

Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi- cles direction of travel, the corresponding audi- ble warning will sound. When the penultimate segment is displayed, the vehicle has reached the collision zone. In the collision zone, the obstacles are represen- ted in red (including those out of the path). Stop the vehicle!   in Description on page 188. If fitted with Top View Camera, the segment display is not shown. The Parking assist system will issue an audible warning for objects that are near the rear of the vehicle, and the Top View Camera image will be shown on the info- tainment system display, giving a real image of the objects around the car.

Parking aid system (Park Assist)

Introduction The assisted parking system is an additional function of ParkPilot  page 186 and helps the driver find a suitable parking space from among the following types:

park driving in reverse in suitable perpendic- ular and parallel spaces, park driving forwards in suitable perpendicu- lar spaces, exit a parking space driving forwards from a parallel space.

In vehicles with a Park Assist system and factory infotainment system, the front, rear and side areas are represented, and the position of ob- stacles is shown relative to the vehicle. The assisted parking system is subject to cer- tain limitations inherent to the system and its use requires special attention by the driver   .

WARNING The technology used in the park assist sys- tem involves a series of limitations inherent in the actual system and in the use of ultrasonic sensors. The use of Park Assist should never tempt you to take any risk that may compro- mise safety. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. Any accidental movement of the vehicle could result in serious injury. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Certain surfaces of objects and garments do not reflect the ultrasound sensors' sig- nals. The system cannot detect, at least cor- rectly, these objects or people wearing such clothes. Ultrasound sensor signals may be affected by external sound sources. In certain circum- stances this may prevent them from detect- ing people or objects.

The ultrasound sensors may have blind spots in which obstacles and people are not detected. Monitor the area around the vehicle at all times, since the ultrasound sensors do not detect small children, animals or certain ob- jects in all situations.

WARNING Quick turns of the steering wheel when park- ing or exiting a parking space with Park As- sist can cause serious injury. Do not hold the steering wheel during ma- noeuvres to park or exit a parking space un- til the system requests it. Doing so disables the system during the manoeuvre, resulting in the parking being cancelled.

NOTICE In certain circumstances, the ultrasonic sensors do not detect objects such as trailer tongues, bars, fences, posts or thin trees, or an open (or opening) rear lid, which could damage the vehicle. Retrofitting of certain accessories to the vehicle, such as a bicycle rack, may interfere with the operation of the Park Assist system and cause damage. The Park Assist system uses as a reference parked vehicles, curbs and other objects. Make sure that the tyres and wheels are not

Parking and manoeuvring

193

Parking aid system (Park Assist)

damaged while parking. If necessary, oppor- tunely interrupt the parking manoeuvre to avoid damaging the vehicle. The ultrasound sensors on the bumper may be damaged or shifted in the event of a colli- sion, for example, when entering or exiting a parking space. If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, do not apply it directly unless very briefly and al- ways from a distance of more than 10 cm. A registration plate or plate holder on the front with larger than the space for the reg- istration plate, or a registration plate that is curved or warped can cause: False detections. The sensors to lose visibility. Cancellation of the parking manoeuvre or defective parking.

If one of the ultrasonic sensors is dam- aged, the area corresponding to that group of sensors (front or rear) is deactivated and cannot be activated until the fault is correc- ted. However, you can still use the sensors of the other bumper as per usual. If there is a fault in the system, consult a specialist workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

Note In order to guarantee good system oper- ation, keep the ultrasound sensors of the bumper clean, free of snow or ice, and do not cover them with adhesives or other objects. Certain sources of noise, such as rough as- phalt or paving stones and the noise of other vehicles can induce the Park Assist system or ParkPilot to give erroneous warnings. The presence of metal objects can also affect the manoeuvre. In order to become familiar with the system and its functions, SEAT recommends that you practice operating the Park Assist system in an area where there is not too much traffic or in a car park.

Description of the parking assist sys- tem

Fig. 137  In the centre console, top section: button to switch on the Park Assist system.

The components of the Park Assist system are the ultrasonic sensors located in the front and rear bumpers, the button to switch the sys- tem on and off and the messages on the instru- ment panel display.

Prerequisites for parking The traction control (TCS) must be switched on  page 152. Speed when passing next to the parking space (parallel parking): do not exceed approx. 40 km/h (25 mph). Speed when passing next to the parking space (angle parking): do not exceed approx. 20 km/h (12 mph). Keep a distance between 0.5 and 2.0 me- tres when driving past the parking space. Space length (parallel parking): vehicle length + 0.8 metres. Space width (parking bay): vehicle width + 0.8 meters. Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) when parking.

194

Parking and manoeuvring

Requirements for leaving the parking space (only for parallel parking) The traction control (TCS) must be switched on  page 152. Space length: length of the vehicle + 0.5 metres. Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) when exiting the parking space.

Prematurely stopping or automatically in- terrupting the manoeuvres for parking or ex- iting a parking space

Park Assist interrupts the manoeuvres for park- ing or exiting a parking space in any of the fol- lowing cases: Press the button. When exceeding a speed of approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) more than once. The driver takes control of the steering wheel. The parking manoeuvre does not end within 6 minutes after activation of the automatic steer- ing. There is a fault in the system (the system is temporarily unavailable). The TCS is disconnected. TCS or ESC intervene with regulation. The Offroad or Snow driving profile is selec- ted. The driver door is opened.

To restart the manoeuvre it is necessary that none of these things occur and that the but- ton is pressed again.

Automatic braking intervention to avoid ex- ceeding the speed limit

To avoid exceeding the allowed speed of ap- prox. 7 km/h (4 mph) when entering or leaving a parking space, the brakes may activate au- tomatically. After automatically activating the brakes, the manoeuvres to enter or exit a park- ing space may continue. The brakes are only automatically activated once for each attempt to enter or exit a parking space. If the speed of approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded again, the corresponding operation is halted.

Special characteristics

The Park Assist system is subject to certain limi- tations inherent to the system. For example, it is therefore not possible to use it to enter or exit a parking space on sharp bends or on very steep hills. While entering or exiting a parking space, a brief signal sounds to prompt the driver to change between forward and reverse gears (depending on the case). In successive ma- noeuvres, the assistant tells the driver to change gears, at the latest, when the continu- ous audible signal is given (object present at a distance of 30 cm) by Park Pilot.

When the Park Assist system turns the steer- ing wheel with the vehicle stationary, the instru- ment panel also displays the symbol . Keep the brake pedal depressed while the symbol remains on the dash panel display to turn the wheels with the vehicle stopped. This way, the system will require fewer manoeuvres to com- plete the parking action.

Trailer mode

The Park Assist system cannot be switched on if the factory-fitted towing bracket is electrically connected to a trailer.

After changing a wheel

If, after changing a wheel, the vehicle stops entering and exiting parking spaces correctly, the circumference of the new wheel may be different and the system may need to adapt to it. The adaptation is automatic and takes place during driving. Making turns slowly and in both directions (20 km/h [12 mph]) for a few minutes may contribute to this adaptation process .

Parking and manoeuvring

195

Parking aid system (Park Assist)

Selecting a parking type

Fig. 138  On the instrument panel display: display of the assisted parking system with decreased visibility.

Fig. 139  On the instrument cluster display: parking modes indication.

Park assist has the following 3 parking types:

Reverse parallel parking. Reverse angle parking. Forward angle parking.

Selecting a parking type after passing in front of the space

After activating the Park Assist system and after detecting a parking space, the display on the instrument panel proposes a parking mode. The Park Assist system selects the park- ing mode automatically. The selected mode is shown on the instrument panel display  Fig. 138. The reduced display of other possi- ble parking modes is also shown  Fig. 139. If the mode selected by the system does not cor- respond to the desired mode, you can select another mode by pressing the button. The necessary conditions to park with Park Assist have to be met  page 193. Press the button. A control lamp on the button lights up when the system is switched on. Additionally, the selected parking mode is shown on the instrument panel display and the reduced dis- play shows another parking mode it can be changed to. Turn on the corresponding turn signal to- wards the side of the road where you are park- ing. The instrument panel displays the side cor- responding to the road. By default, if the turn signal is not on, it parks on the right in the direc- tion of traffic.

If necessary, press the button again to change to the next parking mode. Once you have switched to all possible park- ing modes, if the button is pressed again, the system switches off. Press the button again to switch the system back on. Follow the instructions displayed on the in- strument panel while paying attention to traffic and drive the vehicle past the parking space.

Parking in a parking bay without driving past first

Special case of perpendicular parking space to park forwards without driving past first: The necessary conditions to park with Park Assist have to be met  page 193. Move forward towards the parking space while paying attention to traffic and stop the vehicle with the front part partially inside the parking space. Press the button once. A control lamp on the button lights up when the system is switched on. Additionally, the selected parking mode is shown on the instrument panel display without reduced dis- play. Let go of the steering wheel.

196

Parking and manoeuvring

1

2

3

4

5

6

Parking with the parking assist system

Fig. 140  On the instrument cluster display: parallel parking. : Finding a parking space : Parking position. : Manoeuvring.

Fig. 141  On the instrument cluster display: angle parking. : Finding a parking space : Parking position. : Manoeuvring.

Message to move forwards Your vehicle Parking space detected Message to park Message to press the brake pedal Progress bar

The prerequisites have to be met to park with the parking assist system  page 193 and the parking mode has to be selected  page 195.

Parking Look at the instrument cluster screen to see if the space has been detected as appropriate and if the correct position for parking has been reached  Fig. 140 or  Fig. 141 . The space is considered appropriate if the instru- ment cluster display shows the parking indica- tion 4 . Stop the vehicle and, after a brief pause, en- gage the reverse gear.

Let go of the steering wheel. Please note the following message: Intervention in active steering. Watch your surroundings!

While keeping watch around you, carefully start accelerating up to no more than 7 km/h (4 mph). During the parking manoeuvre, the system only takes charge of the steering. You,

Parking and manoeuvring

197

Parking aid system (Park Assist)

1

2

3

as the driver, have to accelerate, engage the clutch if necessary, change gears and brake. Reverse until the continuous ParkPilot signal sounds; OR: reverse until the indication to move forward appears on the instrument panel dis- play  Fig. 140 or  Fig. 141 ; OR: reverse until the Park Assist finished message appears on the instrument cluster display. The progress bar 6 indicates the distance to cover. Press the brake pedal until the parking assist system completes the steering wheel turns; OR: until the symbol goes out on the instrument panel screen. Select first gear. Move forward until the continuous ParkPilot signal sounds; OR: move forward until the re- verse indication appears on the instrument panel display. The Park Assist system steers the vehicle forward and back until it centres it in the space  Fig. 140 or  Fig. 141 . For best results, wait at the end of each manoeuvre until the Park Assist system has fin- ished turning the steering wheel. The parking manoeuvre ends when a corresponding mes- sage is displayed on the instrument panel and, in some cases, an acoustic signal sounds.

Progress bars

The progress bar  Fig. 140 6 and  Fig. 141 6 on the instrument cluster display shows the

relative distance to be covered as a symbol. The greater the distance, the fuller the progress

bar. When driving forward, the content of the progress bar decreases upwards, and when re- versing, it decreases downwards.

Note If the manoeuvre is terminated prematurely during parking, the result may not be the best.

Leaving a parking space with the parking assist system (only for par- allel parking)

Fig. 142  On the instrument panel display: driving off from perpendicular parking.

Your vehicle in reverse gear Message giving the proposed manoeuvre to exit the parking space Progress bar to indicate the distance left to cover

Leaving a parking space (parallel parking)

The necessary conditions to exit a parking space with Park Assist have to be met  page 193. Press the button. A control lamp on the button lights up when the system is switched on. Turn on the corresponding turn signal towards the road you will enter when exiting the parking space. Select reverse gear. Let go of the steering wheel. Please note the following message: Automatic steering enabled Pay at- tention to your surroundings.

While keeping watch around you, carefully start accelerating up to no more than 7 km/h (4 mph). When exiting the parking space, the system only takes charge of the steering. You, as the driver, have to accelerate, engage the clutch if necessary, change gears and brake. Reverse until the continuous ParkPilot signal sounds; OR: reverse until the instrument panel display shows the forward indication. The pro- gress bar  Fig. 142 3 indicates the distance to cover. Press the brake pedal until the parking assist system completes the steering wheel turns; OR: press the brake pedal until the symbol goes out on the instrument panel screen.

198

Parking and manoeuvring

Move forward until the continuous ParkPilot signal sounds; OR: move forward until the re- verse indication appears on the instrument panel display. The Park Assist system steers the vehicle forward and back until it can exit the space. The vehicle can exit the space when a cor- responding message is displayed on the instru- ment panel and, in some cases, an acoustic signal sounds. Take charge of the steering with the turning angle set by the Park Assist system. Paying attention to the traffic, exit the parking space.

Reverse Assist (Rear View Camera)

Introduction A camera installed in the rear lid handle assists the driver with reverse parking or manoeuvring  page 158. The camera image is viewed together with ori- entation lines projected on the Infotainment system screen. Part of the bumper can be seen at the bottom, which can be used by the driver as a reference point.

Reverse assist settings

Reverse assist offers the user the possibility to change the image's brightness, contrast and colour settings. To change these settings:

Stop the vehicle in a safe place without switching off the ignition or the infotainment system. Apply the parking brake. Select reverse gear.

Press the function button displayed on the screen. Make the desired adjustments on the menu by pressing the /+ function buttons or by mov- ing the scroll button.

Requirements for parking and manoeuvring with the rear assist

The system should not be used in the following cases: If the image displayed is not very reliable or is distorted, or if the lens is dirty. If the area behind the vehicle is incomplete. If the vehicle is heavily loaded. If the position of the camera has changed after a rear-end collision. Have the system checked by a specialised workshop.

Familiarising yourself with the system

To familiarise yourself with the system, the ori- entation lines and their function, SEAT recom- mends practising in a place without too much traffic or in a car park when there are good weather and visibility conditions

WARNING The reverse assist does not make it possi- ble to precisely calculate the distance from obstacles and nor can it overcome the sys- tem's own limits, hence its negligent use may cause serious accidents and injuries if used without due care. The driver should be aware of his/her surroundings at all times to ensure safe driving. The camera lens expands and distorts the field of view and displays the objects on the screen in a way that is different from reality. Distance perception is also distorted. Due to the screen resolution or light con- ditions, some items may be blurry or not dis- played at all. Take care with thin posts, fen- ces, railings or trees that might not be seen on the screen and could damage the vehicle. The reverse assist has blind spots where it cannot see people or objects. Monitor the vehicle's surrounding area at all times. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. Supervise the parking manoeu- vre and the vehicle's surrounding area at all times. Do not be distracted from the traffic by looking at the screen. The images are only two-dimensional. Pro- truding objects or holes in the road, for ex- ample, are more difficult to detect or may not be seen at all.

Parking and manoeuvring

199

Reverse Assist (Rear Vi w Camera)

1) The RVC button will only be displayed when reverse gear is engaged.

Vehicle load modifies the representation of the guide lines. The width represented by the lines decreases with vehicle load. Pay spe- cial attention to the surroundings when the inside of the vehicle of the luggage compart- ment are loaded. In the following situations, objects or other vehicles appear to be further away or closer than they actually are. Pay special attention: If moving from a flat surface to a slope and vice-versa. If the vehicle is heavily loaded. When the vehicle approaches objects that are not on the ground surface or that protrude from it. These objects may be out- side the camera angle when reversing.

Note It is important to take great care and pay special attention if the driver is not familiar with the system. The reverse assist reference lines disap- pear when the rear lid is open.

Shown on the display

Fig. 143  Infotainment system display: guidance lines.

1 Lateral lines: extension of the vehicle (ap- proximately in its total width) on the road.

2 End of the side lines: approx. 2 m behind the vehicle on the road.

3 Intermediate line: approx. 1 m behind the vehicle on the road.

4 Horizontal red line: a safe distance of ap- prox. 40 cm at the rear of the vehicle on the road.

Switching the system on and off Reverse assist is connected by a contact when engaging reverse gear. The system switches off 8 seconds after dis- engaging reverse gear and immediately after removing the contact. The camera will stop transmitting images above the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) with re- verse engaged. In combination with the parking aid plus system  page 186, the camera image will no longer be displayed when reverse gear is disengaged, and the system will display the optical informa- tion provided by the parking aid system. It is also possible to hide the reverse assist im- age: By pressing one of the Infotainment system buttons on the display. OR: by pressing on the miniature vehicle shown on the screen. If you wish to display the rear assist image again: Disengage and re-engage reverse gear.

OR: Press the RVC function button1).

200

Parking and manoeuvring

Parking manoeuvre Stop the vehicle in front of a space and select reverse gear. Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheel so that the side lines lead towards the parking space. Guide the vehicle into the parking space so that the side lines run parallel to it.

Peripheral view system (Top View Camera)

Introduction Using 4 cameras, the system generates a rep- resentation that is shown on the infotainment system display. The cameras are located on the radiator grille, the exterior mirrors and the rear lid. The functions and representations of the Area View system may vary depending on whether or not the vehicle has ParkPilot.

WARNING The image from the cameras does not make it possible to calculate the distance to the obstacles (people, vehicles, etc.) precisely, so using them could cause serious accidents and injury. The camera lenses augment and distort the visual field and the objects on the screen are seen differently and imprecisely. Certain objects may not be shown or may not be shown very clearly, for example, posts or thin rails, due to the screen resolution or if light conditions are insufficient. The cameras have blind spots in which ob- stacles and people are not registered.

WARNING The smart technology incorporated into the Top View Camera system cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics and it only works within the limits of the sys- tem. The greater convenience provided by the Area View system should never tempt you to take any risk that may compromise safety. If used negligently or involuntarily, it may cause serious accidents and injuries. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. Adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- tions. Do not be distracted from the traffic by looking at the screen.

Monitor the area around the vehicle at all times, since the cameras do not capture small children, animals and certain objects in all situations. The system will probably be unable to rep- resent all areas clearly.

NOTICE The camera images are only two-dimen- sional. Due to a lack of spatial depth, objects that jut out or holes on the road, for example, are more difficult to detect or may not be seen at all. In certain circumstances, the camera does not capture objects such as beams, fences, posts or thin trees, which could damage the vehicle. The system displays the auxiliary lines and boxes regardless of the vehicle's environ- ment, no objects are detected. The driver is responsible for determining that the vehicle will fit in the parking space.

Parking and manoeuvring

201

Peripheral view syste (T p View Camera)

A

B

C

D

Area View system

Fig. 144  Display of the Area View system: aerial view.

There are four different views to choose from  Fig. 144:

Front camera area Right camera area Rear camera area Left camera area

Function buttons: Exit the current display.

Adjust the display: bright, contrast and colour.

Three-dimensional views

Depending on the equipment: connect- ing and disconnecting the ParkPilot sound.

The aerial view is generated by combining the images from all the cameras  Fig. 144. The top view can be selected by pressing the vehicle inside the zone. Select the corresponding view by pressing the different areas  Fig. 144 A to D of the top view or the reduced top view.

Conditions necessary for the use of the Area View system The doors and the rear lid must be closed. The image must be reliable and clear. For this reason, for example, the camera lens must be clean. The area around the vehicle must be clearly and totally visible. The area for parking or manoeuvring should be a flat surface. The vehicle should not be loaded very heav- ily at the rear. The driver must be used to the system. There should be no damage to the vehicle in the camera area. If the position or installation angle of the cameras have been changed, e.g. after a rear-end collision, the system should be checked by a specialised workshop.

Special characteristics

The images on the area view system cameras are only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spa- tial depth, it is difficult or impossible to make out on-screen any holes there may be on the ground, objects jutting out from the ground or parts protruding from other vehicles. Situations in which the objects or other vehicles appear to be further away or closer than they really are: On moving from a horizontal plane to a slope. On moving from a slope to a horizontal plane. If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear. If the vehicle approaches protruding objects. These objects may be outside the cameras' an- gle of visibility.

Trailer mode

The Area View system conceals, in the rear camera area, all the auxiliary guiding lines when the factory-fitted towing bracket is con- nected electrically to a trailer  page 265.

Note In order to become familiar with the system and its functions, SEAT recommends that you practice handling the Area View system in an area where there is not too much traffic or in a car park.

202

Parking and manoeuvring

Connecting and disconnecting

Fig. 145  Centre console: button for activating/ deactivating the Top View camera system manually in combination with the parking assist system ( ) or else with the rear ParkPilot system ( ).

Manual activation

Press the  Fig. 145 button once. The infotainment system's screen shows the top view  Fig. 144. If you press the button when driving above 15 km/h (9 mph), the image will not be displayed.

Automatic activation Select reverse gear. EITHER: the vehicle moves backwards. The view of the image of the vehicle's rear cam- era is shown in parallel parking mode with the reduced aerial view.

Manual disconnection

Press the  Fig. 145 button again. EITHER: press a button on the infotainment system, for example the button. OR: press the function button.

Automatic disconnection Drive forward at a speed of at least 15 km/h (9 mph). OR: switch off the ignition. The Area View system menu disappears immediately.

Views of the peripheral vision system (modes)

Fig. 146  Display on the Area View system screen: Front camera: off-road view. Rear camera: off-road view.

Depending on the equipment: connect- ing and disconnecting the ParkPilot sound.

Exiting the Area View system screen:

Adjust the display: bright, contrast and colour.

Parking and manoeuvring

203

Tr iler Assist

/

The selected view is displayed on the right side of the screen. The reduced aerial view shown on the right side displays the view framed in yellow. In addition, the right margin of the screen displays the menu options possible and the views (the so-called modes) of the cam- era in question. The active view (mode) at the time is highlighted. The red lines are indicate a distance of approx. 40 cm away from the vehicle.

Aerial views (bird's eye view)

Main mode: The vehicle and its immediate vicinity seen from above are shown. Depending on the equipment, the ParkPilot's path

may also be displayed. Three-dimensional views:

The vehicle and its vicinity seen from above are shown.

The vehicle and its vicinity seen from above are shown obliquely.

The vehicle and its vicinity seen obli- quely are shown.

Swipe the infotainment system display with your finger in the direction of the arrows to change the angle of vision in the three-dimen- sional views of the vehicle and its vicinity.

Front camera views (front view)

Cross traffic. This visualization helps to monitor traffic to the left, front and right of the vehicle and can be used, for example, when exit-

ing garages or narrow exits Angle parking.

The area in front of the vehicle is shown. Orientation lines are shown to give guid- ance.

Off-road. The area directly in front of the vehicle seen from above is shown. For example, on a slope, in order to see the area directly in front of the vehicle.

Side camera views (side view)

Right and left sides. The areas located directly to the side of the vehicle seen from above are repre- sented in order to navigate possible ob-

stacles more precisely. Driver or passenger side seen from above.

This makes it possible to visualize the blind spots along the vehicle.

Rear camera views (rear view)

Angle parking. The area behind the vehicle is shown. Auxiliary lines are shown to give guidance.

Parallel parking. The area directly behind the vehicle is shown. The coloured boxes and auxiliary lines serve as orientation.

Off-road or hitching a trailer function. The vehicle's rear is presented. Green and red semicircular auxiliary lines are displayed in vehicles with a factory-fitted

towing bracket. The auxiliary lines indicate the distance from the towing bracket. The distance between the auxiliary lines (green and red) is approx. 30 cm The orange aux- iliary line indicates, according to how the steering wheel is turned, the precalculated direction of the towed device.

Cross traffic. This visualization helps to monitor traffic to the left, front and right of the vehicle and can be used, for example, when exit-

ing garages or narrow exits.

Trailer Assist Introduction

Trailer assist helps the driver to reverse and ma- noeuvre with a trailer.

204

Parking and manoeuvring

By moving the rotary knob of the exterior mir- rors, the trailer assist directs the trailer that is hitched. The driver has to accelerate, change gears and brake!

System limitations

Under certain circumstances, the camera does not detect objects such as trailer draw bars, bars, fences, posts or thin trees, or an open (or opening) rear lid, which could damage the ve- hicle. In order to guarantee good system operation, keep the camera clean, free of snow or ice, and do not cover it with adhesives or other objects. Do not allow the draw bar to be covered by external influences. Use the trailer manoeuvre assistant only when the rear lid is closed correctly.

NOTICE The trailer maneuver assistant does not take the vehicles surrounding as a reference. No obstacle detection takes place. The driver alone has to assess whether it is possible to manoeuvre safely with the tow vehicle and trailer set. Always observe the movement of the trailer and, if necessary, actively interrupt the manoeuvre to avoid damage. Even if

the trailer manoeuvring assistant is operated correctly, on rare occasions the trailer may move in a different way to the setting. Do not rely solely on the indications on the instrument cluster display.

Note The trailer manoeuvre assistant automati- cally switches off approx. 10 minutes after being activated. The assistant is also deacti- vated if the driver does not perform any ac- tion over the course of approx. 3 minutes.

Requirements The following requirements must be met for the trailer manoeuvre assistant to work: The engine is running. The ESC must be connected. The driver's door and the rear lid are closed. The exterior mirrors are not folded. There is a non-articulated one or two axle trailer hitched and electrically connected. Both the tow vehicle and trailer are stopped. The maximum bending angle has not been exceeded. The length of the trailers drawbar has been determined.

Determine the length of the trailer's drawbar

In order for the trailer manoeuvre assistant to determine the length of the trailers draw- bar, drive the vehicle-trailer set through some turning manoeuvres or curves. The more pre- cisely the length of the drawbar is determined, the wider the angles that will be available when manoeuvring. The assistant subdivides the maximum available end stops of the angle indicator into four levels: approx. 30, 45, 60 and 75.

Note For technical reasons, the trailer manoeu- vre assistant cannot always correctly detect trailers with LED technology taillights.

Operating

Fig. 147  Outside rearview mirror rotary control: adjust the trailer angle.

Parking and manoeuvring

205

Tr iler Assist

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Fig. 148  Instrument cluster display: engage reverse.

Key to the  Fig. 147 ,  Fig. 148: Rotary exterior mirror controls. Trailer orientation to the left Trailer orientation to the right Move the vehicle in the direction of the tow- ing device. Actual trailer position Target trailer position Angle indicator zero position

Manoeuvre with the tow vehicle and trailer set

The system requirements must be met  page 204. Select reverse gear. Press the button. Let go of the steering wheel   .

Tilt the rotary control until the desired direc- tion is reached  Fig. 147. A representation of the tow vehicle and trailer set is shown on the instrument cluster screen for guidance purpo- ses  Fig. 148. Reverse by accelerating slowly. Pay attention to your surroundings! If necessary, correct the angle with the rotary control. Press the control towards the left or right: the set will move to the left or right. Press the control backwards: the vehicle will follow the trailer. Reverse and move forwards until the desired position is reached. The manoeuvre ends when a message is dis- played on the instrument cluster display and, in some cases, an audio signal sounds.

Automatic brake operation

The trailer manoeuvre assistant helps the driver by automatically operating the brakes in cer- tain situations. The driver is responsible for braking on time   . The brakes may be applied automatically and the function deactivated in the following situa- tions:

A certain speed is exceeded. The steering wheel is grabbed. The vehicle brakes automatically until it stops. If the button is pressed during the manoeu- vre or the drivers door opens.

WARNING The quickly turning steering wheel can cause serious injuries. Do not hold the steering wheel during the manoeuvre until the system requests it. Exception: If a dangerous situation occurs, intervene and take over the steering.

WARNING Never allow the automatic operation of brakes to lead you to take any risk that com- promises safety. The system is not a replace- ment for driver awareness. The manoeuvre assist system is subject to certain limitations inherent to the system. In certain situations, the automatic braking intervention may only work in a limited way or not work at all. Always be ready to use the brakes your- self! Automatic brake operation ends after 1.5 seconds approx. if the vehicle is stopped. Af- ter this, brake the vehicle yourself.

206

Parking and manoeuvring

Note The exterior mirrors cannot be adjusted while the assistant is active. The saved setting for the passengers mirror can be activated  page 110.

Troubleshooting

Camera with no visibility, fault message, the system disconnects Clean the camera or remove possible adhe- sives or accessories from it  page 335. Check for visible damage.

The system behaves differently than expec- ted

There can be several causes: The camera is dirty  page 335. In addi- tion to dirt and snow, camera visibility can be reduced by detergent residue or any type of coating. The system requirements must be met  page 204. The camera is covered with water. The vehicle has some type of damage in the camera area, e.g. due to a parking impact. The field of view of the camera is blocked by an accessory, e.g. a bicycle carrier system.

Changes have been made to the paint in the camera area and structural modifications have been made, e.g. to the front part of the vehicle and the running gear.

Solution for all cases Temporarily disconnect the system. Check if one of the causes indicated above has occurred. Once the source of the problem has been eliminated, the system may be reconnected. If the system still behaves unpredictably, have it checked by a specialised workshop.

Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA)

How it works

Fig. 149  Diagram of the parking assistant: detected area around the vehicle that is driving off.

Park Assist uses the radar sensors on the rear bumper  page 156 to monitor traffic cross- ing behind the vehicle as it reverses out of a parking bay, or as it is being manoeuvred, for example in very low visibility conditions. When the system detects a relevant vehicle on the road that is approaching the rear of the ve- hicle  Fig. 149, an acoustic alarm may sound if the relevance so requires it. In addition to the acoustic alarm, the driver is also informed by means of a visual signal on infotainment system display. This signal is dis-

Parking and manoeuvring

207

Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA)

1) It is only displayed if the vehicle is equipped with a parking system.

played in the form of a red strip at the back of the image of the vehicle on the infotainment system screen. This strip displays the side of the vehicle towards which traffic is approaching in transverse direction1).

Automatic braking to reduce damages

 page 185.

Connecting and disconnecting

The rear cross traffic alert can be switched on and off by accessing the Assistants menu on the dash panel display using the steering wheel controls. If the vehicle is equipped with a multi- function camera, it can also be accessed by means of the assistants systems key located on the main beam headlight lever. When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust- ment in the system will remain active.

Trailer mode

The rear cross traffic alert will be automatically deactivated and it will be impossible to activate them if the tow hitch is electrically connected to a trailer or other similar object. As soon as the driver starts driving, a message appears on the instrument cluster screen indicating that the assistant is deactivated.

Once the trailer is uncoupled from the vehicle, the assistant will return to its initial state prior to the moment when the trailer was electrically connected. If the tow hitch is not factory fitted, then the rear cross traffic alert will have to be deactivated manually when driving with a trailer.

WARNING The smart technology incorporated into the rear cross traffic alert cannot overcome the limits imposed by the laws of physics; it only works within the limits of the system. The parking assistant function should not tempt you into taking any risks. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. The system should never be used in limi- ted visibility conditions or complicated traf- fic, e.g., in high-traffic areas or when crossing multiple lanes. Be sure to always be aware of the vehicle's surroundings, since the system often fails to detect things such as bicycles or pedes- trians. The rear cross traffic alert itself will not brake the vehicle to a complete stop.

208

Practical equipment

Practical equipment Storage compartment

Introduction Use the storage compartments only for small or light items.

WARNING Objects inside the vehicle that are not se- cured could be thrown across the cabin in the event of sudden braking or manoeuvring. This may cause severe injuries as well as loss of control of the vehicle. Do not carry animals or sharp, hard or heavy items in open storage compartments of the vehicle, on the dashboard or on the cover behind the rear seats, or inside pieces of clothing or bags inside the vehicle. Keep the storage compartments closed at all times while the vehicle is in motion. Do not hang garments weighing more than 2.5 kg (approx. 5.5 lb) on the vehicles coat hooks. Never leave heavy, hard or sharp ob- jects in the pockets of these pieces of cloth- ing.

WARNING If you leave lighters inside the vehicle, they might be damaged or lit inadvertently. This could lead to severe burns and damage to the vehicle. Before moving a seat, make sure there are no lighters in the moving part area of the ve- hicle. Before closing a storage compartment, make sure there are no lighters in the closing area. Never leave a lighter inside a storage com- partment or any other surface of the vehicle as it could ignite due to the high tempera- tures on such surfaces, particularly during the summer.

NOTICE Do not store heat- or cold-sensitive ob- jects, food or medicines in the cabin. Heat and cold could damage them or render them useless. Objects made from transparent materials left inside the vehicle, such as glasses, mag- nifying glasses or transparent suction pads stuck to the windows can concentrate sun- light and damage the vehicle.

Glove compartment

Fig. 150  On the passenger side: glove compartment.

Opening and closing the glove compart- ment

Opening: Pull the handle  Fig. 150 and open the glove compartment. Closing: Press the glove compartment up- wards.

WARNING If the glove compartment is left open, the risk of causing severe injuries in the event of an accident, sudden braking or manoeuvring in- creases. Always keep the glove compartment closed while the vehicle is in motion.

Practical equipment

209

Storage compartment

Drink holder

Fig. 151  In the rear central armrest: drink holder.

The storage compartments of the driver and passenger doors contain a bottle holder.

Front drink holders

There are two cup holders in the centre con- sole .

Drinks holder in the rear central armrest

Use: Lower the central armrest. When the drink holder is no longer in use, lift the armrest again.

WARNING Incorrect use of the bottle holders may cause injuries. Never put hot drinks in the drink holders. In the event of sudden braking or an acci- dent while driving, hot beverages in the bot- tle holders might spill and cause burns. Ensure that no bottles or other objects are dropped in the driver footwell while driving, as they could get under the pedals and ob- struct their working. Never place glasses, food or other heavy objects drink holders. These heavy objects may be thrown across the cabin in the event of an accident and cause serious injuries.

WARNING Closed bottles may explode inside the vehi- cle due to cold or heat. Never leave closed bottles in the vehicle if the temperature inside is very high or very low.

NOTICE Do not leave open cans in the drink holders when the vehicle is in motion. If the drink is spilled (e.g. due to sudden braking) it may damage the vehicle and its electrical sys- tem.

Note The inside elements of the drink holders can be extracted for cleaning.

Storage compartment under front seats

Fig. 152  Storage compartment under the right front passenger seat.

Opening: Press the tab on the drawer handle and take the drawer out. Closing: Push the drawer under the seat until it engages.

210

Practical equipment

WARNING If the drawer is left open, it could prevent use of the pedals. This may cause serious acci- dents and injuries. Always keep the drawer closed while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the drawer and any objects in it could fall into the driv- er's footwell and obstruct the pedals.

NOTICE The drawer can contain 1.5 kg at most.

Other object holders You will find more object holders, compart- ments and supports in other parts of the vehi- cle: In the centre console. In the upper part of the glove compartment. The load should not exceed 1.2 kg. Other storage compartments are found in the rear seat, to the left and the right of the seats. In the backrests of the front seats, storage pockets.

There are hangers on the struts of the doors and the rear.

WARNING Hanging clothes may decrease the driver's visibility, which may cause serious accidents and injuries. Always hang clothes from hangers in such a way that the driver's visibility is not affec- ted. Only hang light pieces of clothing from the hangers of the vehicle. Never leave heavy, hard or sharp objects in the pockets of these pieces of clothing. Do not use clothes hangers to hang up the clothing, as this could interfere with the func- tion of the head-protection airbags.

NOTICE Do not place overly large objects in the pockets on the front seat backrests (e.g. bot- tles) or objects with sharp edges. Risk of damage to the pockets and the upholstery.

Power sockets Introduction

Electrical equipment can be plugged in to the vehicle's sockets. The devices must be in a perfect state of repair. Do not use defective devices. The 12 volt power socket will only work with the ignition on.

WARNING Improper use of the sockets or electrical de- vices could lead to a fire and cause serious injuries. Please ensure that children are never left unsupervised inside the vehicle. The sockets and the devices connected to them can be used when the ignition is switched on. If electrical devices overheat, switch them off immediately and disconnect them from the mains.

NOTICE To avoid damaging the electrical system, never connect electrical devices that sup- ply power, such as solar panels or battery chargers, to 12-volt sockets to charge the 12- volt battery. Only use electrical devices that comply with the applicable electromagnetic com- patibility directives. To prevent voltage fluctuations from caus- ing damage, unplug any connected electri- cal devices before switching the ignition on and off. Never connect electrical devices that con- sume more than the specified power to a 12 volt socket. Exceeding the maximum power consumption could damage the vehicle's electrical system. Observe the instruction manuals of electri- cal devices!

Practical equipment

211

Power sockets

1

2

3

Note The use of electrical appliances with the engine switched off will cause the 12-volt battery to discharge. Uninsulated devices can interfere with the radio, infotainment system and the vehicles electronic system.

Vehicle power sockets

Fig. 153  Vehicle 12 volt socket.

 Fig. 153 12-volt sockets on the centre console. 12-volt sockets in the luggage compart- ment. 12-volt USB sockets at the rear of the con- sole, between the front seats.

Make sure that the maximum power of the sockets is not exceeded. The power consump- tion of the devices is shown on the type plate of the devices. The continuous output of all of the vehicles 12- volt sockets is 120 watts in total. When connecting two or more electrical devi- ces at the same time, make sure that their total consumption never exceeds 190 watts.

USB power sockets

Depending on the equipment and the country, the vehicle may also have USB connections ex- clusively for charging or as a power socket  Fig. 153 3 . These USB ports are located at the rear of the console, between the front seats . These con- nectors can work at a maximum power of up to 10.5 W per port.

NOTICE If the 12-volt socket is used at full power for longer than the specified time, the fuse may blow. Never use the 12 volt socket at full power for more than 10 minutes. In the case of full power, use a single 12- volt socket.

230 volt power socket

Fig. 154  In the left hand side of the luggage compartment: 230 volt power socket.

With the engine running, the power socket acti- vates automatically as soon as a connector is plugged in. If there is enough power available, the socket can still be used while the engine is off   . Maximum power consumption is 150 watts (300 watts - maximum 2 minutes). Connect an electrical device: Open the cover and insert the plug into the power socket as far as possible to unlock the built-in child lock. The socket only supplies power once the child lock is unlocked.

LED on the power socket  Fig. 154 (arrow)

Steady green light: The childproof lock is unlocked. The socket is ready to operate.

212

Practical equipment

Flashing green light: The ignition is switched off, but there is enough power available to continue supplying the socket with current for a maximum of 10 minutes. If the connector is unplugged before this time elapses, the socket is disconnected and cannot be used again until the ignition is switched on again. Flashing red light: There is an anomaly, e.g. disconnection due to a current surge or overheating.

Disconnection due to overheating

When the temperature exceeds a certain value, the 230 volt socket inverter is automatically dis- connected. The disconnection prevents over- heating when the power consumption of the connected devices is excessive or the ambient temperature is very high. The 230-volt power supply can be used once again after a cool- ing time. First unplug the connector of the con- nected device and then plug it back in again. This prevents the electrical device from being switched on again if this is not wanted.

WARNING The electrical system is under high voltage!

Do not spill liquids onto the socket. Do not plug adapters or extension cords into the 230 volt power socket. Otherwise, the integrated child lock will be unlocked and the power socket will operate. Do not insert conductive objects (a knitting needle, for example) into the 230 volt power socket.

NOTICE 230 volt power socket: Do not leave devices or connectors that are too heavy (e.g. a transformer) hanging directly from the power socket. Do not connect neon lamps. Only connect devices to the socket if the device and socket voltage match. The built-in overload disconnect function prevents any electrical devices that require a high start-up current from turning on. In this case, unplug the electrical device's power supply and re-try the connection after about 10 seconds.

Note Some appliances may not work properly when connected to the 230 volt sockets due to a lack of power (watts).

Data transmissions

213

SEAT CONNECT

Data transmissions SEAT CONNECT

Introduction To use it, SEAT CONNECT must first be activa- ted online by entering into a SEAT CONNECT contract with SEAT, S.A. and is subject to a tem- porary use limitation depending on the country. Both the SEAT CONNECT service portfolios of- fered by SEAT and individual services can be modified, cancelled, deactivated, reactivated, renamed and extended, even without prior noti- fication. In https://my.seat you can create the user ac- count, see the description of services and more information. The execution and availability of the SEAT CONNECT services and service portfolios may vary depending on the country, as well as the vehicle, its equipment and connectivity. SEAT CONNECT's voice recognition or search technology does not recognise or offer results for all words. There are SEAT CONNECT services for which registration is mandatory and others for which it is not mandatory.

Description of services

Before running SEAT CONNECT services, read and take into account the description of the corresponding services. Descriptions are upda- ted non-periodically and are available online at https://my.seat. Always use the most up-to-date version of the corresponding service description.

WARNING In areas with insufficient mobile phone and GPS coverage, emergency calls and phone calls will not be connected and data cannot be transmitted. Change location if possible.

NOTICE The vehicle may be damaged by factors out- side the control of SEAT, S.A. These damaged can include: Misuse of mobile terminals Data loss during transmission. Unsuitable or defective third party appli- cations. Malicious software on data storage devi- ces, computers, tablets or mobile phones.

Services portfolio The initial service assignment shown here rep- resents the maximum possible volume. The maximum possible volume is only available on a few vehicle models. During the useful life of the vehicle, you can change the assignment shown here. After activating the service management in the infotainment system, you can check whether services are available to the vehicle and what services they are  page 217. In some countries and in the event of a contract renewal, the services offered may be combined differently than indicated here. They may also vary depending on the year of production of the vehicle. The services mentioned correspond to SEAT CONNECT Gen3 (third generation).

SEAT CONNECT services and functions that do not require activation

The following services also work without the activation of SEAT CONNECT: Public emergency call service. Privacy mode. Legal.

SEAT CONNECT services

The SEAT CONNECT services are: Private emergency call Public emergency call

214

Data transmissions

Roadside assistance call Customer support Service appointment planning Online system update Customisation Activating SEAT CONNECT Private mode (deactivation of services) Delete user / Reset factory settings Remote independent heating Remote opening Horn and turn signals Vehicle status incl. doors and lights Driving data Vehicle status report Anti-theft alarm warning Zone warning Speed warning Online map update Search for points of interest Petrol stations Online traffic information Parking lots Online infotainment system update Online route calculation Information on risks Dictation Online radio

Online media Online route import Online destination import Remote auxiliary ventilation Parking position Privacy mode Legal

SEAT CONNECT individual options In-Car Applications. These applications can be purchased and installed directly in the info- tainment system through the In-Car store. Full Link. Data package. Pay per use data rates for the use of online functions, for example, 2 GB per month.

Note The public emergency call service is avail- able regardless of whether the infotainment system is logged in. Customisation and purchase of In-Car ap- plications require logging into infotainment system, but the activation of the vehicle in a SEAT CONNECT account is not necessary.

Activation of SEAT CONNECT and S- PIN

The following steps are necessary for the ac- tivation of SEAT CONNECT (including registra- tion): Create a user account at https://my.seat or directly through the infotainment system in the User Management menu. Place the SEAT CONNECT order and activate it. Add the vehicle to your user account. Prove ownership. Prove your identity. It is only necessary if you are to run SEAT CONNECT services relevant to security. You can activate it at https://my.seat or di- rectly through the infotainment system. To ac- tivate it through the infotainment system, pro- ceed as follows: 9.2 HOME > Manage users > Become primary user.

8.25 MENU > Settings > SEAT Connect > Register.

Follow the rest of the indications and the infor- mation shown in the infotainment system. Dur- ing activation, you may be asked to create an S-PIN.

Update option

9.2 Infotainment yes

Data transmissions

215

SEAT CONNECT

Update option

8.25 Infotainment yes

SEAT CONNECT portal yes

SEAT CONNECT application yes

More information at https://my.seat/faqs

S-PIN

The S-PIN is a sequence of several digits, which can be selected when completed the SEAT CONNECT registration. When creating the S-PIN, avoid easy-to-guess number sequences and known dates of birth. You can change the S-PIN in the SEAT CON- NECT user account in Account settings. The S-PIN is necessary, for example, to protect your user profile or to run a SEAT CONNECT service relevant to the security of your vehicle. You must manage this S-PIN with absolute con- fidentiality. If you reveal the S-PIN to third parties, for secur- ity reasons you must change it immediately.

Ownership and identity accredita- tion

Depending on the Infotainment system, the ownership accreditation method will be the 2- key method or the registration code method.

9.2 Infotainment system

To become a main user and thus prove own- ership of the vehicle, you need both of the ve- hicles physical keys. Ownership accreditation takes place in the vehicle during registration or, if you already have a SEAT CONNECT user ac- count, you must log in through the infotainment system and then go to User management. Switch on the ignition and the infotainment system. In the infotainment system, register in SEAT CONNECT. Or: open the menu Manage users > Settings > Become primary user and follow the instruc- tions. Press the unlock button on the first vehicle key. Press the unlock button on the second vehi- cle key.

8.25 Infotainment system

To become the main user and therefore ac- credit ownership of the vehicle, you will need the registration code found on the SEAT website and in the APP after linking the vehicle to your account (My Garage > Add Vehicle > Accept terms and conditions and SEAT privacy pol- icy). Ownership is accredited inside the vehicle. Go to Vehicle settings > SEAT CONNECT > Registration and enter the pairing code shown on the website or in the App.

Once the infotainment system has processed the orders by radiofrequency, the accreditation of the ownership will have been completed. You can control the current status in the SEAT CON- NECT portal.

How is ownership accredited?

9.2 Infotainment 2-Key method.

8.25 Infotainment Pairing code.

SEAT CONNECT portal No, it is not possible

SEAT CONNECT appli- cation

No, it is not possible

Identity accreditation (SEAT Ident)

Identity accreditation must be done before you can use SEAT CONNECT services that are rele- vant to security, such as the Remote Opening service. Identity accreditation can be done in two ways: In person at the SEAT dealership. You can find more information about SEAT Ident on the SEAT CONNECT portal at https:// my.seat.

Legal provisions During the use of SEAT CONNECT services, in- formation is transferred and processed online through the vehicle. Such data can also provide (at least indirectly) information about the driver

216

Data transmissions

in question, for example, driving behaviour and location. As a contracting party in the SEAT CONNECT contract with SEAT, S.A., you must ensure that when your vehicle is used by other drivers (for example, family or friends), data protection and personal rights are respected. Therefore, you must inform drivers in advance that the vehicle transfers and receives data on- line, and that you can access such data. Not taking into account this obligation to inform, can infringe certain rights of the occupants. Users can manage data sending and transfers through the privacy mode at any time. More information at: https://my.seat/faq.

Follow-up services: ask all occupants

The follow-up services need geographical and vehicle data to determine whether the vehicle is being used within defined speed ranges, where it has been parked or if it is being used in an es- tablished geographical area. This information is displayed on the SEAT CONNECT portal and in the SEAT CONNECT app. Therefore, before moving off, ask all the vehi- cle occupants if they agree with the activated services. If they do not, deactivate the service in question (if possible) or do not allow the occu- pants to use the vehicle.

GPS tracking: marking

If the vehicle has a factory-assembled control unit that transmits the its current geographical position and speed, the vehicle usually has this

GPS marking (e.g., on the roof console). The absence of the marking on the vehicle does not guarantee that the control unit does not trans- mit the vehicles current geographical position and speed.

Personal information

SEAT protects your personal data and only uses them, as long as the law allows it or you have given your consent on the occasion of a use. You will find detailed information on data processing in relation to SEAT CONNECT serv- ices in the Privacy Policy, which you can ac- cess in its corresponding current version on the SEAT website.

Permanent transfer of the vehicle

If another person has left you the vehicle for permanent use (for example, if you buy a used vehicle), SEAT CONNECT may already be acti- vated and the previous user still has the possi- bility of accessing the data registered through SEAT CONNECT and control certain functions of your vehicle. In the infotainment system you can check if your vehicle is assigned to a person as the main user. In this case, you can register yourself as the main user of the vehicle and thus auto- matically delete the previous main user. Alter- natively, through the infotainment system you can directly and permanently delete the previ- ous user as the main user, as well as put the vehicle in offline mode and thus limit both the

communication of your vehicle with the SEAT, S.A. data server and the processing of personal and vehicle data.

Deactivating SEAT CONNECT serv- ices

The following functions are available to acti- vate and deactivate the SEAT CONNECT serv- ices: Allow or prevent data transmissions through the infotainment system  page 217, Privacy mode. Whenever possible: individual deactivation or activation  page 217. You can run the relevant services again after cancelling their deactivation.

Note The services required by law and their data transmission cannot be disconnected or de- activated, for example, the emergency call system (eCall).

Faults Even if the prerequisites for the use of SEAT CONNECT services are met, there may be fac- tors beyond the control of SEAT, S.A. that inter- fere with the execution of such services or pre- vent them. These may be specifically:

Data transmissions

217

Privacy ode

Maintenance, repair, deactivation, software update and technical expansion of telecommu- nication equipment, satellites, servers and data banks. Change of the mobile telephony standard for the transmission of mobile data by the tele- communications service provider, for example, from UMTS to EDGE or GPRS. Disconnection of an existing mobile phone standard by the telecommunications service provider. Interference, disturbance or interruption in the reception of the mobile phone and GPS sig- nal due to aspects such as high-speed driving, solar storms, meteorological influences, topog- raphy, blocking equipment and the intensive use of mobile phones in the radio cells in ques- tion. When in areas with zero or insufficient mobile telephony or GPS signal. Also, for example, in tunnels, confined areas between very tall build- ings, garages, underpasses, mountains and val- leys. External information from third party supplies available with limitations, incomplete or incor- rect, e.g. representations of maps. Countries and regions where SEAT CONNECT is not offered.

Service management Open the settings in Users and go to Privacy settings and services. In vehicles fitted with the 9.2 Infotainment, it is accessed from Users > Settings > Private Mode (deactivation of services). In vehicles equipped with the 8.25 Infotainment it is accessed from Settings > SEAT Connect > Privacy settings and serv- ices. You can do the following in the infotain- ment system: Check which SEAT CONNECT services are currently available in the vehicle. The number of SEAT CONNECT services that are enabled or disabled. Activate or deactivate SEAT CONNECT serv- ices. More information at https://my.seat.

Note If you deactivate all SEAT CONNECT serv- ices, the vehicle can still transmit emergency call (eCall) data.

Privacy mode Introduction

With the Privacy function, data transmissions between the vehicle and the Internet can be allowed or blocked.

The desired mode can be set in vehicle settings in the infotainment system. Data transmission by external devices and their communication with the vehicle cannot be blocked using the Privacy function. The services required by law and their data transmission cannot be disconnected or deac- tivated, for example, the emergency call system (eCall).

Note Please note that all vehicle users can config- ure individual settings in the Privacy func- tion. These settings may not match those de- sired by the vehicle owner.

Privacy and services settings SEAT CONNECT services can be activated and deactivated individually. To do this, just check the box corresponding to the service you want to activate or deactivate. Use the privacy mode option if you want to deactivate all of the serv- ices at the same time.

Privacy mode

Allows you to deactivate or activate the serv- ices depending on the selected privacy level.

218

Data transmissions

no icon

Tracking

Share location. Main users and co-users can view position data on the SEAT CONNECT portal or app.

Location

Use location. Position, vehicle, and user data are used for services.

Personal

No location. Only the vehicle data and user data are used for services.

Incognito

Maximum privacy. Your serv- ices are disabled. Only services re- quired for legal reasons use data.

Setting options are not available in all markets or in all vehicle models.

Connectivity status indication The following symbols indicate the respective data transmission status in the infotainment system.

Symbol white: full connectivity, all serv- ices active Symbol grey: limited connectivity, some services may not be available.

No connectivity, no services available.

WLAN access point Introduction Not available on vehicles without SEAT CONNECT and without navigation

The infotainment system can be used to share a WLAN connection with up to 8 devices  page 218, Configuration for sharing a con- nection over WLAN. The infotainment system can also use the WLAN hotspot of an external device to provide Inter- net to the devices connected to the hotspot (WLAN client)  page 219.

Note Data transmission may incur charges. Due to the high volume of data exchanged, SEAT recommends the use of a flat rate tariff for data transmission. Mobile phone operators can provide the relevant information. Exchanging data packages and purchas- ing them from third parties may generate additional costs, depending on your mobile phone rate, particularly if you are abroad (for example, roaming rates).

Configuration for sharing a connec- tion over WLAN

Establishing the connection with the wire- less network (WLAN) Press the HOME > button. Activate the wireless network. To do this, press the function button Wi-Fi > Infotainment sys- tem as hotspot. Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on the device that is to be connected. If necessary, refer to the manufacturers instruction manual. Activate the mobile device assignment in the infotainment system. To do this, press the func- tion button Use as hotspot and check the checkbox. Enter and confirm the network key displayed on the device. The following adjustments can also be made in the Infotainment system as hotspot menu: Security level: WPA2 encryption automati- cally generates a network key. Network key: Network key automatically generated. Press the function button to man- ually change the network key. The network key must have a minimum of 8 characters and a maximum of 63. SSID: WLAN Network name (maximum of 32 characters).

Data transmissions

219

Full Link

The wireless (WLAN) connection is established. To complete the connection, it may be neces- sary to enter other data into the device. Depending on the version, it is only possible to connect in Hotspot mode to get AppConnect, and a maximum of 5 devices can be connec- ted. Repeat this process to connect other devices. There is also the option of scanning the QR code by connecting the device directly to the infotainment systems Wi-Fi network without having to enter the password: select Settings > Wi-Fi > Quick connection to infotainment system. An additional feature is that the infotainment system can provide data to any device over WPS (Hotspot mode) in the same menu as the QR code.

Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) This depends on the equipment and the country in question.

Wi-Fi Protected Setup allows an encoded local wireless network to be created quickly and sim- ply (Settings > Wi-Fi > Wi-Fi > Quick WPS connection).

Establish the connection with the wireless network (WLAN). Press the WPS button on the WLAN router un- til the warning light on the router starts flashing. If the WLAN router does not support WPS the network must be configured manually. OR: Press and hold the WLAN button on the WLAN router until the WLAN light on the router starts flashing. Press the WPS button on the WLAN device. The wireless (WLAN) connection is established. Repeat this process to connect other devices.

Configure Internet access The infotainment system can use the WLAN hot- spot of an external device to establish an Inter- net connection.

Establishing the connection with the wire- less network (WLAN) Activate and share a wireless hotspot with In- ternet on the external device. Refer to the man- ufacturers instruction manual. Press the HOME > button. Press the Wi-Fi > Connect to Wi-Fi menu and put a check in the checkbox.

Press the Search for Wi-Fi button and select the device you want from the list. If necessary, enter the network key of the device in the infotainment system and confirm with OK.

Manual settings: To manually enter the network settings of an external (WLAN) device. The wireless (WLAN) connection is established. To complete the connection, it may be neces- sary to enter other data into the device.

Note Due to the large number of devices on the market, it is not possible to guarantee fault- free operation of all functions.

Full Link Introduction

With Full Link it is possible to view and use the contents and functions that are shown on the mobile phone device on the infotainment screen. To do this, the mobile phone device must be connected with the infotainment system through a USB interface.

220

Data transmissions

Some technologies can also be used by Wire- less Full Link through the Bluetooth interface and a Wi-Fi connection.

The following technologies may be availa- ble: Apple CarPlay Apple CarPlay Wireless Android Auto Android Auto Wireless MirrorLink The availability of the technologies that Full Link includes depends on the country and the mo- bile phone device used. You will find more information on the SEAT web- site (www.seat.com).

Access the Full Link main menu

Browsing the Full Link main menu depends on the infotainment system used. Press Home > Full Link

Configure Wireless Full Link

In order to use Wireless Full Link, you must first pair the mobile phone device with the infotain- ment system. To do this, proceed as follows: Connect a mobile phone device for the first time.

Unlock the mobile phone device. Enable Wi-Fi reception and Bluetooth on the mobile phone device. Connect the mobile phone device to the info- tainment system using a USB cable or via Blue- tooth. Access the Full Link main menu, if it is not displayed automatically. Select the mobile phone device and the technology you want. Confirm authorisation inquiries on the mobile phone device to grant the necessary authorisa- tions to the infotainment system. Disconnect the USB connection and connect with the infotainment system again via Wi-Fi or Bluetooth. Wireless Full Link is now configured. The pairing has concluded. The connected mo- bile phone device can also use Wireless Full Link from now on without the USB connection. If pop-up menus are rejected during the con- nection process, Wireless Full Link will not be available. In this case, SEAT recommends delet- ing the devices in both the telephone settings and the infotainment system, and restarting the connection process.

WARNING The use of applications while driving can dis- tract your attention from the traffic. Any dis- traction affecting the driver in any way can lead to an accident and cause injuries. Always drive as carefully and responsibly as possible.

WARNING Any applications that are not suitable or ex- ecute incorrectly may cause damage to the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries. Protect the mobile phone device and its applications from inappropriate use. Never carry out modifications to the appli- cations. Follow instructions in the instruction man- ual for the mobile phone device.

NOTICE SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage caused to the vehicle as a result of the use of applications that are of poor quality or are defective, the inadequate programming of the applications, the insufficient coverage of the network, the loss of data during trans- mission or the improper use of mobile phone devices.

Data transmissions

221

Full Link

Note Wireless Full Link may not be compatible with all technologies. When crossing the border into countries with permitted radio frequencies different to those in your own country, running the Full Link Wireless function may be restricted or even unavailable due to legal regulations. This can also be indicated by a message in the infotainment system. Running Full Link via cable is not affected by this restriction and can continue to be used.

Applications (apps) With SEAT Full Link, the display of the contents of SEAT applications and other providers instal- led on mobile phone devices can be transferred to the infotainment screen. In the case of third-party applications, there may be compatibility problems. Applications, their use and the necessary mo- bile phone connection may be pay per use. The offer of applications can be varied and de- signed for a vehicle or a specific country. The content and volume of applications, as well as the companies that offer them, may vary. Some applications also depend on the availability of third-party services. It cannot be guaranteed that all the applica- tions offered will work on all mobile phone devi- ces or with all their operating systems.

The applications offered by SEAT can be modi- fied, cancelled, deactivated, reactivated and extended without prior notification. To avoid distracting the driver while driving, only certified applications can be used.

Full Link symbols and settings To show more information. To open the Full Link settings menu To select Apple CarPlay technology. To select Android Auto technology. To select MirrorLink technology.

Apple CarPlay In order to use Apple CarPlay, the following re- quirements must be met: The iPhone must be compatible with Apple CarPlay. Voice control (Siri ) must be active on the iPhone. Apple CarPlay must be active without limi- tations in the iPhone settings. If this is not possible via Apple CarPlay Wire- less, the iPhone must be connected to the infotainment system via a USB connection. Only USB connections with data transmission are suitable for the use of Apple CarPlay. The USB cable used must be an original Ap- ple cable.

Apple CarPlay Wireless: Bluetooth and Wi-Fi must also be activated on the iPhone.

Establish connection

When you first connect an iPhone, follow the instructions on the infotainment system screen and on the iPhone . The requirements must be met to use Apple CarPlay. Launch Apple CarPlay: Press HOME > Full Link to access the Full Link main menu. Press Apple CarPlay to establish a connec- tion with the iPhone.

Disconnecting In Apple CarPlayTM mode, press the SEAT icon to access the Full Link main menu. Press to interrupt the active connection. The representation of function buttons on the screen may vary.

Special characteristics

During an active Apple CarPlay connection, the following characteristics are applicable: Bluetooth connections between the iPhone and the infotainment system are not possible. If there is an active Bluetooth connection, it is automatically interrupted.

222

Data transmissions

The phone functions are only available through Apple CarPlay. The functions descri- bed for the Infotainment system are not availa- ble. The connected iPhone cannot be used as a media device in the Media main menu. It is not possible to use the built-in naviga- tion system and the Apple CarPlay navigation system at the same time. The last route started interrupts the one that was previously active. Depending on the infotainment system you use, on the instrument panel screen you can view data from the Telephone mode. Depending on the infotainment system you use, on the instrument panel screen you can view data from the Media mode. The instrument panel screen does not display any indication to turn. With the multifunction steering wheel you can accept or reject incoming calls, as well as end an ongoing telephone conversation.

Voice control Press briefly to start voice control using the infotainment system. Press this button for a long time to start voice control (Siri) of the connected iPhone.

Note The availability of technologies depends on the country and may vary. You will find information about technical requirements, compatible iPhones, certified applications and their availability on the SEAT (www.seat.com) and Apple CarPlay websites, or at SEAT dealerships.

Android Auto

Requirements for Android Auto

In order to use Android Auto, the following re- quirements must be met: The mobile phone device, called smartphone from here on, must be compatible with Android Auto. The smartphone must have an Android Auto application installed. If this is not possible via Android Auto Wireless, the smartphone must be connected via the USB connection with data transmission to the info- tainment system. The USB cable used must be an original ca- ble provided by the smartphone manufacturer. Android Auto Wireless: Bluetooth and WLAN (Wi-Fi) also have to be active on the smart- phone.

Establish connection

When you first connect a smartphone, follow the instructions on the infotainment system screen and on the smartphone. The requirements must be met to use Android Auto. Launch Android Auto: Press HOME > Full Link to access the Full Link main menu. Press Android Auto to establish a connec- tion with the smartphone.

Disconnecting In Android AutoTM mode, press the SEAT / Exit icon to access the Full Link main menu. Press to interrupt the active connection.

Special characteristics

During an active Android Auto connection, the following characteristics are applicable: An active Android Auto device can be con- nected at the same time via Bluetooth (HFP profile) with the infotainment system. It is possible to use the phones functions through Android Auto. If the Android Auto device is connected at the same time via Blue- tooth with the infotainment system, the tele- phone function of the infotainment can also be used.

Data transmissions

223

Full Link

An active Android Auto device cannot be used as a media device in the Media main menu. It is not possible to use the built-in navigation system and the Android Auto navigation sys- tem at the same time. The last route started interrupts the one that was previously active. Telephone and Media data can be displayed on the instrument cluster screen. With the multifunction steering wheel you can accept or reject incoming calls, as well as end an ongoing telephone conversation.

Voice control Press briefly to start voice control using the infotainment system. Press and hold this button to start voice con- trol (Google Assistant) on the connected smart- phone.

Note The availability of technologies depends on the country and may vary. You will find information about technical requirements, compatible mobile phone de- vices, certified applications and their avail- ability on the SEAT (www.seat.com) and An- droid Auto websites, or at SEAT dealerships.

MirrorLink

Requirements for MirrorLink

In order to use MirrorLink, the following re- quirements must be met: The mobile device must be compatible with MirrorLink. The mobile phone device must be connec- ted to the infotainment system via a USB con- nection that is suitable for data transmission. The USB cable used must be an original ca- ble provided by the mobile phone device man- ufacturer. Depending on the mobile phone device used, a Car-Mode application that is suitable for us- ing MirrorLink must be installed.

Establish connection

When you first connect a mobile phone device, follow the instructions on the infotainment sys- tem screen and on the mobile phone device. The requirements must be met to use Mirror- Link. Start MirrorLink: Press HOME > Full Link to access the Full Link main menu. Press MirrorLink to connect to the mobile device.

Disconnecting In MirrorLink mode, press APP to access the Full Link main menu. OR: press to access the MirrorLink main menu. Press to interrupt the active connection.

Special characteristics

During an active MirrorLink connection, the following characteristics are applicable: An active MirrorLink device can be connec- ted to the infotainment system at the same time via Bluetooth. If the MirrorLink device is connected to the infotainment system via Bluetooth, the tele- phone function of the infotainment system can be used. You cannot use an active MirrorLink device as a media device in the Media main menu. On the instrument panel screen you can view data from the Telephone mode. The instrument panel screen does not dis- play any indication to turn or the Media mode. With the multifunction steering wheel you can accept or reject incoming calls, as well as end an ongoing telephone conversation.

Function buttons

Function buttons and their function:

224

Data transmissions

APP Return the Full Link main menu. Here you can end the MirrorLink connection, connect another mobile phone device or select another technology. Press to close the open apps. Then press the apps to be closed or the Close all function button to close all the open applications. Press to display the mobile phone device screen on the infotainment system screen. To open the MirrorLink settings.

Press to return to the MirrorLink main menu.

Note You will find information about technical re- quirements, compatible mobile phone devi- ces, certified applications and their availa- bility on the SEAT (www.seat.com) and Mir- rorLink websites, or at SEAT dealerships.

Wired and wireless connec- tions

USB connection

Fig. 155  Centre console: USB input.

Fig. 156  Rear centre console: USB connectors with power socket function.

The USB port can be found in the storage compartment area of the front centre console  Fig. 155. Depending on the equipment and the country, the vehicle may also have USB connections ex- clusively for charging or as a power socket. These USB ports are located at the rear of the console, between the front seats  Fig. 156.

Note Before switching the ignition on or off, unplug the appliances from the USB ports to protect them from any damage caused by fluctua- tions in voltage.

Infotainment system

225

First steps

Infotainment system First steps

Introduction Infotainment functions and settings depend on the country and equipment.

Before first use

Before the first use, bear in mind the following points, to take full advantage of the functions and settings offered: Observe the basic safety warnings  page 225. Reset the Infotainment factory settings. Search and store favourite radio stations on the preset buttons so you can tune them quickly. Use only suitable audio sources and data me- dia. Pair a mobile phone to use phone manage- ment through the Infotainment system. Use current maps for navigation. Register in SEAT CONNECT to run the corre- sponding services.

Current documentation attached

For using infotainment and its components, take into account, together with this instruction man- ual, the following documentation: Supplements to your vehicles on-board doc- umentation. Instruction Manual of the mobile phone de- vice or audio sources. Operating instructions for data media and ex- ternal players. Manuals for the Infotainment accessories subsequently installed or used additionally. Description of services when running SEAT CONNECT services.

Safety instructions Some function areas may include links to third- party websites. SEAT, S.A. is not the owner of the third-party websites accessible through the links, and assumes no liability for their content. Some function areas may include outside infor- mation from third-party providers. SEAT, S.A. is not responsible for such information being cor- rect, up-to-date or complete, or for ensuring it does not infringe the rights of third parties. Radio stations and owners of data media and audio sources are responsible for the informa- tion they transmit.

Bear in mind that parking lots, tunnels, tall buildings, mountains or due to the operation of other electrical devices, such as chargers, can also interfere with the reception of the radio signal. Foils or adhesives with metallic layers on the antenna and on the window panes can inter- fere with radio reception.

WARNING The infotainment central computer is inter- connected with the control units mounted on the vehicle. Therefore, there is a serious danger of accident and injury if the central computer is repaired or disassembled and reassembled incorrectly. Never replace the central computer with another used, recycled or from another vehi- cle at the end of its useful life. The repair or disassembly and reassembly of the central computer should only be car- ried out at specialised workshops. SEAT rec- ommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

WARNING Any distraction affecting the driver in any way can lead to an accident and cause inju- ries. Reading the information on the screen and managing the infotainment system can distract your attention from traffic and cause an accident. Always drive as carefully and responsibly as possible.

226

Infotainment system

WARNING Connecting, inserting or removing an audio source or data media while driving can dis- tract your attention from the traffic and cause an accident.

WARNING Select volume settings that allow you to easily hear signals from outside the vehicle at all times (e.g. emergency services sirens). Hearing may be impaired if using too high a volume setting, even if only for short periods of time.

WARNING The following circumstances may result in an emergency call, phone call or data transmis- sion not being made or being interrupted: When in areas with zero or insufficient mo- bile telephony or GPS signal. Also in tunnels, confined areas between very tall buildings, garages, underpasses, mountains and val- leys. When in areas with sufficient mobile phone or GPS signal, the telephony network of the telecommunications provider has inter- ference or is not available.

When the vehicle components necessary to make emergency calls, phone calls and to transmit data are damaged, do not work or do not have sufficient electrical power. When the battery of the mobile phone de- vice is discharged or its charge level is insuf- ficient.

WARNING In some countries and some telephone net- works it is only possible to make an emer- gency call, if a mobile telephone device is connected to the telephone interface of the vehicle, inside it there is an unlocked SIM card with sufficient balance to make calls and with sufficient network signal coverage.

WARNING Read and observe the operating instructions provided by the manufacturer in question when using mobile phone devices, data me- dia, external devices, external audio and multimedia sources.

WARNING When changing or connecting an audio or multimedia source may cause sudden changes in the volume. Lower the volume before connecting or switching to audio or multimedia sources.

WARNING If mobile phone and radiocommunication de- vices are used without connection to an external antenna, the maximum electromag- netic radiation levels inside the vehicle might be surpassed, thus posing a risk to the health of the driver and passengers. This is also the case if the external antenna has not been correctly installed. Keep a distance of at least 20 centimetres between the antennas of the mobile phone device and an active medical device, such as a pacemaker, as mobile phones might alter the functioning of these devices. Do not carry a mobile phone switched on very close or directly on top of an ac- tive medical device, for instance in a chest pocket. Immediately turn off the mobile phone if you suspect it is causing interferences in an active medical device or any other medical device.

WARNING Mobile phones, external devices and acces- sories that are loose or not properly secured could move around the passenger compart- ment during a sudden driving or braking ma- noeuvre or an accident and cause damage or injury. Set mobile phone devices, external devices and their accessories outside the airbag de- ployment areas or store them securely.

Infotainment system

227

First steps

Position the connection cables of the audio sources and external devices so that they do not interfere with the driver.

WARNING The centre armrest may obstruct the driver's arm movements, which could cause an acci- dent and severe injuries. Keep the storage compartments of the centre armrest closed at all times while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING If the light conditions are not good and the screen is damaged or dirty, the indications and information displayed on the screen may not be read or be read incorrectly. The indications and information displayed on the screen should never induce to take any risk that compromises safety. The screen is not a replacement for driver awareness.

WARNING Radio stations can transmit disaster or haz- ard announcements. The following condi- tions prevent such notices from being re- ceived or issued: When in areas with zero or insufficient ra- dio signal. Also in tunnels, confined areas between very tall buildings, garages, under- passes, mountains and valleys.

When the frequency bands of the radio station have interference or are not available in areas with sufficient radio signal recep- tion. When the speakers and the vehicle com- ponents necessary for radio reception are damaged, do not work or do not have suffi- cient electrical power.

WARNING Switch off mobile phone devices in areas with a risk of explosion!

WARNING The driving recommendations and traffic in- dications shown on the navigation system may differ from the current traffic situation. Traffic signs, signalling systems, traffic regulations and local circumstances prevail over driving recommendations and naviga- tion system indications. Adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- tions. Certain circumstances can significantly in- itially planned lengthen both the duration of the trip and the route to the destination, or even temporarily prevent navigation to it, for example, if a road is closed to traffic.

NOTICE In areas where special regulations apply or the use of mobile phones is forbidden, the mobile device in question must be switched off at all times. The radiation produced by a mobile phone device when switched on may interfere with sensitive technical and medi- cal equipment, possibly resulting in malfunc- tion or damage to the equipment.

NOTICE If the playback volume is excessive or distor- ted, the speakers may be damaged.

228

Infotainment system

Overview and controls Connect System

Fig. 157  Overview: control unit

1 Touch screen. The infotainment functions can be used through the screen.

2 Navigation Menu 3 Full Link menu 4 Turn volume up 5 Turn volume down 6 Turn the infotainment on/off 7 HOME button.

: main menu with widget views. : main menu in tile mode.

Infotainment system

229

Overview and controls

Media System

Fig. 158  Overview: control unit and indication in the 8.25-inch version

1 Touch screen. The infotainment functions can be used through the screen.

2 Rotary push button (to adjust the volume and to switch the infotainment on/off)

3 Rotary push button (to search and select) 4 HOME button (to open the start page) 5 Radio/Multimedia  page 237 6 Telephone  page 251 7 Full Link  page 219 8 Vehicle information  page 34 9 Vehicle settings  page 35

230

Infotainment system

General instructions for use Operating indications The infotainment needs a few seconds for the complete start-up of the system and during that time it does not react to inputs. Only the image of the rear view camera system can be displayed during system start-up. The display of all indications and the execu- tion of functions only takes place once the info- tainment system has finished booting. The du- ration of the system booting depends on the number of infotainment functions and may take longer than normal in the event of very high or very low temperatures. When using the infotainment system and corresponding accessories, e.g., headphones, bear in mind country-specific regulations and legal provisions. Some functions of the infotainment system require an active SEAT CONNECT user account and an Internet connection for the vehicle. The data transmission must not be limited to per- form the functions. To use the infotainment system, simply lightly press a button or touch the screen. For the correct operation of the infotainment system it is important that it is switched on and that, if necessary, the time and date of the vehi- cle are set correctly.

If a function button is missing on the screen, it is not a device defect, but corresponds to the specific equipment of the country or version. Some infotainment functions can only be se- lected when the vehicle is at a standstill. In some countries, the selector lever must also be in the parking position P or in neutral position N. It is not a malfunction, but is due to compliance with legal provisions. Restrictions on the use of devices using Blue- tooth technology may apply in some coun- tries. For further information, contact the local authorities. If you disconnect the 12 volt battery, turn on the ignition before restarting the infotainment system. If the setup is changed, this may change the display on the screen and in some cases, the infotainment system may behave in a manner different to that described in this instruction manual. In some countries, the infotainment system automatically shuts off when the engine is switched off and the vehicle's 12-volt battery charge level is low. Ensure that any repairs or modifications that need to be carried out on the infotainment sys- tem are carried out by a specialised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this. Using a mobile phone device inside the vehi- cle may cause noise in the speakers.

On vehicles with park assist, the audio source volume is automatically lowered when reverse gear is selected, as well as when the doors are opened. The volume reduction can be adjusted. Information about the included software and the license conditions can be found in Set- tings > Copyright. When selling or lending the vehicle, make sure that all saved data, files and settings have been deleted and, if necessary, external audio sources and data media have been removed.

Note You will find more information and tips for using the infotainment system in the Help menu.

HOME screen In the control and display unit you can set up the views and representation on the home screen or use the factory setting templates. If an icon is missing on the screen, it is not a device defect, but corresponds to the specific equipment of the country or version. The following menus can be included as an icon on the home screen: Main menus on the home screen

Navigation  page 244

Infotainment system

231

General instruc ion for use

Radio  page 237, Media  page 241

Telephone  page 251

Full Link  page 219

Settings  page 232

Vehicle  page 35

Data  page 34

Air conditioning  page 112

Sound

Users

Store

Legal

Help

Managing the infotainment system Execute the functions and settings with the info- tainment controls.

Depending on the equipment, the infotainment system has different controls: Touch screen. Touch zones outside the screen, for example, Volume (+ -). Function buttons, for example, RADIO or ME- DIA.

Opening the Quick Guide

You will find more information and tips for han- dling in the Quick Guide of the infotainment system. Press HOME > .

Connecting and disconnecting the infotain- ment system

The infotainment system turns on when the igni- tion is switched on, unless it has been manually turned off beforehand. The infotainment system starts-up with the last set volume, provided that this does not exceed the preset maximum start-up volume. The infotainment system automatically turns off when the driver's door is opened, provided the ignition has been switched off beforehand.

Moving objects and adjusting volume

Move objects on the screen to adapt settings, for example, with scrollable buttons or to move the areas of a menu.

Depending on the equipment, menus and dis- plays can be customised.

Increasing and reducing images or map sizes

Tip: use your thumb and index finger. Press on the map with both fingers at the same time and leave them on the screen. To enlarge views, slowly separate one finger from the other. To reduce views, slowly bring one finger towards the other.

Note If you turn on the infotainment system man- ually with the ignition off, it will automati- cally turn off after about 30 minutes.

Note As with most state-of-the-art computer and electronic equipment, in certain cases the system may need to be rebooted to make sure that it operates correctly. To do this, if appropriate, press and hold the On/Off but- ton of the infotainment system () for approx. 15 seconds until the SEAT logo appears on the display.

232

Infotainment system

Customising the infotainment sys- tem

Customise the menus and infotainment views to quickly access your favourite or most fre- quently used functions. The main menu contains function buttons for accessing all of the Infotainment apps.

Customise shortcuts

At the bottom of the screen you will find short- cuts to customisable system functions. Use the settings to delete or replace them, or change their order. Press and hold one of the icons (or press + of an empty position) to display an additional window. Select one of the icons from the apps bar. Press to delete an icon. Click on an icon in the additional window to replace the value. Hold your finger on one of the icons and drag it to the desired position. To close the edit mode, press in the addi- tional window, or press .

Settings (system and sound) The selection of possible settings varies de- pending on the country, the equipment in ques- tion and the equipment of the vehicle.

Modifying settings

The meaning of the following symbols are valid for all system and sound settings. All changes are automatically applied when the menus are closed.

/ The setting is selected and activated or connected.

/ The setting is not selected, disabled or disconnected.

To open a drop-down list.

To increase a setting value.

To reduce a setting value.

To go back step by step.

To go forward step by step.

To change a setting value with the scrollable button without adjusting.

Sound settings Access the sound settings: HOME > . In the sound settings there may be the following functions, information and setting options: Equaliser. Position. Settings.

System settings Access the system settings: HOME > . In the system settings there may be the follow- ing functions, information and setting options: Screen. Time and date. Language. Additional keypad languages. Units. Voice control. Wi-Fi. Data connection. Manage mobile devices. Reset factory settings. System information. Copyright. Configuration wizard.

Adjust the volume of external audio sources

If you need to increase the playback volume for the external audio source, first lower the volume on the infotainment system. If the sound from the connected audio source is very low, increase the output volume on the external audio source. If this is not enough, change the input volume to medium or high.

Infotainment system

233

General instruc ion for use

1) Equipment name: Media System.

If the sound from the connected external audio source is too loud or distorted, lower the out- put volume on the external audio source. If this is not enough, change the input volume to me- dium or low.

Clean the screen Remove persistent dirt carefully and without us- ing aggressive cleaning products. To clean the screen we recommend that: The infotainment system is switched off. Use a clean, soft cloth dampened with water  page 334. In case of persistent dirt: soften the dirt by moistening with a little water. Then carefully re- move with a clean, soft cloth.

NOTICE Cleaning the screen with inappropriate cleaning products or when dry, may damage it. When cleaning, only press lightly. Do not use aggressive cleaning products or that contain solvents. Such products may damage the equipment and darken the screen.

Trademarks, licenses and copyrights

Registered trademarks and licenses

Certain terms in this manual bear the symbol or . These symbols indicate that they are trademarks or registered trademarks. The ab- sence of this symbol, however, does not neces- sarily mean that the term in question can be used freely. Other product names are registered trade- marks of the respective rights holders.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Lab- oratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license from Dolby Lab- oratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Android Auto is a trademark of Google Inc. Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue- tooth SIG, Inc. iPod, iPad and iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc. MirrorLink and MirrorLink Logo are certified trademarks of Car Connectivity Consortium LLC. Windows is a registered trademark of Micro- soft Corporation, Redmond, USA.

MPEG-4 HE-AAC audio coding technology and patents are licensed by Fraunhofer IIS. This product is protected by certain Microsoft Corporation industrial and intellectual property rights. The use or commercialization of technol- ogy of this type outside the configuration of this product, without a licence from Microsoft or an authorised Microsoft branch is prohibited.

Copyright

As a general rule, audio and video files stored on data media and audio sources are subject to intellectual property protection in accordance with the national and international provisions applicable in each case. Please bear in mind all legal provisions!

Technical data

Radio with integrated hardware (8.25 ") 1)

The factory-mounted radio in the vehicle with integrated hardware includes country-specific components and software for connectivity and for the execution of vehicle, comfort and info- tainment functions. The corresponding indications are displayed on the radio screen and partly on the instrument panel. Capacitive colour screen:

234

Infotainment system

1) Equipment name: Connect System

8.25 inch version, TFT, WVGA: 1082 x 480 pixels.

Touch operation via the device screen, rotary push-button, menu button and buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.

Central computer with control and display unit1)

The factory-mounted central computer in the vehicle includes country-specific components and software for connectivity and for the ex- ecution of vehicle, comfort and infotainment functions. The corresponding indications are shown on the control and display unit screen and partly on the instrument panel. Capacitive colour screen Using the equipment with: Touch zones Touch operation. Buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. Approach sensors (driver and passenger side recognition, gesture control).

Vehicle and comfort functions Assistants system settings. Heating and air conditioning settings. Lights and visibility function settings.

Vehicle comfort settings. Parking and manoeuvring settings.

Sound system (basic equipment):

The infotainment system that is supplied from the factory is equipped as follows: Speakers in different locations and with dif- ferent power levels (watts). Internal amplifier depending on the system: 4 speakers: 2 x 20 W 8 speakers: 4 x 20 W

Setting options: Equaliser, depending on the system: 4 speakers: treble, mid and bass. 8 speakers: 5 frequency bands and default settings.

Sound distribution, depending on the system: 4 speakers: Balance (left / right) 8 speakers: Balance + Fader (left / right / front / rear).

Sound optimisation by zones (valid for the 8- speaker system): Manual (Driver and All) Automatic depending on the seats occu- pied.

Optional sound system

The infotainment system can be extended with an optional sound system as follows: 10 speakers in different locations and with dif- ferent power levels (watts). External amplifier (340 W Ethernet), which processes the audio signals sent by the central computer. Excitation of speaker channels through class AB final stages. Audio signal processing in digital internal sig- nal processor (DSP). Independent subwoofer in the luggage com- partment. Setting options: User equaliser: 5 bands. Sound distribution: Balance (left / right) + Fader (front / rear). Sound optimisation by zones: Manual (Driver, Front and All)

Subwoofer volume. Surround settings.

Wi-Fi Wi-Fi conforming to IEEE 802.11 b/g/n. 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz transfer (depending on the country).

Infotainment system

235

Voice control

Apple Car Play and Android Auto over Wi- Fi Simultaneous connection of up to 8 Wi-Fi de- vices. Media System: 5GHz access point for Full Link Wireless only

Connect System: Access point Tethering Pairing process simplified by WPS or QR code

Bluetooth profiles

There can be a maximum of two mobile devices connected to the Bluetooth hands-free and a third device connected to the Bluetooth as a music player. When a mobile phone is connected to the tele- phone management system, a data exchange takes place via one of the Bluetooth profiles. Hands-free telephone profile (HFP): the HFP can be used to manage calls through the infotainment system. Audio profile (A2DP): This profile allows au- dio to be transmitted with stereo quality. It may require connecting other profiles for managing and controlling playback. Phone book access profile (PBAP): Allows phone book contents to be downloaded from the mobile telephone.

Messaging profile (MAP): It allows short messages (SMS) and emails to be downloaded and synchronised.

Voice control Introduction

Voice control works both online and offline, tak- ing into account the aspects indicated in the section Languages available depending on the market. In online mode, commands are re- corded more accurately, as more data is avail- able. Voice control understands questions and ex- pressions without having to learn commands. Commands can be formulated freely and can be colloquial. Command proposals can be found in the infotainment system, for example in the Help > Voice control menu. Functions are reduced in offline mode. Loud noises inside or outside the vehicle can cause malfunctions, as well as confusing phra- ses and answers.

Languages available depending on the mar- ket Online and offline: German, American Eng- lish, British English, French, Italian, Spanish, Czech, Dutch, Polish, Portuguese, Swedish,

Danish and Norwegian. These languages have advanced functions such as Online Com- mands, natural interaction, etc. The other languages of the infotainment system do not offer natural interaction.

Requirements Online and offline: voice control with the cor- responding infotainment installed in the vehicle. Online: current SEAT CONNECT Plus contract active.

Note Voice control only recognises commands in the language that is set in the infotainment system. Test the voice control with the vehicle stop- ped before starting to move to familiarise yourself with its operation. Online voice search will be faster and more reliable if the Use location privacy setting is selected. Voice control can only control functions that are available as part of the vehicles equipment.

Wake word and commands

Voice control wake words

Voice control starts when the infotainment rec- ognises the wake word.

236

Infotainment system

If you have connected the voice control using the wake word, the connected infotainment an- swer with How can I help you? . OR: after the wake word, say the desired command, for example: Hola Hola and then heating. The system scans the words spoken in the vehi- cle after the wake word.

Connect and disconnect the wake word Press HOME > Settings > Voice control > Activate / deactivate wake word.

Wake word: Hola Hola

Commands

To help the voice control recognise commands reliably: Pronounce clearly. Confusing commands are not recognised. Speak in a normal tone of voice. Speak a little louder if you are driving at high speed. Avoid outside noises. Open windows and doors can interfere with voice control. Avoid other secondary noises, such as con- versations in the vehicle. Do not direct the air flow from the outlets towards the microphone or the interior lining of the roof. Do not make long pauses.

Voice control is active and recognises the words pronounced.

Note When the activation word is disconnected, the infotainment system cannot be activated by means of the activation word. Voice con- trol is still available via the button on the multifunction steering wheel. Availability depends on country and equip- ment.

Start and stop voice control Depending on the equipment, you can start voice control in different ways.

Start voice control Voice control activation: say the word that activates voice control. Multifunction steering wheel: press the voice control button . In some cases you can also start voice con- trol of the connected mobile phone device, by pressing and holding the voice control button.

Manually ending voice control

Voice control can be cancelled with the Can- cel command. Multifunction steering wheel: press the voice control button twice in a row, or press and hold.

The voice control ends automatically, if you use infotainment functions, if the parking system is activated or by incoming calls.

Infotainment system

237

Radio mode

Radio mode Introduction

Fig. 159  Schematic diagram: Radio view.

In Radio mode you can tune in the available radio stations in different frequency bands and memorise your favourites on the preset buttons to access them quickly. The types of reception and frequency bands available depend on the equipment and the country. In certain countries, frequency bands may stop broadcasting or not be available again.

Access the RADIO menu

Press HOME >  Fig. 159.

Access the settings Press HOME > > .

Online functions in Radio mode

Online functions in Radio mode are only availa- ble under the following conditions: SEAT CONNECT or SEAT CONNECT Plus equipment. You have an active SEAT CONNECT user ac- count. The vehicle is assigned to your user account. You have a corresponding data package ac- quired from the In-Car store or have a data volume for your own mobile phone device via Wi-Fi access point.

Note For streaming services you need to have an account with the provider in question. Radio stations are responsible for the con- tent of the information they transmit. Elec- trical equipment connected to the vehicle may also cause interference in radio signal reception and noise in the loudspeakers. Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to the windows may affect reception on vehi- cles with a window aerial.

238

Infotainment system

AM FM/DAB

Internet radio

TP

Radio equipment and symbols The functions, as well as the types of reception and frequency bands available depend on the equipment and the country. AM tuner. Dual FM receiver (diversity antenna). Summarised FM station list. Merger of DAB and FM stations into one list. Fusion of all stations stored in preset buttons into one list. Maximum 36 favourite stations. Station logos. DAB presentation (slideshow). Images that are emitted sequentially. Internet radio.

Universal symbols in Radio mode

To select the desired AM frequency band. To select the desired FM/DAB fre-

quency band. To select the type of Internet ra-

dio reception. Next to the name of the station, monitoring of active traffic information stations (TP).

Symbols on the FM/DAB frequency band

To display the frequency band for manual selection of the FM frequency. Only possi- ble when the summary station list is discon- nected.

DAB not available. DAB stations support presentations (slide- show).

Symbols on the AM frequency band

Manually updating the station list. To display the frequency band for manual selection of the AM frequency.

Menus in Internet radio mode

Show station selection. Open text search. Show the last online radio stations heard. Show the 100 most played radio stations and podcasts. Show available online radio podcasts. Show online radio stations, grouped by country. Show online radio stations by the desired language. Show online radio stations whose pro- gramme belongs to the desired musical genre.

Selecting, tuning and saving a sta- tion

Select the frequency band

Before selecting a station you have to select a frequency band or a type of reception. Differ- ent stations are available depending on the fre- quency band selected or the type of reception. The types of reception and frequency bands available depend on the equipment and the country. Select the frequency band or type of recep- tion: AM, FM/DAB, FM (for devices that do not have DAB), Internet radio.

Search and select a station

You can select radio stations in different ways. The options vary depending on the frequency band and the type of reception.

Select via the frequency band (AM and FM)

1. Activate the frequency band. 2. Click on the cursor, scroll through the fre-

quency band and release it when you reach the frequency band you want. OR: press on a point on the frequency band. The cursor will automatically jump to the corresponding frequency.

The station of the set frequency is tuned.

Infotainment system

239

Radio mode

Select from the station list (AM and FM/DAB)

The station list shows the stations that are cur- rently tunable. In the AM frequency band, you may have to update the station list if you are no longer in the area where you last accessed the station list. In the FM/DAB frequency band, the station list is automatically updated. 1. Open the station list 2. Press the station you want. The selected station is tuned. In the case of FM/DAB and if the station is available, the best quality reception is automatically selected.

Search and filter stations (Internet radio)

In Online Radio mode, stations can be filtered by categories and can be searched by text. 1. Open the station list. 2. Select the category by which the stations

are to be filtered. OR: press to start the text search. The input field is displayed.

3. Enter the name of the station you want. The list of the stations found is updated while entering the text.

4. Press the station you want. The selected station is tuned.

Search in SCAN mode (AM and FM/DAB)

In SCAN mode the stations are automatically tuned in a sequential manner and each of them is played for approx. 5 seconds. To start the SCAN mode, under Settings press SCAN. SCAN mode starts and the station currently tuned in is shown on the screen. Next to it is a SCAN function button. To select a station press SCAN. SCAN mode stops and the station is tuned. The SCAN function button is hidden.

Storing the station on the preset buttons

You can store up to 36 stations of different fre- quency bands and reception types as favour- ites using the preset buttons. 1. Tune the station you want. 2. Access the preset buttons. 3. Press the preset button and keep it pressed

until the station is stored. OR: press the station on the station list and keep it pressed. The preset buttons are dis- played.

4. Press the preset button. The station is stored in the selected preset but- ton. If a station was already stored in the preset button, it is overwritten with the new station.

Special functions in Radio mode

Traffic information (TP)

The TP function monitors the announcements of a station with traffic information and auto- matically reproduces them in the Radio mode or in the multimedia playback that is active. To do this, you have to be able to tune into a sta- tion with traffic information. Some stations without their own traffic informa- tion support the TP function by broadcasting traffic information from other stations (EON). In the AM frequency band or in the Multimedia mode, a station with traffic information in the background is automatically tuned while it is possible to tune into a station with traffic infor- mation. If no station with traffic information can be tuned in, the device automatically searches for stations with tunable traffic information. Stations with traffic information are not availa- ble in all countries. Activating and deactivating the TP function In Radio mode or Multimedia mode, press > Traffic programme (TP).

Presentations (SlideShow) in DAB

The slideshow function (SLS) is a feature of digi- tal radio (DAB) stations, allowing a slideshow of images, e.g. the stations logo, to the user.

240

Infotainment system

Activating and deactivating the SLS function It is possible to deactivate the slideshow func- tion on DAB radio stations: In the Radio Menu click on the area where the station information is located, either in the name or on the additional information (author or information text). OR: in the menu > Slide Show (switch on/ off).

Online radio

Online radio is a type of reception for Internet radio stations and podcasts that are independ- ent of AM, FM and DAB. Thanks to Internet transmission, reception is not limited to the re- gion.

Online radio is only available through the Inter- net connection of the active infotainment sys- tem. The use of online radio can generate ex- penses due to the transmission of data from the Internet. In Online radio mode, press and set the audio quality to high or low to tune the online radio.

Station logos

In the case of some frequency bands, station logos may already be pre-installed in the info- tainment system.

If in the FM/DAB frequency band settings the automatic selection of station logos is acti- vated, station logos are automatically assigned to the stations. In the Online radio mode, the infotainment sys- tem accesses the station logos of the online database and automatically assigns them to the stations.

Assign station logos manually

1. In FM/DAB mode, press Station logos. 2. Press on the icon and then select the

station to which a station logo is to be as- signed.

3. Select the station logo. If desired, repeat the same process with other stations.

4. OR: via the menu > Station logos.

Infotainment system

241

Media Mode

Media Mode Introduction

Fig. 160  Schematic diagram: Media view

In Media mode you can play multimedia files from data media and streaming services through the infotainment system. Depending on the equipment, the following data media can be used: USB storage support (for example, a USB stick, a mobile phone connected via USB). Bluetooth device (for example, a mobile phone or a tablet). Depending on the equipment, the following types of multimedia files can be played: Audio files. Video files (depends on the system).

You can also use streaming services. The avail- ability of streaming services depends on the equipment and the country. To use streaming services you need to have your own user account in the streaming service in question.

Access the MEDIA menu

Press HOME >  Fig. 160.

Access the settings Press HOME > > .

Limitations and indications of data media

Data media may not work if they have been ex- posed to high temperatures or have been dam- aged. Please bear in mind the manufacturers indications. Quality differences between data media pro- duced by different manufacturers can cause multimedia playback malfunctions. Incorrect configuration on a data media may cause the data media to be unreadable. Playlists only specify a playback order and re- fer to the storage location of the multimedia files within the folder structure. In a playlist there are no multimedia files saved. To play a

242

Infotainment system

playlist, multimedia files have to be found in the storage places of the data media to which the playlist refers.

Note SEAT assumes no liability for any deteriora- tion or loss of files on data storage devices.

Equipment features and media sym- bols

Audio, multimedia and connectivity: Media playback and control via Bluetooth. Audio playback in these formats: AAC, ALAC, AVI, FLAC, MP3, MP4, WMA. Video playback in these formats: MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 (.mpg, .mpeg), ISO MPEG4, DivX 3, 4 and 5 Xvid (.avi), ISO MPEG4 H.264 (.mp4, .m4v, .mov), Windows Media Video 10 (.wmv, .asf). Playlists on any type of device. Multimedia streaming (online). Multimedia search.

Universal symbols in Media mode

Start playback. Pause playback. Change to the previous track. Change to the next track.

Repeat the track that is playing. Repeat all titles. Activate the shuffle playback order. Display a list of favourites. Add a media file as favourite. Top right: select media source. Access the settings. Open the search. Return to the top folder of the media source.

Select and play a multimedia source

Select multimedia source

Before playing multimedia files you must first connect a multimedia source. To use streaming services you must be connec- ted to the Internet. Connect an external multimedia source. Select the connected media source to be used for playback.

Playing audio and video files

You can search and play multimedia files from an available multimedia source in different ways.

Search in the folder structure

Multimedia files can be catalogued by catego- ries (for example, album, artist, title). In My me- dia this category view is always displayed. The classic folder structure of individual USB data media is also found in My media. 1. Activate the folder structure.

The folder structure of the selected multi- media source is displayed. When My media is selected, the categories (music, videos, playlists) and connected multimedia sour- ces are displayed first.

2. Search for the title you want in the folder structure. OR: press to start a text search The input field is displayed.

3. Enter the name of the desired title. The list of the titles found is updated while entering the text.

4. Press the desired title. If at the beginning of the playback your se- lection is in a folder of a multimedia source, the multimedia files that are in it are also added to the playback. If a playlist is played, all available titles in the playlist are added to the playback.

5. Close your selection with .

Select favourites

In favourites you can save titles, music genres, artists and albums individually for playback.

Infotainment system

243

Media Mode

Access favourites . Press the favourite you want. Depending on your selection, all the titles be- longing to the favourite are added to the play- back.

Save favourites

Only multimedia files in My media of the info- tainment system can be saved as favourites. You can save up to a maximum of 30 titles, al- bums, artists and music genres individually as favourites.

1. Start playback. 2. Access favourites. 3. Tap a favourite that is not assigned.

OR: press and hold on an existing favourite for approx. 3 seconds.

4. Select from the selection list: Title, Album, Artist, Genres, Playlist.

The selection is saved instead of the previously selected favourite. If the favourite was already assigned, the previously saved favourite is over- written. The selectable options in the selection list de- pend on the data attached to the multimedia file. If the music genre is not indicated in the music files, for example, you cannot save the music genre as favourite. If a video file is playing, only that video can be saved as favourite.

Configure streaming services

Depending on the equipment you can use streaming services directly through the infotain- ment system. For this you need to have a pre- mium user account of the streaming service in question and you have to log in with it in the infotainment system. You also need to be con- nected to the Internet. 1. Select Streaming as the multimedia

source. A list of available streaming services is dis- played.

2. Select the streaming service you want. 3. Follow the steps indicated by the infotain-

ment system. The streaming service is added to the list of multimedia sources as a new function button.

Playing entertainment content in the infotainment system

Depending on the infotainment system, videos can be played.

Video mode

When in video mode, a video can be played on the infotainment screen if this is stored on a data media, in My media or is sourced from a streaming service. In this case, the video sound is played through the vehicle's speakers.

The image is only displayed if the vehicle is stopped. When the vehicle is in motion, the in- fotainment screen turns off. The sound of the video can still be heard. A stable Internet connection is required for playback from a streaming service. In this case, telephony costs may be generated.

244

Infotainment system

Navigation Introduction

Fig. 161  Schematic diagram: Navigation view.

A global satellite system determines the current position of the vehicle and the sensors moun- ted on the vehicle analyse the routes taken. All measured values and possible traffic events are compared with the available maps to allow optimal navigation to the destination. Navigation announcements and graphic repre- sentations will guide you to your destination. Navigation management is carried out on the screen. Depending on the country, some functions of the infotainment system will not be available on the screen when travelling above a certain speed. It is not a malfunction, but is due to com- pliance with legislation.

Navigation announcements

Navigation announcements are acoustic indi- cations for driving referred to the current route. The type and frequency of navigation an- nouncements depend on the driving situation, for example, starting the guide to the destina- tion, driving on the motorway or on a round- about and the settings. If the exact destination cannot be reached be- cause, for example, it is in a non-digitised area, indications relating to the address and the dis- tance to the destination are displayed on the screen.

During dynamic route guidance, you will re- ceive information about reported traffic con- gestion on the route. An additional navigation announcement is given if the route is recalcula- ted due to traffic congestion. While a navigation announcement is playing, its volume can be adjusted. The following navi- gation announcements provided will be played with the newly adjusted volume.

Limitations during navigation

If the infotainment system cannot receive data from GPS satellites, for example, in a tunnel or in an underground garage, navigation contin- ues using the vehicle's sensors.

Infotainment system

245

Naviga ion

In areas that are not digitised or are only parti- ally digitised on the infotainment memory, the infotainment system will still attempt to provide route guidance. In the case of missing or incomplete navigation data, it may not be possible to determine the exact position of the vehicle. This may mean that navigation is not as precise as usual. Roads and streets are subject to constant change (e.g. new roads, road works, roads closed to traffic, changes to street names and building numbers). If the navigation data is ob- solete, this may lead to errors or inaccuracies during the route guidance.

Managing the navigation map

To allow an optimal view, you can also man- age the navigation map with additional finger movements.

Moving the map

Tip: use your index finger Move the map with your finger.

Zoom in

Tip: use your index finger To increase the view in a certain position, double-click on the map.

Zoom out

Tip: use your index and middle fingers

Press on the map with both fingers at the same time.

Change view

Tip: use your index finger Press twice on the map and keep your finger pressed on the screen. To zoom out the view of the map, move your finger upwards. To zoom in the view of the map, move your finger downwards.

Change view

Tip: use your thumb and index finger Press on the map with both fingers at the same time and keep them pressed. To zoom out the view of the map, move one finger towards the other. To zoom in the view of the map, move one finger away from the other.

Tilt the view

Tip: use your index and middle fingers Press on the map with both fingers at the same time and horizontal to each other, keep them pressed. To tilt the view of the map forward, move your fingers upwards. To tilt the view of the map backward, move your fingers downwards.

Rotate the map

Tip: use your thumb and index finger

Press on the map with both fingers at the same time and keep them pressed. To rotate the map view, turn your fingers clockwise anticlockwise.

Saved data

The infotainment system saves certain data, for example, frequent routes and position data, to make the entry of the destination more agile and optimise the route guidance.

Delete saved data Press Settings > Basic function settings > Delete and then Accept.

WARNING Select the settings, enter the destination and the modifications for navigation only with the vehicle at a standstill.

Note If a detour is passed during route guidance, navigation may recalculate the route. The quality of the navigation recommen- dations given by the Infotainment system de- pends on the navigation data available and any reported traffic congestions. Navigation announcements are not emit- ted if the sound is muted in the infotainment system.

246

Infotainment system

Navigation functions and symbols

Navigation

Navigation functions depend on the equipment and country.

Functions Entering the destination and route calcula- tion (offline and online). Display of two navigation maps at the same time (screen and instrument cluster). Update of online maps. Predictive navigation. 3D urban maps. Online traffic information. Dynamic POIs (points of interest).

Symbols on the map

The buttons and indications depend on the set- tings and the current driving situation. Symbols for traffic events and points of inter- est (POIs) are displayed on the map, for exam- ple, petrol stations, train stations or interesting stopovers, provided navigation has such data  page 249.

Current position. Search for destinations. Destinations along the route. Final destination.

Home address. Work address. Favourite destinations. Additional window with more options. Additional window with route options.

Centre the map on the current position.

Change view: 2D oriented to the north, or 2D oriented to the direction of travel, or 3D to the direction of travel.

Information about the current route guid- ance. Map scale.

Symbols in the additional window To open the additional window, press .

Repeat the last navigation announcement. Volume of navigation announcements. Map lighting in Automatic, Day or Night mode. Offer new guidance routes.

Other symbols

Entering the detailed destination for an ad- dress. Search for destinations. Frequent destinations. Last destinations.

Favourite destinations. Back

Symbols in the route details

Current position. Destination of the current guidance.

POI symbols (points of interest)

POIs (points of interest) are shown on the map, provided the navigation has said data. Click on the desired POI (point of interest) to start a route guidance  page 247.

Petrol station. Parking lot. Tourist information offices. Train station. Restaurant.

Traffic information.

POIs (points of interest) are shown on the map, provided the navigation has said data  page 249. Click on a traffic event to open an additional window with further details  page 249.

Slow traffic.

Traffic jam.

Infotainment system

247

Naviga ion

Accident.

Broken down vehicle.

Slippery surface (ice or snow).

Road closed to traffic.

Slippery road hazard.

Danger.

Road works.

Strong wind.

Reduced visibility.

Navigation data The Infotainment system is equipped with a built-in navigation data memory. Depending on the country, the necessary navigation data may already be pre-installed. To provide correct route guidance and make the most of the functions offered, the infotain- ment system should be updated on a regular basis.

Using obsolete data may lead to errors during navigation. Current routes cannot be traced or the route guidances will lead to mistaken desti- nations. Ensure navigation data is updated at all times.

Online updating of navigation data

The navigation data of the regions through which you travel frequently is automatically up- dated in the background if the Internet connec- tion is established and the privacy settings are valid. With the ignition switched on, the navigation data is updated automatically.

Manual update of navigation data

Current navigation data for large regions, for example Western Europe, can be downloaded from www.seat.com and stored on USB data devices. Download the navigation data to a USB data device. Turn on the ignition of the vehicle. Connect the USB data device to the infotain- ment system. Navigation data is automatically updated in the background. The map version is displayed in HOME > > System information.

WARNING If you update the navigation data manually while driving, it may cause accidents with se- rious injuries. Update the navigation data only with the vehicle at a standstill.

Note Automatic update of the navigation data is subject to the privacy settings. No update is made in incognito mode.

Start route guidance Depending on the country and equipment, dif- ferent functions are available to enter destina- tions. The different functions for entering destinations are found in the navigation main menu.

Opening the Navigation main menu Press HOME > .

Select the destination and start navigation

1. Press . 2. Select the desired destination. You can

chose from Frequent destinations, Last destinations or Favourite desti- nations.

248

Infotainment system

OR: press and enter the address in the input screen. OR: detailed address.

3. Press Start.

Frequent destinations

The destination synopsis uses recorded data to propose possible destinations. Select the destination and start navigation: 1. Press and then . 2. Select the desired destination. The route

guidance starts automatically. Quick start: for a quick start, press and hold the desired destination for a few seconds.

Recent destinations

Navigation saves the last destinations to make them available for a route guidance. Select the destination and start navigation: 1. Press and then . 2. Press the desired destination. 3. Press Start. Quick start: for a quick start, press and hold the desired destination for a few seconds.

Favourite destinations

Save up to 20 destinations as favourites.

To save a destination as a favourite press in the split screen when entering the destination. Select the destination and start navigation: 1. Press and then . 2. Press the desired destination. 3. Press Start.

Note Enter the destination as accurately as possi- ble. If you enter a destination incorrectly, the route guidance will not be able to start or it will guide you to an incorrect destination.

Start route guidance by selecting from the map

The navigation map includes active areas at many points that are suitable for entering the destination. To do this, press the desired posi- tion or place on the map. If there is map data at this point, you can start a route guidance. Whether it is possible to enter the destination through the navigation map depends on the state of the data and it is not possible for all positions. To start offroad navigation, press an empty area without position data.

Start navigation: 1. Press . 2. Move the view on the map until the desired

position can be selected. The navigation map can be used by means of additional finger movements  page 244.

3. Press the desired destination on the map. 4. Press Route.

Offroad navigation

Offroad navigation calculates routes to se- lected destination points using unknown data. When a destination point is outside the known roads or position data, navigation finds the route to the next point of the known road and completes the path to the next destination point with a direct connection. Start navigation: 1. Move the view on the map until the desired

position can be selected. The navigation map can be used by means of additional finger movements  page 244.

2. Press on any point on the map without posi- tion data.

3. Press Route.

Start route guidance using contact details

Start route guidance with the saved address data of a contact. Contacts saved without ad- dress data cannot be used for route guidance.

Infotainment system

249

Naviga ion

Start navigation: 1. Press . 2. Press on the contact you want. 3. Press Route.

Note If the address details of a contact are ob- solete, the route guidance will nevertheless take you to the registered address. Check that the contact address is updated.

Traffic information The infotainment system receives detailed traf- fic information automatically if the Internet con- nection is established. This information is shown with symbols and highlighting the road network in colour on the map.

Traffic incidents

Traffic incidents, for example, traffic jams or congested traffic, are shown on the navigation map using symbols. With an active route guidance, traffic incidents that are on the current route are shown in the route details. Such traffic incidents can be avoi- ded  page 249, Function descriptions.

Hazard information

Hazard information is shown on the navigation map with symbols in the same way as traffic incidents. In this case, the source of this infor-

mation is another vehicle that has detected the hazard and has uploaded the information to the service provider. The hazards shown are: accident, broken down vehicle and slippery road surface.

Traffic flow indication

The navigation map shows traffic flow accord- ing to current traffic events, highlighting the road network in colour. Yellow: Slow traffic. Red: Traffic jam.

Note Traffic information receipt is subject to the privacy settings. In maximum Privacy mode, no traffic information is received. Tracking or Location level setting is necessary.

Function descriptions

Route details

The route details contain information on all inci- dents, for example, the starting point, stopovers, traffic events, POIs and destination, provided the navigation has such data. If you press on an incident, an additional win- dow opens providing more options. The avail- able options depend on the incident and the current settings.

Open and close the route details To open them, press or swipe it. To close them, press or swipe it.

Edit route guidance

To edit the route guidance, move the stopovers to the destination in the TripView view. Hold the desired destination pressed until it is visibly highlighted. Move the destination to the desired position. Remove your finger from the screen. The route will recalculate.

Avoid traffic incidents

The details of the route show the current traf- fic incidents if the navigation has such data. Avoid traffic incidents by editing route details  page 249. Press on a traffic event. Press on Avoid. The route will recalculate.

Split screen

When handling navigation functions, an addi- tional window with other options may open. Possible options depend on the function being used.

250

Infotainment system

Close the additional screen Press on an empty area outside the addi- tional window. OR: press . OR: press Accept.

Functions in the additional window:

Show on map

Show what is selected on the map.

Add stop- over desti- nation

Add a stopover to the route guid- ance.

Direct route

Starts direct route guidance.

Delete Delete a stopover from the route guidance.

Avoid Avoid traffic jam. The route will re- calculate.

Stop route guidance

Ends the current route guidance.

Close the additional window.

Add a destination to favourites.

Learn usage pattern

When the vehicle is in motion, navigation saves routes and destinations used to automatically generate destination proposals. Destinations are learned based on the time of day and the day of the week.

Navigation can propose up to 5 routes at the same time. The proposed routes may be differ- ent from the routes of the normal route guid- ance. If one of the proposed destinations is selected, the guide to that destination is started. The route guidance follows the selected route until the vehicle deviates from it. In that case, the route is recalculated and takes you back along the most direct path to the initially selec- ted destination. Important traffic jams are taken into account in the route guidance, and are avoided if alter- native routes are available, provided navigation has such data. You can activate and deactivate the function whenever you want.

Enable and disable learning usage pattern

The setting is in the corresponding navigation menu > Basic function settings. To activate the function, activate Learn us- age pattern. To disable the function, disable Learn usage pattern. To delete saved data, press Delete usage pattern.

Infotainment system

251

Telephon interface

Telephone interface Introduction

Fig. 162  Schematic diagram: Phone view.

You can use the telephone interface to connect your mobile to the infotainment system and op- erate phone functions through it. The sound is played through the vehicle's speakers. You can connect up to two mobile phone devi- ces simultaneously to the infotainment system. High speeds, poor weather or road conditions and a noisy ambience (even outside of the ve- hicle), as well as the quality of reception can all affect the quality of a telephone conversation in the vehicle.

Note As a general rule, pairing a device (for ex- ample, a mobile phone device) is only nec- essary once. You can restore the device con- nection via Bluetooth or Wi-Fi with the info- tainment system whenever you want without having to pair the device again. The availability of some telephone func- tions will depend on the mobile phone con- nected to the infotainment system.

Telephone interface equipment and symbols

Equipment features Hands-free function. Use up to two phones at the same time. Phone book with up to 5,000 contacts, de- pending on the infotainment system. SMS functions via Bluetooth: SMS reading, SMS writing (templates included), SMS play- back, message history. Email functions via Bluetooth: reading email, writing email.

252

Infotainment system

Connection to wireless charging option. Connection to the microphone mounted on the vehicle.

Symbols in the main menu

Contacts. List of incoming and outgoing calls. Enter telephone number. Text messages (SMS and emails). Telephone interface settings.

Symbols for calls

The symbols may be different depending on the infotainment system.

Start a call or bringing it to the foreground. End or reject a call. Open contact list. Enter telephone number. Mute the sound of the hands-free Hold call. Continue call. Start conference call. Pass call to private mode. Make an emergency call. Voice mail.

Get help in case of breakdown.

Obtain information on the SEAT brand and selected additional services related to traffic and your travel.

Call list symbols To open the call lists, press .

Incoming call. Outgoing call. Missed call. Telephone number (company). Telephone number (private). Mobile telephone number (company). Mobile telephone number (private). Fax (private). Fax.

Symbols for text messages

The symbols may be different depending on the infotainment system. To open the text messages, press .

Activate voice control input  page 235. Templates for text messages.

Places with special regulations Switch off the mobile telephone and the tel- ephone interface in places with a risk of ex- plosion. These places are not always clearly marked. They include, for example:

The vicinity of chemical pipelines and tanks. The lower decks of boats and ferries. In the proximity of vehicles that run on lique- fied gas (such as propane or butane). Places where the air is laden with chemicals or particles such as flour, dust or metal powder. All other places where the engine or tele- phone must be switched off.

WARNING Switch off the mobile phone in areas with a risk of explosion!

Note In areas where special regulations apply or the use of mobile phones is forbidden, it must be switched off at all times. The radi- ation produced by the mobile phone when switched on may interfere with sensitive technical and medical equipment, possibly resulting in malfunction or damage to the equipment.

Pair, connect and manage Requirement for pairing: Bluetooth is activated on the mobile phone device. Bluetooth is activated on the infotainment system.

Infotainment system

253

Telephon interface

Active

Passive

Depending on the mobile device, it will be necessary to have the Bluetooth menu open or activate the Visibility option so that the de- vice is visible from the infotainment system. Pair a mobile phone device suitable for teleph- ony with the infotainment system to use the telephone interface functions. On the first con- nection, the mobile phone device is paired with the infotainment system. Doing so saves a user profile  page 253, User profiles. The pairing can take a few minutes. The func- tions available depend on the mobile phone device used and its operating system.

Pair a mobile phone device

1. Open the list of available Bluetooth devi- ces on the mobile phone device and select the name of the infotainment system.

2. Please note and, if necessary, confirm the messages that appear on the mobile phone device and on the infotainment system. If the pairing was successful, the phone data is saved in the user profile.

3. Optional: confirm the data transfer mes- sage on the mobile phone device.

Active and passive connection

To use the functions of the telephone interface, there must be at least one mobile phone device connected to the infotainment system. If there are several mobile phone devices connected to the infotainment system, you can switch be-

tween active and passive connections. To use the telephone interface with the desired mobile phone device, establish the active connection with the infotainment system. Difference between connection types

The mobile phone device is paired and connected. The functions of the telephone interface are performed with the data of said mobile phone device.

The mobile phone device is paired and connected. Calls can be managed but the phone book, messages or other functions will not be active.

Paired mobile phone devices are stored in the infotainment system, even if they are not cur- rently connected.

Connect a mobile phone device

Requirement: the mobile phone device is paired with the infotainment system. Bluetooth is activated on the mobile phone device.

Establish an active connection

Requirement: several mobile phone devices are connected to the infotainment system at the same time. Select the desired mobile phone device from the drop-down menu. All other mobile phone devices are automatically in the passive con- nection.

User profiles

For each of the paired mobile phone devices an individual user profile is automatically created. In the user profile, data from the mobile phone device is stored, for example, contact details or settings. A maximum of four user profiles can be saved in the infotainment system at the same time.

WARNING If you perform the pairing while driving, it could cause an accident or injury. Perform pairing only with the vehicle at a standstill.

Note While the infotainment system is in the Known mobile phones menu, the wireless charging function is disabled. When you exit this menu, the wireless charging function is activated again. In the pairing of some mobile phone devi- ces, a PIN number is shown on the screen of the mobile phone device. Enter that number in the infotainment system to complete the pairing.

Basic and Comfort Telephony Depending on the equipment, two types of tel- ephone interface can be used:

254

Infotainment system

Basic telephone interface. Comfort telephone interface.

Basic telephone interface

The Basic telephone interface uses the Blue- tooth HFP profile for transmission. This inter- face allows the use of telephone functions through the infotainment system and playback through the vehicle's speakers.

Comfort telephone interface

Like the Basic telephone interface, the Comfort telephone interface also uses the Bluetooth HFP profile. The Comfort phone interface can be equip- ped with the wireless charging function  page 255. In order to use the functions of the wireless charging function, you have to place a suitable mobile phone device correctly in the storage compartment. The mobile phone device will then connect to the vehicle antenna. This im- proves the reception and sound quality of calls.

Calling and sending messages

Open the telephone interface Press HOME > .

Make a call

Select a phone number to start a call. Different functions are available for selecting a phone number:

Contacts

If a contact has several registered phone num- bers you have to select one. Press and press a number on the list to start the call. OR: press and enter the contact name in the input field to search for it. Press on the contact to start the call. OR: press a favourite in the telephone interface main menu to start the call.

Calls

The telephone interface shows the call list of the mobile telephone device. Start a call from the call list. Press > All and press a number on the list to start the call. OR: press and filter the call list entries (for example, missed calls or dialled numbers). In filtered list, press a number to start the call.

Dial number

Manually enter a phone number to start a call. While entering the phone number, contacts that match that number are shown on the infotain- ment screen. Press and enter the telephone number. Press to start the call. The last call is dialled by pressing and hold- ing the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

Send messages

Depending on the mobile phone device and the infotainment system used, you can send and receive SMS and e-mails through the telephone interface.

Send an SMS: 1. Press > Text message > Enter new mes-

sage and enter the message on the screen. 2. Enter the contact you want in the search

bar. 3. To send the message press OK.

Send an email: Press > E-mail > Enter new message and enter the message on the screen. Enter the contact you want in the search bar. To send the message press OK.

Infotainment system

255

Telephon interface

1) Qi technology allows you to charge your mobile phone wirelessly.

Phone book, favourites and speed dial buttons

In the first connection of a telephone with the infotainment system, the phone book is saved in the infotainment system. It may be necessary to confirm the data transmission on the mobile phone. Each time the phone is reconnected, the phone book is updated. If conference calls are supported, the phone book can be accessed during a call. If there is a saved image for a contact, it can be displayed in the list next to the entry.

Favourites

A speed dial button can be assigned to a phone book favourite up to a maximum of six. If there is a registered photo saved to the contact, it is shown on the speed dial button. All speed dial buttons have to be manually edited and will be assigned to a user profile  page 252.

Assign the speed dial button

In the Favourites menu, press the button, then open the phone book to select a contact as a favourite. If the contact has several phone numbers, press on the number in the list.

Edit the speed dial button To edit or delete a favourite contact press on the icon in the Favourites menu screen. You can delete one or more favourites.

Call a favourite Press the assigned speed dial button.

Note Favourites are not updated automatically. If you change a contact's phone number, you have to reassign the speed dial button.

Connectivity Box

Fig. 163  Centre console: slot for mobile phone connection.

The Connectivity Box includes the Wireless Charger functionality.

Wireless charger

The Wireless Charger allows mobile devices with Qi1) technology to be charged without a cable. To charge your mobile phone wirelessly: Place your mobile device in the middle of the pad with the screen facing up  Fig. 163 ,   . Make sure there are no objects between the pad and the mobile phone. The mobile phone will start charging automat- ically. For further information about whether your mobile device uses Qi technology, check your phone's user manual or visit the SEAT website

WARNING Notifications on the screen of the mobile de- vice can distract the drivers attention and increase the risk of a serious accident. Only place one suitable mobile device, with Qi compatibility if applicable. To ensure that it operates properly, place it without the protective case and ensure that it has maximum dimensions (width x length) of 80 x 140 mm (3.15 x 5.512 inches) on the base of the Connectivity Box as indicated. If the mobile device is not placed on the base of the Connectivity Box, in the correct position, or if its dimensions exceed those

256

Infotainment system

specified, it may not be recognised or may not charge correctly. Under certain circum- stances, the infotainment system indicates that there is a foreign object in the storage compartment. Using a suitable mobile phone device and correcting its position can elimi- nate the fault. If necessary, remove any objects that may obstruct the covers closing function.

WARNING The mobile phone may heat up due to the wireless charging. Think about this before you pick it up, and take care when removing it. There must be no metallic or other objects between the mobile phone and the housing, to prevent the functionality of the Connectiv- ity Box from being affected.

NOTICE The base of the Connectivity Box is not re- movable.

Note Your mobile device must support the Qi inductive charging interface standard for proper operation. The charging time and the temperature vary in accordance with the device used. The maximum charging capacity is 5 W.

Qi technology does not allow you to charge more than one mobile device simul- taneously. You are advised to keep the engine running to guarantee proper wireless charging. When a telephone with Qi technology is connected by USB, it will be charged by the means specified by the manufacturer.

Storing objects

257

Positioning the luggage and cargo

Storing objects Positioning the luggage and cargo

General information

Placing luggage inside the vehicle safely

It is possible to carry objects and luggage in the vehicle, in a trailer  page 265 and on the roof  page 263. When doing so, please consider all legal provisions. Distribute the load in the vehicle as evenly as possible. Always place luggage and heavy objects as far forwards as possible in the luggage com- partment   . Take into account the maximum authorised weight per axle, as well as the maximum au- thorised weight of the vehicle  page 349. Secure the objects to the fastening rings of the boot using appropriate chains or belts  page 261. Also place small objects safely. In vehicles with dynamic headlight range control, the lights adapt automatically. Adapt tyre pressure to the load. Take into account the pressure sticker of the tyres  page 316.

In vehicles equipped with tyre pressure con- trol system, adjust to the new load status if nec- essary  page 326.

WARNING Loose or unsecured objects can cause seri- ous injury in case of sudden manoeuvring or braking or in case of an accident. Partic- ularly if the airbag hits them when deploying and they are thrown across the inside of the vehicle. Please observe the following rules to minimise the risk of injury: Place all objects inside the vehicle safely. Secure all objects, little and large. Place the objects in the cabin in such a way that they can never reach the airbag de- ployment areas while the vehicle is in motion. Keep the storage compartments closed at all times while the vehicle is in motion. Place the objects in such a way that they never force any occupant of the vehicle to sit in an incorrect position. When transporting objects that take up a seat, never let anyone use that seat. Never leave hard, sharp or heavy objects loose in open storage compartment of the vehicle, on the cover behind the rear seat or on the instrument panel. Remove all hard, sharp or heavy objects from the fabrics and bags inside the cabin and store them safely.

WARNING The transport of heavy object changes vehi- cle handling and increases braking distance. Heavy objects that are not properly placed or secured may cause loss of control of the vehicle and thus severe injuries. Never put too much load in the vehicle. Both the carrying capacity as well as the distribution of the load in the vehicle have effects on the driving behaviour and braking ability. When transporting heavy objects, the driv- ing behaviour of the vehicle varies due to the displacement of the centre of gravity. Always distribute the load in the vehicle as evenly and horizontally as possible. Always place heavy objects in the boot be- fore the rear axle and as far away from it as possible. Objects in the luggage compartment that are unsecured could move suddenly and modify the handling of the vehicle. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Accelerate with particular care and cau- tion. Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. Brake earlier than usual.

258

Storing objects

NOTICE Electrical wires or, depending on the fea- tures, the antenna embedded into the rear windows could be damaged, even irrepara- bly, if they are in contact with objects.

Note Straps for securing the load to the fasten- ing rings are commercially available from accessory shops.

Luggage compartment Luggage compartment shelf

Fig. 164  In the boot: removing and installing the shelf.

Fig. 165  In the boot: removing and installing the shelf.

Removing

Detach the cord loops  Fig. 164 B from their hooks A . Remove the rear shelf from the side supports  Fig. 165 by pulling it upwards and then take it out. If necessary, the rear shelf can be stored un- der the luggage compartment double floor  page 259.

Fitting Insert the cover horizontally so that the recess fits onto the axis of the supports  Fig. 165 and press down until it engages. Attach the securing straps  Fig. 164 B onto the rear lid.

WARNING Animals, loose or unsecured or objects car- ried on the rear shelf can cause serious injury in case of sudden manoeuvring or braking or in case of an accident. Do not leave hard, sharp or heavy objects or in bags on the rear shelf. Never transport animals on the rear shelf.

NOTICE Before closing the rear lid, ensure that the rear shelf is correctly fitted. An overloaded luggage compartment could mean that the rear shelf is not cor- rectly seated and it may be bent or dam- aged. If the luggage compartment is overloaded, remove the tray.

Note Ensure that, when placing items of clothing on the luggage compartment cover, rear visi- bility is not reduced.

Storing objects

259

Luggage compar ment

Store the rear shelf

Fig. 166  In the boot: covers for storing the rear shelf.

Fig. 167  In the boot: fitting the rear shelf.

Depending on the equipment, once the lug- gage compartment shelf has been removed, it can be stored under the boot floor.

Remove the left and right covers  Fig. 166. Place the rear shelf in the corresponding housing  Fig. 167. Put the left and right covers in their original position.

Variable luggage compartment floor

Fig. 168  Variable luggage compartment floor: raised position; lowered position.

Fig. 169  Variable boot floor: tilted position.

Variable floor in high position To move from the low position to the high po- sition, lift the floor using the handle  Fig. 168

1 , and pull it back until the front of the floor has fully passed the supports 2 . Move the floor forward over the supports as far as the rear seat backrest and then lower the floor with the handle 1 .

Variable floor in low position To move from the high position to the low po- sition, lift the floor using the handle  Fig. 168

1 , and pull it back until the front of the floor has fully passed the supports 2 . Now let the front part fall to the floor and slide the floor forwards as far as the rear seat backrest; lower the floor at the same time with the handle 1 .

260

Storing objects

Variable floor in the tilted position

When the variable floor is tilted you can access the spare wheel or anti-puncture kit area. Lift the variable floor in the high position using handle  Fig. 168 1 , pull it up and push it towards the backrest of the rear seats until it folds along the hinge line and the movable part of the floor is resting on itself. Rest the floor on its housings  Fig. 169 (ar- rows).

Variable floor with folded seats To move from the high position to the low po- sition, lift the floor using the handle  Fig. 168

1 and pull it back a little. Push the variable floor towards the folded rear seats with the handle 1 using some downward pressure so that the moving part of the floor is flush with the backs of the rear seats.

WARNING Always secure objects, even when the lug- gage compartment floor is properly lifted. Only objects that do not protrude more than 2/3 the height of the floor may be car- ried between the rear seat and the raised luggage compartment floor. Only objects that do not weigh than ap- proximately 7.5 kg may be carried between the rear seat and the raised luggage com- partment floor.

NOTICE The maximum weight that can be loaded on the luggage compartment variable floor in the top position is 100 kg. Do not let the luggage compartment floor fall when closing it. Always carefully guide it downwards in a controlled manner. Other- wise, the lining and the floor of the luggage compartment could be damaged.

Net partition Using the net partition

Fig. 170  Net partition fitted.

The purpose of the net partition is to prevent the items in the boot from moving into the cabin, e.g. in the event of sudden braking.

Fitting the net partition

The partition net can be fitted behind the rear seat or, depending on the features, behind the front seats with the second row of seats low- ered. If required, remove the rear shelf  page 258. Hook the net partition to the left-hand side roof housing  Fig. 170 A . Be sure to pull the cross rod down past the upper position. Hook in the net partition on the rear right- hand side roof housing by pressing on the bar  Fig. 170 A . Secure two hooks of the partition net to the fastening rings of the boot  Fig. 170 B and tighten the straps firmly. To remove it proceed in reverse order.

WARNING Always secure objects, even when the net partition is properly assembled. There should be nobody behind the as- sembled partition when the vehicle is mov- ing. The attachments on the backs of the rear seats must never be used to fit the net par- tition when the rear seat backs are in their vertical position.

Storing objects

261

Luggage compartment equipment

NOTICE If the net partition is secured incorrectly or to incorrect points, this may damage the ve- hicle.

Luggage compartment equipment

Fastening rings

Fig. 171  In the luggage compartment: fastening rings.

There are fastening rings  Fig. 171 on the front and rear of the boot to secure loose objects and luggage with fastening belts and cords.

WARNING If unsuitable or damaged belts or retaining straps are used, they could break in the event of braking or an accident. Objects could then be launched across the passen- ger compartment and cause serious or fatal injuries. Always use belts or straps that are suitable and in good condition. Tighten the belts and straps in a cross layout over the load placed on the boot floor and secure them to the fastening rings safely. Never exceed the maximum tensile load of the fastening rings when securing objects. Make sure that, particularly for flat ob- jects, the upper edge of the load is higher than the fastening rings. Depending on the features, take into ac- count the instruction panels on the boot on how to place the load. Never secure a child seat to the fastening rings.

Note The maximum tensile load that the fasten- ing rings can support is approx. 3.5 kN. Belts, straps and securing systems for the appropriate load can be obtained from spe- cialised dealerships. SEAT recommends visit- ing a SEAT dealership for this.

Note The fastening rings are rendered unusable for versions with a spare wheel.

Net bag

Fig. 172  In the boot: net bag hooked up at floor level.

Fig. 173  In the luggage compartment: rings 1 and hooks 2 for attaching the net bag.

262

Storing objects

The luggage compartment prevents light lug- gage from moving. The net bag has a zip and can be used to store small objects. The net bag can be hooked up to the luggage compartment in different ways.

Hooking the net bag into the luggage com- partment floor

If necessary, the front eyes must be unfolded first  page 261. Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings  Fig. 172 1 and 2   . The bag zip should be facing upwards.

Hook the net bag next to the load threshold Secure the short net hooks to the fastening rings  Fig. 173 1   . The bag zip should be facing upwards. Secure the straps in the bag hooks 2 .

Removing the net bag

The hooked up net bag is taut   . Release the net bag from the fastening rings. Store the net bag in the luggage compart- ment.

WARNING To secure the elastic net bag on the fasten- ing rings of the boot it must be stretched out. Once hooked up it is taut. If the net bag is hooked up or unhooked incorrectly the hooks could cause injuries. Always secure the bag hooks properly so that they do not suddenly release from the fastening rings when hooking or unhooking them. On hooking or unhooking them, protect your eyes and face in case the hooks are released suddenly. Always hook up the net bag hooks in the described order. If a hook is unfastened sud- denly, this may cause injuries.

Bag hooks

Fig. 174  In the boot: retaining hooks.

There may be hooks for hanging bags on both sides of the luggage compartment  Fig. 174. The retaining hooks have been designed to se- cure light shopping bags.

WARNING Never use the hooks to hang luggage or other objects. In case of sudden braking or an accident, the hooks could break.

NOTICE Each hook is designed for a maximum load of 2.5 kg.

Trapdoor for transporting long ob- jects

Fig. 175  On the rear seat backrest: opening the tailboard.

Storing objects

263

Roof carrier

Fig. 176  In the boot: opening the tailboard.

On the rear seat, behind the central armrest, there is a tailboard for transporting long items in the interior, such as skis.

Opening the tailboard Lower the centre armrest. Pull the release lever in the direction of the arrow and push the tailboard cover  Fig. 175

1 down and forwards. Open the rear lid. Insert the long objects through the gap from the luggage compartment. Secure the objects with the seat belt. Close the rear lid.

Closing the tailboard Lift the tailboard cover until it engages. The red mark on the luggage compartment side should never be visible.

Close the rear lid. Lift the centre armrest if necessary.

Note The tailboard can also be opened from the luggage compartment. To do so, press the release lever down, in the direction of the ar- row, and the cover upwards  Fig. 176.

Roof carrier Introduction

The vehicle roof has been designed to optimise aerodynamics. For this reason, cross bars or conventional roof carrier systems cannot be secured to the roof water drains. As the roof water drains are integrated in the roof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap- proved cross bars and roof carrier systems can be used.

Cases in which cross bars and the roof car- rier system should be disassembled. When they are not used. When the vehicle is washed in a car wash. When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi- mum height, for example, in some garages.

WARNING Always secure the load properly using belts or retaining straps that are suitable and in a good condition. Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a neg- ative effect on aerodynamics, the centre of gravity and driving performance. Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions.

NOTICE Remove the cross bars and the roof carrier system before entering a car wash. Vehicle height is increased by the installa- tion of cross bars or a roof carrier system and the load secured on them. For this pur- pose, check that your vehicle's height does not surpass the headspace limit, for exam- ple, for underpasses or for entering garage doors. Cross bars, the roof carrier system and the load secured on them should not interfere with the roof aerial or hamper the path of the panoramic sun roof and the rear lid. On opening the rear lid make sure that it does not knock into the roof load.

264

Storing objects

For the sake of the environment When cross bars and a roof carrier system are installed, the increased air resistance means that the vehicle uses more fuel.

Securing the crossbars and the roof carrier system

Fig. 177  Attachment points for the roof railings for the roof carrier

The crossbars are the basis of a series of spe- cial roof carrier systems. For safety reasons, special fixtures must be used to safely transport luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards or boats on the roof. Suitable accessories can be acquired at SEAT dealerships.

Always secure the crossbars and the roof car- rier system properly. Always take the assembly instructions that come with the crossbars and the roof carrier system in question into account.

Installing the bars

The crossbars are assembled on the roof railings. The distance between crossbars  Fig. 177 A should be between 70 and 90 cm and the distance between the crossbars and the brackets of the roof railings B must be 15 cm.

WARNING Incorrect attachment and use of the cross- bars and the roof carrier system may cause the whole system to detach from the roof and cause an accident and injuries. Always take the manufacturer assembly instructions into account. Check threaded joints and attachments travelling and if necessary tighten them after you have travelled a short distance. When making long trips, check the threaded joints whenever you stop for a rest. Do not modify or repair the crossbars or roof carrier system.

Note Always read the assembly instructions that come with the crossbars and the roof carrier system carefully and keep them in the vehi- cle.

Loading the roof carrier system The load can only be secured if the crossbars and the roof carrier system are properly instal- led   .

Maximum authorised cargo on the roof

The maximum permissible roof load is 75 kg. This figure comes from the combined weight of the roof carrier, the cross bars and the load itself on the roof   . Always check the weight of the roof carrier system, the cross bars and the weight of the load to be transported and weigh them if nec- essary. Never exceed the maximum authorised roof load. If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier with a lower weight rating, you will not be able to carry the maximum authorised roof load. In this case, do not exceed the maximum weight limit for the roof carrier which is listed in the fitting instructions.

Distributing a load

Distribute loads uniformly and secure them cor- rectly   .

Storing objects

265

Trailer mode

Check attachments

Once the cross bars and roof carrier system have been installed, check the bolted connec- tions and attachments after a short journey and subsequently with a certain frequency.

WARNING Never exceed the maximum authorised load on the roof and on the axles or the ve- hicle's maximum authorised weight. Never exceed the load capacity of the cross bars and the roof carrier system, even if the maximum authorised roof load has not been reached. Secure heavy items as far forward as possible and distribute the vehicle load uni- formly.

WARNING If the load is loose or not secured, it could fall from the roof carrier system or cause ac- cidents and injuries. Always use belts or retaining straps that are suitable and in a good condition.

Trailer mode Introduction

Take into account country-specific regulations about driving with a trailer and the use of a towing bracket. The vehicle has been developed primarily for carrying people, although it can also be used to tow a trailer if fitted with the corresponding technical equipment. This additional load has an effect on the useful life, fuel consumption and vehicle performance and in some cases can reduce the service intervals. Driving with a trailer requires more force from the vehicle, and thus more concentration from the driver. In winter, winter tyres should be fitted on both the vehicle and the trailer.

Maximum vertical load technically permit- ted on the coupling device

The maximum vertical load technically permit- ted from the trailer draw bar on the towing bracket's tow ball is 90 kg.

Vehicles with the Start-Stop system

If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing bracket or one that is retrofitted by SEAT, the Start-Stop system operates as normal. No spe- cial characteristics need to be taken into ac- count.

If the system does not recognise the trailer or the trailer bracket has not been retrofitted by SEAT, the Start-Stop system must be discon- nected by pressing the corresponding button in the lower part of the centre console before driving with the trailer, and it should remain off for the rest of the journey   .

Vehicles with driving profile selection

If you are going to be towing a trailer, the use of the Eco driving profile is not recommended. You are advised to select another of the available driving profiles before beginning to drive with a trailer.

Trailer weight/drawbar load

Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If you do not load the trailer up to the maximum permitted trailer weight, you can then climb correspondingly steeper slopes. The maximum trailer weights listed are only ap- plicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above sea level. Since higher altitude decreases engine performance and the ability to climb slopes, the tow load decreases proportionally. The weight of the vehicle and trailer combination must be reduced by 10% for every 1000 m of altitude. When possible, operate the trailer with the max- imum authorised drawbar load on the ball joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified limit.

266

Storing objects

WARNING Never use the trailer to transport people, since it would put their life in danger and is also prohibited.

WARNING Undue use of the towing bracket may cause injury and accidents. Only use the towing bracket if it is in a per- fect state of repair and is properly secured. Never modify or repair the towing bracket in any way. In order to reduce the danger of injury in the event of rear-end collisions and to avoid injury to pedestrians and cyclists when park- ing the vehicle, cover or remove the tow hook when you are not using a trailer. According to EU regulation 2021_535 it is not permitted to install a towing device that completely or partially covers the rear num- ber plate. Never fit a towing bracket with weight dis- tribution or load compensation. The vehi- cle has not been designed for this type of towing bracket. The towing bracket could fail and the trailer could be released from the vehicle.

WARNING Driving with a trailer and transporting heavy or large objects can affect driving properties and even cause an accident. Always secure the load properly using belts or straps that are suitable and in good condition. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Trailers with a high centre of gravity are more likely to overturn than those with a low one. Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. Take great care when overtaking. Reduce speed immediately if you notice that the trailer is swaying, however slightly. Never drive at more than 80 km/h (50 mph) when towing a trailer (or at more than 100 km/h (60 mph) in exceptional circum- stances). This also applies in countries where driving at higher speeds is permitted. Take into account the speed limit for vehicles with trailers in the corresponding country, as it could be less than the speed limit for vehi- cles without a trailer. Never attempt to straighten the towing vehicle and trailer while accelerating.

WARNING If the towing bracket has been retrofitted by a non-SEAT workshop, the Start-Stop system must be disconnected manually whenever driving with a trailer. Otherwise the brake system could be damaged and could conse- quently cause a serious accident or injury. Always disconnect the Start-Stop system manually when using a towing bracket that has not been fitted by a SEAT workshop.

Note Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, always deactivate the anti-theft alarm  page 76. Otherwise, the tilt sensor could cause the alarm to go off. Do not drive with a trailer for the engine's first 1000 km  page 129. Some retrofitted towing brackets cover the rear towing eye. In these cases, the towing eye should not be used for tow-starting or for towing other vehicles. For this reason, if the vehicle has been retrofitted with a towing bracket, always keep the tow hook in the ve- hicle when you remove it.

Technical requirements Vehicles that are factory-equipped with a tow- ing bracket fulfil all the technical and legal re- quirements for driving with a trailer.

Storing objects

267

Trailer mode

If the vehicle is retrofitted with a tow bracket, only a bracket that is authorised for the max- imum authorised load of the trailer that is to be towed may be fitted. The towing bracket must be suitable for the vehicle and the trailer and must be properly secured to the vehicle's chassis. Only use a towing bracket that has been authorised by SEAT for this vehicle. Al- ways check and take into account the towing bracket manufacturer's instructions.

Towing bracket fitted on the bumper

Never fit a towing bracket to the bumper or to the area where the bumper is mounted. The towing bracket should not impair the bumper's function. Do not make modifications or repairs to the exhaust system or the brake system. Make regular checks to ensure that the towing bracket is secure.

Engine cooling system

Driving with a trailer increases the load on the engine and cooling system. The cooling system should have sufficient coolant and be prepared for the additional effort involved in driving with a trailer.

Trailer brakes

If the trailer has its own brake system, please take the relevant legal requirements into ac- count. Never connect the trailer's brake system to the vehicle's brake system.

Tow cable

Always use a cable between the vehicle and the trailer  page 268.

Trailer tail lights

The trailer's rear lights should comply with the statutory safety regulations  page 268. Never connect the trailer's rear lights directly to the vehicle's electric system. If you are not sure that the trailer's electrical connection is correct, have it checked by a specialised work- shop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealer- ship for this.

Exterior mirrors

If you cannot see the area behind the trailer with the exterior mirrors of the towing vehicle, additional mirrors will have to be installed in accordance with the regulations of the country in question. The exterior mirrors should be ad- justed before you start driving and must provide a sufficient field of vision at the rear.

Trailer maximum electricity consumption

Never exceed the values indicated!

Europe, Asia, Africa, South America and Cen- tral America

Brake lights (total) 84 Watts

Turn signal (on each side) 42 Watts

Side lights (on each side) 50 Watts

Europe, Asia, Africa, South America and Cen- tral America

Reverse lights (in total) 42 Watts

Rear fog light 42 Watts

Australia

Brake lights (total) 108 Watts

Turn signal (on each side) 54 Watts

Side lights (on each side) 100 Watts

Reverse lights (in total) 54 Watts

Rear fog light 54 Watts

WARNING If the towing bracket is wrongly fitted or is not the right one, the trailer could become detached from the vehicle and cause serious injury.

NOTICE If the rear lights of the trailer are not correctly connected, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged. If the trailer absorbs excessive electric cur- rent, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged.

268

Storing objects

Never connect the trailer's electric system directly to the electrical connections of the tail lights or any other power sources. Only use the connections intended for providing electric current to the trailer.

Hitching and connecting a trailer

Fig. 178  Diagram: assignment of the pins of the trailer's electrical socket.

Pin Meaning

1 Left turn signal

2 Rear fog light

3 Earth for pins 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8

4 Right turn signal

5 Rear light, right

6 Brake lights

7 Rear light, left

8 Reverse lights

Pin Meaning

9 Permanent live

10 Live charge cable

11 Earth for pin 10

12 Unassigned

13 Earth for pin 9

Power socket for trailer

The vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole power socket for the connection between the trailer and the vehicle. With the engine running, electrical devi- ces on the trailer receive power from the elec- trical connection (pin 9 and pin 10 of the trailer power socket). If the system detects that a trailer has been connected, the consumers on the trailer will re- ceive electricity through this connection (pins 9 and 10). Pin 9 has a permanent live. This pow- ers, for example, the trailer's interior lighting. Electrical devices such as a fridge in a caravan only receive electrical power if the engine is running (through pin 10). To avoid overloading the electrical system, you cannot connect the ground wires of pin 3, pin 11 or pin 13. If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you will need to use an adapter cable. In this case the function corresponding to pin 10 will not be available.

Tow cable

The tow rope must always be securely fixed to the towing vehicle and loose enough so that the vehicle can handle turns smoothly. However, make sure that the cable does not rub on the ground while driving.

Trailer tail lights

Always check the trailer's rear lights to ensure they are working correctly and that they com- ply with the relevant safety regulations. Make sure that the maximum permissible power that can be absorbed by the trailer is not exceeded  page 266.

Include in the anti-theft alarm

The trailer is included in the anti-theft system if the following conditions are met: If the vehicle is factory-equipped with an anti-theft alarm. If the vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow bracket. If the trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle through the trailer power socket. If the electrical systems of the vehicle and trailer are in perfect condition and have no faults or damage. If the vehicle is locked with the key and the anti-theft alarm is activated.

Storing objects

269

Trailer mode

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig- gered if the electrical connection with the trailer is cut off. Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, always turn off the anti-theft alarm. Otherwise, the tilt sensor could cause the alarm to go off.

Trailers with LED tail lights

For technical reasons, trailers fitted with LED rear lights cannot be connected to the anti- theft alarm system. When the vehicle is locked, the alarm does not go off when the electrical connection with the trailer is cut if it has rear lights with light-emit- ting diodes.

If the Eco driving profile was selected when hitching the trailer, this will automatically switch to theNormal profile. If the system cannot de- tect the attached trailer or if the towing bracket has been retrofitted by an auto repair shop other than SEAT, you must manually select the Normal profile before you start driving with a trailer attached. To reconnect the Eco profile once the trailer has been unhitched, switch the ignition off and back on once.

WARNING If the cables are improperly or incorrectly connected, it may lead to an excessive amount of current supplied to the trailer, which can cause abnormalities in the entire vehicle electronic system, as well as acci- dents and serious injuries. Ensure that any repairs that need to be carried out on the electrical system are car- ried out by a specialised workshop. Never connect the trailer's electric system directly to the electrical connections of the tail lights or any other power sources.

WARNING Contact between the pins of the trailer power socket can cause short circuits, over- loading of the electrical system or failure of the lighting system, and consequently can cause accidents and serious injuries. Never connect the pins of the trailer power socket to each other. Make sure any work on bent pins is carried out by a specialised workshop.

NOTICE Do not leave the trailer connected to the ve- hicle when parked; place it on its support wheel or its supports. If the vehicle rises or falls due, for example, to a variation of the load or a burst tyre, increased pressure will be placed on the towing bracket and the trailer, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.

Note In case of anomalies in the electrical sys- tems of the vehicle or trailer, as well as in the anti-theft alarm system, have them inspec- ted by a specialised workshop. If the trailer accessories consume energy through the power socket to the trailer and the engine is turned off, the battery will dis- charge. If the vehicle battery is running low, the electrical connection with the trailer will be automatically cut.

270

Storing objects

Trailer loading

Technically permissible maximum trailer weight and vertical load on the coupling de- vice

The technically permissible maximum trailer weight is the weight that the vehicle can tow   . The vertical load on the coupling is ex- erted vertically from above on the hook of the towing bracket. The information on the maximum trailer weight and vertical load on the coupling device con- tained in the type plate of the towing bracket are experimental values only. The correct fig- ures for your specific model, which may be lower than these figures, are given in the vehicle documentation. The information in the vehicle documentation takes precedence at all times. To promote safety while driving, SEAT recom- mends making the most of the maximum ver- tical load technically permissible on the cou- pling device  page 265. An insufficient ver- tical load has a negative influence on the be- haviour of both the vehicle and trailer. The vertical load increases the weight on the rear axle, reducing the vehicle's carrying ca- pacity.

Gross combination weight of the towing ve- hicle and trailer

The gross combination weight is the actual weight of the loaded vehicle plus the actual weight of the loaded trailer. In some countries trailers are classified into distinct categories. SEAT recommends obtain- ing information from a specialised workshop re- garding which type of trailer is most suitable for your vehicle.

Trailer loading

The weight of the towing vehicle and trailer must be balanced. In order to do this, the load must be as close as possible to the maximum vertical load technically permissible on the coupling point, and it must be evenly distributed between the back and front of the trailer: Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as possible or above it. Secure the trailer load properly.

Tyre pressure

Set the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in ac- cordance with the trailer manufacturer's rec- ommendations. When towing a trailer, inflate the tyres of the towing vehicle with the maximum allowable pressure  page 316.

WARNING If the maximum permissible axle weight, the maximum load technically permissible on the coupling point, the maximum authorised ve- hicle weight or the gross combination weight of the towing vehicle and trailer are excee- ded, accidents and serious injuries may oc- cur. Never exceed the indicated values. The actual weight on the front and rear axles must never exceed the maximum per- missible axle weight. The weight on the front and rear axles must never exceed the maxi- mum permissible weight.

WARNING A shift in weight could jeopardize the stability and security of the towing vehicle and trailer, which could lead to accidents and serious injuries. Always load the trailer correctly. Always secure the load properly using belts or straps that are suitable and in good condition.

Driving with a trailer

Adjusting the headlights

The front part of the vehicle may be raised when the trailer is connected and the light may dazzle the rest of the traffic.

Storing objects

271

Trailer mode

Specific features of driving with a trailer If your trailer has an overrun brake, brake gently at first and then rapidly. This will prevent the jerking that can be caused by the locking of trailer wheels. Due to the gross combination weight of the towing vehicle and trailer, the braking distance increases. When going down a slope, engage a lower gear (with a manual gearbox, or use the auto- matic gearbox's tiptronic mode) to use engine braking. Otherwise, the brake system could overheat and even fail. The trailer weight, as well as the gross combi- nation weight of the towing vehicle and trailer, change the centre of gravity and the properties of the vehicle. If the towing vehicle is empty and the trailer is loaded, then the load distribution is incorrect. Under these conditions, drive slowly and with extra caution.

Hill starts with a trailer

Depending on the slope of the hill and the combination weight of the towing vehicle and trailer, the vehicle might start rolling backwards slightly when you first start up. For hill starts with a trailer hitched: Press and hold the brake pedal. Press the button to disconnect the elec- tronic parking brake  page 183.

Manual gearbox: Depress the clutch pedal fully and engage 1st gear. Automatic gearbox: Move the selector lever to the D/S position. Pull out the button and hold it in that posi- tion to stop the towing vehicle and trailer with the electronic parking brake. Release the brake pedal. Move off slowly. Manual transmission: release the clutch pedal slowly. Do not release the button until the engine has sufficient power to start driving.

WARNING If a trailer is pulled incorrectly, this may lead to loss of control of the vehicle and serious injury. Driving with a trailer and transporting heavy or large objects will change the vehi- cle handling and braking distances. Always drive cautiously and carefully. Brake earlier than usual. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Slow down, especially when driving down hills or slopes. Accelerate with particular care and cau- tion. Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.

Take great care when overtaking. Reduce speed immediately if you notice that the trailer is swaying, however slightly. Never attempt to straighten the towing vehicle and trailer while accelerating. Take into account the speed limit for vehi- cles with a trailer, as it could be lower than for vehicles without a trailer.

Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer combination

The stabilisation of the vehicle and trailer com- bination is an additional function of the elec- tronic stability control (ESC). If the system detects that the trailer is weaving, it intervenes to reduce the swaying of the trailer.

Vehicle and trailer combination stabilisation requirements The vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow- ing bracket or has been retro-fitted with a com- patible towing bracket. The ESC and TCS are active. The control lamp  or  is not lit up on the instrument clus- ter. The trailer is connected to the towing vehicle through the trailer power socket. The vehicle is travelling at over 60 km/h (ap- prox. 37 mph).

272

Storing objects

The maximum vertical load technically per- missible is not being exceeded on the coupling device. The trailer has a rigid draw bar. If the trailer has brakes, it must be equipped with a mechanical overrun brake.

WARNING The enhanced safety provided by the elec- tric stability control of the vehicle and trailer should not lead you to take any risks that could compromise your safety. Adapt your speed and driving style at all times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Accelerate with caution when the road is slippery. When adjusting any settings, stop acceler- ating.

WARNING The electric stability control for the vehicle and trailer may not correctly detect all driv- ing conditions. When the ESC is switched off, the stabili- sation of the towing vehicle and trailer is also switched off. The stability system does not always de- tect light trailers, so it may not stabilise these correctly.

When driving on surfaces with poor grip, the trailer can even interfere with the stabil- ity system. Trailers with a high centre of gravity can tip over without having previously weaved. If a trailer is not attached, but a connector is plugged into the power socket (e.g. instal- lation of a bicycle rack with lights), repea- ted automatic braking may occur in extreme driving conditions.

Electrically unlocking trailer hook

Fig. 179  Right side of the luggage compartment: button to unlock the tow hitch.

The towing brackets hook is located in the bumper. Tow hooks for electrical unlocking cannot be removed. There should be no person, animal or object in the path of the tow hook   .

Unlocking the tow hook and removing it Stop the vehicle and connect the electronic parking brake  page 183. Switch off the engine. Open the rear lid. Pull the  Fig. 179 button briefly. The tow hook unlocks electrically and automati- cally turns outwards. The button's control lamp flashes. Finish remove the tow hook by hand until you feel and hear that it has engaged and the con- trol lamp on the button stays on. Close the rear lid. Hitching and connecting a trailer  page 268.

Retracting the tow hook Stop the vehicle and apply the electronic parking brake. Switch off the engine. Unhook the trailer and interrupt the electrical connection between it and the vehicle. If you are using an adapter, remove it from the trailer's power socket. Open the rear lid. Pull the  Fig. 179 button briefly. The tow hook unlocks electrically.

Storing objects

273

Trailer mode

Turn the tow hook under the bumper with your hand until you feel and hear that it engages and the control lamp on the button remains on continuously. Close the rear lid.

The button's control lamp

Flashing: This means that the tow hook has not yet engaged correctly or is damaged   . Remains on: If it remains on while the rear lid is open, the tow hook is correctly in place both when extracted and when covered.

The button's indicator lamp switches off ap- proximately 1 minute after closing the rear lid.

WARNING Undue use of the towing bracket may cause injury and accidents. Only use the tow hook if it is properly en- gaged. Always ensure that no person, animal or object is to be found in the path of the tow hook. Never use a tool or instrument while the tow hook is moving. Never press the button  Fig. 179 when there is a trailer hooked to the vehicle or when a carrier system or other accessories are mounted on the tow hook.

If the tow hook is not attached properly, do not use it. Instead, go to a specialised work- shop and have the towing bracket checked. If you detect any fault in the electrical sys- tem or in the towing bracket, contact a speci- alised workshop and ask them to check it. If the ball has a diameter of less than 49 mm at any one point, do not use the tow- ing bracket under any circumstances.

NOTICE If you clean the vehicle with high-pressure or steam devices, do not point the jet di- rectly towards the retractable tow hook or the trailer power socket, as this may damage the joints or remove the grease necessary for lubrication.

Note At extremely low temperatures, the tow hook may be impossible to operate. In this case, place the vehicle in a warmer location (for example, a garage).

Installing a rear carrier system or a bicycle rack on the trailer hitch

Fig. 180  Recommended weight distribution on the rear support system.

Examples of rear carrier systems are bicycle racks or multi-purpose boxes that are installed on the trailer hitch. Only use rear carrier systems that have been specified by the respective manufacturer for the vehicle model, model year and version of the vehicle in question   . SEAT recommends the use of genuine SEAT spare parts and accessories, which can be pur- chased from the brands dealers. Install the rear carrier system according to the manufacturers installation instructions. The load capacity results from the weight of the rear carrier system and the weight of the load carried on it.

274

Storing objects

A

B

The recommended maximum load capacity of the rear carrier system installed on the trailer hitch may be different from the maximum verti- cal load on the specific vehicle coupling. However, it is not permitted to exceed the max- imum permitted vertical load on the tow hitch (which depends on the model). The load capacity is reduced due to the lever effect that occurs the further the carrier system is from the ball head. Place heavy objects as close as possible to the trailer hitch  Fig. 180.

Maximum load capacity depending on the vehicle

To find out the recommended load capacity for your vehicle, check the maximum vertical load on its coupling  page 349. Please refer to the following table for the load capacity. In accordance with the UN-R-55 guideline, SEAT recommends not carrying more bicycles than recommended on the rear rack system.

Maximum vertical load on the vehi-

cle's specific cou- pling

Maximum load ca-

pacity

Number of bicycles

50 kg 50 kg 2

55 kg 55 kg 2

From 75 kg 75 kg 3

Maximum load overhang of the rear carrier system

Fig. 181  Schematic representation of the maximum load overhang of a bicycle rack for two or three bicycles.

With up to 55 kg load capacity: 500 mm (approx. 19.7 in) With 75 kg load capacity: 700 mm (approx. 27.6 in)

The maximum overhang shall not exceed 500 mm from the centre of the ball head to the to the centre of the rail of the last support  Fig. 181 A for two-bicycle racks. In the case of three-bicycle racks, the overhang must not exceed 700 mm  Fig. 181 B .

WARNING The incorrect use of a rear carrier system in- stalled on the tow hook can cause accidents and injury. Make sure that the carrier system is suita- ble for your vehicle. Read and observe the installation instruc- tions of the rear carrier system manufacturer. Never attach a rear carrier system below the ball head of the trailer hitch. The system could slip due to the shape of the hitch.

Note Before setting off, SEAT recommends remov- ing, to the extent possible, all accessories from the load attached to the carrier system. Examples of these accessories are baskets and panniers, child seats or batteries. This improves the aerodynamics and centre of gravity of the rear carrier system.

Storing objects

275

Trailer mode

Retrofitting a towing bracket

Fig. 182  Limits and attachment points for retrofitting a towing bracket.

Distance measurements: A Mounting points on the vehicle B 65 mm (minimum) C 350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)

D 1,043 mm E 413.5 mm F 633.5 mm G 951.5 mm

SEAT recommends that towing brackets be ret- rofitted at a specialised workshop. For exam- ple, it may very well be necessary to adjust the cooling system or mount thermal protection plates. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT deal- ership for this. If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the distance specifications should always be kept in mind. The distance between the centre of the ball head and the road  Fig. 182 C must never be less than that indicated. This also applies when the vehicle is fully loaded, including the technically permissible maximum vertical load on the coupling device.

WARNING If the cables are improperly or incorrectly connected, this may lead to malfunctions in the entire vehicle electronic system, as well as to accidents and serious injuries. Never connect the trailer's electric sys- tem to the electrical connections of the tail lights or any other unsuitable power sources. Only use suitable connectors to connect the trailer. The towing bracket should be retrofitted only at a specialised workshop.

WARNING If the towing bracket is badly fitted or unsuit- able, the trailer may separate from the ve- hicle while driving. This could cause serious accidents and fatal injuries.

Note According to regulation EU2021_535 it is not permitted to install a towing device that cannot be removed or retracted. Only use towing brackets that have been approved by SEAT for the model in question. In some versions, the fitting of a conven- tional towing hook solution is not recommen- ded. Please consult your Technical Service.

276

Fuel and exhaust gas cleaning

1) Depending upon country.

Fuel and exhaust gas cleaning Refuelling

Safety warnings regarding fuel han- dling

WARNING Fuel is highly flammable and can cause seri- ous burns and other injuries. When refuelling, turn off the engine and turn off the ignition for safety reasons. Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank or a canister. Naked flames are forbidden in the vicinity due to the risk of explosion. Observe legislation governing the use, storage and carrying of a spare fuel canister in the vehicle. For safety reasons we do not recommend carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehicle. In an accident the canister could be dam- aged and could leak. If, in exceptional circumstances, you have to carry a spare fuel canister, please observe the following points:

Never fill fuel into the spare fuel canister if it is inside or on top of the vehicle. This could cause an explosion. Always place the canister on the ground to fill it. Insert the filling nozzle as far as possible into the spare fuel canister. If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filling nozzle must be in contact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an electrostatic charge building up. Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel vapour is ex- plosive. Risk of fatal accident!

NOTICE If any fuel is spilt onto the vehicle, it should be removed immediately. It could otherwise damage the paintwork. Never run the tank completely dry. The catalytic converter can be damaged. When filling the fuel tank after having run it completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel engine, the ignition must be switched on for at least 30 seconds before starting the en- gine. When you then start the engine it may take longer than normal (up to one minute) to start firing.

For the sake of the environment Do not overfill the fuel tank, it may cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.

Note There is no emergency mechanism for the manual release of the fuel tank flap. If nec- essary, request assistance from specialised personnel.

Note Diesel vehicles are fitted with a protective device that prevents the insertion of the wrong fuel hose1). It is only possible to refuel with Diesel nozzles. If the pump nozzle is worn, damaged, or if it is very small, it is possible that it will not be able to open the protective device. Before trying to insert the pump nozzle by turning it, try a different pump or request specialist help. If you fill the tank from a reserve fuel canis- ter, the protective device will not open. One way to resolve this is to pour the fuel in very slowly.

Fuel and exhaust gas cleaning

277

Fuel types

1) Depending upon country. 2) Follow the regulations of the country you are driving in.

1

2

3

4

Refuelling

Fig. 183  Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached.

The fuel tank flap is on the rear right of the vehicle. The tank flap is unlocked when the car is un- locked using the central locking remote control  page 72. Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on the retainer zone. Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left. Place it in the space on the hinge of the open flap  Fig. 183. Start refuelling. The tank is full as soon as the pumps automatic nozzle cuts off the fuel supply. Do not try to put in more fuel after the nozzle cuts out, as this will fill the expansion chamber in the fuel tank.

Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as far as it will go. Close the lid. The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is given on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap. Further notes on fuel can be found at  page 277. The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is given in  page 349.

Fuel types Identification of fuels1)

Fig. 184  Identification of fuels according to European Union (EU) Directive 2014/94/

Fuels are identified by different symbols on the pump and on your vehicle's tank flap. The identification serves to prevent confusion when choosing the fuel.

Petrol with ethanol (E stands for Ethanol). The number indicates the percentage of ethanol in the petrol. E5 means, for exam- ple, an ethanol ratio of 5% max. Diesel according to EN590 standard. The number indicates the maximum percent- age of Biodiesel in the fuel. B7 means a maximum of 7% Biodiesel. Synthetic diesel according to EN15940 standard. Natural gas: CNG means Compressed Natural Gas

Type of petrol The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the fuel tank flap. The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con- verter and must only be run on unleaded pet- rol. The petrol must comply with the standard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuels with a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled (E10)2). The types of petrol are differentiated by using the octane numbers (RON) or via the anti-knock index (AKI).

278

Fuel and exhaust gas cleaning

1) This motor is only available in some markets.

Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol or normal 91 octane petrol at least

We recommend refuelling with super 95 octane petrol (91 AKI). If not available, normal 91 oc- tane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight power loss) may be used.

Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes at least

You should use super 95 octane petrol (91 AKI) at least. If super petrol is not available, if necessary, use normal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only use moderate engine speeds and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possible.

Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol or su- per 95 octane petrol at least

We recommend refuelling with super plus 98 octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super 95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight power loss). If super petrol is not available, if necessary, use normal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only use moderate engine speeds and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possible.

NOTICE Fuels with a high percentage of ethanol, e.g. E30 - E100 button must not be used. The fuel system would be damaged. A single refuelling with leaded fuel or other metal additives entails a permanent deterio- ration of the effectiveness of the catalytic converter. Only use fuel additives that have been ap- proved by SEAT. The products that contain substances to increase the octane rating or decrease knocking may contain metal addi- tives that damage the engine and catalytic converter. This type of products must not be used. Do not use fuels shown in the pump as containing metals. LRP (lead replacement petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of metal additives. Risk of engine damage! High engine speed and full throttle can damage the engine when using petrol with an octane rating lower than the correct grade for the engine.

Note Fuel with an octane rating higher than the one required by the engine can be used. In countries in which there is no sulphur- free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sulphur content fuel.

Ethanol fuel Valid for: vehicles with Totalflex engines

You can recognise vehicles with Totalflex en- gines1) by label on the fuel tank lid with the marking Petrol/ethanol. Vehicles with Totalflex engine can run with un- leaded petrol (95 octane / 91 AKI) according to ANP No. 57 and with fuels with any high per- centage of ethanol. The vehicle is refuelled in the same way as petrol refuelling. Also consider that  page 277, Type of petrol.

Note SEAT recommends filling the tank exclusively with petrol every 10,000 km to decrease im- purities that using E100 ethanol fuel might have left in the engine.

Diesel Valid for: vehicles with diesel engines

Please note the information on the inside of the fuel tank flap. The diesel can thicken at very low tempera- tures, thus affecting the start or operation of the engine. Ask your service station attendant if their diesel is suitable for winter use.

Fuel and exhaust gas cleaning

279

AdBlue

1) Depending upon country.

Water in the fuel filter1)

If your vehicle has a diesel engine and is equip- ped with a fuel filter with a water separator, the instrument panel may display the following warning:

Water in the fuel filter.

If this is the case, take the vehicle to a special- ised workshop so that they can drain the fuel filter.

NOTICE Never use of FAME (biodiesel that does not meet the EN590 standard), petrol, heating oil, other fuels or thinning agents as they can cause severely damage the fuel system and the engine. If the wrong fuel has been filled, do not start the engine under any circumstances. Risk of damaging the fuel system and the en- gine! Seek professional assistance.

AdBlue Information about AdBlue

AdBlue consumption depends on your per- sonal driving style, the temperature of the sys- tem and the outdoor temperature when the ve- hicle is used.

AdBlue freezes at temperatures of -11 C (+13F). The system has heating elements that guarantee its operation even at low tempera- tures. When the range is less than 2400 km the instrument cluster screen displays a message requesting an AdBlue refill. If this message is ignored, the yellow indicator light will come on once the remaining range is 1,000 km . The indication that in XXX km it will no longer be possible to restart the engine will appear on the instrument panel display. If the yellow indicator lamp is ignored, when a remaining range of 0 km is displayed, it will no longer be possible to restart the engine. The red warning light will come on . AdBlue is a registered trademark of the Ger- man Association of the Automotive Industry (VDA) and is also known as AUS32 or DEF (Die- sel Exhaust Fluid).

The AdBlue tank has a capacity of approx. 11 litres.

NOTICE Overfilling with AdBlue can cause damage to the tank system.

Fill AdBlue

Fig. 185  AdBlue tank cap.

Operations prior to refilling

Park the vehicle on a flat surface and turn off the ignition. If the vehicle is on a slope or on a curb, the level indicator may not detect the refill properly. If an AdBlue warning message is shown on the instrument cluster display, fill with at least the minimum required amount (approx. 5 litres). Only after adding this amount will the system detect that AdBlue has been added and you will be able to start the engine again. The maxi- mum amount that can be refilled is 11 litres.

Fill with a refill bottle

Only use AdBlue that complies with the ISO 22241-1 standard.

280

Fuel and exhaust gas cleaning

Only use original containers. Open the tank cover  Fig. 185. Unscrew the tank cap by turning it in an anti- clockwise direction. Please observe the manufacturer's instruc- tions, indicated on the refill bottle. Check the expiry date. Remove the cap of the refill bottle. Insert the neck of the bottle in the tank filler neck vertically and screw the bottle on by hand, by turning it in a clockwise direction. Press the refill bottle in the direction of the filler neck and hold it in this position. Wait until the contents of the refill bottle have been poured into the AdBlue tank. Do not compress or break the bottle! Turn the bottle in a counter-clockwise direc- tion and gently pull it upwards  page 280. The AdBlue tank is full when no more liquid comes out of the bottle. Screw on the tank cap in a clockwise direc- tion until it is tightly closed. Close the fuel tank flap.

Operations before driving After refilling the tank, only switch on the igni- tion. Leave the ignition on for at least 30 seconds for the system to detect the fluid load. Make sure you wait for at least 30 seconds before starting the engine!

Refilling the dispenser with AdBlue

Valid for vehicles with selective catalytic reduc- tion. Open the tank cap. Turn the SCR tank cap anti-clockwise  Fig. 185. Add AdBlue until the nozzle stops for the first time. Close the SCR tube by turning it clockwise until you hear a click.

WARNING AdBlue should only be stored in its origi- nal container, which should be tightly closed and kept in a safe place.

NOTICE When refilling, the nozzle grip should be aligned downward. Otherwise the nozzle will not connect automatically. Do not try to add any more additive after the nozzle has stopped for the first time. The AdBlue tank could overflow and AdBlue could spill out. Only use AdBlue that complies with the ISO 22241-1 standard. Only use original con- tainers. Never mix AdBlue with water, fuel or addi- tives. Any type of damage caused by such a mixture will not be covered by the warranty. Never pour AdBlue into the fuel tank! This could result in engine damage. Do not carry the refill bottle inside the vehicle. If there is a leak (due to tempera- ture changes or damage to the bottle), the AdBlue may damage the vehicle's interior.

For the sake of the environment Dispose of the refill bottle in an environment- friendly manner.

Note Suitable AdBlue refill bottles can be pur- chased from SEAT dealerships.

Fuel and exhaust gas cleaning

281

Engine management and emis ions co trol system

Troubleshooting

AdBlue level is too low

The indicator lamp lights up red. The engine cannot be restarted! Stop the vehicle in a suitable, safe and flat area then top up with the minimum required quantity of AdBlue  page 279.

together with : Fault in the AdBlue system

The indicator lamps light up red. The engine cannot be restarted! Go to a specialised workshop and get the sys- tem checked.

The AdBlue reserve is low

The indicator lamp lights up yellow. To up AdBlue within the number of kilometres (or miles) that are indicated  page 279. SEAT recommends contacting a specialised workshop.

together with : Fault in the AdBlue system.

The control lamps light up yellow. There is a fault in the AdBlue system or unsuitable AdBlue fluid has been used. Go to a special- ised workshop and get the system checked.

Engine management and emissions control system

Introduction

WARNING Due to the high temperatures reached by the exhaust gas scrubbing system, you should not park your vehicle near a surface that can catch fire easily. Fire hazard!

WARNING Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle around the area of the exhaust system: Fire hazard!

Catalytic converter

To maintain the useful life of the catalytic converter Only use unleaded petrol with petrol en- gines. Never run the fuel tank dry. When changing or adding engine oil, do not exceed the necessary amount  page 306, Checking and topping up the engine oil level. Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump leads if necessary  page 286.

If you should notice misfiring, uneven running or loss of power when the car is moving, have the vehicle inspected by a specialised workshop. In general, the emissions warning lamp will light up when any of these symptoms occur. If this happens, any unburnt fuel can enter the ex- haust system and escape into the atmosphere. The catalytic converter can also be damaged by overheating.

NOTICE Never run the fuel tank completely dry be- cause an irregular fuel supply can cause ig- nition faults. This allows unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust system, which could cause over- heating and damage the catalytic converter.

For the sake of the environment Even when the emission control system is working perfectly, there may be a smell of sulphur from the gases on occasions. This depends on the sulphur content of the fuel used. This can quite often be avoided by changing to another brand of fuel.

Particulate filter Valid for: vehicles with petrol or diesel particu- late filters The particulate filter eliminates most of the soot from the exhaust gas system. Under nor- mal driving conditions the filter cleans itself. If the filter does not clean itself (e.g. if short

282

Fuel and exhaust gas cleaning

1) Except 2.0l and 2.5l TSI petrol engines.

journeys are made continuously), it becomes blocked with soot and the following indication is displayed to the driver:

Particulate filter: cleaned while the vehicle is moving. See Manual.

The particulate filter needs cleaning (regenera- tion).

Regeneration of the petrol and diesel partic- ulate filter1)

Requirements for the regeneration journey: the engine is at operating temperature. Drive at a speed of between 50120 km/h (31-75 mph). This increases the temperature and burns the soot in the filter  page 282. Consider the legal speed limits as well as the recommended gears. End the regeneration journey once the con- trol warning lamp has gone out. If the warning lamp stays on after 30 minutes of running in regeneration mode, have a speci- alised workshop repair the fault.

Regeneration of the particulate filter (only for 2.0l and 2.5l TSI engines)

Requirements for the regeneration journey: the engine is at operating temperature.

Drive at a speed of at least 80 km/h  page 282. Completely remove your foot from the accel- erator pedal for a few seconds to let the vehicle roll with the gear engaged. Consider the legal speed limits as well as the recommended gears. Repeat this procedure (accelerate and let roll) until the control lamp turns off. This procedure involves an autonomous par- ticulate filter cleaning process and may take some time. If the warning lamp does not turn off, go imme- diately to a specialised workshop to repair the fault.

WARNING Always adjust your speed to suit the weather conditions, roads, braking distance and traf- fic if the particulate filter is in its regeneration phase. Route recommendations should never make you disregard each country's specific traffic regulations.

NOTICE When the exhaust system detects that the particulate filter is close to saturation, the self-cleaning function of this system recom- mends optimal driving for this function. Due to the high temperatures caused by the regeneration of the particulate filter, it is possible that the radiator fan will activate af- ter stopping the engine, even it its operating temperature has not been reached. Noise, smells and high idle speeds can oc- cur during regeneration. Always use the correct engine oil and the correct fuel to make sure the useful life of the particulate filter is not affected. Also avoid making short trips all the time.

Troubleshooting

Fault in the emissions control system

The indicator lamp lights up yellow. Reduce speed and drive carefully to the near- est specialised workshop to have the engine checked.

Combustion failures that could dam- age the catalytic converter

The control lamp flashes yellow.

Fuel and exhaust gas cleaning

283

Engine management and emis ions co trol system

Reduce speed and drive carefully to the near- est specialised workshop to have the engine checked.

Particulate filter clogged

The indicator lamp lights up yellow  page 281..

Petrol engine management fault

The indicator lamp lights up yellow. Have the engine checked as soon as possible by a specialised workshop. When the ignition is switched on, the (Elec- tronic Power Control) lamp lights up and should go off once the engine has started.

Diesel engine preheating system

The indicator lamp lights up yellow. The engine can be started straight away when the lamp switches off.

Diesel engine management fault

The control lamp flashes yellow. Have the engine checked as soon as possible by a specialised workshop.

NOTICE While the indicator lamps , , or are on, there might be faults in the engine, fuel consumption may go up and the engine might lose power.

284

Miscellaneous situations

1

2

3

4

5

6

7 Miscellaneous situa- tions Vehicle tool kit

On-board toolkit

Fig. 186  Underneath the floor panel of the luggage compartment: on-board tools.

The vehicle tool kit is located under the floor panel in the luggage compartment. To access the on-board tools  page 258. The tool kit includes:

Adapter for the anti-theft bolt Towing eye, removable Wheel spanner Crank handle for jack Jack

Hook for extracting the central wheel trims Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps

Some of the items listed are only provided in certain model versions, or are optional extras.

WARNING When the vehicle tool kit, tyre mobility set and spare wheel are loose in the interior they can be violently thrown in case of a sudden manoeuvre or braking and especially in acci- dents, causing serious injury. Ensure that the vehicle tool kit, the tyre mobility set and the spare wheel or tempo- rary spare wheel are safely secured in the luggage compartment.

WARNING Unsuitable or damaged vehicle tools can cause injury or accidents. Never work with inappropriate or damaged tools.

Note The jack does not generally require any maintenance. If required, it should be greased using universal type grease.

Changing the windscreen wiper blades

Wiper service position

Fig. 187  Wipers in service position.

Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen. With the wiper in service position, it is possible to the fold the wiper arms  Fig. 187.

Close the bonnet  page 297. Switch the ignition on and off. Briefly press the wiper lever downwards. Before driving, always lower the wiper arms. Us- ing the windscreen wiper lever, the windscreen wiper arms return to their initial position.

Miscellaneous situations

285

Changing the windscreen w per blades

Note The wiper arms can be moved into the re- placement position when the front bonnet is fully closed. You can also use the service position, for example, if you want to fix a cover over the windscreen in the winter to keep it clear of ice.

Changing the wiper rear wiper blades

Fig. 188  Changing the windscreen wiper blades

The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is responsible for ensuring that the wipe is silent. If the graphite layer is damaged, the noise of the water as it is wiped across the windscreen will be louder.

Check the condition of the wiper blades regu- larly. If the wipers scrape across the glass, they should be changed if they are damaged, or cleaned if they are dirty   . If this does not produce the desired results, the setting angle of the windscreen wiper arms might be incorrect. They should be checked by a specialised workshop and corrected if neces- sary. Damaged windscreen wiper blades should be replaced immediately. These are available from qualified workshops.

Raising and lowering windscreen wiper arms Place the windscreen wipers in the service position  page 284. Grip the wiper arms only by the blade's fas- tening point.

Cleaning windscreen wiper blades Raise the wiper arms. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen wiper blades. If the blades are very dirty, a sponge or damp cloth may be used   .

Changing the windscreen wiper blades Lift and unfold the wiper arms. Press and hold release button  Fig. 188 1 and pull gently on the wiper blade in the direc- tion of the arrow.

Fit a new wiper blade of the same length and design on to the wiper arm and hook it into place. Rest the wiper arms back onto the wind- screen.

Changing the rear window wiper blade

Fig. 189  Changing the rear wiper blade

Separate the wiper arm from the rear window. Rotate the blade lightly  Fig. 189 (arrow A ). Hold down the release button 1 while gently pulling the blade in the direction of arrow B . Insert a new blade of the same length and type in the rear wiper arm in the opposite direc- tion to the arrow B until button 1 hooks into place. Fold the wiper arm and rest it on the window.

286

Miscellaneous situations

WARNING Worn or dirty windscreen wiper blades re- duce visibility and increase the risk of acci- dent and serious injury. Always replace damaged or worn wind- screen wiper blades or blades that no longer clean the windscreen properly.

NOTICE Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the glass. If products containing solvents, rough sponges or sharp objects are used to clean the blades, the graphite layer will be dam- aged. Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to clean the win- dows. In icy conditions, always check that the wiper blades are not frozen to the glass be- fore using the wipers. In cold weather, it may help to leave the vehicle parked with the wip- ers in service position  page 284.

NOTICE To prevent damage to the bonnet and the wiper arms, only leave them in the service position. Before driving, always lower the wiper arms.

Jump start Introduction

If the engine fails to start because of a dis- charged 12-volt battery, the battery can be connected to the battery of another vehicle to start the engine. Jump leads complying with the DIN 72553 standard are needed for starting (see cable manufacturer's instructions). The wire cross section must be at least 25 mm2 for petrol en- gines and at least 35 mm2 for diesel engines.

NOTICE To avoid considerable damage to the vehicle electrical system, note the following care- fully: If the jump leads are connected incor- rectly, a short circuit may occur. Use only jump leads with fully insulated clamps. Do not allow the vehicles to come into con- tact with each other, otherwise current may start to flow as soon as the positive poles are connected.

Jump start: description

Fig. 190  Diagram of connections for vehicles without Start Stop system

Fig. 191  Diagram of connections for vehicles with Start Stop system

The discharged battery must be properly con- nected to the on-board network. Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient metal-to-metal contact with the battery termi- nals.

Miscellaneous situations

287

Jump start

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

Jump lead terminal connections

The jump leads should only be connected in the order 1 > 2 > 3 > 4  Fig. 191.

Switch off the ignition of both vehicles   . Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive + terminal of the vehicle with the flat battery A . Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive terminal + in the vehicle providing assistance B . Vehicles without a Start-Stop system: con- nect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal of the vehicle provid- ing the current B  Fig. 190. Vehicles with a Start-stop system: connect one end of the black jump lead X to a suitable ground terminal, to a solid piece of metal in the engine block, or to the engine block itself  Fig. 191. Connect the other end of the black jump lead X to a solid metal component bolted to the engine block or to the engine block itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. Do not connect it to a point near the battery A. Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.

Starting

Start the engine of the vehicle with the boosting battery and let it run at idling speed. Start the engine of the vehicle with the flat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes until the engine is running.

Removing the jump leads

Before you remove the jump leads, switch off the dipped beam headlights if they are switched on. Turn on the heater blower and heated rear window in the vehicle with the flat battery. This helps minimise voltage peaks which are generated when the leads are discon- nected. When the engine is running, disconnect the leads in reverse order to the details given above.

If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec- onds, switch off the starter and try again after about 1 minute.

WARNING Please note the safety warnings refer- ring to working in the engine compartment  page 297. The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on battery). Failure to comply could result in an explosion. Never use jump leads when one of the bat- teries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced. Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes away from batteries, danger of explosion. Failure to comply could result in an explo- sion. Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads. Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the negative ter- minal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion. Never attach the negative cable to fuel system components or the brake lines in the other vehicle. The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.

288

Miscellaneous situations

Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment. Do not lean on the batteries. This could re- sult in chemical burns. Take into account the instruction manual of the jump lead manufacturer and the instruc- tion manual of the other vehicle.

NOTICE Immediately go to a specialist workshop and have the 12 volt battery checked.

Towing the vehicle Introduction

It takes practice to tow a vehicle, especially when using a tow cable. Both drivers should be well informed of the special features of towing. Inexperienced drivers should refrain from tow- ing. During towing, make sure at all times that no inadmissible traction forces or jolts are gener- ated. On roads without a firm surface there is always the danger of overloading the attach- ment parts. Take into account the legal provisions regarding tow starting and towing.

Tow start

Tow starting means starting a vehicle's engine while another puts it in motion by pulling it. The vehicle can be towed with a tow bar or cable

Towing

Towing means a vehicle pulling another vehicle that is not in a condition to run. The vehicle can be towed with a tow bar or cable. The maximum permitted speed is 50 km/h (30 mph). The maximum permitted distance is 50 km (30 miles).

Tow cable and tow bar

It is safer for the vehicle to be towed using a tow bar, avoiding damage to the vehicle. The tow cable should only be used if a tow bar is not available. A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoid damage to both vehicles. It is advisable to use a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or similarly elastic material.

Tow with a tow truck

If a breakdown lorry is used, vehicles with au- tomatic transmission are only allowed to be towed with the front wheels suspended.

Towing vehicles with four-wheel drive (4Drive)

Four-wheel drive vehicles (4Drive) can be towed using a tow bar or tow rope. If the vehicle is towed with the front or rear axle suspended, the engine must be switched off, otherwise the transmission may be damaged.

WARNING During the towing of a vehicle, the driving behaviour and braking capacity change con- siderably.

WARNING Never allow the vehicle to be towed if it has no power. When towing, never remove the key from the ignition or disconnect the ignition with the ignition and start button. Otherwise, the electronic lock of the steering column could suddenly get blocked and it would be impos- sible to steer the vehicle. This could cause an accident, serious injury and loss of control of the vehicle. If the vehicle runs out of power during tow- ing, stop the process immediately and seek the assistance of specialised personnel.

Miscellaneous situations

289

Towing the vehicle

NOTICE Towing the vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar can cause damage to the vehicle. If the vehicle is towed with a tow cable or tow bar, special care must be taken. If possible, have the vehicle transported on a tow truck.

NOTICE If the vehicle is pushed by hand, the tail light units, the side spoilers of the rear window and large sheet metal surfaces may be dam- aged. In addition, the rear spoiler could be detached. If the vehicle is pushed by hand, the tail light units, the side spoilers of the rear win- dow, large sheet metal surfaces or the rear spoiler.

NOTICE Removing and attaching the cover and the towing eye may cause damage to the vehi- cle, for example, on the paintwork. To avoid damaging the vehicle, remove and replace the cover and the towing eye care- fully.

NOTICE Using a towing eye that is not suitable for the vehicle can damage it. When towing, always use the vehicles tow- ing eye, which forms part of the on-board tools, or an appropriate eye for towing.

Instructions for tow-starting and towing

During towing, the change of direction can be signalled on the towed vehicle even when the hazard warning lights are on. To do so, at the same time, the turn signal lever must be oper- ated with ignition switched on. During this time the hazard warning lights remain disconnected. When the turn signal lever is returned to the rest position, the hazard warning lights will be automatically reactivated.

Cases where tow starting and towing the ve- hicle are not permitted

Do not allow the vehicle to be towed in the following situations: The vehicles gearbox is damaged or has no lubricant. The 12-volt battery is discharged. In vehicles with the Keyless Access locking and ignition system the steering remains locked and the parking brake cannot be deactivated and the steering column lock cannot be released if they are connected.

If a distance above 50 km needs to be travel- led. There is no guarantee that the wheels will turn smoothly or that the steering will work after an accident. If the vehicle cannot be towed on its wheels for any of the reasons mentioned above, request assistance from specialised personnel and, if necessary, have the vehicle transported with- out the wheels touching the ground.

Tow start

Steps to be taken prior to tow starting

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox: Due to technical reasons, tow starting the vehicle is not allowed. Attempt to start the engine using the starting aid  page 286. Vehicles with a manual gearbox: In general, it is not recommended to tow start the vehicle. If the engine does not start, try the starting aid first  page 286. Please note that, in the case of petrol engines, the maximum permitted dis- tance for tow starting is 50 m. Secure the tow cable or tow bar using only the attachment points provided for this pur- pose. Switch on the ignition and the hazard warning lights. Engage 2nd or 3rd gear while the vehicle is stopped. Press the clutch and hold it down.

290

Miscellaneous situations

When both vehicles are in motion, release the clutch pedal. As soon as the engine starts, depress the clutch and disengage the gear to avoid collid- ing with the towing vehicle.

NOTICE When tow-starting, unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.

Towing

Previous steps Secure the tow cable or tow bar using only the attachment points provided for this purpose   . Depending on the equipment, these points may be a towing device or a towing eye. Make sure the tow cable is not twisted. Other- wise the towing eye could unscrew during tow- ing. Switch on the ignition and the hazard warning lights of both vehicles. If necessary, take into account other different provisions that may ex- ist in this regard. Take into account the instructions on towing provided in the instruction manual of the other vehicle.

Towing vehicle (front) Do not actually start driving until the cable is tight. Accelerate with particular care. Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. Vehicles with a manual gearbox: When starting to drive, use the clutch very gently.

Towed vehicle (behind) Make sure the ignition is switched on so that the steering wheel does not lock and so that, if necessary, you can use the turn signals and the windscreen wiper. The brake servo and power steering only work when the engine is running. Otherwise, you will have to depress the brake pedal con- siderably harder and more force will be needed to turn the steering wheel. Release the electronic parking brake. Make sure the tow cable is always taut. Disengage the gear or place the gear selec- tor in the Nposition.

WARNING Never attach the tow rope or tow bar to axle or running gear components. They could be damaged, resulting in an accident and seri- ous injury. Seek specialist assistance and, if applica- ble, have the vehicle transported on a tow truck.

NOTICE The vehicle can only be towed if the state of charge of the 12-volt battery is sufficient to disengage the electronic parking brake and the steering column lock. If the vehicle has no power supply or there is an electric sys- tem fault, the engine must be jump-started to release the electronic parking brake and deactivate the electronic lock of the steering column.

Miscellaneous situations

291

Towing the vehicle

Front towline anchorage

Fig. 192  Front bumper on right: remove the lid.

Fig. 193  Right side of the front bumper: towline anchorage screwed in.

The housing of the removable towline anchor- age is on the right side of the front bumper un- derneath a cover  Fig. 192. The towing eye should always be kept in the vehicle.

Bear in mind the instructions for towing  page 289.

Fitting the towline anchorage Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit in the luggage compartment  page 284. Remove the cover by pressing down on its base and leave it hanging from the vehicle  Fig. 192. Screw the towing eye in the housing by turning it to the maximum anticlockwise  Fig. 193 ,   . Use a suitable object that can completely and securely tighten the towing eye in its housing. After towing, unscrew the towing eye clock- wise with a suitable object. Replace the cover and push it in until it clicks into place. Clean the towing eye if necessary and then store it in the luggage compartment along with the other vehicle tools.

NOTICE The towing eye must always be completely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could jump out of the housing during towing.

Rear towline anchorage

Fig. 194  Rear bumper on right: remove the lid.

Fig. 195  Right side of the rear bumper: towline anchorage screwed in.

The housing of the screw towing eye is on the right side of the rear bumper behind a lid  Fig. 194.

292

Miscellaneous situations

Vehicles fitted as standard with a towing bracket do not have any housing for the screw towing eye behind the lid. In this case, the tow hitch needs to be extracted or installed and used for towing  page 265 ,   . Bear in mind the instructions for towing  page 289.

Assemble the rear towing eye (cars without a factory-equipped towing bracket) Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit in the luggage compartment  page 284. Press the upper side of the lid  Fig. 194 to unclip it. Remove the lid and let it hang from the vehi- cle. Screw the towing eye in the housing by turning it to the maximum anticlockwise  Fig. 195 ,   . Use a suitable object that can completely and securely tighten the towing eye in its housing. After towing, unscrew the towing eye clock- wise with a suitable object. Replace the cover and press until the tab snaps into the bumper. Clean the towing eye if necessary and then store it in the luggage compartment along with the other vehicle tools.

NOTICE The towing eye must always be com- pletely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could be released while towing and tow- starting. If the vehicle is factory-equipped with a towing bracket, it is only allowed to tow with a tow bar if this has been specially designed to be installed with a tow hitch. If an unsuita- ble tow bar is used, both the tow hitch and the vehicle may be damaged. Instead, a tow rope should be used.

Fuses Introduction

In general, a fuse can be assigned to various electrical components. Likewise, an electrical component can be protected by several fuses. Only replace fuses when the cause of the problem has been solved. If a newly inserted fuse blows after a short time, you must have the electrical system checked by a specialised workshop as soon as possible.

WARNING The high voltages in the electrical system can give serious electrical shocks, causing burns and even death! Never touch the electrical wiring of the ig- nition system. Take care not to cause short circuits in the electrical system.

WARNING Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or bridging a current circuit without fuses can cause a fire and serious injury. Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same amper- age (same colour and markings) and size. Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta- ple or similar.

NOTICE To prevent damage to the vehicles electri- cal system, before replacing a fuse always turn off the ignition, the lights and all electri- cal elements. Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre- vent the entry of dust or humidity as they can damage the electrical system.

Miscellaneous situations

293

Fuses

Note In the vehicle, there are more fuses than those indicated in this chapter. These should only be replaced by a specialist workshop.

Fuses inside the vehicle

Fig. 196  On the dashboard on the driver side: lid of the fuse box.

Fig. 197  Right-hand drive vehicles: fuse box cover under the passenger side dash panel.

Vehicles with the steering wheel on the left: open the fuse box cover under the dash panel

Open: fold the cover down  Fig. 196. Close: push back the cover it in until it clicks into place.

Right-hand drive vehicles: open the fuse box behind the glove compartment Open the glove compartment and, if neces- sary, empty it. Undo the opening limiter  Fig. 197 A in two steps: first, unlock the limiter by pulling back on it (arrow 1 ) and then move it gently to the right (arrow 2 ). Remove the guide when the cover is in the normal opening position (30). Free the side pivots B to release the cover to its second opening position (60). Follow the same procedure in reverse order to return the glove compartment to its normal position.

Identifying fuses below the dashboard by colours

Colour Current intensity in amps

Orange 5

Brown 7.5

Red 10

Blue 15

Yellow 20

White or transparent 25

Green 30

Orange 40

294

Miscellaneous situations

NOTICE Always carefully remove the fuse box cov- ers and refit them correctly to avoid prob- lems with your vehicle. Protect the fuse boxes when open to avoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and humid- ity inside fuse boxes can cause damage to the electrical system.

Fuses in the engine compartment

Fig. 198  In the engine compartment: lid of the fuse box.

To open the engine compartment fuse box

Raise the bonnet   on page 297. Press the locking tabs to unlock the fuse box cover  Fig. 198. Then lift the cover out. To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box. Push the locking tabs down until they click audibly into place.

Replace a blown fuse

Fig. 199  Image of a blown fuse.

Preparations Switch off the ignition, lights and all electrical equipment. Open the corresponding fuse box  page 293,  page 294.

Recognise a blown fuse

A blown fuse can be recognised if the metal strip is melted  Fig. 199. Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has blown.

To replace a fuse Remove the fuse. Replace the blown fuse by one with an iden- tical amperage rating (same colour and mark- ings) and identical size. Replace the cover again or close the fuse box lid.

Fuse placement

Fuses in the vehicle interior

No. Consumers/Amps

1 Adblue (SCR) 20

4 Alarm horn 7.5

5 Gateway 7.5

6 Automatic gearbox lever 7.5

7 Air conditioning and heating control panel, back window heating, auxiliary heating.

10

8

Diagnosis, electronic parking brake switch, light switch, re- versing light, interior lighting, driving mode, lit-up door sill, rain sensor

7.5

9 Steering column, coolant pump (T2C) 7.5

10 Radio display 7.5

11 Left lights 40

Miscellaneous situations

295

Fuses

No. Consumers/Amps

12 Radio 20

13 Driver and passenger seat belt pre-tensioner 25

14 Air conditioner fan 40

15 Steering column release 10

16 Connectivity Box 7.5

17 Instrument panel, OCU 7.5

18 Rear camera and surroundings camera 7.5

19 Kessy 7.5

20 SCR, engine relay, 1.5 10/15

21 4x4 Haldex Control Unit 15

22 Trailer 15

23 Electric sunroof 30

24 Right lights 40

25 Left door 30

26 Heated seats 30

27 Interior light 30

28 Trailer 25

31 Rear lid control unit 30

32 Control unit for park distance control, front camera and radar 7.5/10

33 Airbag 7.5

No. Consumers/Amps

34 Reverse switch, climate sen- sor, electrochromic mirror, rear power sockets (USB)

7.5

35 Diagnosis, headlight control unit, headlight adjuster 7.5

38 Trailer 25

39 Right door 30

40 12V socket 20

41 Driver and passenger seat belt pre-tensioner 25

42 Central locking 40

43 Beats Audio CAN and MOST. 40

44 Trailer 15

45 Electric driver's seat 15

46 USB socket 7.5

47 Rear window wiper 15

49 Starter motor; clutch sensor 7.5

52 Driving mode 15

53 Heated rear window 30

In-line fuse/Amps

230 V rear power sockets 30

Fuse arrangement in engine compartment

No. Consumer/Amps

1 ESP control unit 25

2 ESP control unit 40/60

3 Engine control unit (diesel/pet- rol) 30/15

4 Engine sensors 7.5/10

5 Engine sensors 10

6 Brake light sensor 7.5

7 Engine power supply 10

8 Lambda probe 10

9 Engine 20

10 Fuel pump control unit 15/20

11 PTC 40

12 PTC 40

13 Gearbox pump 15/30

14 Heated windscreen 50

15 Horn 15

16 Petrol pump 20

17 Engine control unit 7.5

18 Terminal 30 (positive reference) 7.5

19 Front windscreen washer 30

21 Automatic gearbox control unit 15/30

22 Engine control unit 7.5

296

Miscellaneous situations

No. Consumer/Amps

23 Starter motor 30

24 PTC 40

36 Left LED headlight 15

37 Parking heating 20

38 Right LED headlight 15

Note In the vehicle, there are more fuses than those indicated in this chapter. These should only be changed by a specialised workshop. Positions not containing a fuse do not ap- pear in the following tables. Some of the equipment listed in the tables below pertain only to certain versions of the model or are optional extras. Please note that the above lists, while cor- rect at the time of printing, are subject to change.

Changing bulbs Change a bulb

LED technology lights

Full-LED headlights handle all light functions (daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped beam and route light) with light emitting diodes (LEDs) as a light source.

Full-LED headlights are designed to last the lifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot be replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to an authorised workshop to have it replaced.

The fog lights, tail lights, number plate light, side turn signals and additional brake light are all LED bulbs. With this in mind, they should be re- placed by a technical service.

Checking and refilling levels

297

Engine compartment

Checking and refilling levels Engine compartment

Working in the engine compartment The engine compartment of the vehicle is a dangerous area. You should only perform works in the engine compartment if you have good knowledge of the necessary operations and the general safety measures, and if you have ade- quate tools, means and operating fluids. Works performed inadequately, could lead to serious injuries   . In this case, seek a specialised workshop to perform all the works. SEAT rec- ommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this. Before performing any work in the engine com- partment, always park the vehicle on level and firm ground, taking all necessary safety pre- cautions.

WARNING Any accidental movement of the vehicle dur- ing maintenance work could cause serious injuries. Never perform works underneath the vehi- cle without having first immobilised it to pre- vent it from moving. When working under the vehicle with the wheels on the ground, the vehicle must be on a level surface and the wheels must be locked.

If work must be performed underneath the vehicle, take the extra precaution of support- ing it safely using suitable assembly support. The jack is not suitable for this purpose and may not withstand, which could lead to seri- ous injuries. The Start-Stop system must be switched off manually.

WARNING The engine compartment of any vehicle is a dangerous area in which serious injuries can be caused! When performing any type of work, always ensure you are extremely cautious, and bear in mind the general safety measures. Never put yourself at risk. Never perform works in the engine com- partment if you do not have solid knowledge of the necessary operations. If you are un- sure of what needs to be done, seek a speci- alised workshop to perform the works. Works performed inadequately, could lead to seri- ous injuries. Never open or close the bonnet if you see steam or coolant escaping from the en- gine compartment. Steam or hot coolant can cause severe burns. Always wait until you stop hearing or seeing the steam or coolant discharging from the engine compartment. Before opening the bonnet, always wait for the engine to cool down.

Touching hot engine or exhaust system components could result in skin burns. Turn off the ignition and keep the vehicle key in a safe place at a safe distance from the vehicle to prevent the ignition from being turned on and the combustion engine started by mistake. Always keep children away from the en- gine compartment and never leave them un- supervised. When the motor is hot, its cooling system is pressurised. Do not open the expansion tank cap, hot coolant may splash out and cause severe burns and other injuries. Turn the coolant expansion tank cap slowly and very carefully anticlockwise while pressing it down slightly. Always protect your face, hands and arms from the hot coolant and steam with a large thick cloth.

When refilling operating fluids, ensure they do not spill onto the components of the en- gine or onto the exhaust system. These liq- uids could cause a fire.

298

Checking and refilling levels

WARNING The electrical system is under high voltage and can cause electrical shocks, burns, seri- ous injuries and even death! Never short circuit the electrical system. The 12-volt battery could explode. To reduce the risk of electric shock and se- rious injury, never touch the electrical wires of the ignition system while the engine is run- ning or when starting.

WARNING There are rotating parts in the engine com- partment which could cause serious injury. Never insert your hand in the radiator fan or around that area. All the rotor blades can cause serious injuries. The fan activates de- pending on the temperature and can switch on automatically, even if the ignition is off. If any work has to be done during engine start-up or when it is running, take into ac- count that the rotating parts (e.g. the poly- V belt, alternator and the radiator fan) and the high-voltage ignition system pose a fatal hazard. Always act with extreme care. Ensure that no part of your body, or any jewellery or tie, loose clothing, loose long hair can become trapped in the rotating parts. Before performing works in the en- gine compartment, remove any jewellery or tie you may be wearing, tie up your hair if it is long and gather any loose clothing.

Do not press the accelerator pedal while not paying attention. Always do so with ex- treme care. The vehicle could move, even if the electronic parking brake is activated.

Do not leave objects in the engine com- partment, e.g. rags or tools.

WARNING The operating fluids and some materials of the engine compartment are highly flamma- ble and could cause a fire and serious inju- ries! Never smoke in the vicinity of the engine compartment. Never perform works close to unprotected flames or sparks. When you must perform works on the on- board 12 volt electrical system, bear in mind the following: Always disconnect the 12 volt battery. Ensure the vehicle is unlocked when dis- connecting the 12-volt battery, otherwise the anti-theft alarm will trigger. Never perform works in the vicinity of heating elements, water boilers or unpro- tected flames.

Always have a fire extinguisher close-by, ensuring it is operational and had been checked.

NOTICE When refilling or changing the operating flu- ids, ensure you pour the correct fluids into their corresponding filler caps. Using the wrong operating fluids can lead to serious malfunctions and motor damage.

For the sake of the environment Operating fluids that overflow from the ve- hicle contaminate the environment. There- fore, check underneath the vehicle on a reg- ular basis. If there are marks left by operat- ing fluids on the ground, consult a special- ised workshop and request the vehicle be checked. If any operating fluid leaks out, dis- pose of it in the correct manner.

Preparing the vehicle for work in the engine compartment

Before performing works in the engine com- partment, always perform the following opera- tions in the order indicated   : 1. Place the vehicle on level and firm ground,

taking all necessary safety precautions. 2. Press the brake pedal and keep it pressed

until the ignition is switched off. 3. Apply the electronic parking brake. 4. Manual transmission: place the gear lever

in neutral.

Checking and refilling levels

299

Engine compartment

Automatic transmission: move the selector lever to position P.

5. Switch the ignition off  page 131. 6. Remove the vehicle key from the vehicle

and store it outside to avoid inadvertently starting the engine.

7. Wait for the engine to cool down suffi- ciently.

8. Always keep other people away from the engine compartment.

9. Immobilize the vehicle so that it cannot move.

WARNING For your own safety, do not ignore this impor- tant check list, otherwise this could cause accidents and serious injuries. Always follow the indications on the check list and always bear in mind the general safety measures.

Opening and closing the bonnet

Fig. 200  Release lever in the driver's footwell area.

Fig. 201  Lever under the bonnet.

Opening the bonnet

The bonnet is released from inside the vehicle. Before opening the bonnet, make sure that the windscreen wiper arms are in place against the windscreen.

Open the door and pull the lever that is un- derneath the instrument panel  Fig. 200 1 . To lift the bonnet, press the release catch un- der the bonnet upwards  Fig. 201 2 . The arrester hook under the bonnet is released. The bonnet can be opened. Release the bon- net stay and secure it in the fixture designed for this in the bonnet.

Closing the bonnet Slightly lift the bonnet. Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its support. At a height of approximately 20 cm let it fall so it locks. If the bonnet does not close, do not press downwards. Open it again and let it fall as mentioned above.

WARNING Make sure that the bonnet is properly closed. If it opens when driving, it can cause an acci- dent.

NOTICE To avoid damage to the bonnet and to the windscreen wiper arms, only open it when the windscreen wipers are in place against the windscreen.

300

Checking and refilling levels

Fluids and consumables Introduction

All fluids and consumables, such as engine coolant or vehicle batteries, are subject to con- tinuous development. For this reason, whenever a fluid or consumable needs to be replaced, please contact a specialist workshop. SEAT dealers always promptly receive informa- tion about any modifications.

WARNING If unsuitable fluids and consumables are used or used improperly, accidents, injuries, burns and severe poisoning can occur. Only store operating fluids in their original containers, tightly closed. Never store operating fluids in empty food cans, bottles or other empty containers, as they could be ingested by somebody. Keep all fluids and consumables out of reach of children. Always read and observe the information and warnings given on containers of operat- ing fluids. When using products that emit harmful va- pours, always work outdoors or in a well-ven- tilated area.

NOTICE Use only appropriate operating fluids. Never confuse operating fluids. This could result in serious malfunctions and motor damage!

For the sake of the environment Leakages of operating fluids can contami- nate the environment. If any operating fluid leaks, collect it in an appropriate container and dispose of it properly and in an environ- mentally friendly manner.

Cooling system Introduction

Only carry out work on the motor cooling sys- tem yourself if you are familiar with the neces- sary operations and the generally applicable safety measures, and if you have the appro- priate tools, equipment and operating fluids. Works performed inadequately could lead to serious injuries . In this case, seek a specialised workshop to perform all the works. SEAT rec- ommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

WARNING Engine coolant is toxic! Only store coolant in its original container, tightly closed and in a safe place. Never store motor coolant in empty food cans, bottles or other empty containers, as it could be ingested by another person. Always keep motor coolant out of reach of children. Ensure that the coolant fluid additive per- centage is correct, taking into account the lowest ambient temperature expected in the location where the vehicle is to be used. When the outside temperature is very low, the coolant could freeze and the vehicle could be immobilised. In this case, the heat- ing would not work either and inadequately dressed passengers could die of cold.

For the sake of the environment Coolants and additives can contaminate the environment. If any operating fluid leaks out, collect it and dispose of it properly and in an environmentally friendly manner.

Coolant specifications The factory fitted motor cooling system is filled with a mixture of specially treated water and at least 40% coolant additive G12evo (TL-VW 774 L).

Checking and refilling levels

301

Cooli g system

Get information from a specialist workshop about which coolant is suitable for your vehicle. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this. To protect the engine cooling system, the ad- ditive percentage should always be at least 40%. If more antifreeze protection is required for climatic reasons, the additive proportion can be increased. However, it should only be increased up to a maximum of 55 %, otherwise the antifreeze protection would be reduced and the cooling effect would be impaired. The G12evo (TL-VW 774 L) can be recognised by its lilac colouring. This mixture of water and additive not only provides antifreeze pro- tection down to -25C (-13F), but also pro- tects the light alloy parts of the cooling system against corrosion, prevents limescale build-up and considerably raises the boiling point of the coolant. When topping up the coolant, a mixture of dis- tilled water and at least 40% of the appropri- ate coolant additive should be used for opti- mum corrosion protection  page 301.

WARNING If the vehicles cooling system does not have sufficient antifreeze protection, the engine could fail and this could result in serious in- jury. Ensure that the coolant fluid additive per- centage is correct, taking into account the lowest ambient temperature expected in the location where the vehicle is to be used. When the outside temperature is very low, the coolant could freeze and the vehicle could be immobilised. In this case, the heat- ing would not work either and inadequately dressed passengers could die of cold.

NOTICE Never mix the original additives for the G12evo coolant (TL-VW 774 L) with motor coolant fluid not authorised by SEAT. If the fluid in the expansion tank does not have a pink colour (resulting from mixing the lilac additive with distilled water), but is, for example, brown, the suitable coolant may have been mixed with another unsuitable one. The coolant must be changed as soon as possible if this is the case! Otherwise se- rious malfunctions or damage to the engine and the cooling system could occur!

For the sake of the environment Motor coolant and its additives can pollute the environment. If any operating fluid leaks out, collect it and dispose of it properly and in an environmentally friendly manner.

Check and refill the coolant

Fig. 202  In the front compartment: marking on coolant expansion tank.

302

Checking and refilling levels

Fig. 203  Front compartment: coolant expansion tank cap.

Previous steps Park the vehicle on a firm, flat surface. Wait until the engine has fully cooled   . Open the front bonnet. The motor coolant expansion tank can be recognised by the symbol on the cap  Fig. 203

Check the level

When the vehicle is delivered (new vehicles), the coolant may be above the marked area. This is normal. It is not necessary to suck the coolant out. When the engine is cold, check the coolant level using the side marking on the expansion tank  Fig. 202. The coolant level should be between the marks.

If the level is below the minimum level mark ( ) on the tank, top up with coolant. When the motor is warm, the coolant level may be slightly above the upper mark.

Topping up the fluid

When the motor coolant level is too low, the coolant warning light comes on. In this case, immediately seek assistance from specialist personnel. If the coolant level is too low and there is no workshop nearby, note the following: Always protect your face, hands and arms from hot coolant or steam by placing a suitable cloth over the cap of the motor coolant expan- sion tank. Carefully unscrew the cap   . Only top up with fresh coolant according to SEAT specifications  page 300. Only top up with coolant if there is still some coolant left in the expansion tank; otherwise the motor could be damaged! If you do not see any coolant in the expansion tank, do not continue driving and seek specialist assistance. If there is still some coolant left in the expan- sion tank, top up with coolant up to the tanks upper mark and check the level the next day. If the level drops again, go to a workshop and request a check of the cooling system. The coolant level must be between the marks on the expansion tank  Fig. 202. Never ex- ceed the top edge of the marked area   .

Screw the cap on tightly. If engine coolant with the recommended specifications is not available in an emergency, do not use any other coolant additive! In this case, top up with distilled water   only. Next, ensure that the recommended additive is topped up as soon as possible in the correct proportion  page 300.

WARNING Steam and hot motor coolant can cause se- vere burns. Never open the front bonnet if you see or hear steam or coolant escaping from the front compartment. Always wait until you can no longer see or hear steam or coolant es- caping. Touching hot parts can result in skin burns. Before opening the front bonnet, please note the following: Apply the electronic parking brake. Always keep children away from the front compartment and never leave them unat- tended.

Checking and refilling levels

303

Brake fluid

When the motor is hot, its cooling system is pressurised. Do not open the expansion tank cap, hot coolant may splash out and cause severe burns and other injuries. Turn the cap slowly and very care- fully anticlockwise while pressing it down slightly. Always protect your face, hands and arms from the hot coolant and steam with a large thick cloth.

NOTICE Only use distilled water! Other types of wa- ter contain chemical substances that could cause significant corrosion damage. If you have added non-distilled water, have all of the motor cooling system fluid changed im- mediately by a specialist workshop. When topping up the, do not fill over the upper edge of the marked area  Fig. 202. Otherwise, when the temperature rises the excess fluid will be expelled from the motor cooling system and could cause damage. If the system leaks a lot of coolant, only refill once the motor has cooled down com- pletely. If there is a significant loss of cool- ant, there may be leaks in the cooling sys- tem. Immediately go to a specialist workshop to have the system checked. This could result in motor damage.

Do not add coolant if the expansion tank is completely empty! Air may have got into the cooling system. Do not continue driving and seek assistance from specialist person- nel. This could result in motor damage. When changing the operating fluids, make sure that you pour the correct fluids into the correct filler necks. Using the wrong operat- ing fluids can lead to serious malfunctions and motor damage.

Brake fluid Check and refill the brake fluid

Fig. 204  Engine compartment: brake fluid reservoir cap.

Checking the brake fluid level

The brake fluid level must be between the and markings.

However, if the brake fluid level goes down no- ticeably in a short time, or drops below the mark, there may be a leak in the brake system. Seek specialist assistance. A warning light on the instrument panel display monitors the brake fluid level.

Brake fluid level

The control lamp lights up red. Brake fluid level is too low. Stop driving! Check the brake fluid level. If the brake fluid level is too low, seek special- ist assistance.

Changing brake fluid

We recommend that you have the brake fluid changed by a Technical Service.

WARNING If the brake fluid level is low or unsuitable/old brake fluid is used, the brake system may fail or braking power may be reduced. Check the brake system and the brake fluid level regularly! When the brake fluid is used and brakes are subjected to extreme braking forces, bubbles of vapour form in the brake system. These bubbles can significantly reduce brak-

304

Checking and refilling levels

ing power, notably increasing braking dis- tance, and could result in the total failure of the brake system. Be sure to always use the correct brake fluid. Only use brake fluid that expressly meets the VW 501 14 standard. You can buy VW 501 14 standard brake fluid in a SEAT dealership or a SEAT Offi- cial Service. If none is available, use only high-quality brake fluid that meets DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, or USA Standards FMVSS 116 DOT 4. The replacement brake fluid must be new. Brake fluid should be stored in the closed original container in a safe place out of reach of children. Risk of poisoning!

NOTICE Brake fluid should not come into contact with the vehicle paintwork, as it is abrasive.

Note Brake fluid is an environmental pollutant. Collect any spilt service fluids and allow a professional to dispose of them.

Windscreen washer reser- voir

Checking the level of the window washer tank and refilling it

Fig. 205  In the engine compartment: blue cap of the windscreen washer tank.

Check the water level in the windscreen washer reservoir regularly and top up as required. The window washer tank contains liquid deter- gent for the windscreen and rear window. There is a sieve in the filler neck of the washer fluid tank. When filling the tank, this sieve re- tains large dirt particles so that they do not reach the nozzles. Do not remove the sieve ex- cept for cleaning. If the sieve is damaged or not fitted, these dirt particles could enter the system during filling and clog the windscreen washer nozzles.

Raise the bonnet   on page 297. The windscreen washer reservoir is marked with the symbol on the cap. Check if there is enough fluid in the tank. Plain water is not enough to clean the wind- screen and headlights. We recommend that you always add a product to the windscreen washer fluid.

Recommended windscreen wipers For the hottest seasons we recommend sum- mer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Proportions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank: 1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts water). All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clear glass. Approximate proportion of the winter mixture, up to -18C (0F): 1:2 (1 part concentrate per 2 parts water); otherwise, a 1:4 proportion of mixture in the washer fluid tank.

The capacity of the windscreen washer tank is approximately 3 litres.

Checking and refilling levels

305

Engin oi

A

B

NOTICE If the water from the windscreen washer does not contain enough anti-freeze, it may freeze on the windscreen and rear window, reducing forward and rear visibility. In winter, ensure the windscreen washer contains enough anti-freeze. In cold conditions, you should not use the windscreen wiper system unless you have warmed the windscreen with the ventilation system. The antifreeze could freeze on the windscreen and reduce visibility.

NOTICE Never mix an unsuitable antifreeze or other similar additives with the windscreen washer water. A greasy layer may be formed on the windscreen which will impair visibility. Use clean water with a window cleaner recommended by SEAT. If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze to the water in the reservoir.

NOTICE Do not mix cleaning products recommen- ded by SEAT with other products. This could lead to flocculation and may block the wind- screen washer jets. When topping up service fluids, make ab- solutely certain that you fill the fluids into the correct reservoirs. Using the wrong fluids could cause serious malfunctions. Lack of window washer fluid causes the view through the windscreen to be obscured.

Engine oil General notes

Fig. 206  In the engine compartment: engine oil label

Fig. 207  In the engine compartment: area where the engine oil label is located

Key to the  Fig. 206: Information about the engine oil standard. Information about engine oil viscosity.

The engine comes with a special, multi-grade oil that can be used all year round. Because the use of high-quality oil is essential for the correct operation of the engine and its long useful life, when topping up or changing oil, use only those oils that comply with VW standards.

For vehicles with an engine oil label

If the engine oil has to be topped up, use one of the oils shown on the label  Fig. 206. The label with the prescribed standard is loca- ted at the front of the engine compartment  Fig. 207 1 . If you use the recommended engine oil, you can top up the oil as often as necessary.

306

Checking and refilling levels

For vehicles without an engine oil label

Contact a specialised workshop or SEAT of- ficial service for information about the corre- sponding standard.

If the engine oil level is too low

If the recommended engine oil is not availa- ble, in the event of an emergency you can change the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 l of the next oil until the next oil change:

Petrol engines: VW 504 00, ACEA C3 or API SN standard. Diesel engines: VW 507 00, ACEA C3 or API CJ-4, viscosity 0W-30.

SEAT recommends changing the oil at a speci- alised workshop. SEAT recommends an Official SEAT Service. SEAT recommends the use of engine oils ap- proved according to the appropriate VW stand- ard. Use of engine oils that do not meet these quality requirements can cause engine dam- age. SEAT recommends the use of Original SEAT Spare Part engine oils.

Engine oil additives

No type of additive should be mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration caused by these additives is not covered by the warranty.

NOTICE Take the following into account if you have refilled with an engine oil different to those specified in the aforementioned standards, or by your SEAT technical service centre: There is no way of completely avoiding the danger of causing damage to the engine and particulate filter. You can continue driving with the vehicle if the refill was no more than 0.5 l of engine oil. Go to a specialised workshop as soon as possible and request an oil change. Oth- erwise, there is a danger of engine damage. If you have topped up more than 0.5 l of engine oil, drive with the engine at low load levels and within the medium RPM range as a maximum. Do not drive at more than 80 km/h and do not travel more than 300 km (approx- imately). Go to a specialised workshop as soon as possible and request an oil change. Otherwise, there is a danger of engine dam- age. You are responsible for the risk of possible damage to the vehicle (engine, exhaust sys- tem). If in doubt, do not start the engine and request assistance from the technical serv- ice centre. Do not start the engine if you have topped up with a fluid other than engine oil. Request assistance from the technical service centre. Danger of engine damage!

Note Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the correspond- ing VW specifications and recommend keep- ing it in the vehicle. This way, the correct en- gine oil will always be available for a top-up if needed.

Checking and topping up the engine oil level

Fig. 208  Engine oil dipstick.

Checking and refilling levels

307

Engin oi

A

B

C

Fig. 209  Oil filler cap cover in the engine compartment.

Key to the  Fig. 208: Do not top up oil in any case. You can add oil but keep the level in that zone. The oil level is too low. Add oil up to zone B .

Before opening the bonnet, read and observe the warnings  page 297, Working in the en- gine compartment.

Check the oil level

The engine oil dipstick indicates the level of the oil. Park the vehicle in a horizontal position. Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the operating temperature is reached and then stop.

Wait for about two minutes. Locate the oil level dipstick. It can be recog- nized by its coloured upper end. Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it in as far as it will go. Then pull it out again and check the oil level  Fig. 208. Top up with engine oil if necessary. The oil should leave a mark between the areas A and C . It must never exceed zone A .

Depending on how you drive and the conditions in which the vehicle is used, oil consumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil consumption is likely to be higher for the first 5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level must be checked at regular intervals, preferably when filling the tank and before a journey.

Topping up engine oil Locate the engine oil filler cap. It can be recognized by the symbol on the cover  Fig. 209. Unscrew cap from the oil filler mouth  Fig. 209. Carefully add oil in small quantities (no more than 0.5 l). To avoid adding too much oil, whenever you add a certain amount, wait about 2 minutes and recheck the oil level  page 307. If necessary, add some more oil.

When the oil level reaches at least zone  Fig. 208 B , carefully screw on the engine oil filler cap   . Engine oil specification  page 305.

WARNING Any work carried out in the engine compart- ment or on the engine must be carried out cautiously. When working in the engine compart- ment, always observe the safety warnings  page 297.

WARNING Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil comes into contact with hot engine compo- nents when topping up.

NOTICE If the oil level is above zone A , do not start the engine. This could result in damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Contact a Technical Service.

For the sake of the environment Under no circumstances should the oil level be above zone A . Otherwise oil can be drawn in through the crankcase breather and leak into the atmosphere via the exhaust sys- tem.

308

Checking and refilling levels

Note Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the correspond- ing VW specifications and recommend keep- ing it in the vehicle. This way, the correct en- gine oil will always be available for a top-up if needed.

Engine oil change We recommend that you have the engine oil changed by a Technical Service.

WARNING Only change the engine oil yourself if you have the specialist knowledge required! Before opening the bonnet, read and ob- serve the warnings  page 297. Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil may cause burn injuries. Wear eye protection to avoid injuries, such as acid burns, caused by splashes of oil. When removing the oil drain plug with your fingers, keep your arm horizontal to help pre- vent oil from running down your arm. Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into contact with engine oil. Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must be stored in a safe place out of the reach of children.

NOTICE No additives should be used with engine oil. This could result in engine damage. Any damage caused by the use of such additives would not be covered by the factory war- ranty.

For the sake of the environment We recommend that you change the en- gine oil and the filter at a technical service centre. Never pour oil down drains or into the ground. Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. It must be large enough to hold all the engine oil.

Troubleshooting

Engine oil pressure too low

The indicator lamp lights up red. Do not carry on driving! Switch off the en-

gine. Check the engine oil level. If this warning lamp starts to flash, and is accompanied by three audible warnings, switch off the engine and check the oil level. If necessary, add more oil  page 306. If the warning lamp flashes although the oil level is correct, stop driving. Do not even run the engine at idle speed! Seek professional assistance.

Engine oil level too low

The indicator lamp lights up yellow. Check the engine oil level as soon as possible  page 306. Change the oil as soon as you have the op- portunity to do so.

Fault in the oil level sensor

The control lamp flashes yellow. Have the check done by a specialised work- shop. Until then it is advisable to check the oil level every time you refuel.

12-volt battery Introduction

The 12 volt battery is located in the engine compartment. Its status is checked and, if nec- essary, it is replaced as part of maintenance work.

All work on batteries requires specialist knowl- edge. Please refer to a SEAT Official Service or a workshop specialising in batteries: risk of burns or exploding battery! The battery must not be opened! Never try to change the fluid level of the battery. Otherwise explosive gas is released from the battery that could cause an explosion.

Checking and refilling levels

309

12-volt battery

Battery warning indications

Wear protective goggles.

Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear protective gloves and eye protection. Rinse any splashes of electrolyte with

plenty of water. Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are prohibited. The battery should only be charged in a well-ventilated zone. Risk of explosion!

Keep children away from acid and the battery. Always follow the instruction manual.

If the vehicle is not used for long periods

The vehicle has a system for monitoring the current consumption when the engine is left unused for extended periods of time  page 312. Some functions, such as the in- terior lights, or the remote door opening, may be temporarily disabled to prevent the battery from running flat. These functions will come back on as soon as the ignition is switched on and the engine started.

WARNING Working on the 12-volt battery and electri- cal system can cause severe burns, fire and electric shock. Always read and observe the following warnings and safety precautions before working on the battery: Before working on the 12-volt battery, switch off the ignition and all electrical con- sumers and disconnect the negative cable from this battery. Always keep children away from the 12-volt battery electrolyte and the battery itself. Always wear eye protection and protective gloves. The battery electrolyte is very corrosive It can cause skin burns and blindness. When handling the 12-volt battery, protect your hands, arms and face in particular from acid splashes Do not smoke while working and never work in the vicinity of naked flames or sparks. Avoid sparks caused by electrostatic dis- charges, just like when handling electric ca- bles and devices. Never short the battery terminals. Never use damaged 12-volt batteries. They could explode. If the 12-volt battery is dam- aged, replace it immediately. Never use a frozen 12 volt battery. When the battery is discharged, it may freeze at temperatures close to 0C (+32 F). If the 12- volt battery is frozen, replace it immediately.

NOTICE Do not expose the 12-volt battery to direct sunlight for a prolonged period of time. Ultraviolet rays can damage the battery casing.

NOTICE If the vehicle is not to be used for a long pe- riod of time, protect the 12-volt battery from frost. The battery may freeze and, as a result, suffer irreparable damage.

Note After starting the engine with a deeply dis- charged or newly replaced 12-volt battery, or after a jump start, some system settings (time, date, personalised comfort settings and programs) may be incorrectly set or de- leted. Check and correct these settings once the battery is sufficiently charged.

Note During the winter, the starting power may be reduced, and if necessary, the battery should be charged.

310

Checking and refilling levels

Yellow or colourless:

Black:

Check the electrolyte level

Fig. 210  Sight glass on the top of the 12 volt battery (schematic representation).

Battery access

The 12 volt battery is located in the engine compartment. Raise the bonnet   in Working in the engine compartment on page 297. Lift the cover that protects the front of the battery.

Check the level

The electrolyte level should be checked regu- larly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot countries and in older batteries. Check the colour display in the sight glass on the top of the battery  Fig. 210. If there are air bubbles in the window, tap the window gently until they disperse.

The magic eye indicator, located on the top of the battery changes colour, depending on the charge state and electrolyte level of the battery. There are two different colours:

The battery's electrolyte level is too low. Go to a specialised work- shop to have the battery checked and re- placed if necessary.

The batterys electrolyte level is correct.

Charging, replacing, disconnecting and connecting the 12-volt battery

If you suspect that the 12-volt battery is dam- aged or defective, have it checked by a quali- fied specialist workshop.

Charging the 12-volt battery

Contact a specialist workshop for charging the 12-volt battery, as the battery model fitted in the vehicle in the factory uses a technology that requires limited voltage charging   . SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

Replacing the 12-volt battery

The 12-volt vehicle battery has been designed to suit its location and has special safety fea- tures. If a 12 volt battery needs to be replaced, the replacement battery must be installed by a qualified technician. SEAT recommends visit-

ing a SEAT dealership. Component information regarding size, maintenance, power and safety characteristics to be met can be obtained from a qualified technician, who should have the necessary documentation and technical equip- ment. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT deal- ership. The degassing hole of the 12 volt battery must always be on side of the negative pole. The degassing hole on the side of the positive pole must always be sealed. Only use maintenance-free 12 volt batteries that comply with the TL 825 06 and VW 7 50 73 standards. These standards must be dated Oc- tober 2014 or later. The 12 volt battery must always be replaced by a qualified technician, as the vehicle's elec- tronic system must also be adjusted as part of the replacement. In addition, the battery pa- rameters relating to operational safety can only be determined with the original battery. Only a qualified technician has both the right technol- ogy to make the adjustment and the correct replacement batteries. The use of unsuitable batteries will invalidate the approval. Vehicles with Start-Stop functions (  page 135) are fitted with a special battery. Therefore, it must only be replaced with a bat- tery of the same specifications.

Checking and refilling levels

311

12-volt battery

Disconnecting the 12-volt battery

If the 12 volt battery is to be disconnected from the vehicle's electrical system, please note the following: Switch off all electrical consumers. Before disconnecting the battery, unlock the vehicle, otherwise the alarm will be triggered. First disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable   .

Connecting the 12-volt battery Switch off all electrical consumers before re- connecting the 12 volt battery. First reconnect the positive cable and then the negative one   . After connecting the 12 volt battery and switch- ing on the ignition, several control lamps may light up. These lamps go out after a short dis- tance at a speed of approx. 15 to 20 km/h (10 to 12 mph). If the warning lights do not go out, visit a specialist workshop and have the vehicle checked. If the 12-volt battery has been disconnected for a long period of time, it is likely that the next service is not correctly indicated or calculated  page 16 . In this case it will be necessary to take into account the maximum maintenance intervals allowed  page 331. Vehicles with a Keyless Access system  page 70: If the ignition cannot be switched on after connecting the 12 volt battery, lock and

unlock the vehicle from the outside. Then try to switch on the ignition again. If the ignition does not work, seek professional assistance.

WARNING Attaching the 12-volt battery incorrectly or using unsuitable batteries may result in short circuits, fire and serious injury. Use only maintenance-free 12 volt batter- ies with an anti-spill system with the same properties, specifications and dimensions as the factory-fitted battery.

WARNING Charging the 12-volt battery creates a highly explosive mixture of detonating gases. Only charge the 12-volt battery in a well- ventilated place. Never charge a 12-volt battery that is fro- zen or has thawed. When the battery is dis- charged, it may freeze at temperatures close to 0C (+32F). If the 12-volt battery has frozen, have it re- placed without fail. A short circuit may occur if the wires are incorrectly connected to the poles. First con- nect the positive cable and then the negative one.

NOTICE Never connect or disconnect the 12-volt battery when the ignition is switched on or the engine is running. Also, never use a 12- volt battery that does not meet the vehicle's battery specifications. The electrical system or certain electronic components could be damaged and electrical malfunctions could occur. Never connect accessories that supply power, such as solar panels or battery chargers, to the 12-volt socket or cigarette lighter, to charge the 12-volt battery. This could damage the vehicle's electrical sys- tem.

For the sake of the environment The battery may contain toxic substances, such as sulphuric acid and lead. Dispose of the 12 volt battery in accordance with the applicable regulations. Electrolyte can contaminate the environ- ment. If any operating fluid leaks out, collect it and dispose of it properly.

Troubleshooting

Alternator fault

The control lamp lights up in RED. The vehicle battery stops charging from the al- ternator. You should immediately drive to the nearest specialised workshop.

312

Checking and refilling levels

You should avoid using electrical equipment that is not absolutely necessary because this will drain the battery.

Energy management Optimisation of the starting capacity

The power management controls the distribu- tion of electrical energy and thus helps to en- sure that there is always enough power availa- ble to start the engine. If a vehicle with a conventional electrical sys- tem is left parked for a long time, the battery will gradually lose its charge because certain electrical devices, such as the electronic gear- box lock continues to draw current even when the ignition is off. In some cases there may not be enough power available to start the engine. Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent power management system to control the dis- tribution of electrical energy. This significantly improves reliability when starting the engine, and also prolongs the useful life of the battery. The main functions incorporated in the power management system are battery diagnosis, residual current management and a dy- namic power management system.

Battery diagnosis

The battery diagnosis function constantly reg- isters the condition of the battery. Sensors de- tect the battery voltage, battery current and battery temperature. This enables the system to calculate the current power level and charge condition of the battery.

Residual current management

The residual current management reduces power consumption while the vehicle is parked. It controls the supply of power to the various electrical devices while the ignition is switched off. The system takes the battery diagnosis data into consideration. Depending on the power level of the battery, switch off the individual electrical devices one after the other to prevent the battery from los- ing too much charge and to ensure that the engine can be started reliably.

Dynamic power management

While the vehicle is moving, this function distrib- utes the available power to the various elec- trical devices and systems according to their requirements. The power management ensures that on-board systems do not consume more electrical power than the alternator can sup- ply, and thus maintains the maximum possible battery power level.

Note Neither is the power management system able to overcome the given physical limits. Please remember that the power and useful life of the battery are limited. When there is a risk that the vehicle will not start, the alternator power failure or low bat- tery charge level warning lamp will be shown

 page 311.

Flat battery Starting ability has first priority. Short trips, city traffic and low temperatures all place a heavy load on the battery. In these conditions a large amount of power is consumed, but only a small amount is supplied. The situation is also critical if electrical devices are in use when the engine is not running. In this case power is consumed when none is being generated. In these situations you will be aware that the power management system is intervening to control the distribution of electrical power.

When the vehicle is parked for long periods

If you do not drive your vehicle for a period of several days or weeks, the power manage- ment will gradually shut off the electrical devi- ces one by one or reduce the amount of cur- rent they are using. This limits the amount of power consumed and helps to ensure reliable

Checking and refilling levels

313

Ener y management

starting even after a long period. Some conven- ience functions, such as remote vehicle open- ing, may not be available under certain circum- stances. These functions will be restored when you switch on the ignition and start the engine.

With the engine switched off

For example, if you listen to the sound system with the engine switched off the battery will run down. If the energy consumption means there is a risk that the engine will not start, a text will be dis- played in vehicles with a driver information sys- tem. This driver indicator tells you that you must start the engine so that the battery can recharge.

When the engine is running

Although the alternator generates electrical power, the battery can still become discharged while the vehicle is being driven. This can occur when a lot of power is being consumed but only a small amount supplied, especially if the bat- tery is not fully charged initially. To restore the necessary energy balance, the system will then temporarily shut off the elec- trical devices that are using a lot of power, or reduce the current they are consuming. Heat- ing systems in particular use a large amount of electrical power. If you notice, for instance, that the seat heating or the rear window heater is not working, they may have been temporarily

switched off or regulated to a lower heat out- put. These systems will be available again as soon as sufficient electrical power is available. You may also notice that the engine runs at a slightly faster idling speed when necessary. This is quite normal, and no cause for concern. The increased idling speed allows the alterna- tor to meet the greater power requirement and charge the battery at the same time.

314

Wheels and tyres

P

Wheels and tyres Important information about wheels and tyres

General notes When driving with new tyres, be especially careful during the first 600 km (300 miles). If you have to drive over a kerb or similar ob- stacle, drive very slowly and as near as possi- ble at a right angle to the obstacle. Check from time to time if the tyres are damaged (punctures, cuts, cracks or dents). Remove any foreign objects embedded in the treads. Damaged wheels and tyres must be replaced immediately. Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres. Replace any missing valve caps as soon as possible. Mark the wheels before taking them off so that they rotate in the same direction when put back. When removed, the wheels or tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark place.

Low profile tyres

Low profile tyres have a wider tread, a larger wheel diameter and a lower sidewall height. Therefore, its driving behaviour is more agile.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quickly than standard tyres, for instance due to strong knocks, potholes, manhole covers and kerbs. Correct tyre pressure is very important  page 316. To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drive with special care when driving on roads in poor condition. Visually check your wheels every 3000 km. If the tyres or rims have received a heavy im- pact or have been damaged, have a special- ised workshop check whether or not it is neces- sary to change the tyre. Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quickly than standard tyres.

Concealed damage

Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily visible. If you notice unusual vibration or the car pulling to one side, this may indicate that one of the tyres is damaged. Reduce speed im- mediately if there is any reason to suspect that damage may have occurred. Inspect the tyres for damage. If no external damage is visible, drive slowly and carefully to the nearest speci- alised workshop and have the car inspected.

Foreign objects inserted in the tyre Do not remove foreign bodies if they have penetrated through the tyre wall! If the vehicle comes with a tyre mobility sys- tem, where necessary seal the damaged tyre as shown in section  page 327. Use a spe- cialised workshop for repair or replacement. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this. The sealant at the lower part of the tyre tread wraps around the foreign body and provision- ally seals the tyre.

Tyres with directional tread pattern

An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di- rection of rotation on single drive tyres. Always note the direction of rotation indicated when mounting the wheel. This makes sure that opti- mal use is made of tyre properties in terms of aquaplaning, grip, excessive noise and wear.

Subsequent fitting of accessories

If you wish to change or fit wheels, rims or wheel trims, we recommend that you consult with a SEAT Official Service for advice regard- ing current techniques.

Speed symbols

The speed rating indicates the maximum speed permitted for the tyres.

max. 150 km/h (93 mph)

Wheels and tyres

315

Important information bout wheels and tyres

1) COC = certificate of conformity.

Q R S T U H V Z W Y

max. 160 km/h (99 mph) max. 170 km/h (106 mph) max. 180 km/h (112 mph) max. 190 km/h (118 mph) max. 200 km/h (124 mph) max. 210 km/h (130 mph) max. 240 km/h (149 mph) max. 240 km/h (149 mph) max. 270 km/h (168 mph) max. 300 km/h (186 mph)

WARNING New tyres do not have maximum grip dur- ing the first 600 km. Drive particularly care- fully to avoid possible accidents. Never drive with damaged tyres. This may cause an accident. If you notice unusual vibrations or if the ve- hicle pulls to one side when driving, stop the vehicle immediately and check the tyres. Never use old tyres or those with an un- known history of use.

New wheels and tyres It is best to have all wheels and tyres serviced by a specialised workshop. There they have the required knowledge, the special tools and the corresponding spare parts. Even winter tyres lose their grip on ice. If you have installed new tyres, drive the first 600 km carefully and at a moderate speed. All four wheels must be fitted with tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and, if possible, tread pattern. When changing tyres, do not change just one; change at least two on the same axle. If you want to equip your vehicle with a com- bination tyres and rims that are different to those fitted in the factory, inform your special- ised workshop before purchasing them   The sizes of the rims and tyres approved for your vehicle are listed in the vehicle documen- tation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or COC document1)). The vehicle documentation varies depending on the country of residence. If the type of spare wheel is different form the normal wheels e.g. in the case of winter tyres or particularly wide tyres the spare wheel should only be used temporarily in the event of a puncture, and the vehicle should be driven with care. Refit the normal road wheel as soon as possible.

In vehicles with four-wheel drive, the 4 wheels must be fitted with tyres of the same brand, type and tread so that the traction system is not damaged by a difference in the number of turns of the wheels. Therefore, in the event of a puncture, only a spare wheel with the same perimeter as normal tyres should be used.

Manufacturing date

The manufacturing date is also indicated on the tyre sidewall (or on the inside face of the wheel): DOT ... 2220 ...

it means, for example, that the tyre was manu- factured in the 22nd week of 2020.

WARNING Use only combinations of tyres and rims, as well as suitable wheel nuts, approved by SEAT. Otherwise the vehicle may be dam- aged, causing an accident. For technical reasons it is not possible to use wheels of other vehicles; in some ca- ses not even wheels from the same vehicle model should be used. Always ensure that the tyres you have chosen have adequate clearance. When se- lecting replacement tyres, do not rely en- tirely on the nominal tyre size marked on the tyre, since the nominal tyre size can differ significantly depending on the manufacturer.

316

Wheels and tyres

Lack of clearance can damage the tyres or the vehicle and, as a result, endanger road safety. Accident hazard! Only use tyres that are over 6 years old in an emergency, and drive with due care. The fitting of tyres with run-flat properties is not permitted on your vehicle! Prohibited use can cause accidents or can damage your vehicle. If decorative hubcaps are subsequently fit- ted, make sure that they allow enough air in to cool the braking system. Accident hazard! Models with aerodynamic wheel rims and/or with bolt-on plastic elements (more closed design) increase the likelihood of ice and snow accumulating on the inside. This should be taken into account, depending on the driving situations, as snow or ice accu- mulated in the wheels can cause vibration in the vehicle when it drives at over 40 km/h. It is advisable to remove ice and snow from the inside of the wheels using hot water. If you drive on dirt or gravel tracks, the likelihood of stones becoming trapped inside wheel rims with plastic elements increases when driving at high speed or in a sporty manner. If you see that there are stones trap- ped between the aluminium wheel rim and the insert, you can attempt to remove them using pressurised water.

For the sake of the environment Old tyres must be disposed of according to the laws in the country concerned.

Note A SEAT Service Centre should be consul- ted to find out whether wheels or tyres of different sizes to those originally fitted by SEAT can be fitted, and to find out about the combinations allowed between the front axle (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2). Never mount used tyres if you are not sure of their previous history.

Note When 245/40 R19 or 245/35 R20 tyres are fitted, the corresponding deflector must also be installed.

Tyre life

Fig. 211  Location of the tyre pressure sticker.

Correct inflation pressures and sensible driving habits will increase the useful life of your tyres. Check tyre pressure at least once a month, and also prior to any long trip. The tyre pressure should only be checked when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce the pressure of warm tyres. Adjust tyre pressure to the load being carried by the vehicle  Fig. 211. In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator, save the modified tyre pressure  page 326.

Wheels and tyres

317

Important information bout wheels and tyres

Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration. Inspect the tyres for irregular wear from time to time.

Tyre pressure

The values of the tyre pressure are shown on the sticker label located on the read frame of the front left door  Fig. 211. Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly re- duces the useful life of the tyres and adversely affects vehicle performance and ride. Correct inflation pressures are very important, espe- cially at high speeds. The tyre pressure must be adjusted according to the load the vehicle is carrying. If the vehicle is going to be fully loaded, increase the tyre pressure to the maximum load value shown on the sticker label  Fig. 211. Do not forget the spare wheel when checking the tyre pressures: Keep this spare wheel infla- ted to the highest pressure required for the road wheels. In the case of a minimised temporary spare wheel (125/70 R16 or 125/70 R18) inflate to a pressure of 4.2 bar as indicated on the tyre pressure label  Fig. 211.

Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure can be adjusted to medium load to improve driv- ing comfort (tyre pressure  Fig. 211). When driving with comfort tyre pressure fuel consumption may increase slightly.

Driving style

Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking (squealing tyres) all increase tyre wear.

Wheel balance

The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, certain circumstances may lead to imbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi- brations in the steering wheel. Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as they otherwise cause excessive wear on steer- ing, suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted or if a tyre is repaired.

Incorrect wheel alignment

Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex- cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the vehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear, you should check wheel alignment at a SEAT Offi- cial Service.

WARNING Unsuitable handling of the wheels and tyres may lead to sudden tyre pressure losses, to tread separation or even to a blow-out. The driver is responsible for ensuring that all of the vehicle tyres are correctly inflated to the right pressure. The recommended tyre pressure is indicated on the label  Fig. 211.

Check tyre pressures regularly and ensure they are maintained at the pressures indica- ted. Tyre pressure that is too low could cause overheating, resulting in tread detachment or even burst tyres. Tyre pressure should be that indicated on the label when the tyres are cold at all times  Fig. 211. Regularly check the cold inflation pressure of the tyres. If necessary, change the tyre pressure of the vehicle tyres while they are cold. Regularly check your tyres for damage and wear. Never exceed the maximum permitted speed or loads specified for the type of tyre fitted on your vehicle.

For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con- sumption.

318

Wheels and tyres

1) Follow the regulations of the country you are driving in.

Tread wear indicators

Fig. 212  Tyre profile: tread wear indicators.

Fig. 213  Interchanging tyres.

Wear indicators around 1.6 mm high can be found on the base of the original tyre treads, ordered at regular intervals and running across the tread  Fig. 212. The letters TWI or trian- gles on the sidewall of the tyre mark the posi- tion of the wear indicators.

The minimum permitted profile depth 1) have been reached when the tyres have worn down to the wear indicators. Replace the tyres with new ones   .

Changing wheels around

In order to wear the wheels in a uniform manner, it is recommended to interchange them regu- larly according to the diagram  Fig. 213. The useful life of all the tyres will then be about the same time.

WARNING The tyres must be replaced at the latest when the tread is worn down to the tread wear indicators. Failure to follow this instruc- tion could result in an accident. Particularly in difficult driving conditions such as wet or icy roads. It is important that the tyre tread be as deep as possible and be approximately the same on the tyres of both the front and the rear axles. The scant driving safety due to insufficient tread depth is particularly evident in vehicle handling, when there is a risk of aquaplan- ing in deep puddles of water and when driv- ing through corners, and braking is also ad- versely affected. The speed has to be adapted accordingly, otherwise there is a risk of losing control over the vehicle.

Wheel nuts The wheel bolts and rims have been designed to be part of an assembly. When installing different wheels (for instance alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it is important to use the correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt heads. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the brake system functions correctly. The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easily. A special adapter is required to turn the anti- theft wheel bolts  page 323.

WARNING Wheel nuts should never be greased or oiled. Use only wheel bolts which belong to the wheel. If the prescribed torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst the vehi- cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tight- ening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged.

NOTICE See  page 325 to find out the recommen- ded tightening torque for wheel nuts for steel and alloy rims.

Wheels and tyres

319

Important information bout wheels and tyres

1) COC = certificate of conformity.

Winter tyres Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels. Only use winter tyres that are approved for your vehicle. Please note that the maximum permissible speed for winter tyres may be lower than for summer tyres. Also note that winter tyres are no longer ef- fective when the tread is worn down. After fitting the wheels you must always check the tyre pressures. When doing so, take into account the correct tyre pressures lis- ted on the rear of the front left door frame  page 316. In winter road conditions winter tyres will con- siderably improve vehicle handling. The design of summer tyres (width, rubber compound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice and snow. This applies particularly to vehicles equipped with wide section tyres or with high speed tyres (code letters H, V or Y on the sidewall). Only use winter tyres of the correct type ap- proved for your vehicle. The sizes of these tyres are specified in the vehicle's documents (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or COC1)). The ve- hicle documentation varies depending on the country of residence. Winter tyres lose a great deal of their properties when the tread is worn down to a depth of 4 mm.

The performance of winter tyres is also severely impaired by ageing, even if the tread is still much deeper than 4 mm. A code letter indicating the speed limit is stam- ped on all winter tyres  page 314. In the infotainment system's Vehicle settings menu, a speed warning can be set in the Tyres menu. Vehicles capable of exceeding these speeds must have an appropriate sticker attached so that it is visible to the driver. Suitable stickers are available from the SEAT Official Service and specialised workshop. Please note the regula- tions to this effect in your country. All-weather tyres can also be used instead of winter tyres.

Using winter tyres with V-rating

Please note that the generally applicable 240 km/h (149 mph) speed for winter tyres with the letter V is subject to technical restric- tions; the maximum permissible speed for your vehicle may be significantly lower. The maximum speed limit for these tyres depends directly on the maximum axle weights for your car and on the listed weight rating of the tyres being used. It is best to contact a SEAT Official Service to check the maximum speed which is permissible for the V-rated tyres fitted on your car on the basis of this information.

WARNING Exceeding the maximum speed permitted for the winter tyres fitted on your car can cause tyre failure, resulting in a loss of control of the vehicle risk of accident.

For the sake of the environment When winter is over, change back to summer tyres at an appropriate moment. In tempera- tures above +7C (+45F), performance will be improved if summer tyres are used. Rolling noise, wear and energy consumption will all be reduced.

Snow chains Snow chains are only permitted on the front wheels, even on 4-wheel drive vehicles. Check that they are correctly seated after driving for a few yards; correct the position if necessary, in accordance with the manufactur- er's fitting instructions. Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph). If there is a danger of being trapped despite having fitted the chains, it is best to disable the traction control (TCS) in the ESC  page 152.

Snow chains will improve braking ability as well as traction in winter conditions.

320

Wheels and tyres

For technical reasons, the use of snow chains is only permitted on the following rim and tyre combinations:

Tyres Wheel rim Chains

215/60 R16 6Jx16 VAS 43 Max. link 15 mm215/55 R17 7Jx17 VAS 45

215/50 R18 7Jx18 VAS 45

225/55 R17 7Jx17 VAS 45

Max. link 9 mm225/50 R18 7Jx18 VAS 45

225/45 R19 8Jx19 VAS 45

Other dimensions do not allow chains

Remove any central wheel trims before fitting snow chains.

WARNING The use of unsuitable or incorrectly fitted chains could lead to serious accidents and damage. Always the appropriate snow chains. Observe the fitting instructions provided by the snow chain manufacturer. Never exceed the maximum permitted speeds when driving with snow chains.

NOTICE Remove the snow chains to drive on roads without snow. Otherwise they will impair ve- hicle handling, damage the tyres and wear out very quickly. Wheel rims may be damaged or scratched if the chains come into direct contact with them. SEAT recommends the use of covered snow chains.

Changing a wheel Introduction

Only change a wheel yourself if you are famil- iar with the necessary operations and safety measures, if you have the necessary tools and if the vehicle is parked safely.

Preliminary actions Stop the vehicle on a level surface and in a safe place, as far away from road traffic as possible. Apply the electronic parking brake. Switch on the hazard warning lights. Manual transmission: engage 1st gear. Automatic transmission: switch on the parking lock P. If towing a trailer, unhitch the trailer from your vehicle.

Lay out the on-board tools  page 284 and the wheel to be changed. Follow the legal provisions of each country (reflective vest, warning triangles, light beacon, etc.). Get all occupants out of the vehicle and keep them out of the danger zone (e.g. behind the guard rail).

WARNING Always observe the above steps and pro- tect yourself and other road users. If you change the wheel on a slope, block the wheel on the opposite side of the car with a stone or similar to prevent the vehicle from moving.

Wheels and tyres

321

Changing a wh el

Location and use of the temporary spare wheel

Fig. 214  In the luggage compartment: raised load floor.

Fig. 215  In the boot: remove the subwoofer.

The temporary spare wheel is stored under the floor panel in the luggage compartment and is attached by a thumbnut. The temporary spare wheel has been designed to be used for short periods of time. Have the tyres checked and replaced as soon as possi- ble at a SEAT Official Service or at a special- ised workshop. The spare wheel must not be switched for a spare wheel from another vehicle.

Removing the temporary spare wheel Lift and hold up the floor panel to remove the temporary spare wheel  page 259. Turn the thumb wheel anticlockwise  Fig. 214. Take out the temporary spare wheel.

Getting the spare wheel out of vehicles fit- ted with the optional sound system (with subwoofer)

To remove the spare wheel, you must first re- move the subwoofer. Vehicles without a variable floor in the lug- gage compartment: pull the floor of the lug- gage compartment (carpet) upwards to get it out. Vehicles with a variable luggage compart- ment floor: lift and secure the floor storage compartment as explained in  page 259.

Disconnect the subwoofers speaker cable  Fig. 215 1 . Turn the securing wheel anti-clockwise  Fig. 215 2 . Remove the subwoofer speaker and the spare wheel. When re-mounting the spare tyre, place the subwoofer on the base of the wheel rim with care. When doing so, the tip of the FRONT arrow on the subwoofer should point forward. Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly rotate the securing wheel clockwise so that the subwoofer system and wheel are firmly in place.

Chains

For technical reasons, snow chains must not be used on the temporary spare wheel. If you have a puncture on one of the front wheels when using snow chains, fit the tempo- rary spare wheel in place of one of the rear wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheel that you have removed and replace the punc- tured front wheel with this wheel.

322

Wheels and tyres

WARNING After fitting the temporary spare wheel, check the tyre pressures as soon as possible. Failure to do so may cause an accident. The tyre pressure is listed on the back of the left front door frame  page 316. Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph) when the temporary spare wheel is fitted on the vehicle: risk of accident! Never travel more than 200 km using a temporary spare wheel. Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering: risk of accident! Never use more than one temporary spare wheel at the same time, risk of accident. No other type of tyre (normal summer or winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact temporary spare wheel rim. If you are driving using the spare wheel, the ACC system could automatically switch off during the journey. Switch off the system when starting off.

Wheel central trim

Fig. 216  Correct positioning of the central wheel trim for steel rims.

The central trims must be removed for access to the wheel bolts.

Removing Attach the wire hook (vehicle tools  page 284) to one of the recesses of the central wheel trim and remove it.

Fitting Fit the central wheel trim onto the rim. The bottom of the S of the SEAT badge should align with the inflation valve  Fig. 216 1 . Press the central trim firmly until it locks in with an audible click.

Note There is also a valve mark on the back of the central wheel trim that indicates the correct alignment.

Wheel bolt caps

Fig. 217  Wheel: wheel bolts with caps.

Removal

Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools  Fig. 186) over the cap until it clicks into place  Fig. 217. Remove the cap with the plastic clip. The caps protect the wheel bolts and should be remounted after changing the tyre. The anti-theft wheel locking bolt has a spe- cial cap. This only fits on anti-theft locking bolts and is not for use with standard wheel bolts.

Wheels and tyres

323

Changing a wh el

Anti-theft wheel nuts

Fig. 218  Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap and adapter.

Loosening the anti-theft wheel bolt Remove the wheel trim or hub cap. Insert the special adapter  Fig. 218 1 (ve- hicle tools  page 284) onto the anti-theft wheel bolt and push it on as far as it will go. Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) onto the adapter as far as it will go. Remove the wheel bolt  page 323.

Note Make a note of the code number of the anti- theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safe place, but not in your vehicle. If you need a new adapter, you can obtain it from the SEAT Offi- cial Service, indicating the code number.

Loosening wheel nuts

Fig. 219  Tyre change: slacken the wheel bolts.

Fig. 220  Tyre change: tyre valve 1 and the correct position for the anti-theft wheel locking bolt 2 or 3 .

Use only the wheel wrench belonging to the car to loosen the wheel bolts. Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn be- fore raising the vehicle with the jack.

If the wheel bolt is very tight, carefully push on the end of the wheel wrench with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and take care not to slip during this operation.

Loosening wheel nuts Fit the box spanner into the bolt as far as it will go  Fig. 219. Hold the wrench at the end and rotate the bolt approximately one turn anticlock- wise   .

Important information about wheel bolts

Factory-fitted rims and wheel bolts are spe- cially matched during construction. Therefore, if different rims are fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the brake system functions correctly. In certain circumstances, you should not even use wheel bolts from vehicles of the same model.

On wheels with integral hubcaps, the anti-theft wheel locking bolt must be screwed in the posi- tions  Fig. 220 2 o 3 , taking as reference the position of the tyre valve 1 . Otherwise it will not be possible to mount the hubcap.

324

Wheels and tyres

WARNING If the wheel bolts are not properly tightened, they could come loose while driving and cause an accident, serious injury and loss of vehicle control. Use only wheel bolts which correspond to the rim in question. Never use different wheel bolts. Wheel bolts and threads should be clean, free of oil and grease, and it should be possi- ble to screw them easily. To loosen and tighten wheel bolts, only use the wheel wrench that came with the car from the factory. The wheel bolts should only be loosened slightly (about one turn) before raising the vehicle with the jack. Risk of accident! Never apply grease or oil to wheel bolts or to the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts have been tightened to the prescribed tor- que, they could come loose while driving. Never loosen the screwed joints of wheel rims with bolted ring trims. If wheel bolts are tightened below the prescribed torque, the bolts and rims could come loose while driving. If tightening torque is too high, the wheel bolts or threads can be damaged.

Raise the vehicle

Fig. 221  Jack position points.

Fig. 222  Crossbar: mounting the jack on the vehicle.

Rest the jack (vehicles tools) on firm ground. If necessary use a large, strong board or similar support. If the surface is slippery (for example tiles) place the jack on a rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slipping   .

Look on the strut for the mark of the jack sup- port point (sunken area) closest to the wheel to be changed  Fig. 221. Turn the jack crank handle, located below the strut support point, to raise it until the tab  1  Fig. 222 is below the housing that is provi- ded. Align the jack so that the tab 1 grips onto the housing provided on the cross member and the mobile base 2 is resting on the ground. The base plate  2 should fall vertically with respect to the support point 1 . Continue turning the jack until the wheel is slightly lifted off the ground.

WARNING The factory-supplied jack is only designed for changing wheels on this model. On no account attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles or other loads. Risk of injury. Make sure the jack remains stable. If the surface is slippery or soft, the jack could slip or sink, respectively, with the consequent risk of causing injuries. Lift the vehicle using only the jack supplied from the factory. Other jacks, even those ap- proved for other SEAT models could slip, with the consequent risk of injury. Place the jack only at the support points provided on the strut and align it. Otherwise, the jack could slip because it does not have sufficient grip on the vehicle: risk of injury!

Wheels and tyres

325

Changing a wh el

You should never place a body limb such as an arm or leg under a raised vehicle that is solely supported by the jack. If you have to work underneath the vehicle, you must use suitable stands additionally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of acci- dent!. Never raise the vehicle if it is tilting to one side or the engine is running. Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised. The vehicle may come loose from the jack due to the engine vibrations.

NOTICE The vehicle must not be raised on the crossbar. Place the jack only at the support points provided on the strut and align it. Oth- erwise, the vehicle may be damaged. Any type of load or weight applied to the external trim/door will (stepped on, fitting the jack, resting heavy objects, etc.) can cause damage to it. SEAT accepts no re- sponsibility for any damages caused by im- proper use of the external trim or body.

Removing and installing a wheel Change the wheel after loosening the wheel bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack. When removing/fitting the wheel, the rim may hit and damage the brake disc. For this reason, please take care and get a second person to assist you.

Taking off the wheel Unscrew the bolts with the wheel wrench and place them on a clean surface. Remove the wheel.

Putting on the spare wheel

Check the direction of rotation of the tyre  page 325. Place the spare wheel or temporary spare wheel into position. Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten them a little with the wheel wrench. Use the appropriate adapter to tighten the anti-theft wheel bolts. Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack. Use the wheel spanner to tighten all of the wheel nuts clockwise. Tighten the bolts in diag- onal pairs (not in a circle). Put the caps, trim or full hubcap back on. The wheel bolts should be clean and turn easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa- ces. These surfaces must be clean before fitting the wheel.

Tightening torque of the wheel nuts

The prescribed tightening torque for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 140 Nm. After changing a wheel, have the tightening torque checked immediately with a torque wrench that is working perfectly.

Before checking tightening torque, have any rusty wheel bolts that are difficult to screw re- placed and clean the wheel hub threads. Never apply grease or oil to wheel bolts or to the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts have been tightened to the prescribed torque, they could come loose while driving.

Tyres with directional tread pattern Tyres with directional tread pattern have been designed to operate best when rotating in only one direction. An arrow on the tyre sidewall in- dicates the direction of rotation on tyres with directional tread. Always observe the indicated direction of rotation in order to guarantee opti- mum grip and help avoid aquaplaning, exces- sive noise and wear. If the tyre is mounted in the opposite direction of rotation, drive with extreme caution, as the tyre is no longer being used correctly. This is of particular importance when the road surface is wet. Change the tyre as soon as possible or remount it with the correct direction of rotation.

Works after changing a wheel Replace the hub caps or wheel bolt caps (depending on equipment). Return all tools to their proper storing loca- tion.

326

Wheels and tyres

If the replaced wheel does not fit in the spare wheel housing, store it safely in the luggage compartment  page 257. Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun- ted tyre as soon as possible. In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indica- tor, adjust the pressure and store it in memory  page 326. Have the tightening torque of the wheel nuts checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench  page 325. Meanwhile, drive care- fully. Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as pos- sible.

Tyre pressure monitor sys- tem

Tyre pressure monitor indicator

Fig. 223  Instrument panel: warning of loss of tyre pressure.

The tyre pressure monitoring system compares the individual speeds of each wheel and thus the dynamic radius with the help of the ABS sensors. If the rolling circumference of one or more wheels has changed, the tyre pressure monitor- ing indicator will indicate this on the instrument panel through a warning lamp and a warning to the driver  Fig. 223. When only one specific tyre is affected, its position within the vehicle will be indicated. Loss of pressure: Check left tyre

pressure!

Wheel tread change

The wheel diameter changes when: Tyre pressure is changed manually. Tyre pressure is insufficient. The tyre structure is damaged. The vehicle is unbalanced because of a load. The wheels on an axle are subject to a heav- ier load (e.g. with a heavy load). The vehicle is fitted with snow chains. The temporary spare wheel is fitted. The wheel on one axle is changed. There may be a delay in the reaction of the tyre pressure monitoring indicator or it may not indicate anything under certain circumstances (e.g. sporty driving, snow-covered or unpaved roads, or when driving with snow chains).

Calibrate the tyre pressure monitoring indi- cator

After changing the tyre pressure or replacing one or more wheels, the tyre pressure moni- toring indicator must be recalibrated. Do the same, for example, when the front and rear wheels are swapped. Switch the ignition on. Save the new inflation pressure in the Info- tainment system: function button > Vehi- cle status > Tyres; OR: > External settings > Tyres  page 34.

Wheels and tyres

327

Tyre repair

When driving, the system self-calibrates the tyre pressure provided by the driver and the wheels fitted. After a long journey with varied speeds the programmed values are collected and monitored. With the wheels under very heavy loads, the tyre pressure must be increased to the total recommended tyre pressure before the calibra- tion  Fig. 223.

WARNING When the tyres are inflated at different pres- sures or at a pressure that is too low then a tyre may be damaged resulting in a loss of control of the vehicle and a serious or fatal accident. If the lamp lights up, reduce speed im- mediately and avoid any sudden turning or braking manoeuvres. Stop when possible, and check the tyre pressure and status. The tyre pressure monitoring system can only operate correctly if all of the tyres are inflated to the correct pressure when cold. If a tyre has not been punctured and it does not have to be changed immediately, drive to the nearest specialised workshop at a mod- erate speed and have the tyre checked and inflated to the correct pressure.

Note Driving for the first time with new tyres at a high speed can cause them to slightly ex- pand, which could then produce an air pres- sure warning. If excessively low tyre pressure is detected with the ignition on, an audible warning will sound. In the event that there is a fault in the system, an audible warning will sound. Driving on unpaved roads for a long pe- riod of time, or sporty driving, may tempora- rily deactivate the system. The control lamp shows a fault, but disappears when road conditions or the driving style change. Do not only rely on the tyre pressure moni- toring system. Regularly check your tyres to ensure that the tyre pressure is correct and that the tyres are not damaged due to punc- ture, cuts, tears and impacts/dents. Remove objects from the tyres only when they have not pierced the tyres. The tyre pressure monitoring indicator does not function when there is a fault in the ESC or ABS  page 150.

Troubleshooting

Low tyre pressure

The control lamp switches on yellow.

The inflation pressure of one or more wheels is much lower than the value set by the driver, or the tyre has structural damage. In addition, a audible warning sounds and a text message is displayed on the instrument panel screen. Stop the vehicle! Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Check all tyres and pressures. Replace any damaged tyres.

Fault in the tyre pressure loss indicator

The control lamp flashes for approximately 1 minute and then lights up permanently in yel- low. If the tyre is inflated correctly, switch the igni- tion off and on again. Re-calibrate the tyre pressure monitoring sys- tem  page 326 If the fault continues, go to a specialised workshop.

Tyre repair TMS (Tyre Mobility System) puncture repair kit

The puncture repair kit (Tyre Mobility System) will reliably seal punctures caused by the pen- etration of a foreign body of up to about 4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign objects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.

328

Wheels and tyres

After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre, you must again check the tyre pressure about 10 minutes after starting the engine. You should only use the tyre mobility set if the vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are famil- iar with the procedure and you have the nec- essary tyre mobility set. Otherwise, you should seek professional assistance.

Do not use the tyre sealant in the following cases: If the wheel rim has been damaged. In outside temperatures below -20C (-4F). In the event of cuts or perforations in the tyre greater than 4 mm. If you have been driving with very low pres- sure or a completely flat tyre. If the sealant bottle has passed its use by date.

WARNING Using the puncture repair kit can be danger- ous, particularly when filling the tyre on the roadside. To reduce the risk of serious injury, consider the following: Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Park it at a safe distance from surrounding traffic to fill the tyre. Ensure the ground on which you park is flat and solid.

All passengers and particularly children must keep a safe distance from the work area. Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users. Always stop the engine, apply the elec- tronic parking brake and put it in gear if fitted with a manual gearbox, or press the parking lock button P if fitted with an automatic gear box, to reduce the risk of involuntary move- ment of the vehicle . Use the tyre mobility system only if you are familiar with the necessary procedures. Otherwise, you should seek professional as- sistance. The tyre mobility set is intended for tempo- rary emergency use only until you can reach the nearest specialised workshop. Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre mo- bility set as soon as possible. The sealant is a health hazard and must be cleaned immediately if it comes into contact with the skin. Always keep the tyre mobility set out of the reach of small children.

WARNING A tyre filled with sealant does not have the same performance properties as a conven- tional tyre. Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph). Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering. Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check the tyre.

For the sake of the environment Dispose of used or expired sealant observing any legal requirements.

Note A new bottle of sealant can be purchased at SEAT dealerships.

Note Take into account the separate instruction manual provided by the tyre mobility system manufacturer.

Wheels and tyres

329

Tyre repair

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

Anti-puncture kit contents

Fig. 224  Standard display: contents of the anti-puncture kit.

The anti-puncture kit is located underneath the floor covering in the luggage compartment. In- cludes the following components  Fig. 224:

Valve insert remover A sticker to be adhered to the instrument cluster, within the driver's visual field, to re- mind that the maximum advisable speed max. 80 km/h or max. 50 mph Filler tube with cap Air compressor (depending on the version, the model may vary). ON/OFF switch Air bleed screw (it can also be integrated in the inflator tube).

Warning provided by tyre pressure monitor- ing system (it can also be integrated in the inflator tube). Tube for inflating tyres 12 volt connector Bottle of sealant Spare tyre valve

The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at the lower end for a valve insert. The valve insert can only be screwed or unscrewed in this way. This also applies to its replacement part 11 .

Sealing and inflating a tyre

Sealing the tyre Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use the device  Fig. 224 1 to remove the valve cap. Place it on a clean surface. Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously  Fig. 224 10 . Screw the tyre inflation hose  Fig. 224 3 into the tyre sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will break automatically. Remove the filler cap  Fig. 224 3 and screw the open end of the tube into the tyre valve. With the bottle upside down, empty all of the contents into the tyre.

Remove the bottle from the valve. Replace the howitzer with the device  Fig. 224 1 onto the tyre valve.

Inflating the tyre Screw the tyre inflation tube of the compres- sor  Fig. 224 8 on the tyre valve. Check that the air evacuation screw is closed  Fig. 224 6 . Start the engine and leave it running. Attach the connector  Fig. 224 9 to the vehicles 12 volt power outlet  page 210. Switch on the air compressor with ON/OFF switch  Fig. 224 5 . Keep the air compressor running until it rea- ches a pressure of 2.0-2.5 bar (29-36 psi/ 200-250 kPa). A maximum of 8 minutes. Disconnect the air compressor. If it does not reach the pressure indicated, unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve. Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is distributed throughout the tyre. Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the valve. Repeat the inflation process. If it still does not come up to pressure, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop and seek as- sistance from authorised personnel. Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew the tyre inflation tube from the tyre valve.

330

Wheels and tyres

When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and 2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). Attach the sticker  Fig. 224 2 to the instru- ment panel display, within the driver's field of vision. Check the pressure again after 10 minutes  page 330.

WARNING When inflating the wheel, the air compressor and the inflator tube may become hot. Protect hands and skin from hot parts. Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube or hot air compressor on flammable material. Allow them to cool before storing the de- vice. If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con- tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.

NOTICE Switch off the air compressor after a maxi- mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid over- heating! Before switching on the air com- pressor again, let it cool for several minutes.

Check after 10 minutes of driving

Screw in the inflator tube  Fig. 224 8 again and check the pressure on the gauge 7 .

1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower: Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be sealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set. You should obtain professional assistance   .

1.4 bar (20 psi/140 kPa) and higher: Set the tyre pressure to the correct value again. Carefully resume your journey until you reach the nearest specialised workshop without ex- ceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). Have the damaged tyre replaced.

WARNING Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous and can cause accidents and serious injury. Do not continue driving if the tyre pressure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower. Seek specialist assistance.

Maintenance

331

Service

Maintenance Service

Service work and the Digital Mainte- nance Plan

Log of services performed (Digital Mainte- nance Plan)

The SEAT dealership or a specialised workshop records Service receipts in a central system. Thanks to this comprehensive documentation of the service history, it is possible to reproduce the services performed any time. SEAT recom- mends requesting a Service receipt after every service carried out containing all the services carried out on the system. Whenever there is a new service the receipt is replaced with a current one. The Digital Maintenance Plan is not availa- ble in some markets. In this case, your SEAT dealer will inform you about the current documentation of the work.

Service works

In the Digital Maintenance Plan, your SEAT au- thorised service or specialised workshop docu- ments the following information:

When each one of the services was carried out. Whether a specific repair has been sugges- ted, e.g. changing the brake pads in the near future. If you have expressed a special request for the maintenance. Your Service Advisor will write the work order. The components or fluids that were changed. The date of the next service. The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid until the next inspection. This information is documented in all checks performed. The type and the volume of the service may vary from one vehicle to another. A specialised workshop will be able to provide specific infor- mation on the jobs for your vehicle.

WARNING If the services are insufficient or not per- formed and if the service intervals are not observed, the vehicle may be immobilised in traffic cause an accident and severe injuries. Make sure that any repairs are carried out by a SEAT authorised service or specialised workshop.

NOTICE SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage to the vehicle due to insufficient work or of lack of availability of spare parts.

Note Regular services on the vehicle not only maintain its value, but also its correct opera- tion and road safety. For this reason, conduct the services in accordance with SEAT guide- lines.

Set Service or Flexible Service Inter- vals

Services are classified as oil change service and inspection. The service interval display on the instrument panel display serves as a re- minder of the next service. Depending on the features, the engine and the conditions of use of the car, either the Fixed service or the Flexible service will be applied for an oil change service..

How to know which type of service needs to his vehicle

Check the tables below:

332

Maintenance

Oil change servicea)

PR No. Type of service Service interval

QI1

Fixed

Every 5000 km or after 1 yearb)

QI2 Every 7500 km or after 1 yearb)

QI3 Every 10000 km or after 1 yearb)

QI4 Every 15000 km or after 1 yearb)

QI6 Flexible According to the service in- terval display.

a) The data are based on normal conditions of use. b) Whatever happens first.

Inspection Servicea)

According to the service interval display. a) The data are based on normal conditions of use.

Particular characteristics of the Flexible Service

Regarding the Flexible Service the oil change service only has to be performed when the ve- hicle needs it. To calculate when you have to carry out this service, take into account the in- dividual conditions of use and personal driving

style. A major component of the flexible service the use of LongLife oil instead of conventional engine oil. Bear in mind the information about the specifi- cations of the engine oil according to the VW standard  page 305. If you do not want to the flexible service you can select the fixed service. However, a fixed service may affect service costs. The Service Advisor will gladly advise you.

At SEAT, the dates of the services are indicated by the service intervals display: on the instrument panel  page 28 in the infotainment system: menu > Set- tings > Service; OR > Vehicle sta- tus > Service  page 34. The service interval display gives information for service dates that involve an engine oil change or an inspection. When the time for the corresponding service comes, additional work required, such as the change of brake fluid and the spark plugs, can be carried out.

Information about the terms of use The service intervals and groups are usually based on normal conditions of use. If, on the other hand, the vehicle is under ad- verse conditions of use, some of the work must be carried out before the next service pe- riod or even between service intervals.

Conditions of use adverse include: The use of fuel with a high sulphur content. Frequent short trips. Letting the engine idle for a long period of time, as in the case of taxis. Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust. Frequent driving with a trailer (depending on equipment). Using the vehicle mostly in situations with a lot of traffic and stops (e.g. in the city). Using the vehicle mostly in winter.

This applies especially for the following parts (depending on equipment): Dust and pollen filter Air Care allergen filter Air filter Toothed chain Particulate filter Engine oil The Service Advisor of your specialised workshop will gladly inform you about the need of performing service work between nor- mal service intervals, always considering the conditions of use of your vehicle.

Maintenance

333

Additional service offers

WARNING If the services are insufficient or not per- formed and if the service intervals are not observed, the vehicle may be immobilised in traffic and cause accidents and severe inju- ries. Have the services conducted at authorised SEAT services or specialised workshops.

NOTICE SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage to the vehicle due to insufficient work or of lack of availability of spare parts.

Service sets Sets of services include all the maintenance works needed to ensure the safety and the smooth running of the vehicle (depending on the conditions of use and the features of the vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, or oper- ating fluids). Maintenance services are divided into inspec- tion and review services. Consult the details of the jobs required for your vehicle at: Your SEAT authorised service Your specialised workshop

Due to technical reasons (continuous develop- ment of components) the sets of services may vary. Your SEAT authorised service or special- ised workshop is always receiving updates in time.

Additional service offers Approved spare parts

Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con- ceived for their vehicles and approved by SEAT, with a special emphasis on safety. These parts correspond exactly to the manufacturer's re- quirements in terms of design, accuracy of the measurements and materials. The original SEAT Spare Parts have been conceived exclusively for your vehicle. For this reason, we always rec- ommend the use of Original SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety and suitability of parts from other manufacturers.

Approved spare parts Approved spare parts, following the manufac- turer's requirements, are an additional service to you, offering the possibility of replacing com- plete sets, such as: light engine, gearboxes, heads, control units, electrical components, etc. These parts are, approved parts, and are the same as the factory parts, which are also ap- proved spare parts.

Original accessories We recommend you only use SEAT Original Ac- cessories and SEAT approved accessories for your vehicle. The reliability, safety and suitabil- ity of these accessories have been inspected specifically for this type of vehicle. SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety and suitability of parts from other manufacturers.

Service Mobility As of the moment you purchase your SEAT ve- hicle you will be able to enjoy the benefits and coverage of Service Mobility. For the first two years after the purchase, your new SEAT vehicle is automatically covered by Service Mobility at no additional cost. If you wish to enjoy this service after this period, you can extend SEAT Service Mobility as long as you carry out the recommended Inspection and Maintenance Services at a SEAT Author- ised Service. If your SEAT vehicle is immobilised due to a fault or an accident, our assistance services will help you keep moving. Take into account that the SEAT Mobility Serv- ice differs depending on the country in which the vehicle was purchased. For further informa- tion ask your SEAT dealership or the SEAT web- site in your country.

334

Maintenance

Vehicle upkeep and clean- ing

Basic observations Regular and careful care helps to maintain the value of your vehicle. In addition, it may be- come a prerequisite to demand the warranty in the event of corrosion damage and deficien- cies in the paint coat of the bodywork. Specialised workshops have the necessary care products. Please follow the instructions for application on the packaging.

WARNING Cleaning products and other materials used for car care can be damaging to your health if misused. Always keep care products in a safe place, out of the reach of children. Danger of poi- soning!

For the sake of the environment When purchasing car care products, chose products that are compatible with the envi- ronment. The waste from car-care products should not be disposed of with ordinary household waste.

Washing the vehicle The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g. re- mains of insects, bird excrements, tree resin or anti frost salt adhered to your vehicle, the more damage it can cause to the surface. High tem- peratures, for instance strong sunlight, further intensify the damage. Before washing the car, soften the dirt using plenty of water. To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, bird droppings or tree resin, use a lot of water and a microfibre cloth. Have the underside of the vehicle washed after the end of the anti frost salts in winter.

High pressure cleaning equipment

When washing the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, always follow the operating instruc- tions for the equipment. This applies particu- larly to the operating pressure and the distance between the spraying water. Do not aim the jet directly towards the side windows, doors, sunroof or covers; the same applies for the tyres, rubber hoses, damping material, sensors or camera lenses. Keep a distance of at least 40 cm. Do not remove snow and ice with a high-pres- sure cleaner. Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out in a direct stream or one that has a rotating jet for forcing off dirt.

The water temperature must not exceed 60C.

Automatic car washes

Spray the vehicle before starting the car wash. Make sure that the windows and sunroof are closed and the wipers are deactivated. Bear in mind the instructions of the car wash tunnel operator, especially if your vehicle has detach- able parts. Use of car washes without brushes if possible.

Washing by hand

Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a soft sponge or with a brush. Only use cleaning products that do not contain solvents.

Polishing

Polishing is only necessary when the vehicle's paintwork has lost its gloss and cannot be re- stored with care products. Do not polish matt painted surfaces! If the paintwork is polished, the surface will be irrep- arably damaged.

Washing vehicles with a matte paint by hand

To prevent damage to the vehicle when wash- ing it, first remove the thicker dust and dirt. To remove traces of insects, grease and finger- prints, it is best to use a special cleaner for matte paint.

Maintenance

335

Vehicle upkeep d cleaning

Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. To avoid damaging the surface of the paint, do not apply too much pressure. Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it with a neutral cleaning product and a soft microfibre cloth. Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of water and then leave it to dry. Remove traces of water with a leather cloth.

WARNING Only wash the vehicle with the ignition switched off or according to the specifica- tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Acci- dent hazard! When cleaning the underbody or the inside of the wheel arches, protect yourself from sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk of cut! After cleaning the brakes could act more slowly due to moisture or, in winter, the ice on the brake discs and pads. Accident hazard! In this case the brakes should be dried by pressing the brake pedal several times.

WARNING Incorrect use of high-pressure cleaning equipment can cause damage. This can lead to accidents and serious injuries. Never direct the jet of the high-pressure cleaning equipment directly at the orange high-voltage cables, the high-voltage sys- tem components or the 12-volt on-board net- work.

NOTICE Before washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash, please make sure to retract the exterior mirrors to prevent them from being damaged. The electric folding exterior mir- rors should only be folded/unfolded electri- cally! Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Risk of damaging the paint job! Do not use sponges, abrasive household sponges or similar to clean insect remains. Risk of damaging the surface! Vehicle parts with matte paint: Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of damaging the surface! Never select washing programmes that include the use of wax. This could damage the appearance of matte paint. Do not put stickers or magnets on parts with matte paint, as removing them may damage the paint.

For the sake of the environment The car should only be washed in special wash bays. These places are prepared to prevent oily water from getting into the pub- lic drains.

Cleaning and maintenance instruc- tions

The cleaning and maintenance of individual components of the vehicle can be checked in the following tables. The contents should be understood merely as a recommendation. Go to your specialised workshop if you have spe- cial questions or parts that are not listed. Take he general considerations into account   in Take special care with... on page 339.

Cleaning the exterior

Windscreen wipers

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with wipers

336

Maintenance

Headlights / Tail lights

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap solution a)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Sensors / Camera lenses

Problem Solution

Dirt

Sensors: soft cloth with a solvent-free cleaning product Camera lenses: soft cloth with an alcohol-free cleaning product

Snow/ice Hand brush/Anti frost spray with no solvents

Wheels

Problem Solution

Antifreeze salt Water

Brake abrasion dust Acid-free special cleaning product

End exhausts

Problem Solution

Antifreeze salt

Water, if a steel clean- ing product is required, or a non-abrasive and non- corrosive cleaning product

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solution a), if a steel cleaning product is required

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Paint

Problem Solution

Paint flaws

Check the paint's colour code in an authorised service and restore with a touch-up pencil

Spilled fuel Immediately rinse with wa- ter

Environmental rust tank

Apply rust remover and then apply hard wax. Go you your specialised work- shop if you have any quer- ies

Problem Solution

Corrosion Have your specialised workshop take care of this

The water does not create droplets on the clean paint

Maintain with hard wax (at least 2 times a year)

No shine de- spite sober mainte- nance/paint

Treat with suitable wax and apply paint preservative afterwards if the wax used does not contain preser- vative ingredients

Tanks, e.g. insect remains, bird drop- pings, tree sap, road salt

Immediately soften with water and remove with a microfibre cloth

Fat-based dirt, e.g. cosmetic products or sunscreen

Remove immediately with a neutral soap solution a)

and a soft cloth a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean the same way as painted parts  page 334

Maintenance

337

Vehicle upkeep d cleaning

Decoration slides

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap solution a)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Interior cleaning

Windows

Problem Solution

Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner and then dry with a cloth

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solution a)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Plastic parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Damp cloth

Problem Solution

Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solution a), if possible solvent-free plas- tic cleaner

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Displays/instrument panel

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystal display cleaner

Control panels

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth with neutral soap solution a)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Seat belts

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solution a), allowed to dry before re- tracting

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather

Problem Solution

Particles of dirt stuck to surfaces

Vacuum cleaner

Water-based dirt, e.g. coffee, tea, blood etc.

Absorbent cloth and neu- tral soap solution a)

Grease-based dirt, e.g. oil, make-up, etc.

Apply a neutral soap sol- ution a). Absorb the dis- solved grease and paint particles drying with an absorbent cloth, in case you must treat it with water afterwards

Special dirt, e.g. pens, nail polish, dis- persion paint, shoe cream etc.

Special stain remove: dry with an absorbent cloth, if applicable, apply neutral soap solution afterwards a)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Natural leather

Problem Solution

Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soap solution a)

Water-based dirt, e.g. coffee, tea, blood etc.

Recent stains: absorbent cloth Dry stains: stain remover suitable for leather

338

Maintenance

Problem Solution

Grease-based dirt, e.g. oil, make-up, etc.

Recent stains: absorbent cloth and suitable stain re- mover for leather. Dry stains: grease solvent spray

Special dirt, e.g. pens, nail polish, dis- persion paint, shoe cream etc.

Stain remover suitable for leather

Care

Apply preservative cream regularly to protect from sunlight. Use a colour preservative if required

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water

Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean like plastic parts

Take special care with...

Headlights/tail lights Do not clean the headlights/tail lights with a dry cloth or sponge. Do not use cleaning products that contain alcohol. Risk of cracks!

Wheels Do not use for paint wax or other abrasive products. If the protective coating on the paint of the rim has been damaged due to stone impacts, scratches, etc., the damage should be repaired immediately.

Camera lenses Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice or snow from the camera lenses. Risk of crack- ing the lens! To clean the camera lens, never use abra- sive cleaning products or products with alcohol. Risk of scratches and cracks!

Windows Remove snow and ice from windows and ex- terior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To avoid scratches, the scraper should only be pushed in one direction and not moved to and fro. Never remove snow or ice from windows and rearview mirrors with warm or hot water. Risk of cracks on the windows! To prevent damage to the heating of the rear window, do not put stickers over the heating elements.

Covers/trims Do not use cleaning products or chrome based cleaning agents.

Paint The vehicle must be free from dirt and dust before applying wax or care products. Risk of scratches! Do not apply wax or care products if the vehi- cle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk of damag- ing the paint job! The ambient rust deposits must not be re- moved through friction. Risk of damaging the paint job! Remove cosmetic products and sunlight im- mediately. Risk of damaging the paint job!

Displays/instrument panel The displays, the instrument panel and the trim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk of scratches! Make sure that the instrument panel is switched off and cooled down before cleaning. Make sure that no liquid leaks between the instrument panel and the trim. Risk of damage!

Control panels Make sure that no liquid leaks into the control panels. Risk of damage!

Maintenance

339

Accessories, sp re parts and repair work

Seat belts Do not remove the seat belts to clean them. Seat belts and their components must never be cleaned with chemical products, nor should they be allowed to come into contact with cor- rosive liquids, solvents or sharp objects. Risk of damaging the fabric! If you find any damage to the belt webbing, belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle, ask your specialised workshop to replace the belt in question.

Fabrics/artificial leather/microfibre Do not treat artificial leather/microfibre with leather cleaning products, solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers or similar products. If the stain is very hard to remove, take the vehicle to a specialised workshop to have it re- moved there. This will prevent damage. Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sponges, etc. to clean. Do not turn on seat heating to dry the seats. Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, rivets or belts can damage the surface. Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damage the seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcro fasten- ers are closed.

Natural leather Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, spot removers or similar products on leather. Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, rivets or belts can damage the surface. Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sponges, etc. to clean. Do not turn on seat heating to dry the seats. Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight for long periods, otherwise it may tend to lose some of its colour. If the car is left for a pro- longed period in the bright sun, it is best to cover the leather.

WARNING Do not use water-repellent coatings on the windscreen. In bad visibility conditions such as humid weather, darkness or when the sun is in its lowest point, visibility may be impac- ted. Accident hazard! Such coatings can also cause the windscreen wiper blades to make noise.

Note Remains of insects can be removed much more easily with previously treated paint. Regular car care treatments can prevent deposits of ambient rust.

Remove the vehicle from traffic If you want to leave your vehicle stationary for a long period of time, contact a qualified workshop. They will gladly inform you about the necessary measures, such as anti-corrosion protection, Service and storage. Also take into account the indications relat- ing to the vehicles battery  page 308 ,  page 308, Introduction.

Accessories, spare parts and repair work

Introduction Always ask your dealer or specialist retailer for advice before purchasing accessories and re- placement parts. Your vehicle is designed to offer a high standard of active and passive safety. For this reason, we recommend that you ask a SEAT Official Serv- ice for advice before fitting accessories or re- placement parts. Your SEAT Official Service has the latest information from the manufacturer and can recommend accessories and replace- ment parts which are suitable for your require- ments. They can also answer any questions you might have regarding official regulations. We recommend only using SEAT accessories and genuine SEAT parts. SEAT has tested these parts and accessories for suitability, reli-

340

Maintenance

ability and safety. SEAT Official Services have the necessary experience and facilities to en- sure that the parts are installed correctly and professionally. Although SEAT continuously monitors the mar- ket, it cannot judge whether products not au- thorised by SEAT meet the vehicles reliability, safety and suitability requirements. SEAT there- fore accepts no liability for these products, even if, in certain cases, they are authorised by an officially recognised technical inspection institute or official body. Any retro-fitted equipment which has a di- rect effect on the vehicle and/or the way it is driven, such as a cruise control system or electronically-controlled suspension, must be approved for use in your vehicle and bear the e mark (the European Union's authorisation symbol). If any additional electrical devices are fitted which do not serve to control the vehicle itself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptop or venti- lator fan, etc.), they must bear the marking (manufacturer conformity declaration in the Eu- ropean Union).

WARNING Accessories, for example telephone holders or cup holders, should never be fitted on the covers, or within the working range of the air- bags. Otherwise, there is a danger of injury if the airbag is triggered in an accident.

Technical modifications Unauthorised modifications to the electronic components, software, wiring or data transfer in the vehicle may cause malfunctioning. You will appreciate that your SEAT dealership cannot be held liable for any damage caused by modifications and/or work performed incor- rectly. For this reason we recommend asking official SEAT service centres to do any necessary work using genuine SEAT parts.

WARNING Incorrectly performed modifications or other work on your vehicle can lead to malfunc- tions and cause accidents.

Radio telephones and office equip- ment

Radio transmitters (fixed installation)

Any retrofit installations of radio transmitters in the vehicle require prior approval. SEAT gen- erally authorises in-vehicle installations of ap- proved types of radio transmitters provided that:

The antenna is installed correctly. The aerial is installed on the exterior of the vehicle (and shielded cables are used together with non-reflective aerial trimming). The effective transmitting power does not ex- ceed 10 Watts at the aerial base. A SEAT Official Service and specialised work- shop will be able to inform you about options for installing and operating radio transmitters with a higher transmitting power.

Mobile radio transmitters

Commercial mobile telephones or radio equip- ment might interfere with the electronics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions. This may be due to: No external aerial. External aerial incorrectly installed. Transmitting power more than 10 W. You must, therefore, do not operate portable mobile telephones or radio equipment inside the vehicle without a properly installed external aerial   . Please note also that the maximum range of the equipment can only be achieved with an external aerial.

Business equipment

Retrofit installation of business or private equip- ment in the vehicle is permitted, provided the equipment cannot interfere with the driver's im-

Maintenance

341

Accessories, sp re parts and repair work

mediate control of the vehicle and that any such equipment carries the mark. Any retro- fit equipment that could influence the driver's control of the vehicle must have a type appro- val for your vehicle and must carry the e mark.

WARNING Mobile telephones or radio equipment which is operated inside the vehicle without a prop- erly installed external aerial can create ex- cessive magnetic fields that could cause a health hazard.

Note The posterior fitting of electric and elec- tronic equipment in this vehicle affects its li- cence and could lead to the withdrawal of the vehicle registration document under cer- tain circumstances. Please use the mobile telephone/radio op- erating instructions.

342

Information for the user

Information for the user Warranty

Fault-free operation warranty SEAT Authorised Services ensure the perfect condition of new vehicles. Check the purchase agreement or complementary additional docu- mentation provided by your Technical Service to see the conditions and the terms of the war- ranty. Consult further information in this regard in your SEAT Official Service.

Information stored by the control units

Storage of accident data (Event Data Recorder)

Your vehicle has an event data recorder (EDR). The EDRs function is to record data in the event of a mild or serious accident. These data are used to support the analysis of how different vehicle systems behaved. The EDR records, over a reduced time range (normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driving data and data from the restraint systems, such as:

How different vehicle systems worked. Whether the driver and the occupants were wearing their seat belts. How hard the acceleration or brake pedal was pressed. Vehicle speed. GPS position. These data will provide a better understanding of the circumstances of the accident. Data from the driving assist systems are also recorded. This includes data such as whether the systems were inactive or active and if such action had an impact on the vehicles dynamic behaviour, changing its path in the aforemen- tioned situations, accelerating or decelerating the vehicle. Depending on vehicle equipment, this includes data from systems such as: the adaptive cruise control the lane assist system parking assistants the emergency brake functions. The EDR data are only recorded in specific ac- cident situations. No data are recorded in nor- mal driving conditions. No audio or video data inside or around the vehicle are recorded. Under no circumstances are personal data such as name, age, or gen- der recorded. Nevertheless, third parties (such as criminal proceedings authorities) may relate

the contents of the EDR data to other data sources and create a personal reference in the context of an accident investigation. In order to read the EDR data it is necessary to access (if legally permitted to do so) the vehicle's ODB (On-Board-Diagnose) interface while the vehicle is switched on. SEAT will not have access to EDR data unless the owner (or, in Leasing cases, the lessee or hirer) gives their consent. There may be excep- tions to this, depending on legal or contractual provisions. Due to legal requirements in safety-related products, SEAT may use the EDR data for field research and in order to improve vehicle system quality. Any data used for the purposes of re- search will be treated anonymously (in other words, no reference will be made to the vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer).

Vehicle antennas Infotainment system and antennas

The infotainment system's antennas are instal- led on different locations on the vehicle: On the roof. On the windscreen, between the layers of glass. On the rear and side windows with a printed antenna structure   .

Information for the user

343

Materials and recycling information

NOTICE The printed antenna structure on the rear and side windows can be damaged by ob- jects rubbing against it or by the use of corrosive products, or products containing acids. Do not apply any stickers to the rear and side window areas. Never clean the antenna structure with corrosive or acidic products.

Materials and recycling in- formation

Environmental compatibility Environmental protection is a top priority in the design, choice of materials and manufacture of your new SEAT.

Constructive measures to encourage recy- cling Joints and connections designed for easy dismantling. Modular construction to facilitate disman- tling. Increased use of single-grade materials. Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and ISO 1629.

Choice of materials Use of recycled materials. Use of compatible plastics in the same part if its components are not easily separated. Use of recycled materials and/or materials originating from renewable sources. Reduction of volatile components, including odour, in plastic materials. Use of CFC-free coolants.

Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive 2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexa- valent chromium.

Manufacturing methods Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the protective wax for cavities. Use of plastic film as protection during vehi- cle transport. Use of solvent-free stickers. Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling systems. Recycling and energy recovery from residues (RDF). Improvement in the quality of waste water. Use of systems for the recovery of residual heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels, etc.). The use of water-soluble paints.

Recycling of electrical or electronic devices

All electrical or electronic devices (EED) that are not permanently fitted in the vehicle must be marked with the following symbol:

This symbol indicates that EED must not be dis- carded as home waste but through selective waste collection.

Product recycling

344

Information for the user

For the sake of the environment The Triman logo and the Infotri symbol con- tain important information for the classifica- tion of the end consumer.

Radioelectrical equipment Simplified declaration of conformity

Your vehicle has different radioelectrical de- vices. The manufacturers of these devices declare that they comply with Directive 2014/53/EU when legally required. The full text of the EU compliance declaration is available online at the following address:

www.seat.com/generalinfo

United Kingdom

Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi- ces. The manufacturers of these devices de- clare that they comply with the UK Radio Equipment Regulations 2017 (SI 2017/1206) if required by law. The full text of the declaration of conformity is available online at the following Internet ad- dress:

www.seat.com/generalinfo

Ukraine

Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi- ces. The manufacturers of these devices de- clare that they comply with Ukraine Decree 355/2017 (TR Radio Equipment) where legally required. The full text of the declaration of conformity is available online at the following Internet ad- dress:

www.seat.com/generalinfo

Addresses of the manufacturers The address of the manufacturers of compo- nents that, due to their size or nature, cannot include a sticker are listed below, as long as it is legally required:

Central control unit (BCM)

Robert Bosch GmbH/Braunschweig Theodor-Heuss-Strasse 12 38122 - Braunschweig, Germany Phone: 0049 53188890

Keyless Access System

HELLA GmbH & Co. KGaA/Hamm Roemerstr. 66 59075 - Hamm, Germany Phone: 0049 23817980

Roof antenna

ASK Industries S.p.A Via dell'Industria n.12/14/16 60037 Monte San Vito (AN), Italy Phone: +3907174521 Website: www.askgroup.it   Mitsumi Electronics Europe GmbH Siemensstrasse 32 63225 Langen, Germany Phone: +49 (0) 6103913-0 Website: www.minebeamitsumi.co.jp   Molex CVS Hildesheim GmbH Daimlerring 31 31135 Hildesheim, Germany Phone: +49 3377 3160 Website: www.molex.com

Information for the user

345

Radi electrical equipment

Antenna amplifiers

ASK Industries S.p.A Via dell'Industria n.12/14/16 60037 Monte San Vito (AN), Italy Phone: +3907174521 Website: www.askgroup.it   Hirschmann Car Communication GmbH Stuttgarter Strasse 45-51 72654 Neckartenzlingen, Germany Phone: +49 7127 140 Website: www.te.com   KATHREIN Automotive GmbH Rmerring 1 31137 Hildesheim, Germany Phone: +498,031,184-0 Website: www.kathrein.com   Molex CVS Hildesheim GmbH Daimlerring 31 31135 Hildesheim, Germany Phone: +49 3377 3160 Website: www.molex.com

Navigation antenna

Hirschmann Car Communication GmbH Stuttgarter Strasse 45-51 72654 Neckartenzlingen, Germany Phone: +49 7127 140 Website: www.te.com   KATHREIN Automotive GmbH Rmerring 1 31137 Hildesheim, Germany Phone: +498,031,184-0 Website: www.kathrein.com

Connectivity Box

Molex CVS Dabendorf GmbH Mrkische Strasse 72 15806 Zossen OT Dabendorf, Germany Phone:+49 3377 3160 Website: www.molex.com

Basic infotainment system

Panasonic Automotive Systems Czech U Panasonicu 266 530 06, Pardubice, Czech Republic

Optional infotainment system

LG Electronics Mlawa SP LG Electronics 7 06 500, Mlawa

Remote control key

Digades GmbH Digitales Und Ana/Zittau uere Weberstr. 20 02763 - Zittau, Germany Phone: 0049 358357750

Instrument panel

Analogue SE38x/SE316 Visteon Electronics Germany GmbH Visteonstr. 4-10 50170 Kerpen, Germany   Analogue all other models Continental Automotive Spain, S.A. Crta. de Rub a Ullastrell, n 12-30 08191 Rub (Barcelona - Spain)   FPK (digital) Continental Automotive GmbH VDO-Strasse 1, 64832 Babenhausen, Germany   Panasonic Automotive Systems Europe GmbH Robert Bosch Str. 27-29 63225 Langen, Germany   Panasonic Automotive Systems Czech, s.r.o. U Panasonicu 266 530 06, Pardubice, Czech Republic

346

Information for the user

1) The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements.

Front radar sensors

MRR for SE38X Robert Bosch GmbH Markwiesenstrasse, 46 72770 Reutlingen (Kusterdingen) Germany   MRR for Tarraco, Ateca, Ibiza, Arona Automotive Distance Control Systems GmbH Peter-Dornier-Strasse, 10 88131, Lindau, Germany

Rear radar sensors

Hella GmbH & Co. KGaA Rixbecker Strae 75 59552 Lippstadt (Germany)

Online Connectivity Unit

LG ELECTRONICS INC. 10, Magokjungang 10-ro, Gangseo-gu, Seoul, Republic of Korea

Radio equipment, frequency band, maximum transmitting power

Below can be found details of the radio equip- ment1) that can be fitted to all SEAT models. Unless otherwise stated, the data are valid for all models (variations are indicated in footnotes to the tables):

Frequency band Max. station power

Key with radio-operated remote control (vehicle)

433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)

433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW

868.0-868.6 MHz 25 mW

434.42 MHz 32 W

Radio-operated remote control (auxiliary heater)

868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 25 mWa)

868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 3.1 mWb)

a) Valid for: Leon, Ateca, Tarraco b) Valid for: Alhambra

Transmitter-Receiver (auxiliary heater)

868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mWa)

868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 23.5 mWb)

a) Valid for: Leon, Ateca, Tarraco b) Valid for: Alhambra

Bluetooth

2402-2480 MHz 6 dBm

2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm

Connection to the vehicles external an- tenna

GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

GSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm

WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm

WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 21 dBm

WCDMA FDD VIII: 880-915 MHz 21 dBm

LTE FDD1: 1920-1980 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FDD3: 1710-1785 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FDD7: 2500-2570 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FDD8: 880-915 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FFD20: 832-862 MHz 23 dBm

Valid for: Tarraco, Leon

Connection to the vehicles external an- tenna

GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

GSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm

WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm

Valid for: Alhambra

Information for the user

347

Radi electrical equipment

Wireless hotspot

2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm

Valid for: Leon, Ateca, Tarraco

Keyless Access

434.42 MHz 32 W

Valid for: Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca, Tarraco

Radar sensors for front assist systems

76 GHz-77 GHz 28.2 dBma)

35.0 dBmb)

a) Valid for: Leon, Alhambra b) Valid for: Ibiza, Arona, Ateca, Tarraco

Radar sensors for rear assist systems

24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm

Valid for: Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca, Tarraco

Wireless charging function

110-120 kHz 5 W

Valid for: Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca, Tarraco

Instrument cluster

125 kHz 40 dBA/m

Online Connectivity Unit

EGSM900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

DCS1800: 1710-1785 MHz 31 dBm

UMTS FDD 1: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm

UMTS FDD 3: 1710-1785 MHz 24 dBm

UMTS FDD 8: 880-915 MHz 24 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 1: 1920-1980 MHz 23.5 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 3: 1710-1785 MHz 23.0 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 7: 2500-2570 MHz 23.5 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 8: 880-915 MHz 23.0 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 20: 832-862 MHz 23.5 dBm

E-UTRA FDD 28: 703-748 MHz 23.0 dBm

Valid for: Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca, Tarraco

Additional information for countries outside the European Union

Mexico

Your vehicle has different radioelectrical de- vices. The manufacturers of these devices declare that they comply with Directive RLVCOAR15-0008 when legally required. The full text of the declaration of conformity is avail- able online at the following Internet address: https://www.seat.mx/servicio/mi-seat/manual- del-propietario.html

Certificate: RLVHERS17-0286. RS4 Hella KGaA Hueck & Co. short-range radar IFT:RLVHERS17-0286. The operation of this equipment is subject to the following two con- ditions: (1) this equipment or device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this equip- ment or device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause unde- sired operation.

United Kingdom

The following applies to importers in the UK market: Volkswagen Group United Kingdom Ltd. Yeomans Drive, Blakelands Milton Keynes, MK 14 5AN United Kingdom

Turkey

Telsiz Ekipmanlar Ynetmelii (2014/53/AB) Aracnzda eitli telsiz ekipmanlar bulunmak- tadr. Telsiz Ekipmanlari Ynetmelii (2014/53/AB) asndan Trkiye pazar iin radyo ekipman ithalats (bu bilgi sadece resmi temsilcimiz olan Dou Otomotiv Servis ve Ticaret A..nin ithal ettii rnler iin geerlidir): Dou Otomotiv Servis ve Ticaret A.. ekerpnar Mahallesi, Anadolu Caddesi, No: 22 ve 45 41420 ayrova/Kocaeli

348

Information for the user

Ukraine

: . , 1, , 4- 02152 , . Importer: Porsche Ukraine LLC Pavla Tychyny ave. 1V, Office B, 4th floor 02152 Kyiv, Ukraine.

Technical data

349

Indications about the technical data

Technical data Indications about the tech- nical data

Vehicle identification data The values indicated in the technical data may differ depending on optional equipment or ver- sion of the model, as well as in the case of spe- cial vehicles and equipment for certain coun- tries. The information in the official vehicle documen- tation takes precedence at all times.

Abbreviations used in the Technical Specifi- cations section

kW Kilowatt, engine power measure- ment.

PS Horsepower (not currently used), engine power measurement unit.

rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute engine speed.

Nm Newton metres, unit of engine tor- que.

CZ Cetane number, indication of the diesel combustion power.

RON Research octane number, indication of the knock resistance of petrol.

Vehicle ID number

The vehicle ID number can be found in the fol- lowing places: One the vehicle's data label. In front, under the windscreen. To the right in the engine compartment.

Type plate

The type plate is located on the vehicles right hand door frame. Vehicles for certain export countries do not have a type plate.

Performance

The values apply only to optimal road and weather conditions. The vehicles performance has been calculated without any equipment that would affect it, e.g. accessories.

Fuel consumption

Approved consumption values are derived from measurements performed or supervised by certified EU laboratories, according to the legis- lation in force at the time (for more information, see the Publications Office of the European Union on the EUR-Lex website: European Un- ion, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and apply to the specified vehicle characteristics.

The values relating to fuel consumption and CO2 emissions can be found in the documenta- tion provided to the purchaser of the vehicle at the time of purchase. Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions depend on the equipment/features of each individual vehicle, as well as on the driving style, road conditions, traffic conditions, environmental conditions, load or number of passengers.

Tank level

Vehicles with front-wheel drive:

50 l, 7 l reserve

Vehicles with all-wheel drive

55 l, 8.5 l reserve

Weights

The kerb weight values apply to the vehicle as ready to drive with a driver (75 kg), oper- ating fluids and, if applicable, tools and the spare wheel. The kerb weight increases with optional equipment and retrofitting of accesso- ries, which reduces the possible payload ac- cordingly.

Load on the roof

The maximum authorised load on the roof of your vehicle is 75 kg.

350

Technical data

Trailer weight

The maximum permitted drawbar load on the ball head of the towing bracket is 90 kg.

WARNING The values indicated for the maximum per- mitted weights must not be exceeded. There is a risk of accident and damage!

Technical data

351

Indications about the technical data

Engine specifications

Petrol engines 1.0 TSI Start-Stop 1.4 TSI Start-Stop 1.5 TSI Start-Stop 2.0 TSI Start-Stop

Power output in kW (hp) at 1/min 81 (110)/5,500 110 (150)/ 5,000-6,000 110 (150)/5,000-6,000 140 (190)/

4,200-6,000

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 200/2,000-3,000 250/1,500-4,000 250/1,500-4,000 320/1,500-4,100

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 3/999 4/1,395 4/1498 4/1,984

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual DSG manual DSG DSG 4Drive

Top speed (km/h) 180 (V) 195 (VI) 198 (V) 202 (V) 214 (V)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (s) 11.4 9.1 9.3 9.1 7.1

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,870 1,950 1,930 1,930 2,090

Diesel engines 2.0 TDI CR Start- Stop

2.0 TDI CR Start- Stop

2.0 TDI CR Start- Stop

2.0 TDI CR Start-Stop

Power output in kW (hp) at 1/min 85 (116)/2,750-4,250 105 (143)/ 3,500-4,000

110 (150)/ 3,250-4,200 110 (150)/3,000-4,200

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 300/1,600-2,500 320/1,750-3,000 340/1,600-3,000 360/1,600-2,750

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,968 4/1,968 4/1,968 4/1,968

Fuel Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 51 CN

Gearbox manual DSG manual DSG DSG 4Drive

Top speed (km/h) 185 (V) 193 (V) 202 (V) 202 (VI) 197 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (s) 10.9 9.4 9.3 9.0 8.7

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 2,000 1,990 2,000 2,030 2,130

352

Technical data

Dimensions.

Fig. 225  Dimensions.

Technical data

353

Indications about the technical data

 Fig. 225 ATECA ATECA 4Drive

A Front projection (mm) 871 871

B Rear projection (mm) 872 880

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,638 2,630

D Length (mm) 4,381

E Fronta) track (mm) 1,576 1,572

F Backa) track (mm) 1,541 1,544

G Width (mm) 1,841

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,601b)

1,615c)

1,611b)

1,625c)

I Ground clearance between the axles (mm) 176 189

J Front projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 18.9 maximum 19.9

K Rear projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 27.4 maximum 27.8

Turning radius (m) 10.2 a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim. b) Distance to the roof. c) Dimension to the roof bars.

354

Technical data

Index

355

Index Numbers and Symbols 4Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 12-volt battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 charge level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

A ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Activating SEAT CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Adapting the playback volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 System limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

AdBlue control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 minimum filling capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Adjust front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 seat with memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 time and date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Adjusting the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Infotainment system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 activating and deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 for the head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 for the knees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Android Auto disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 inflating the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 sealing the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

interior monitoring and anti-tow system . . . . . . 76 trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Anti-trap function

glass roof sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Apple CarPlay

disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Applications (apps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Approved spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Area View system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Aspects to think about before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Assistance systems

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 area view system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Auto-Hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 driving assist (Travel Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

356

Index

emergency braking (Front Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . 168 front camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 front radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Hill Hold Control (HHC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 lane departure warning (Side Assist) . . . . . . . . 178 parking aid Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 peripheral view system (Top View Camera) 200 PreCrash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 predictive speed adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 rear radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 road signs detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 safety advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 system limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Trailer assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 tyre pressure monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 ultrasound sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Audible warning

lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 unbuckled seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Audio warning signals warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Auto Lock (central locking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Auto-Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Auto-Hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

disconnecting the Auto-Hold function . . . . . . 184 Automatic dipped beam headlight control . . . . . 99

Automatic gearbox control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 launch-control program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 steering wheel with shift paddles . . . . . . . . . . . 140 tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Auxiliary heating activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 electricity consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 radio-operated remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Average fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

B Backrest of the rear seat

folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210, 262 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Belt force limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Bicycle carrier

fitting onto the coverable tow hook . . . . . . . . . 273 max. load rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Blown bulbs

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Bonnet

opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Braking system

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Brands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

C Camera

cleaning the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Central armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 auto-locking due to involuntary opening . . . . . 72 central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 emergency lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Keyless Access system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Cetane index (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Change the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

raise the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Changing parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Changing the battery

of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Index

357

Check lists requirements for Android Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 requirements for Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 requirements for MirrorLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Child lock electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Child seats attachment systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 group classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 i-Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 securing with the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Cleaning high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . . . 334 special care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Climate control windscreen heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Clocks set the time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Clutch (lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Connectivity

WLAN access point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Control and warning lamps

12-volt battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 AdBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 anti-lock brake system ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 cruise control (GRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 emissions control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 ESC in Sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 ESC off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 hill descent control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 lane departure warning (Side Assist) . . . . . . . . 179 lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281, 282 press on the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 277 remote control (independent heating) . . . . . . 123 seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 TCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 tow hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Control lamps overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Convenience close function

sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Convenience open function

sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Cooling system

check the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 refilling coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Current documentation attached . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

D Dangers of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Deactivating SEAT CONNECT services . . . . . . . 216 Deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Diesel

refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Disposal

seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

358

Index

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 child lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Downhill assistance function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Drink holder

bottle holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 in the rear central armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Driving

driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 economical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 loaded vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104, 130 with the luggage compartment open . . . . . . . 128 with trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Driving Assist (Travel Assist) see Travel Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Driving data indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Driving mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Driving with a loaded vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Driving with the luggage compartment open . 128 DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

E e-Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 E10

see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Easy Open special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Eco-driving notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Electric devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Electrolyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Electronic immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 emergency vehicle towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 replace a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 problems and solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 see Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Emergency braking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 activating and deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 temporarily deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Emergency braking warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Emergency call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Emergency call service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Emergency locking of the front passenger door 78

Emergency opening driver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Emergency operation front passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Emissions control system AdBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Engine

noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 start (driver instructions with the mechanical contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Engine and ignition emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . . . . 132 switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Engine compartment battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 check the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 temperature indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Engine failure control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Index

359

Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Engine oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305, 308 check the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Engine oil pressure control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Environment

ecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 recycling of electrical appliances . . . . . . . . . . 343 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Environmental tip refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

ESC connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Exhaust gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Exiting a parking space

with the parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Exterior lighting

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Exterior mirrors

driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

External antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 External audio sources

adapting the playback volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

F Fabrics: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Factors that have a negative influence on safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Filling capacities

AdBlue tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 window washer water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Frequency bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Front bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Front camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Front compartment

brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300, 301 windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Front passenger front airbag control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Fuel diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Fuel consumption inertia disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 why does consumption increase? . . . . . . . . . . 282

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Fuel tank cap opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Fuel tank flap opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Full-LED headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

colour coded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293, 294 preparations for replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 recognise blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

G Gear change

manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Gear indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Glass roof sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

anti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

H Hangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 HDC

see Hill descent control (HDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

360

Index

Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . . . 41 Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Headlights

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 HHC

see Hill Hold Control (HHC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Hill descent control (HDC)

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Hill Hold Control (HHC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

I i-Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Identification of fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

adapt menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Android Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 assistants and vehicle settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 before first use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 customise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 customised menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 drop-down menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 executing functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Internet access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Media mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 MirrorLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 overview and controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 229 Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 share a WLAN connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 vehicle information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Infotainment system see Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305, 331 Inspection reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Basic digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 digital (SEAT Digital Cockpit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 time and date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 use with the multifunction steering wheel . . . . 29 warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 warning and information messages . . . . . . . . . . 22

Instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 16, 19 Instrument panel lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Interior mirror

anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Interior monitoring and the anti-tow system activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

J Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

position points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

K Key switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Keyless Access

Press & Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Keys changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 instructions for the driver (mechanical contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 pull out the key blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 synchronise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 78 vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Index

361

L Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Lane Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Lane departure warning (Side Assist)

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 indication on the exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 lane change Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Launch-control (automatic transmission) . . . . . 142 Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Legal provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Lift the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Light Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Lights

audible warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 control lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 controlling the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 main beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Loading the luggage compartment fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 general advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . . . 262

Lock and unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 257 electric opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 enlarge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 features of the electric rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 opening and closing controlled by sensors (Easy Open) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 removing and fitting the shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 store the rear shelf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 variable luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . 259

Luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Luggage net

luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

M Main beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Malfunction

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 PreCrash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Microfiber: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 MirrorLink

disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 establish connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 adjusting the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Mobile phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Mobility Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224, 237

favourites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 select source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

362

Index

N Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244, 247

decrease the navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 edit route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 enter an address for a guide destination . . . . 247 favourite destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 frequent destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 function: entering destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 increase the navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 last destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 learn usage pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 navigation announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 operating the navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 route details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 save destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 saved data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 saved destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 traffic reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 updating navigation data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 use contact details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Net bag luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Noise

auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

O Octane (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 16

partial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 On-board toolkit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 One-touch signalling function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Online services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 rear lid with electric opening and closing . . . . 80 sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 sunshade blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Operation in winter diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 salt on the roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Original accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Overview

of warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

overview (right hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 view of the vehicle from inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 view of the vehicle from the front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 view of the vehicle from the rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Ownership accreditation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

P Painting the vehicle

care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Park assist

fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 parking aid plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 see the Parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 sensors and camera: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 surroundings warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 with the parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 angle parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 leaving a parking space (only when parallel parked) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 parallel parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 parking conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 stop early . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Parking systems automatic brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 reverse assist (Rear View Camera) . . . . . . . . . 198 troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Partial odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 126

Index

363

Peripheral view system (Top View Camera) . . 200 menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Places with risk of explosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Places with special regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 PreCrash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Front Assist monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 selecting the driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Predictive speed adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Press & Drive

start button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

R Radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 frequency bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 preset buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Traffic information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 tune station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 type of reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Radio screen: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Radio telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Rain and light sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Rain sensor

function control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Raise the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 RCTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Rear fog light

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 83 Rear mounting

towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Rear radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Rear seat

fold down with the remote unlocking lever . . . 98 Rear Traffic Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Refuelling

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 opening the fuel tank flap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 safety warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Releasing the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Remote control (independent heating) . . . . . . . . 123 Remote control key

unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Requirements for Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Reverse assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Reverse assist (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 shown on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Reverse assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Revolution counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 16, 17 Road signs

shown on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Road signs detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 limited operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 shown on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 windscreen damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 fix the crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Rotation direction

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Running in

new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 new engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

S Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 134 Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Safe security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Safety

child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

364

Index

Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Save fuel inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Screen clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Seat belts adjusting the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 automatic retractor, tensioner and belt force limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 maintenance and disposal of seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

SEAT CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 legal provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

SEAT Digital Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 SEAT Drive Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

see Drive profile selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 selecting a profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

SEAT Ident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

adjusting the headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 backrest of the rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 electric settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 fitting the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 incorrect positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 removing the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Selection of driving profile characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Selective catalytic reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Selector lever (automatic gearbox)

positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Selling the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Service

Digital Maintenance plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 proof of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 service sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 service works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 terms of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Service Menu

service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Service Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . . . . 140 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Special characteristics

Android Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Apple CarPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . . . 272 MirrorLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 peripheral view system (Top View Camera) . 201 tow start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 indication on display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Start button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Start the engine by towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Start-Stop system

disconnect and connect manually . . . . . . . . . . 137 driver indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 stopping and starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 the engine does not turn off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 the engine starts by itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Status display adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 doors, front bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . 19 Eco-driving notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Index

365

Emergency brake assistance system (Front Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 PreCrash system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 road signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 time and date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Travel Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 warning and information messages . . . . . . . . . . 22

Steering control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 steering assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Steering assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Steering wheel

adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . . 140

Steering wheel heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 on-board documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 other object holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Storage compartment accessories see Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Storage of accident data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263, 264 trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . . . 262

Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 87

anti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 convenience open/close function . . . . . . . . . . . 87 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 sunshade blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Switching off telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Symbols see Warning and control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

T Tail lights

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Technical data

engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Telephone connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 favourites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 pairing a mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 phone book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 send messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 speed dial buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 to call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Telephone interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 places with risk of explosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Time adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Tiptronic (automatic transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Top Tether System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Top View Camera

see the Peripheral view system (Top View Camera) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Torque wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 229 Tow cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266, 268 Tow hook

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 unlocking electrically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Towable loads loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Towing device fitting a bicycle carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 fitting later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 tow hook with electric unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

366

Index

Towing the vehicle emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 front towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 prior steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 rear towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 tow cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 towing prohibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Traction control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Traffic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Traffic information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Traffic programme

see TP (traffic information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

adjusting the headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 hitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 LED tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266, 268 loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266, 268 technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 tow cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266, 268 towable loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Trailer assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 unlocking the tow hook electrically . . . . . . . . . 272 vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . 265, 270

Trailer Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 automatic brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 see Trailer Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Trailer mode see Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Transportation of children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . . . . 262 Travel Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 problems and solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Troubleshooting AdBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 DSG gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Trailer assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Travel Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Turning off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Turning on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Tyre pressure monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Tyre pressure monitor systems

tyre pressure monitor indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314, 325 for winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 foreign objects inserted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 tread wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

U Ultrasound sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

V Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Variable luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . 259 Vehicle

data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 lending or selling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 overview (right hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 unlocking and locking (Keyless Access) . . . . . 70

Index

367

vehicle ID number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 view from behind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 view from the front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Vehicle care wiper blade service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Vehicle conservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Vehicle conservation products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Vehicle information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Vehicle location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Vehicle settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Android Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Siri (Apple CarPlay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 wake word: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Volume set for external audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

W Warning lamps

overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Washing the vehicle

cleaning the exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . . . 334 interior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 special care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Wheel central trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

anti-theft device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 loosen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Wheel spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Wheels

change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 removing and attaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 wheel central trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Window washer

window washer lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Window washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Window washer water

check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 filling quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 anti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 automatic opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Windscreen heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Windscreen heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 lift the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 rain and light sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 reposition the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 thermal washing ejectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Winter conditions sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Wiper and rear window wiper blades

cleaning the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285, 335 replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook. All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print. Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form. SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the Copyright Act. All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.06.22

Vehicle identification data

Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification number:

Date of vehicle registration or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered with the vehicle: YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Ateca Seat works, you can view and download the Seat Ateca Edition 06.22 2022 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Seat Ateca as well as other Seat manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Seat Ateca. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Seat Ateca Edition 06.22 2022 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Seat Ateca Edition 06.22 2022 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Seat Ateca Edition 06.22 2022 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Seat Ateca Edition 06.22 2022 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Seat Ateca Edition 06.22 2022 Crossover SUV Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.